Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutGateway Park Technical Specs Volume 1 (2)Gateway Park Center SECTION 01 25 00 -SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 A . Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by l isted manufacturers. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A . Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that a re not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests : Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a . Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 -1 Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and addresses as well as names and addresses of architects and owners . h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project j . Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. I. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven (7) days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within fourteen ( 14) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Wo r k. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.5 PROCEDURES A . Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 -2 Gateway Park Center 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 A . Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than fifteen (15) days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution is consistent with the design intent and client's branding. c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of th e Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved . B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within fifteen ( 15) days after Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. General: This project anticipates use of all products and mate rials as specified to maintain consistency across client's multiple projects. When a substitution is proposed , the following must be considered: a . Client's ability to exercise ease of maintenance in the context of multiple project locations. b . Client's ability to manage warranties for various products and services in the context of multiple project locations. c. Potential to utilize this substitution for future projects. d. Adherence to the client's Brand Standards. 2. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied . If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requ ests without action, except to r ecord noncompliance with these requirements: a . Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 -3 Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results . d . Requested Substitution is in compliance with the design intent and client's brand standards. e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 -4 Gateway Park Center REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION TO: Perkins+ Will FROM: 806 Douglas Road, Suite 300 Coral Gables, FL 33134 Name of manufacturer Street address City and state Phone number and name of person to contact PROJECT: Name: 1. 2. City, State: Gateway Park Center Sunny Isles Beach, Florida Architect's Job Number: 810495.000 Specification Section and Paragraph numbers of product specified Proposed Substitute A.Name and Model No.: B.Description: PERKINS+ WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 C.Attach applicable Submittals as required by the referenced Specification Sec­ tion, i.e. Product Data, Materials List, Shop Drawings, Samples, Design Data, Test Reports, and Certificates. Attach Shop Drawings to the effect of the pro­ posed substitution on adjacent components of the Work. D.Insert Numbers of applicable reference standards: E.Attach a color chart, if applicable. F.Attach installation instructions. 3.Manufacturer's Reputation: Attach the following: A.Evidence of reputation for prompt delivery. B.Evidence of reputation for efficiency in servicing products. 4.Comparison: Attach an itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance, and visual effects. 5.Changes in Work: Attach data relating to changes required in other work to permit use of proposed substitution and changes required in construction schedule and SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 5 Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 overall contract time. Coordinate changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate Contractors that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. 6. Cost Data: Attach accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product specified. 7. Previous Installation : Provide the following information on similar projects on which proposed substitution was used, list projects in the locale of the project primarily and then in other areas that best represent its application on this project: Name and Address of Project A. B. C. D . Date of Installation Name, Address, and Phone # of Architect 8. In making a request for substitution, the Manufacturer represents that: A. He has ex amined the Drawings and Specifications and has determined that, to the best of his knowledge, the proposed substitution is appropriate for the use intended in the Drawings and Specifications. B. He will provide the same or better warranty for substitution as for product or method specified. C. The product is equal or better in quality and serviceability to the specified item. 9. In making a request for substitution, the Installer and Contractor each represents that: A. He will coordinate the installation of accepted substitution into the Work, mak- ing such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all re- spects. B. He waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which conse- quently become apparent. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 -6 Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 C. Cost data is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract, but ex- cludes costs under separate contracts and the Architect's redesign costs. D . The substitution meets the requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of the evidence submitted or any review or independent investigation by the Owner or the Architect. Name of Manufacturer and signature of Manufacturer's Rep. Name of Installer and signature of Installer's Rep. Name of Contractor and signature of Contractor's Rep. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 -7 Date Date Date Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 1 SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on form included in Project Manual. 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within ten (10) days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating an equitable cost adjustment to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 2 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, Construction Manager will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on form included in Project Manual. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect, Program Manager or Construction Manager may issue a Construction Change Directive on form included in Project Manual. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1 SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect and Owner at earliest possible date, but no later than ten (10) days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 2. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five (5) percent of the Contract Sum. 3. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 4. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 5. Overhead Costs: Show cost of temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place as separate line items. 6. Closeout Costs. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements . 7. Schedule of Values Revisions: Revise the schedule of values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. Include at least one separate line item for each Change Order and Construction Change Directive. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 2 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. 1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment in accordance with Contract between the Contractor and Owner. C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amoun ts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. D. Transmittal: Submit three (3) signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. E. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien in accordance with the contract between Contractor and Owner. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 3 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. If not submitted previously, certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. If not submitted previously, performance and payment bonds. 15. If not submitted previously, data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submi t an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. H. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706. 5. AIA Document G706A. 6. Other documents as required by contract. 7. AIA Document G707. 8. Evidence that claims have been settled. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1 SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. RFIs. 4. Digital project management procedures. 5. Project meetings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. BIM: Building Information Modeling. B. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Construction Manager, Program Manager, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to fu rnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 2 Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installati on is not completely indicated on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate dimensions shown on Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternative sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within plenums to accommodate layout of light fixtures and other components indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire- alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and si zes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 3 bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 6. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that in general the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements: 1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings. 2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using format same as file preparation format and PDF format. 3. BIM File Incorporation: Develop and incorporate coordination drawing files into BIM established for Project. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in Autocad c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form acceptable to Owner and Architect. 1.6 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 4 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. C. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven (7) working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt by Architect of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 01 26 00 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within ten (10) days of receipt of the RFI response. D. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven (7) days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1.7 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. Use of Architect's Digital Data Files: Digital data files will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use during construction. 1. Digital data files may be used by Contractor in preparing coordination drawings, Shop Drawings, and Project record Drawings. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 5 2. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Contract Drawings. 3. Digital Drawing Software Program: Contract Drawings are available in Revit. 4. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form acceptable to Owner and Architect. a. Subcontractors, and other parties granted access by Contractor to Architect's digital data files shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement acceptable to Owner and Architect. B. Web-Based Project Software: Use Architect's and Owner's web-based Project software sites for purposes of hosting and managing Project communication and documentation until Final Completion. It is intended that one web-based Software will manage the items noted below; however, a second may be utilized for owner ’s access to drawing pdf’s only. 1. Web-based Project software site includes, at a minimum, the following features: a. Compilation of Project data, including Contractor, subcontractors, Architect, architect's consultants, Owner, and other entities involved in Project. Include names of individuals and contact information. b. Access control for each entity for each workflow process, to determine entity's digital rights to create, modify, view, and print documents. c. Document workflow planning, allowing customization of workflow between project entities. d. Creation, logging, tracking, and notification for Project communications required in other Specification Sections, including, but not limited to, RFIs, submittals, Minor Changes in the Work, Construction Change Directives, and Change Orders. e. Track status of each Project communication in real time, and log time and date when responses are provided. f. Procedures for handling PDFs or similar file formats, allowing markups by each entity. Provide security features to lock markups against changes once submitted. g. Processing and tracking of payment applications. h. Processing and tracking of contract modifications. i. Creating and distributing meeting minutes. j. Document management for Drawings, Specifications, and coordination drawings, including revision control. k. Management of construction progress photographs. l. Mobile device compatibility, including smartphones and tablets. 2. At completion of Project, provide digital archive in format that is readable by common desktop software applications in format acceptable to Architect. Provide data in locked format to prevent further changes. C. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect, prepare as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 6 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are required, provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated. 1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, in cluding the following: a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments. b. Tentative construction schedule. c. Phasing. d. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. e. Designation of key personnel and their duties. f. Lines of communications. g. Use of web-based Project software. h. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. i. Procedures for RFIs. j. Procedures for testing and inspecting. k. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. l. Distribution of the Contract Documents. m. Submittal procedures. n. Preparation of Record Documents. o. Use of the premises. p. Work restrictions. q. Working hours. r. Owner's occupancy requirements. s. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. t. Procedures for moisture and mold control. u. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. v. Construction waste management and recycling. w. Parking availability. x. Office, work, and storage areas. y. Equipment deliveries and priorities. z. First aid. aa. Security. bb. Progress cleaning. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 7 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity when required by other sections and when required for coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect and Owner of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 8 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these m eetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site use. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Progress cleaning. 11) Quality and work standards. 12) Status of correction of deficient items. 13) Field observations. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Status of Proposal Requests. 16) Pending changes. 17) Status of Change Orders. 18) Pending claims and disputes. 19) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 9 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1 SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the followi ng: 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Construction schedule updating reports. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Site condition reports. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction Project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 2 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF file. B. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit a working digital copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for each activity, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then by early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of activities sorted in ascending order of total float. E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals with photos. G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the schedule of values list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 3 B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each floor or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. a. Food Service Equipment b. Mechanical equipment c. Tile and Stone d. Specialty materials e. Specialty lighting fixtures f. Furniture (while not purchased by the Contractor, coordination of installation is critical) 2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with submittal schedule. 3. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 4. Commissioning Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for commissioning. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated i n the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use-of-premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 4 h. Environmental control. i. Night work E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion, and the following interim milestones: 1. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning, when applicable 2. Anticipated inspection dates. F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and the Contract Time. G. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one day before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. H. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 10 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. I. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identifi ed by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 5 1.6 GANTT-CHART SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt- chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice of Award. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1.7 CPM SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice of Award. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for the Notice of Award. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule to coordinate with the Contract Time. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 6 f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and inspection. j. Commissioning. k. Punch list and final completion. l. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time- scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall Project schedule. F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values). G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. H. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 7 1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. 4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed" with total at bottom. b. Submit value summary printouts one day before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1.8 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Testing and inspection. 8. Accidents. 9. Meetings and significant decisions. 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 8 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 - 1 SECTION 01 32 33 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final completion construction photographs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation. B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three (3) days of taking photographs. 1. Submit photos by uploading to web-based project software site. Include copy of key plan indicating each photograph's location and direction. 2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description : a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Name of Architect d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. f. Description of location, vantage point, and direction. g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional photographer of construction projects for not less than three years. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 - 2 1.4 FORMATS AND MEDIA A. Digital Photographs: Provide color images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 12 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels, and with vibration-reduction technology. Use flash in low light levels or backlit conditions. B. Digital Images: Submit digital media as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. C. Metadata: Record accurate date and time[and GPS location data from camera. D. File Names: Name media files with date, project name, and sequential numbering suffix. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs. B. General: Take photographs with maximum depth of field and in focus. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before project commencement, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect 1. Flag or otherwise clearly mark construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take a sufficient number of photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 3. Take a sufficient number of photographs of existing surrounding conditions to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. 4. Take additional photographs as required to record existing settlement, cracking, or other anomalies of surrounding structure. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take photographs coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. E. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Architect will inform photographer of desired vantage points. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1 SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submittal schedule requirements. 2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those subm ittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." 1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. In clude time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1.4 SUBMITTAL FORMATS A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Architect. 4. Name of Construction Manager. 5. Name of Contractor. 6. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 7. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 8. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section number with sequential alphanumeric identifier; and alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals. 9. Category and type of submittal. 10. Submittal purpose and description. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 2 11. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for each of multiple items. 12. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 13. Indication of full or partial submittal. 14. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 15. Other necessary identification. 16. Remarks. 17. Signature of transmitter. B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet. D. Paper Submittals: It should be determined prior to construction commencement which submittals will be required to be paper submittals. 1. Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification; include name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Action Submittals: Submit three (3) paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two (2) copies. 4. Informational Submittals: Submit two (2) paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 5. Transmittal for Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using AIA Document G810 transmittal form or an alternate form agreed upon by all parties. E. PDF Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, incorporating complete information into each PDF file. Name PDF file with submittal number. F. Submittals for Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals as PDF files, or other format indicated by Project software website. 1.5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Email: Prepare submittals as PDF package, and transmit to Architect by sending via email. Include PDF transmittal form. Include information in email subject line as requested by Architect. 2. Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web-based Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify submittal. 3. Paper: Prepare submittals in paper form, and deliver to Architect. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 3 B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 10 working days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 working days for review of each resubmittal. D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 4 f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with Samples. B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Paper Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. a. Three opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy. C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other materials. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Project name and submittal number. b. Generic description of Sample. c. Product name and name of manufacturer. d. Sample source. e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 5 3. Email Transmittal: Provide PDF transmittal. Include digital ima ge file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to web-based Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software site to fully identify submittal. 5. Paper Transmittal: Include paper transmittal including complete submittal information indicated. 6. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of constructi on activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 7. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 8. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record Sample.] 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 6 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal. G. Certificates: 1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated. 2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. 3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. 4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. H. Test and Research Reports: 1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 7 3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. 5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: a. Name of evaluation organization. b. Date of evaluation. c. Time period when report is in effect. d. Product and manufacturers' names. e. Description of product. f. Test procedures and results. g. Limitations of use. 1.7 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 8 B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with a uniform approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have Contractor's review and approval. 1.9 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "No Exceptions," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Exceptions As Noted," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 3. Returned for Resubmittal: When the Architect marks a submittal "Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Resubmit" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 4. Returned as Rejected: When the Architect marks a submittal "Rejected," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. The submittal does not conform to the design concept or meet requirements of the Contract Documents. a. Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "Rejected" at the Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 5. Other Action: Where a submittal is for information or record purposes or special processing or other activity, the Architect will return the submittal without action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 9 D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor. F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Architect without action. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1 SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Architect, Owner or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further described means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for compl eted Work. C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). D. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site either as freestanding temporary built elements or as part of permanent construction. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface betw een dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 2 1. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes; doors; windows; millwork; casework; specialties; furnishings and equipment; and lighting. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. F. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. G. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for example, plant, mill, factory, or shop. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. J. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Architect. 1.3 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for direction before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 3 indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Delegated-Design Services Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections. 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 4 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspection. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 2. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 2. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 3. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory- authorized service representative requirements. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 5 E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products th at are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens and test assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 6 K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups of size indicated. 2. Build mockups in location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 3. Notify Architect seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 4. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed to perform same tasks during the construction at Project. 5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 6. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting corresponding work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven (7) days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 1.9 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements. 1. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspection will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 7 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform duties of Contractor. E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation confer ences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. G. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the followi ng: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality- assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 8 necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 9 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 00 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1 SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 2 C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. 1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. 2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org. 3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org. 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; www.transportation.org. 5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org. 6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org. 7. ABMA - American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com. 8. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.abma.com. 9. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org. 10. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org. 11. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org. 12. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org. 13. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org. 14. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Insti tute (The); www.ahrinet.org. 15. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org. 16. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org. 17. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. 18. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; http://www.steel.org. 19. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org. 20. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. 21. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org. 22. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com. 23. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org. 24. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org. 25. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 3 26. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 27. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 28. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org. 29. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org. 30. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE). 31. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers; www.ashrae.org. 32. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers); www.asme.org. 33. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org. 34. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org. 35. ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org. 36. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org. 37. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org. 38. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 39. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com. 40. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com. 41. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 42. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org. 43. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 44. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com. 45. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org. 46. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association); www.bifma.org. 47. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org. 48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation); www.bissc.org. 49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org. 50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca. 51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org. 52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org. 54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org. 56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org. 58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org. 59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com. 60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org. 61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org. 62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca. 64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa-international.org. 65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org. 66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org. 68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA). Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 4 69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. 70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA). 72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECIA). 73. ECIA - Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org. 74. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 75. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. 76. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org. 77. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org. 78. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA). 79. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org. 80. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org. 81. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation); www.fiba.com. 82. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation); www.fivb.org. 83. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com. 84. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com. 85. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.; www.floridaroof.com. 86. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com. 87. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 88. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 89. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com. 90. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org. 91. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org. 92. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI). 93. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). 94. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org. 95. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com. 96. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org. 97. IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org. 98. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA). 99. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC). 100. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 101. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net. 102. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org. 103. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org. 104. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch. 105. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org. 106. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America); www.ies.org. 107. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES). 108. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org. 109. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org. 110. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu. 111. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 5 112. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA); www.intertek.com. 113. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society); www.isa.org. 114. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA). 115. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org. 116. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org. 117. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA). 118. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home. 119. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org. 120. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA). 121. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org. 122. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. 123. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org. 124. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org. 125. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org. 126. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org. 127. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.mhia.org. 128. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com. 129. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com. 130. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.mss-hq.org. 131. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 132. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International); www.nace.org. 133. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com. 134. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org. 135. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com. 136. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org. 137. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org. 138. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 139. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 140. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 141. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. 142. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org. 143. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org. 144. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org. 145. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org. 146. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA). 147. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 148. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. 149. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 150. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA). 151. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 152. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 153. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org. 154. NSF - NSF International; www.nsf.org. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 6 155. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 156. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. 157. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 158. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 159. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org. 160. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. 161. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association); www.plasa.org. 162. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org. 163. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 164. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com. 165. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.org. 166. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 167. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 168. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. 169. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com. 170. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE). 171. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org. 172. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org. 173. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org. 174. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org. 175. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org. 176. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org. 177. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 178. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org. 179. SRCC - Solar Rating & Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org. 180. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 181. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org. 182. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com. 183. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 184. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org. 185. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org. 186. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com. 187. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org. 188. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org. 189. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 190. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org. 191. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org. 192. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org. 193. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org. 194. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com. 195. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org. 196. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org. 197. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org. 198. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org. 199. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org. 200. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 7 201. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org. 202. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com. 203. WI - Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.org. 204. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 205. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org. C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. 1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de. 2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org. D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. 1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. 2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov. 4. DOD - Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. 8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov. 11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov. 12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov. 14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; The National Academies; www.trb.org. 15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov. 16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. 17. USDOJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice; www.ojp.usdoj.gov. 18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org. 19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com. E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. 1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 8 3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS). 5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb. 6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB). F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. 1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic and Appliance Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov. 2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com. 3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH). 4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal-iaq.org. 5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov. 6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov. 7. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic Development; www.txforestservice.tamu.edu. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1 SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the Project to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction and installation forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Utilization Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility lines and connections, staging areas, construction site entrances, vehicle circulation, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Show fabrication and installation details, including plans, elevations, details, layouts, typestyles, graphic elements, and message content. C. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 2 D. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program. E. Moisture-and Mold-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage and mold. F. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Include th e following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste-handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in t he United States Access Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 3 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F 5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander- type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures. C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, GENERAL A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 4 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Temporary Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 1. Provide temporary dehumidification systems when required to reduce ambient and substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes and their proper curing or drying. F. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 5 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common -use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install WiFi cell phone access equipment. 1. Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions. 2. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall, providing minimum 1.0Mbps upload and 15 Mbps download speeds at each computer. 3. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware, phishing, and spam protection in a combined application. 4. Backup: External hard drive, minimum 2 terrabyte, with automated backup software providing daily backups. 3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads paved areas, or access drives adequate for construction operations. Locate or utilize temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated. 1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Parking: Provide parking areas for construction personnel. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 6 F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are n ot permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touch up signs so they are legible at all times. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 01 73 00 "Execution." H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. I. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life. 1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. J. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. K. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. L. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 7 3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. 1. Where access to adjacent properties is required in order to affect protection of existing facilities, obtain written permission from adjacent property owner to access property for that purpose. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. 1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant-protection zones. 2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. 3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project. 4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction. F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering site except by entrance gates and as coordinated with the Owner. 1. Extent of Fence: As coordinated with the Owner. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each workday. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 8 H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. I. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. K. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side. 2. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. 3. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. L. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Comply with additional limits on smoking specified in other Sections. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.6 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe delivery, handling, storage, installation, and protection provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 9 1. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work. 2. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire- resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. 3. Indicate methods to be used to avoid trapping water in finished work. B. Exposed Construction Period: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Period: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard and replace stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in gypsum board or other interior finishes. D. Controlled Construction Period: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows: 1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry -in conditions. 2. Use temporary or permanent HVAC system to control humidity within ranges specified for installed and stored materials. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to water limits. 3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 10 B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1 SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Architect through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation. In addition to the basis-of-design product description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 2 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 10 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Architect's Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 3 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 4 1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: …" 2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: …" 3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered if indicated in advance and full explanation of advantages and disadvantages is provided with sufficient time to review. a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: …" 4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, which complies with requirements. a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …" 5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered if indicated in advance and full explanation of advantages and disadvantages is provided with sufficient time to review. a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: …" 6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, which complies with requirements. a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Sub ject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …" Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 5 7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for substitutions for convenience. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant product qualities include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and requirements. 2. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 3. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 4. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 1 SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection. 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 2 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable design requirements. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in -place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of utilities indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning construction, investigate and verify the existence and location of utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services; and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for i nstallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 3 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility services located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout in formation shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: 1. Establish limits on use of Project site. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 4 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or non-conforming Work. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 5 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 6 as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F . 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 7 D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or proper ty and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deteriorat ion at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, danger ous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 EXECUTION 01 73 00 - 8 C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1 SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for additional operation and maintenance manual requirements. 2. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements to train the Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain products, equipment, and systems. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at final completion. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 2 B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determi ning date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Owner or Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number. 5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver ke ys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training." 6. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements. 10. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requi rements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate w ill be issued. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 3 1.5 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1.6 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect, will return annotated file. b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. c. Web-based project software upload. Utilize software feature for creating and updating list of incomplete items (punch list). 1.7 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for desig nated portions of the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 4 C. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranti es and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. 1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Owner. D. Warranties in Paper Form: 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose- leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 5 c. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. d. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. e. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. f. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. g. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. h. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. i. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls.” 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations, before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing incl udes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1 SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory manuals. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Systems and equipment operation manuals. 4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 5. Product maintenance manuals. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operation and maintenance submittals is acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the followi ng format: 1. Submit by uploading to web-based project software site. Enable reviewer comments on draft submittals. 2. Submit three paper copies. Architect will return two copies. C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Owner’s comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. D. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. 1.3 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 2 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. B. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard-copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. 2. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 1.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 3 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 1.5 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. C. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. D. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. E. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 4 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 1.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and special operating procedures. B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. C. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 5 E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for identification. 1.7 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information. B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds, as described below. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 6 E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. H. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1.8 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 7 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1 SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one (1) set of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit one (1) paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints. 3) Submit record digital data files. 4) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit One (1) paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints. 3) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 2 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual. 1.3 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets wi th erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 3 B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Revit or CAD files. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 4. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 5. Architect will furnish Contractor with one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. a. See Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files. b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers. C. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 1.4 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 4 5. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file. 1.5 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable. C. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file . 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 1.6 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 1 SECTION 01 79 00 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Instruction in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Demonstration and training video recordings. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two (2) copies within seven (7) days of end of each training module. 1. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared in same paper and pdf format required for operation and maintenance manuals specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 2 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data have been reviewed and approved by Architect. 1.6 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for ea ch module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requi rements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Systems and equipment operation manuals. c. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. d. Product maintenance manuals. e. Project Record Documents. f. Identification systems. g. Warranties and bonds. h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 3 b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning. e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 4 1.7 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 1.8 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner with at least fourteen (14) days' advance notice. D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in -place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test. F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materi als and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. 1.9 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. 1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline. B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video in MPEG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor resolution of 12 megapixels and capable of recording in full HD mode with vibration reduction technology. 1. Submit video recordings on thumb drive and by uploading to web-based Project software site. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 5 C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time. D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording. E. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training. PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1 SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner- occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 01 73 00 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 3. Division 31 for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements not part of selective demolition. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or rei nstalled. 1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 2 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property , for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Submit before Work begins. E. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. F. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 3 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. 3. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 4. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective d emolition operations. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 4 1.10 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. C. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. D. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or video. 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 5 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 6 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporaril y cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 2hours after flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris- removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 7 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. E. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. See Section 07 54 23 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing for new roofing requirements. 1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 031000-1 Concrete Formwork SECTION 031000 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL Work of this Section shall conform to requirements of Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections. 1.2 SCOPE Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and transportation for formwork and related accessories required to complete all cast-in-place concrete work as shown on Drawings, as specified herein, and as required by the job conditions. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS Submittals Division 1 Quality Control Division 1 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies Section 032000 Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 033000 Thermal and Moisture Protection Division 7 1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS A.Building Code: Concrete work shall conform to the requirements of the Building Code identified on the Structural General Notes, and OSHA requirements, except where more stringent conditions or criteria occur in the standards referenced below and on the Drawings. B.Standards: 1.ACI 117 – Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2.ACI 237 – Self Consolidating Concrete. 3.ACI 301 –Specifications for Structural Concrete. 4.ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 5.ACI 347 – Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 6.ACI 347.2R – Guide for Shoring/Reshoring of Concrete Multistory Buildings Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 031000-2 Concrete Formwork C.Definitions: 1.See Section 033000. 1.5 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A.The work of this section shall be performed by a company specializing in the type of concrete formwork required for this Project, with a minimum of 10 years of documented successful experience and shall be performed by skilled workers thoroughly experienced in the necessary crafts. B.Contractor’s Testing Agency Services: Required as specified in Division 1, and herein. C.Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of work, as directed by Design Professionals. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed work will be done at Contractor's expense. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A.Required Submittals - Where the SUBMITTALS section of this Specification is in conflict with Division 1 Submittals, the more stringent requirements for the Contractor apply. Required submittal items are listed here; see below for detailed requirements. Do not submit items not requested. (1)Submittal Schedule (2)Shop Drawings (3)Shoring/Reshoring Calculations (4)Product Data (5)Samples (6)Compatibility Certification (7)Hazardous Materials Notification 1.Submittal Schedule: See Section 033000. 2.Shop Drawings: a)Submit for action: Formwork shop drawings sealed and signed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the project is located. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate but not be limited to the following: 1.Size, type and quality of form materials including conditions at tops and ends of walls. (If wood is used, indicate species.) 2.Form construction indicating structural stability and jointing including special form joints or reveals required by Contract Documents 3.Location and pattern of form tie placement, and other items that affect the appearance of concrete that will remain exposed to view. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 031000-3 Concrete Formwork 4.Form finish clearly indicating proper locations and full coordination with concrete finishes required by Contract Documents. 5.Layout, procedures, and sequencing of shoring and reshoring that correlates with the information contained in the shoring/reshoring calculations described below. 6.Locations and dimensions of openings in structural members including floor slab, shear walls, columns and beams. See SUBMITTALS Section of Specification 033000. 7.Location of proposed construction joints in walls, floors, slabs, and beams. See SUBMITTALS Section of Specification 033000. 3.Product Data: Submit for action copies of manufacturers' product data and installation instructions for proprietary materials used in exposed concrete work, including form liners, release agents, manufactured form systems, ties, and accessories. 4.Samples: At request of Architect, submit for record samples of form ties and spreaders. 5.Compatibility Certification: Submit for record a written statement certifying that form release agent used is compatible with subsequent architectural finish materials applied to concrete surfaces. Submit along with manufacturer's data. 6.Hazardous Materials Notification: Submit for record. In the event no product or material is available that does not contain hazardous materials as determined by the Owner, a "Material Safety Data Sheet" (MSDS) equivalent to OSHA Form 20 shall be submitted for that proposed product or material prior to installation. B.Submittal Process: See Section 033000 C.SER Submittal Review: See Section 033000 D.Substitution Request: See Section 033000 E.Request for Information (RFI): See Section 033000 1.7 FORMWORK DESIGN A.Design of Formwork, Shoring/Reshoring, and its removal is the Contractor’s responsibility. B.Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork so that it will safely support vertical and lateral loads per SEI/ASCE 37-02 that might be applied, until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. C.Design Requirements: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 031000-4 Concrete Formwork 1.Forms shall be designed for fabrication and erection in accordance with Design Professionals’ requirements and recommendations of ACI 301, 318 and 347. 2.Design formwork in a manner such that the total construction load does not at any time exceed the total design load of new or existing construction and accounts for concrete age and relative strength at time of loading. See Section 3.2 for shoring/reshoring requirements. 3.Design formwork for loads and lateral pressures outlined in Section 2.2, ACI 347, and wind and seismic loads as specified by SEI/ASCE 37-02 unless otherwise controlled by local building code. 4.Design formwork to include loads imposed during construction, including weight of construction equipment, concrete mix, height of concrete drop, rate of filling of formwork, vibrator frequency, ambient temperature, foundation pressures, lateral stability, temporary imbalance or discontinuity of building components, and other factors pertinent to safety of structure during construction. 5.The use of flowing concrete (8” (200mm) to 10” (250mm) slump) of Self- Consolidating Concrete requires a review of the formwork design based on the rate of placement and setting time of the mix. Unless shown to be sufficient otherwise, formwork design shall conform to the requirements of ACI 237. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Comply with General Conditions and Division 1, including the following: 1.Store forms and form materials clear of ground and protect from damage. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE BY OWNER’S TESTING AGENCY A.Field Quality Assurance General: The Owner’s Testing Agency shall test and inspect concrete formwork as Work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such a defect is discovered nor shall it obligate Design Professionals for final acceptance. B.Testing Agency shall provide qualified personnel at site to inspect formwork using the latest Contract Documents and approved shop drawings as follows: 1.Prior to placement of reinforcement, inspect formwork for grade, quality of material, absence of foreign matter, and other imperfections that might affect suitability of concrete placement and tolerances stated herein. 2.Inspect forms for location, configuration, compliance with specified tolerances, block outs, camber, shoring ties, seal of form joints and compliance with Contract Documents. 3.Verify condition of bond surfaces, locations and sizes of all accessories, embedment items, and anchorage for prevention of displacement. 4.Verify proper use/application of form release agents. 5.Inspect concrete surfaces immediately after removal of formwork and prior to any patching or repair work. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 031000-5 Concrete Formwork C.Owner’s Testing Agency shall submit for record inspection, observation, and/or test reports to the Owner and Design Professionals, as required herein and shall provide an evaluation statement in each report stating whether or not concrete formwork conforms to requirements of Specifications and Drawings and shall specifically note deviations therefrom. D.Immediately notify the Contractor, Owner and Design Professionals of deficiencies. 1.10 QUALITY CONTROL BY CONTRACTOR See Section 033000. 1.11 OBSERVATIONS AND CORRECTIONS BY DESIGN PROFESSIONALS See Section 033000. 1.12 PERMITS AND WARRANTY A.Permits: See Section 033000. B.Warranty: See Section 033000. Failures include but are not limited to the following: 1.Discoloration of concrete scheduled to remain exposed to view. 2.Damage of concrete finishes caused by forms. 3.Damage of concrete caused by form stripping. 4.Non-compliance with form finishes required for designated architectural finishes. 5.Non-compatibility of form release agent with subsequent architectural finish materials applied to concrete surfaces. 6.Excessive and/or noticeable bowing in placed concrete members caused by deflection of formwork during concrete placement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK REQUIREMENTS A.General Requirements: 1.Formwork shall meet construction safety regulations for the state where the project is located. 2.Forms shall be removable without impact, shock or damage to concrete surfaces, the structure and adjacent materials. 3.Forms shall be tight-fitting, designed and fabricated for required finishes and to withstand concrete weight and maintain tolerances as specified in ACI 117 for the following designations: (See architectural drawings for locations). Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 031000-6 Concrete Formwork a)Class A – For surfaces prominently exposed to public view where appearance is of special importance. b)Class B – Coarse-textured concrete-formed surfaces intended to receive plaster, stucco or wainscoting. c)Class C – General Standard for permanently exposed surfaces where other finishes are not specified. d)Class D - Minimum quality surface where roughness is not objectionable, usually applied where surfaces will be concealed. 4.Furnish forms in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on Drawings, using form materials with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly-placed concrete without bow or deflection. 5.Butt Joints: Shall be solid and complete with backup material to prevent leakage of cement paste. B.Form Finishes for Exposed Surfaces: 1.Type: Straight, smooth, free of cement paste leaks at butt-joints, surface imperfections and other irregularities detrimental to appearance of finished concrete, fully coordinated with requirements for required finish material. 2.Form exposed areas of columns, beams, ledges, balcony fascias to achieve true alignment and level soffit of edge beams and concrete edges. All such areas must be sharp, straight and true to line and level. Edge beams and concrete canopies and ledges must have adequate shoring to prevent any visible amount of sag and sufficient bracing to prevent any lateral movement during construction. 2.2 FORM MATERIALS A.General: Plywood, fiberglass, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials. 1.Provide materials with sufficient strength to prevent warping. B.Plywood: Of species and grade suitable for intended use, sound undamaged sheets with clean true edges, minimum 5/8" (16mm) thick, complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1. 1.Other Acceptable Sheet Materials: 14 gauge (2.0mm) sheet steel or fibrous glass reinforced resin. C.Lumber: Construction grade or better consistent with calculation requirements, without loose knots or other defects. 1.Use only where entire width can be covered with one board 11-1/4" (285mm) or less in width. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 031000-7 Concrete Formwork D.Forms for Cylindrical Columns and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber reinforced plastic, or paper or fiber tubes that will produce smooth surfaces without joint indications. 1.Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist wet concrete loads without deformation. E.Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to support weight of placed concrete without deformation. F.Chamfer for Form Corners: 1.Types: Chamfer strips of wood, metal, PVC or rubber fabricated to produce smooth form lines and tight edge joints, 3/4" (20mm) size, maximum possible lengths. 2.Required for all exposed corners of beam, walls and column forms. G.Form Ties: 1.Type: Factory-fabricated metal, adjustable length, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal. 2.Ties used for architecturally exposed concrete shall be galvanized. 3.Ties shall not leave metal closer than 1-1/2" (40mm) to exposed surface. 4.When removed, ties shall not leave holes larger than 1" (25mm) diameter in concrete surface. 5.Removable Ties: Use type with tapered cones, 1" (25mm) outside diameter, for concrete walls which will remain exposed to view and scheduled for architectural finishes. 6.Snap-Off Ties: Use for concrete walls below grade and walls which will not remain exposed to view and are not scheduled for architectural finishes. 7.Wire Ties: Not acceptable. H.Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Thru-Bolts, Anchorages: 1.Type: Of size, strength and quality to meet the required quality of formwork. I.Form Release Agent: 1.Type: Commercial formulation form release agent of non-emulsifiable type which will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces. Form release agent shall not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, or impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. Form release agent shall be compatible with subsequent architectural finish materials applied to concrete surfaces. Apply in compliance with manufacturers' instructions. 2.Form release agent shall meet, at a minimum, all federal and state requirements for volatile organic compounds (VOC’s). Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 031000-8 Concrete Formwork 3.For Steel Forms: Non-staining rust-preventative type. J.Reglets: Provide sheet metal reglets formed of same type and gauge as flashing metal, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Where resilient or elastomeric sheet flashing, or bituminous membranes are terminated in reglets, provide reglets of not less than 26 gauge (0.55mm) galvanized sheet metal. Fill reglet or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. K.Coordinate with materials as specified in Section 032000/Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A.General: 1.Inspect areas to receive formwork. a)Immediately notify the Owner’s Testing Agency and Design Professionals in writing of conditions that will adversely affect the Work. 2.Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown on Contract Documents, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. 3.Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and fins, and to maintain alignment. 4.Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, drips, bevels, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts and other features required in the Work. 5.Comply with shop drawings, ACI 301, 318, 347 and Contract Documents. 6.Maintain formwork and finished work construction tolerances complying with ACI 301 and 117. 7.Provide shore and struts with positive means of adjustment capable of taking up formwork settlement during concrete placing operations, using wedges or jacks or a combination thereof. 8.Erect forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. 9.Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. 10.Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. 11.Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 031000-9 Concrete Formwork 12.Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated on the architectural drawings, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce smooth lines and tight edge joints. 13.Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork and shoring to support loads until such loads can be safely supported by the concrete structure. 14.Where specifically shown on the Contract Documents as monolithic, upturned beams, curbs and similar members in connection with slabs shall be formed so that they can be poured integrally with slabs. B.Concrete Accessories and Embedded Items: 1.Install into forms concrete accessories, sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts, anchorage devices and other miscellaneous embedded items furnished by other trades or that are required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. a)Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached. 2.Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, relieving angles, and other conditions. 3.Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated on drawings or required by other trades. 4.Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. 5.Coordinate with CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT AND EMBEDDED ASSEMBLIES Section in Specification 032000. 6.Install accessories and embedded items straight, level, plumb and secure in place to prevent displacement by concrete placement. C.Temporary Openings: 1.Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. 2.For clean-outs and inspection before concrete placement, locate temporary openings where interior area of formwork would otherwise be inaccessible. 3.For cleaning and inspections, locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. 4.Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly in forms to prevent loss of concrete. 5.Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, neatly fitted so that joints will not be noticeable on exposed concrete surfaces. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 031000-10 Concrete Formwork D.Provisions for Other Trades: Coordinate and provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. 1.Determine size and location of openings, recesses, chases, offsets, openings, depressions, and curbs from information provided by trades requiring such items. 2.Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. E.Cleaning: 1.Normal Conditions: a)Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. b)Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, standing water or other debris just before placing concrete. c)Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. d)Verify that water and debris can drain from forms through clean- out ports. 2.During Cold Weather: a)Remove ice and snow from within forms. b)Do not use de-icing salts. c)Do not use water to clean out completed forms, unless formwork and concrete construction will proceed within heated enclosure. d)Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. F.Form Release Agents 1.Before placing reinforcing steel and miscellaneous embedded items, coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved non-residual, low VOC form release agent in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 2.Do not allow release agent to accumulate in forms or come into contact with reinforcement or concrete against which fresh concrete will be placed. a)Coat steel forms with nonstaining, rust-preventative material. 3.Remove form release agent and residue from reinforcement or surfaces not requiring form coating. G.Before Placing Concrete: 1.Inspect and check completed formwork, shoring and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork requirements of this section and Contract Documents, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and parts are secure. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 031000-11 Concrete Formwork a)Make necessary corrections or adjustment to formwork to meet tolerance requirements. 2.Retighten forms and bracing before concrete placement to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.Notify Owner’s Testing Agency sufficiently in advance of placement of concrete to allow inspection of completed and cleaned forms. H.During Concrete Placement: 1.Maintain a check on formwork to ensure that forms, shoring, ties and other parts of formwork have not been disturbed by concrete placement methods or equipment. 2.Use positive means of adjustment as required for formwork settlement during concrete placing operations. I.Camber: 1.Provide camber in formwork as required for anticipated deflections due to weight and pressures of fresh concrete and construction loads. 2.Camber bottom forms where indicated on the drawings. Whenever forms are cambered, screeded levels for establishing top of concrete must be cambered to the same amount and to the same profiles such that scheduled depth of member is not reduced by lifting of forms. Check camber and adjust forms before initial set as required to maintain camber. J.Surface Defects: 1.Install forms that will not impair the texture of the concrete and are compatible with the specified finish type. K.Formwork Loads on Grade 1.Where loads from formwork bear on grade, provide suitable load- spreading devices for adequate support and to minimize settlement. In no event shall frozen ground or soft ground be utilized directly as the supporting medium. L.Footings and Grade Beams: 1.Provide forms for footings and grade beams if soil or other conditions are such that earth trench forms are unsuitable. 2.When trench forms are used, provide an additional 1” (25mm) of concrete on each side of the minimum design profiles and dimensions indicated. M.For slabs-on-grade, secure edge forms in such a manner as to not move under weight of construction loads, construction and finishing equipment, or workers. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 031000-12 Concrete Formwork 3.2 SHORES AND RESHORES A.Comply with ACI 347.2R for shoring and reshoring in multistory construction, and as specified herein. 1.For non-post tensioned flat plate concrete structures of five supported levels or more, extend shoring/reshoring at least four levels below the floor or roof being placed (shore formwork, reshore three levels below) 2.For non-post tensioned flat plate concrete structures of less than five supported levels, extend shoring/reshoring to ground. 3.For all other concrete structures of four supported levels or more, extend shoring/reshoring at least three levels below the floor or roof being placed (shore formwork, reshore two levels below) 4.For all other concrete structures of less than four supported levels, extend shoring/reshoring to ground. 5.For shoring/reshoring placed on mud sills, adjustments shall be made by contractor to account for ground settlement. 6.Locate shores/reshores such that the factored (ultimate) construction load imposed onto any slab or beam at any time during the construction cycle does not exceed 90% of the factored (ultimate) design load for that slab or beam, scaled down to reflect effect on capacity of lower concrete strength at time of loading. 7.Construction load shall include the weight of wet concrete, total weight of formwork and shoring/reshoring, and a minimum construction live load of 50 psf (2.5kPa) (increase if construction operations will produce higher loading). Design load includes self-weight of the slab, and superimposed dead and live loads as indicated on the drawings. 8.For comparison of construction loads to design loads, compare factored (ultimate) construction loads to factored (ultimate) design loads. For construction dead and live loads, use the same load factors and load combinations as required by ACI 318 for design dead and live loads. The specified strength reduction factors from ACI 318 should also be applied during the strength evaluation of the partially completed structure. 9.For flat plate or flat slab construction “backshores” or “preshores” as defined in ACI 347 shall be permitted only if appropriate calculations and construction sequences are provided demonstrating that the accumulation of shore loads will not overload any slab. In the absence of such calculations and construction sequences, shores must be removed and reshores installed in a sequence such that each floor is permitted to deflect and carry its own weight prior to the installation of reshores. 10.Reshores shall not be removed until the concrete has attained its specified 28 day strength. 3.3 REMOVING FORMS A.Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50oF (10oC) for 12 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to avoid damage by form-removal operations, and Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 031000-13 Concrete Formwork provided curing and protection operations are maintained after removal of formwork. B.Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, may not be removed until concrete has attained at least 75% of design compressive strength as proven by cylinder test. If stripping occurs before 3 days, 100% strength must be achieved. 1.Provide reshores as required per ACI 347. 2.Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. C.Remove formwork progressively using methods to prevent shock loads or unbalanced loads from being imposed on structure. Comply with ACI 347. D.Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against concrete surfaces. E.Reshore structural members where required due to design requirements, construction requirements, or construction conditions. 1.Reshore on same day shoring and forms are removed. F.Whenever formwork is removed during the curing period, the exposed concrete shall be cured per requirements of Section 033000. G.All wood formwork, including that used in void spaces, pockets and other similar places shall be removed. H.Form tie holes shall be filled as per approved samples submitted to the Design Professionals. I.The Contractor shall assume responsibility for all damage due to removal of the forms. 3.4 RE-USING FORMS A.Before forms can be re-used, surfaces that will be in contact with freshly poured concrete must be thoroughly cleaned, damaged areas repaired, and projecting nails withdrawn. 1.Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable. 2.Apply new form release agent on re-used forms. B.When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 031000-14 Concrete Formwork C.Forms for exposed concrete may be reused only if the surfaces have not absorbed moisture and have not splintered, warped, discolored, stained, rusted or peeled, subject to acceptance by the Design Professionals. The Design Professionals reserve the right to require the Contractor to remove and reconstruct such formwork as will produce subsequent areas that are acceptable. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, unless approved by the Design Professionals. 3.5 CORRECTIVE MEASURES A.Where the Contractor requests that the Design Professionals develop the corrective actions or review corrective actions developed by others, the Design Professional shall be compensated as outlined in Part 3 – CORRECTIVE MEASURES section of Specification 033000. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-1 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies SECTION 032000 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT AND EMBEDDED ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL Work of this Section shall conform to requirements of Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections. 1.2 SCOPE Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and transportation for reinforcing steel, accessories, embedments and miscellaneous anchorage accessories, joint fillers, and waterstops for cast-in-place concrete work as shown on Drawings, as specified herein, and as required by the job conditions. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS Submittals Division 1 Quality Control Division 1 Concrete Formwork Section 031000 Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 033000 Thermal and Moisture Protection Division 7 1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS A.Building Code: Concrete work shall conform to the requirements of the Building Code identified on the Structural General Notes, and OSHA requirements, except where more stringent conditions or criteria occur in the standards referenced below and on the Drawings. B.Standards: 1.ACI 117 – Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2.ACI 301 –Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3.ACI 315 – Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 4.ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 5.ACI 355.2 – Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and Commentary 6.ACI 355.4 – Qualification of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete and Commentary 7.American Society for Testing and Materials "ASTM Standards in Building Codes", various standards as referenced herein. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-2 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies 8.AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code-Steel. 9.AWS D1.4 – Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel. 10.CRD C 572 – Specification for Polyvinylchloride Waterstops. 11.Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute ”Manual of Standard Practice” 12.ASTM D3963 Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of epoxy Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars. C.Definitions: 1.See Section 033000. 1.5 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A.The work of this section shall be performed by a fabricator specializing in the type of reinforcement fabrication required for this Project, with a minimum of 10 years of documented successful experience and shall be performed by skilled workmen thoroughly experienced in the necessary crafts. 1.Welders shall be qualified in accordance with applicable AWS Code within 12 months before starting the work. a)Make qualification records available to the Design Professionals upon request. B.Manufacturers shall specialize in manufacturing the types of concrete accessories required for cast-in-place concrete work, with a minimum of 10 years of documented successful experience and shall have the facilities capable of meeting all requirements of Contract Documents as a single-source responsibility and warranty for each type of accessory. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A.Required Submittals - Where the SUBMITTALS section of this Specification is in conflict with Division 1 Submittals, the more stringent requirements for the Contractor apply. Required submittal items are listed here; see below for detailed requirements. Do not submit items not requested. (1)Submittal Schedule (2)Shop Drawings (3)Product Data (4)Mill Reports (5)Reinforcement Strain Test (6)Hazardous Materials Notification 1.Submittal Schedule: See Section 033000. 2.Shop Drawings: Submit for action shop drawings that shall clearly indicate, but not be limited to: a)All details, dimensions and information required for fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement in accordance with Contract Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-3 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies Documents, prepared in accordance with ACI 315 recommendations. b)Elevations, plans, sections, and dimensions of concrete work with required reinforcement clearances. c)Ledges, brackets, openings, sleeves, anchor rods, embedments, prefabricated bent-in dowel keyway systems, electrical conduit and items of other trades including interference with reinforcing materials. d)Sizes, grade designations, spacing, locations, and quantities of wire fabric, reinforcement bars, temperature and shrinkage reinforcement dowels. i.Do not use dimensions scaled from Contract Drawings to determine bar lengths. ii.Hooks and bends not specifically dimensioned shall be detailed per ACI 318. e)Bending and cutting schedules, assembly diagrams, splicing and connection requirements, details, and laps. f)Each type of supporting and spacing devices, including miscellaneous accessories. g)Construction joint type, details, and locations. Contractor shall coordinate construction joint type, details, and locations with concrete pour schedule. Submittal shall include details for each type of construction joint in accordance with Contract Documents. h)Locations and dimensions of openings in structural members including floor slab, shear walls, columns and beams. See SUBMITTALS Section of Specification 033000. i)Concrete accessories and embedded items. See SUBMITTALS Section of Specification 033000. 3.Product Data: Submit for action for each type of product identified in Part 2. Product Data shall be clearly marked to indicate all technical information which specifies full compliance with this section and Contract Documents, including published installation instructions and I.C.C reports, where applicable, for products of each manufacturer specified in this section. 4.Mill Reports: Submit for record. 5.Reinforcement Strain Test: For Grade 75 reinforcement, submit for record certification that steel has a yield strength of no less than 75 ksi as measured by both ASTM A615 and ACI 318 Section 3.5.3.2 procedures. 6.Hazardous Materials Notification: Submit for record. In the event no product or material is available that does not contain hazardous materials as determined by the Owner, a "Material Safety Data Sheet" (MSDS) equivalent to OSHA Form 20 shall be submitted for that proposed product or material prior to installation. B.Submittal Process: See Section 033000 C.SER Submittal Review: See Section 033000 Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-4 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies D.Substitution Request: See Section 033000 E.Request for Information (RFI): See Section 033000 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Comply with General Conditions and Division 1, including the following: 1.Deliver reinforcing steel to Project site bundled, tagged and marked. a)Use weatherproof tags indicating bar sizes, lengths and other information corresponding to markings shown on placement diagrams. 2.Deliver welded wire fabric in sheets. Do not deliver in rolls. 3.During construction period, properly store reinforcing steel and accessories to assure uniformity throughout the Project. 4.Deliver and store welding electrodes in accordance with AWS D1.4. 5.Immediately remove from site materials not complying with Contract Documents or determined to be damaged. 6.Store reinforcing steel above ground so that it remains clean. a)Maintain steel surfaces free from materials and coatings that might impair bond. b)Keep covered. c)Protect against corrosion or deterioration of any kind. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE BY OWNER’S TESTING AGENCY A.Field Quality Assurance General: The Owner’s Testing Agency shall test and inspect concrete reinforcement and embedded assemblies as Work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Design Professionals for final acceptance. B.Owner’s Testing Agency shall provide qualified personnel at the site to inspect reinforcement, embedments, and accessories using the latest Drawings and reviewed shop drawings, as follows: 1.Prior to placement, inspect reinforcement and embeds for grade, quality of material, absence of foreign matter, and for suitable storage. 2.Provide continuous inspection of reinforcement and embedded assemblies during placement and immediately prior to concreting operations for: size, quantity, vertical and horizontal spacing and location, correctness of bends and splices, mechanical splices, clearances, compliance with specified tolerances, security of supports and ties, concrete cover, and absence of foreign matter. 3.Inspect epoxy-coated reinforcement for coating damage and required applied coatings. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-5 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies 4.Provide continuous inspection of adhesive anchors installed in horizontal or upwardly inclined orientations and those marked (CERT) on the latest Drawings. C.Periodic inspection for post-installed adhesive and mechanical anchors shall be provided in accordance with the building code except that continuous inspection shall be provided for the conditions identified in section B.4. The inspector shall observe all aspects of the anchor installation and shall, at a minimum, verify the following items: 1.Hole drilling method in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Published Installation Instructions (MPII) and these installation requirements. 2.Anchor spacing and edge distance. 3.Hole diameter and depth. 4.Hole cleaning in accordance with the MPII. 5.Anchor element type, material, diameter, and length. 6.For adhesive anchors, adhesive identification and expiration date. 7.For adhesive anchors, adhesive installation in accordance with the MPII. 8.For torque-controlled mechanical anchors, the number of turns required to achieve the anchor set torque per the MPII. D.Owner’s Testing Agency shall submit for record inspection, observation, and/or test reports to the Owner and Design Professionals, as required herein and shall provide an evaluation statement in each report stating whether or not concrete reinforcement, embedded assemblies, and post-installed anchors conforms to requirements of Specifications and Drawings and shall specifically note deviations therefrom. E.Immediately notify the Contractor, Owner and Design Professionals of deficiencies. 1.9 QUALITY CONTROL BY CONTRACTOR See Section 033000. 1.10 OBSERVATIONS AND CORRECTIONS BY DESIGN PROFESSIONALS See Section 033000. 1.11 PERMITS AND WARRANTY A.Permits: See Section 033000. B.Warranty: See Section 033000. Failures include but are not limited to the following: 1.Bars with kinks or bends not indicated on Drawings or on approved shop drawings. 2.Bars damaged due to bending, straightening or cutting. 3.Bars heated for bending. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-6 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCEMENT A.Reinforcing Steel: 1.Type: Deformed billet steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 or 75 as indicated on Drawings. 2.Size: As indicated on structural Drawings. B.Welded Wire Reinforcement: 1.Type: steel wire, deformed, ASTM A 496. 2.Size: As indicated on structural Drawings. 3.Plain Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A.Tie Wire: 1.Type: Minimum 16 gauge (1.5mm) annealed steel wire, ASTM A 510 and ASTM A 853. 2.Wire Bar Type: Comply with CRSI. B.Mechanical Splicing Systems: 1.Mechanical tension and compression splicing systems shall be used where indicated on Drawings or at contractor’s option. For seismic design categories D, E and F, in plastic hinge regions, only Type 2 mechanical splices are permitted. 2.Acceptable Products: Bartec Couplers by Dextra, Santa Fe Springs, CA or Lenton Cadweld by Erico, Solon, OH or Bar Lock coupler system by Dayton Superior, Miamisburg, OH or Grip-Twist by Bar Splice, Dayton, OH or ZAP Screwlok by Bar Splice, Dayton, OH or Lenton Couplers by Erico, Solon, OH. Splices shall be installed in compliance with manufacturer’s requirements. 3.Mechanical and welded tensile mechanical splicing systems shall be capable of developing 125% of the reinforcing steel ASTM specified minimum yield strength (Type 1) except where indicated as Type 2 (100% of specified tensile strength). 4.Mechanical compression splices shall be such that the compression stress is transmitted by end bearing held in concentric contact. C.Headed Bars: 1.For bar sizes #11 (ø36) or smaller where specifically detailed on Drawings, mechanical bar terminators shall be used. 2.Acceptable Products: Bartec End Anchors by Dextra, Santa Fe Springs, CA or Lenton Terminator by Erico, Solon, OH or Grip-Twist Doughnut by Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-7 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies Bar-Splice, Dayton, OH or Bar Lock End Anchorage System by Dayton Superior, Miamisburg, OH. D.Supports for Reinforcement: 1.Types: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, clips, chair bars, and other devices for properly placing, spacing, supporting, and fastening the reinforcement, plastic, plastic protected steel, or epoxy coated to match supported reinforcement. 2.For Contact with Forms: Use types with not less than 3/32” (2.5mm) of plastic between metal and concrete surface. a)Plastic tips shall extend not less than ½” (12mm) on metal legs. 3.Individual and continuous slab bolsters and chairs shall be of type to suit various conditions encountered and must be capable of supporting 300 pound (1.5kN) load without damage or permanent distortion. 4.Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, bottom reinforcing bars in footings shall be supported by precast concrete bricks or individual high chairs with welded sand plates on bottom. 5.For Slabs on Grade: Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. E.Deformed Bar Anchors: 1.Type: Automatic end welded, ASTM A 496 quality. 2.Size and Grade: As indicated on structural Drawings by Nelson Stud Welding. F.Anchor rods and dowels: 1.Types and Sizes: Provide sizes and types of anchor rods and dowels as indicated on the Drawings. Each type of anchor shall be manufactured of structural quality steel, designed for cast-in-place concrete applications and be of sizes as indicated on Drawings, complete with washers, nuts, plates and miscellaneous accessories required to meet Contract Document requirements. 2.Adhesive Anchors for anchor rods and dowels in existing concrete: See Anchorage Accessories. 2.3 ANCHORAGE ACCESSORIES A.General: Miscellaneous anchorage accessories for anchoring structural, architectural, electrical, and mechanical items to poured concrete shall include but not be limited to the following: 1.Concrete Anchors: Headed or bent studs ASTM A 108/Grade 1015 through 1020, minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (345MPa), minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi (415MPa). 2.Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade as noted on Drawings. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-8 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies 3.Threaded Inserts: Manufactured by Dayton/Richmond Screw Anchor Co. or Powers Fasteners, Inc. 4.Adhesive Anchors: a)Basis of Design: See General Notes b)Substitution Request: As anchor capacities vary by manufacturer, the following anchors will be considered as a Substitution Request. Refer to project specifications for Substitution Request procedure i.HIT-RE 500-SD by Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK ii.Epcon C6+ by ITW Red Head, Glendale Heights, IL iii.Epcon G5 by ITW Red Head, Glendale Heights, IL iv.PE 1000+ by Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY v.Pure 110+ by Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY vi.SET-XP by Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Pleasanton, CA c)The adhesive anchor system used for post-installed anchorage to concrete shall conform to the requirements of ACI 355.4 and commentary and shall possess a current ICC- ES report demonstrating compliance with ACI 318. 5.Expansion Anchors: a)Basis of Design: See General Notes b)Substitution Request: As anchor capacities vary by manufacturer, the following anchors will be considered as a Substitution Request. Refer to project specifications for Substitution Request procedure. i.Power Stud+ SD1 or SD2 by Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY ii.Power Stud + SD6 (SS) by Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY iii.Trubolt or Trubolt+ by ITW Red Head, Glendale Heights, IL iv.Strong-Bolt by Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Pleasanton, CA c)The expansion anchors used for post-installed anchorage to concrete shall conform to the requirements of ACI 355.2 and commentary and shall possess a current ICC- ES report demonstrating compliance with ACI 318. 6.Threaded Screw Anchors: a)Basis of Design: See General Notes b)Substitution Request: As anchor capacities vary by manufacturer, the following anchors will be considered as a Substitution Request. Refer to project specifications for Substitution Request procedure. i.Wedge Bolt+ by Powers Fasteners, Brewster, NY Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-9 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies ii.Tapcon by ITW Red Head, Glendale Heights, IL iii.Titan HD by Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Pleasanton, CA 7.Inserts and Coil Rods: Yield strength 65,000 psi (450MPa), ASTM B 633, manufactured by Acrow-Richmond Limited or Dayton Superior, Dayton, OH. 8.Welding Electrodes: AWS 5.5, Series E70. 9.Welded Deformed Bar Anchors: Welded by full-fusion process, as furnished by TRW Nelson Stud Welding Division or equivalent. B.Dovetail Anchor Slots: 1.Type: Formed 22 gauge (0.85mm) galvanized steel manufactured by Heckmann Building Products, Chicago, Illinois or Hohmann and Barnard, Hauppauge, New York or Pro-Slot by BoMetals, Inc., Carrollton, GA. 2.Location of Use: Continuous installation of anchor slots, full height of masonry walls, where masonry walls abut poured concrete walls. 3.Fill slot with temporary filler or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 4.Finish: Hot-dip galvanized or zinc-plated steel. 5.Stainless steel anchors are acceptable. 2.4 JOINT FILLERS A.Permanent Compressible Joint Filler: 1.Type: W. R. Meadows: “Ceramar” closed-cell expansion joint filler, ultraviolet stable, minimal moisture absorption, non-impregnated, nonstaining and nonbleeding, inert and compatible with cold-applied sealants. 2.Location of Use: Slabs and curbs as indicated on Drawings or required. 3.Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or required. B.Temporary Compressible Joint Filler: 1.Type: White molded polystyrene beadboard. 2.Location of Use: a)In slabs, curbs, and walls which must be removed prior to joint sealant installation. b)Vertically to isolate walls from columns or other walls. C.Semi Rigid Joint Filler: 1.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “Euco 700” or “Euco QWIKjoint 200” 2.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sikadur 51 SL” 3.Acceptable Product: W.R. Meadows Sealtight “Rezi-Weld Flex” D.Noncompressible Joint Filler: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-10 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies 1.Type: Dow Chemical's "STYROFOAM 40" rigid closed-cell extruded polystyrene board, square edges, 40 psi (275kPa) compressive strength, ASTM C 578, Type IV. 2.Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 3.Location of Use: As indicated on Drawings or required. E.Asphalt-Impregnated Joint Filler: 1.Type: W.R. Meadows Asphalt Expansion Joint Filler, preformed, ASTM D 994. 2.Thickness: ½” (12mm) maximum, as indicated on Drawings or required. 3.Location of Use: Sidewalks at foundation walls and as indicated on Drawings or required. F.Asphalt-impregnated fiberboard expansion joint filler for interior work: 1.Type: ASTM D1751. G.Self-expanding cork board expansion joint filler for exterior work: 1.Type: ASTM D1752. H.Construction Joints: 1.Type: Tongue and groove type profile of galvanized steel, with knock-out holes at 6" (150mm) on center to receive dowelling, complete with anchorage. 2.5 WATERSTOPS A.Preformed Swellable Waterproofing Strips especially formulated for concrete cold joints at footings, walls, or slabs. 1.Acceptable Products: a)“Volclay Waterstop RX” by CETCO Building Materials Group, Hoffman Estates, IL b)“Adcor ES” by W. R. Grace & Co., Cambridge, MA c)“Hydrotite” by Sika, Lyndhurst, NJ 2.Size: 3/4" (20mm) by 3/8" (10mm) strips minimum, 25 ft. (7.5m) long, and weighing at least 0.165 lbs/ft (0.245kg/m). 3.Location of Use: Concrete cold joints at footings, walls and slab joints. 4.Comply with manufacturer product application and installation instructions. B.Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops: 1.Type: PVC Waterstops for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections and directional changes. U.S. Corp of Engineers Specification CRD C 572. 2.Acceptable Products: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-11 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies a)“PVC Waterstops” by BoMetals, Carrollton, GA b)“Greenstreak” by Sika, Lyndhurst, NJ c)“Sealtight PVC Waterstops” by W.R. Meadows, Hampshire, IL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A.Reinforcing Steel Fabrication: 1.Fabricate in accordance with approved shop Drawings, ACI 315 and Contract Documents. 2.Heating of Reinforcement: Will be permitted only with specific prior approval of the SER. 3.Welding: Comply with ANSI/AWS D1.4; use E9018 electrodes or approved electrodes. 4.Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117. 5.Unacceptable Materials: Reinforcement with any of following defects will not be permitted in Work. a)Bar lengths, depths, and bends exceeding ACI fabrication tolerances. b)Bends or kinks not indicated on Drawings or final shop drawings. c)Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other cause. B.Welded Wire Reinforcement: 1.Type: As fabricated in accordance with CRSI, unless otherwise noted. C.Templates: 1.Required for all footing and column dowels, and where required for proper alignment of reinforcing. D.Assemblies: 1.Fabricate and assemble structural steel items in shop in conformance with AISC and AWS D1.1. Shearing, flame cutting, and chipping shall be done carefully and accurately. Cut, drill, or punch holes at right angles to the surface of the metal. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. Holes shall be clean-cut without torn or ragged edges. 2.Welding of deformed bar anchors and headed stud anchors shall be installed by full-fusion process equivalent to TRW Nelson Stud Welding Division or KSM Welding Services Division, Omark Industries or Tru-Weld Stud Welding, Medina, OH. 3.Welding of reinforcement shall be done in accordance with AWS requirements. Welding shall be performed subject to the observance and testing by Owner’s Testing Agency. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-12 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies 4.Galvanizing where required, shall be applied after fabrication and prior to casting concrete. 5.Welding of crossing bars (tack welding) for assembly of reinforcement is not permitted without use of weldable reinforcement and express written consent of SER. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCEMENT A.General: 1.Perform the work of this section in accordance with approved shop drawings, ACI 318 and CRSI recommended practice for “Placing Reinforcing Bars”, for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as specified. 2.Before placing reinforcement steel, inspect forms for proper fitting and compliance with allowable tolerances. 3.Reinforcement shall be free of form coatings, sealers, powdered and scaled rust, loose mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which will reduce or destroy bond with concrete. 4.Do not place concrete until the completed reinforcement steel work has been observed and accepted by Owner’s Testing Laboratory. 5.Reinforcement steel is not permitted to be “floated into position”. 6.Bend bars cold. a)Do not heat or flame cut bars. b)No field bending of bars partially embedded in concrete is permitted, unless specifically approved by the SER and tested by Independent Testing Agency for cracks. 7.Weld only as indicated. a)Perform welding per ANSI/AWS D12.1 and/or ANSI/AWS D1.4. b)See structural Drawings for additional requirements. 8.Tag reinforcement steel for easy identification. B.Placement of Reinforcement Bars: 1.Comply with approved shop drawings, ACI 318 and Contract Documents. 2.Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement in a manner to prevent displacement before and during placement of concrete. a)Place reinforcement bars within tolerances specified in ACI 117. b)Locate and support reinforcement by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, hangers and other accessories for fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. 3.If bars are displaced beyond specified tolerance when relocating the bars to avoid interference with other reinforcement or embedded items, immediately notify the Design Professionals for approval prior to concrete placement. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-13 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies 4.Avoid cutting or puncturing vapor retarder during reinforcement placement. a)Repair damages before placing concrete. 5.Concrete Coverage: Maintain concrete cover around reinforcement as indicated on Drawings. 6.Bar Supports: Use type specified in this section. 7.Tie Wires: After cutting, turn tie wires to the inside of section and bend so that concrete placement will not force ends to be exposed at face of concrete. C.Placement of Wire Reinforcement: 1.Install in lengths as long as practicable. 2.Support in position adequately to prevent bending of reinforcement between supports before and during placement of concrete. 3.Overlap the wire reinforcement 6” (150mm) or one panel width + 2” (50mm), whichever is larger. a)Securely tie together with wire. 4.Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 5.Locate wire fabric in the top third of slabs, unless noted otherwise on structural Drawings. D.At Construction Joints: 1.Reinforcement bars and wire reinforcement shall be continuous through construction joints, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. See Drawings for scheduled lap splices. E.At Expansion Joints: 1.Reinforcing bars and wire fabric shall NOT be continuous through expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. F.Splicing: 1.Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings provide lap splices for bar sizes #11 (ø36) and smaller by lapping ends, placing bars in contact, and tying tightly with wire in accordance with requirements of ACI 318 for lap lengths indicated on Drawings. 2.At all #14 (ø43) and #18 (ø57) bars and where mechanical splices are specifically indicated on Drawings, comply with requirements specified in this Specification section under “Mechanical Splicing Systems”. 3.Do not splice reinforcement except as indicated on structural Drawings. 4.Tension couplers may be used and installed per manufacturer’s specifications where indicated on Drawings or as approved by Engineer. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-14 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies G.Dowels in Existing Concrete: 1.Install dowels and dowel adhesive in accordance with supplier’s recommendations. 2.Minimum embedment length shall be 12 bar diameters, unless noted otherwise. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF POST-INSTALLED ADHESIVE ANCHORS A.General: 1.Post-installed adhesive anchors shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s Printed Installation Instructions (MPII). 2.The adhesive anchors shall be supplied as an entire system. The contractor shall provide all equipment required to install the adhesive anchor in accordance with the MPII. 3.Anchors shall be installed in holes drilled with a rotary impact hammer drill with carbide bit. Contractor shall obtain prior written approval from SER before using rock drilling or core drilling installation methods. 4.Anchor holes shall be thoroughly cleaned and dry prior to adhesive injection, in accordance with the MPII. Anchors to be installed in the adhesive shall be clean, oil-free, and free of loose rust, paint, or other coatings. 5.Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi (17MPa). 6.Concrete at time of adhesive anchor installation shall have a minimum of 21 days. 7.Concrete temperature at the time of adhesive anchor installation shall be at least equal to manufacture's requirements, or 50° F (10°C) if no requirement exists. 8.Support the anchor and protect it from disturbance or loading for the full cure time stated by the manufacturer at that base material temperature. 9.Unless specified otherwise in the contract documents, anchors shall be installed perpendicular to the concrete surface. Anchors displaced or disturbed prior to the adhesive cure time shall be considered damaged and reported to the SER (see Observations and Corrections section of 033000). 10.Locate, by non-destructive means, and avoid all existing reinforcement prior to installation of anchors. If existing reinforcement layout prohibits the installation of anchors as indicated in the drawings the contractor shall immediately notify the Design Professionals. 11.Reinforcement bars or all-threaded bars shall not be bent after being adhesively embedded in hardened, sound concrete, unless written approval is given by the SER. 12.All personnel installing anchors shall be trained by the manufacturer on proper installation techniques. Submit for record certificate from training documentation from the manufacturer for each installer on this Project 13.Installation of adhesive anchors horizontally or upwardly inclined and anchors that are designated with a (CERT) after the anchor call-out, shall be performed by personnel certified by the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-15 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies Installer Certification program. Submit for record certificate from ACI - CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installation Certification Program for each certified installer on this Project. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES AND EMBEDDED ITEMS A.Install concrete accessories in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and Contract Documents. 1.Set and secure embedments, including embedded plates, bearing plates, and anchor rods, per approved setting drawings and in such a manner to prevent movement during placement of concrete and to allow removal of formwork without damage. 2.Tolerances: Anchor rod and other embedded items placement tolerances shall comply with AISC 303, “Code of Standard Practice”, Section 7.5. 3.Inspect locations to receive concrete accessories. 4.Immediately notify the Design Professionals in writing of conditions that will adversely affect the Work or fail to meet Contract Document requirements. 5.Do not place concrete until reinforcement, accessories and other built-in items have been inspected and accepted by Owner’s Testing Agency. B.Construction and Contraction (Control) Joints: 1.Construction and contraction (control) joints indicated on Drawings are mandatory and must not be omitted. a)Provide construction joints in accordance with ACI 318. b)Roughen surface at construction joints as indicated on the drawings. c)Where specifically indicated on drawings, provide 1-1/2” (40mm) deep key type construction joints at end of each placement for slabs, beams, walls and footings. i.Bevel forms for easy removal. 2.Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated on the Contract Documents in sizes to suit joint. 3.Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. 4.Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of Work. 5.Field-fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer’s printed instructions. C.Coordinate the installation of pipes, bolts, hangers, anchors, flashing and other embedded items with the work of other trades. 3.5 CORRECTIVE MEASURES A.Where the Contractor requests that the Design Professionals develop the corrective actions or review corrective actions developed by others, the Design Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 032000-16 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies Professional shall be compensated as outlined in Part 3 – CORRECTIVE MEASURES section of Specification 033000. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-1 Cast-In-Place Concrete SECTION 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL Work of this Section shall conform to requirements of Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections. 1.2 SCOPE Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and transportation required to complete all concrete work as shown on Drawings, as specified herein, and as required by the job conditions. This Specification is not intended to address the particular requirements of Architectural Concrete. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS Submittals Division 1 Quality Control Division 1 Concrete Formwork Section 031000 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies Section 032000 Thermal and Moisture Protection Division 7 1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS A.Building Code: Concrete work shall conform to the requirements of the Building Code identified on the Structural General Notes, and OSHA requirements, except where more stringent conditions or criteria occur in the standards referenced below and on the Drawings. B.Standards: 1.ACI 117 – Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2.ACI 237 – Self Consolidating Concrete. 3.ACI 301 – Specifications for Structural Concrete. 4.ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 5.American Concrete Institute “Manual of Concrete Practice”, various committee reports as referenced herein. 6.American Society for Testing and Materials "ASTM Standards in Building Codes", various standards as referenced herein. 7.AASHTO T318 – Standard Method of Test for Water Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete Using Microwave Oven Drying. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-2 Cast-In-Place Concrete C.Definitions: 1.The term “Contract Documents” in this Specification is defined as the design Drawings and the specifications. 2.The term “SER” in this Specification is defined as the Structural Engineer of Record for the structure in its final condition. 3.The term “Design Professionals” in this Specification is defined as the Owner’s Architect and SER. 4.The term “Contractor” in this Specification is defined to include any of the following: General Contractor and their sub-contractors, Construction Manager, Concrete Contractor and their sub-contractors. 5.The term “Testing Agency” in this Specification is defined as an independent testing and inspection service engaged by the Owner for quality assurance observation and testing of concrete construction in accordance with applicable building code provisions and any additional activities listed in the Contract Documents. 6.The terms “for record” and “submit for record” in this Specification are defined as Contractor submittals that do not require a response from the Design Professionals. 7.The term “Working Days” in this Specification is defined as Monday through Friday, excluding federal or state holidays. 8.The term “Delegated Design” in this Specification is defined as a scope of work that meets performance and design criteria established in the Contract Documents and is to be completed by the Contractor’s licensed engineer. 1.5 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A.The work of this section shall be performed by a company specializing in the type of concrete work required for this Project, with a minimum of 10 years of documented successful experience and shall be performed by skilled workmen thoroughly experienced in the necessary crafts. B.Contractor’s Testing Agency Services: Required as specified in Division 1, and herein. C.Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of work, as directed by Design Professionals. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed work will be done at Contractor's expense. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A.Required Submittals - Where the SUBMITTALS section of this Specification is in conflict with Division 1 Submittals, the more stringent requirements for the Contractor apply. Required submittal items are listed here; see below for detailed requirements. Do not submit items not requested. Reproduction of structural drawings for shop drawings is not permitted. Building Information Models for contractor’s use may be provided as mutually agreed upon by Design Professionals. (1)Submittal Schedule Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-3 Cast-In-Place Concrete (2)Mix Designs (3)Concrete Travel Times to the Project Site (4)Hot and Cold Weather Procedures (5)Product Data (6)Concrete Joint Locations (7)Comprehensive Layout Drawings (8)Preconstruction Survey (9)Survey of Flat Plate or Flat Slab Concrete Floors during construction (10)FF/FL Testing (11)Structural Repairs (12)Patching Defective Concrete Finishes (13)Conduit and Pipes Embedded in Concrete (14)Hazardous Materials Notification 1.Submittal Schedule: The contractor shall submit for action a schedule at least twenty (20) working days prior to commencing submittals. a)This schedule shall include a list, in order of date to be submitted, of all drawings and other required submittal items scheduled to be submitted. The schedule shall list the proposed submittals for each week, as well as their formats. Once shop drawing submissions have commenced any modification or addition to this schedule must be submitted for action at least twenty (20) working days before the modification or addition is proposed to take place. b)If at any time the total number of shop drawings received in any one week period exceeds the amount in the approved schedule by more than 10% for that week, the Design Professionals have the right to add two days to the average turnaround time for each 20% increment in excess of the scheduled quantity for that week’s submissions. For example if the weekly total exceeds the schedule by 10% to 20%, two days may be added; if it is exceeded by 21% to 40%, four days may be added. The return dates for subsequent submittals may be extended based on the additional review time stated above. c)For the purposes of developing a schedule, assume the following review rate, Shop drawings – 10 full size sheets per week. 2.Mix Designs: Submit for action concrete mix designs for each type and strength of concrete required for this Project at least thirty (30) days before placing concrete. a)Mix designs shall be prepared or reviewed by an approved independent Testing Agency retained by the Contractor in accordance with requirements of ACI 301 and ACI 318, sealed and signed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the project is located, and shall be coordinated with design requirements and Contract Documents. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-4 Cast-In-Place Concrete b)Before submitting to Owner's Testing Agency, submit complete mix design data for each separate mix to be used on the Project in a single submittal. c)Provide a completed “Concrete Mix Design Submittal Form” (attached to the end of this Specification Section) for each proposed concrete mix. d)Mix materials shall be from the same production facility that will be used for this Project. e)Mix Design data shall include but not be limited to the following: i.Locations on the Project where each mix design is to be used corresponding to Structural General Notes on the Drawings. ii.Design Compressive Strength: As indicated on the Drawings. iii.Proportions: ACI 301 and ACI 318. iv.Gradation and quality of each type of ingredient including fresh (wet) unit weight, aggregates sieve analysis. v.Water/cementitious material ratio. vi.Evaluation and classification fly ash in accordance with ASTM D 5759. vii.Report of chemical analysis of fly ash in accordance with ASTM C 618. viii.Classification of blast furnace slag in accordance with ASTM C 989. ix.Slump: ASTM C 143. x.Certification and test results of the total water soluble chloride ion content of the design mix - AASHTO T260 or ASTM C 1218. xi.Air content of freshly mixed concrete by the pressure method, ASTM C 231, or the volumetric method, ASTM C 173. xii.Unit Weight of Concrete: ASTM C 138. xiii.Design strength at 28, 56 or 90 days, as indicated on Contract Documents: ASTM C 39. (1)Document strength based on basis of previous field experience or trial mixtures per ACI 301. Proportioning by Water-Cement Ratio is not permitted. (2)Submit strength test records, mix design materials, conditions, and proportions for concrete used for record of tests, standard deviation calculation, and determination of required average compressive strength. Test records to support proposed mixtures shall be no more than 24 months old and use current cement aggregate sources. Test records to establish standard deviation may be older if necessary to have the required number of samples. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-5 Cast-In-Place Concrete (3)If early concrete strengths are required, Contractor shall submit trial mixture results as required. xiv.Manufacturer's product data for each type of admixture. xv.Manufacturer’s certification that all admixtures used are compatible with each other. xvi.All information indicating compliance with Contract Documents including method of placement and method of curing. xvii.Normalweight Concrete: Density per ASTM C 138. Design the mix to produce the strength, modulus of elasticity and density as indicated on the Contract Documents. xviii.Certification from a qualified testing agency indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity in accordance with ASTM C 33 3.Concrete Travel Times to the Project Site: Submit for record. 4.Hot and Cold Weather Procedures: Submit for record written procedures for placement of concrete in hot and cold weather conditions. Hot and Cold weather are as defined in the Concrete Placement section of this Specification. 5.Product Data: Submit for action product data clearly marked to indicate locations to be used and all technical information which specifies full compliance with this section and Contract Documents, including published application instructions, product characteristics, compatibility, and limitations for each of the following: a)Bonding agents. b)Curing compound and liquid sealer densifier. Submit for record to Design Professionals a written statement guaranteeing that the compound will not leave discoloration on concrete to be left exposed, or affect the bond for paint or other applied finishes. Include provision in written statement that in the event of failure of applied finishes to bond to membrane cured concrete, to remove the curing compound and leave suitable surfaces for bonding such finishes. c)Absorptive covers and moisture retaining covers. d)Vapor Retarder: See Division 7, Thermal and Moisture Protection. e)Self-leveling concrete topping. f)Grout: Submittal of grout by manufacturers not listed herein must be accompanied by independent certification of ASTM C 1107 compliance without modification of standard methods. g)Other products proposed by Contractor 6.Concrete Joint Locations: Submit for action plans indicating locations and details of construction joints, contraction joints, waterstops, sleeves, embedments, etc. that interact with the joints. Contractor to coordinate joint location with reinforcement shop drawings. Reinforcement shop drawings shall indicate additional reinforcement bars where required at construction joints. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-6 Cast-In-Place Concrete Joint locations for concrete slabs to receive a terrazzo or similar finish subject to reflective cracking must be coordinated with layout of finish drawings. 7.Comprehensive Layout Drawings: Submit for action comprehensive layout drawings (a single drawing per area/element): a)Drawings shall show openings in structural members, including floor slab, shear walls, columns and beams. b)Drawings shall consolidate the work of all trades and shall be coordinated by the Contractor. c)Drawings shall show concrete accessories and embedded items, including fabrication details of items to be placed (exclusive of reinforcement). d)Submit with or prior to reinforcement and formwork submittals for same element/area. 8.Preconstruction Survey: Submit for record. Where interface with existing construction occurs, before related shop drawings are prepared survey the existing construction and submit the survey prepared by a professional surveyor employed by the Contractor to the Design Professionals. 9.Survey of Flat Plate or Flat Slab Concrete Floors during construction: Submit for record. Survey requirements are described on Drawings. Based on survey results, SER may propose adjustments to formwork and camber. 10.FF/FL Testing: Submit for record. Owner’s Testing Agency to test and report flatness (FF), levelness (FL) prior to shoring removal. For slabs that include camber, do not test for levelness (FL). Perform FF/FL testing in accordance with ASTM E 1155 requirements. 11.Structural Repairs: Submit for action procedures, intended locations, and product information. Alterations to design shall be sealed and signed by a Professional/Structural Engineer licensed in the state where the project is located. 12.Patching Defective Concrete Finishes: Submit for action procedures, intended locations, and product information. 13.Conduit and Pipes Embedded in Concrete: Submit for action layout of embedded conduit and pipes. 14.Hazardous Materials Notification: Submit for record. In the event no product or material is available that does not contain hazardous materials as determined by the Owner, a "Material Safety Data Sheet" (MSDS) equivalent to OSHA Form 20 shall be submitted for that proposed product or material prior to installation. B.Submittal Process 1.Submittal of shop drawings and other submittals by the Contractor shall constitute Contractor's representation that the Contractor has verified all quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar data with respect thereto and reviewed or coordinated each drawing with other Drawings Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-7 Cast-In-Place Concrete and other trades. The Contractor shall place their shop drawing stamp on all submittals confirming the above. 2.Shop drawings: Submit in complete packages so that individual parts and the assembled unit may be reviewed together. This Specification Section and the applicable Drawings used in the development of the shop drawings shall be referenced on each shop drawing to facilitate checking. 3.The Contractor shall submit to the Design Professionals one (1) electronic copy for shop drawing review. The naming convention of each drawing must follow the submittal numbering system and include the submittal number, Specification number, revision number and drawing number in the prefix of the drawing name. 4.The Contractor shall allow at least ten (10) working days between receipt and release by the SER for the review of shop drawings and submittals. 5.All modifications or revisions to submittals and shop drawings must be clouded, with an appropriate revision number clearly indicated. The following shall automatically be considered cause for rejection of the modification or revision whether or not the drawing has been approved by the Design Professionals: a)Failure to specifically cloud modifications b)Unapproved revisions to previous submittals c)Unapproved departure from Contract Documents 6.Resubmittals: Completely address previous comments prior to resubmitting a drawing. Resubmit only those drawings that require resubmittal. Do not include new content not previously reviewed. 7.Resubmittals Compensation: The Contractor shall compensate the Design Professionals for submittals that must be reviewed more than twice due to Contractors’ errors. The Contractor shall compensate the Design Professionals at standard billing rates plus out-of-pocket expenses incurred at cost + 10%. 8.The Contractor shall deliver to the Design Professionals at the completion of the job two (2) copies of the electronic version of the final as-built shop drawings on a CD-ROM or other media acceptable to the Design Professionals. C.SER Submittal Review 1.The Design Professionals’ review and approval of shop drawings and other submittals shall be for general conformance with the design intent of the work and with the information given in the Contract Documents only and will not in any way relieve the Contractor or the Contractor's Engineer from: a)Conforming to the Contract Documents. b)Coordination with other trades. c)Responsibility for all required detailing and proper fitting of construction work. d)The necessity of furnishing material and workmanship required by Drawings and Specifications which may not be indicated on the shop drawings. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-8 Cast-In-Place Concrete e)Control or charge of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, for safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. 2.TYPE 1 – Structural Submittal Review Stamp: For shop drawings for building elements designed by the SER, the responses on the shop drawing review stamp used by the SER require one of the following actions: a)APPROVED indicates that the SER has found that the information presented on the shop or erection drawing appears to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Fabrication, manufacture or construction of the elements of work shown in the shop drawing may proceed, provided that work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. b)APPROVED AS NOTED indicates that the SER requires the shop or erection drawing to be corrected to reflect the notes and comments shown. Fabrication, manufacture or construction of the elements of work shown in the shop drawing may proceed, provided that work is in compliance with the notations shown on the shop drawings and the Contract Documents. Promptly resubmit the corrected shop or erection drawing for record. c)REVISE and RESUBMIT indicates that the SER requires resubmission of the shop or erection drawing after correction per notes and comments. None of the elements of work shown on the shop drawing shall be fabricated, manufactured or constructed until the Contractor has received a returned shop drawing marked Approved or Approved as Noted. d)NOT APPROVED indicates that the shop or erection drawing does not conform to the Contract Documents and must be extensively revised before re-submittal. None of the elements of work shown on the shop drawing shall be fabricated, manufactured or constructed until the Contractor has received a returned shop drawing marked Approved or Approved as Noted. 3.TYPE 2 – Delegated Design Review Stamp: For submittals for building elements which are not designed by the SER but are delegated design items, or for items that do not form part of the completed structural system but impose loads on the structure, or for construction items or activities which have an effect on the final structure. The responses on the stamp used by the SER require one of the following actions: a)NO EXCEPTIONS indicates that the SER has found that the information presented on the submittal appears to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Fabrication, manufacture or construction of the elements of work shown in the shop drawing may proceed, provided that work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. b)EXCEPTIONS NOTED indicates that the SER requires the submittal be corrected to reflect the notes and comments shown. Fabrication, manufacture or construction of the elements of work Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-9 Cast-In-Place Concrete shown in the shop drawing may proceed, provided that work is in compliance with the notations shown on the shop drawings and the Contract Documents. Promptly resubmit the corrected document for record. c)REJECTED indicates that the SER requires resubmission of the submittal after correction per notes and comments. None of the elements of work shown on the shop drawing shall be fabricated, manufactured or constructed. Contractor to revise and resubmit until SER response of No Exceptions or Exceptions Noted is received. D.Substitution Request 1.Requests for any departure from Contract Documents must be submitted in writing by the Contractor and accepted in writing by the Design Professionals, prior to receipt of submittals. 2.All substitutions must be requested using the structural substitution request form included at the end of this section. Acceptance using the structural substitution request form indicates acceptability of the structural concept only. Contractor must submit shop drawings reflecting accepted substitutions for review in accordance with this Specification. The structural substitution request form, even if accepted, does not constitute a change order. 3.Accepted substitutions or modifications shall be coordinated and incorporated in the work at the sole expense of the Contractor. 4.The acceptance by the Design Professionals of a specific and isolated request by the Contractor to deviate from these requirements does not constitute a waiving of that requirement for other elements of, or locations in the project, unless specifically addressed as such and permitted by the Design Professionals in writing. 5.Compensation for Additional Services: Should additional work by Design Professionals such as design, documentation, meetings and/or site visits be required which are necessitated for the review and/or incorporation of the Contractor-requested substitution, including indirect effects on other portions of the work, the Contractor is responsible for paying for additional work performed by the Design Professionals at the standard billing rates plus out-of-pocket expenses incurred at cost + 10%. Additional costs for testing and inspection by the Owner shall also be compensated by the Contractor. 6.Contractor is responsible for means and methods and any impacts on other portions of the work that may arise from this substitution. E.Request for Information (RFI) 1.RFIs shall be submitted by the Contractor. RFIs submitted by other entities will be returned with no response. 2.Limit RFI to one subject. 3.Submit RFI immediately upon discovery of the need for interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. Submit RFI within timeframe so as not to delay the Construction Schedule while allowing the full response time described below. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-10 Cast-In-Place Concrete 4.The response time for answering an RFI depends on the category in which it is assigned. a)Upon receipt by the SER, each RFI will be assigned to one of the following categories: i.No cost clarification ii.Shown in Contract Documents iii.Change to be issued in future document revision iv.Previously answered v.Information needs to be provided by others. vi.Request for corrective field work vii.Request for substitution b)RFIs in the first five categories listed above will be turned around by the SER on average of five (5) working days. c)RFIs in the last two categories listed above will be immediately rejected and must be submitted as submittals or requests for substitution. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Comply with General Conditions and Division 1. B.Storage: 1.Store materials in accordance with ACI 304R. 2.Store cement in weather-tight buildings, bins or silos that will exclude moisture and contaminates. 3.Store admixtures to avoid contamination, evaporation, damage, and in accordance with manufacturer's temperature and other recommendations. 4.Keep packaged material in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. C.Handling: 1.Handle fine and coarse aggregates as separate ingredients. 2.Arrange aggregate stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation, and prevent contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. 3.Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates. 4.Allow sand to drain until it has reached relatively uniform moisture content before use. 5.Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and temperature changes that would adversely affect characteristics, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-11 Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A.At least 30 working days prior to the start of concrete construction, the Contractor shall hold a meeting to review the approved concrete mix designs and to determine the procedures for producing proper concrete construction. The Contractor shall notify the Design Professionals of the meeting and require responsible representatives of every party who is concerned with the concrete Work to attend the conference, including but not limited to the following: 1.Contractor. 2.Owner’s Testing Agency representative 3.Concrete Subcontractor. 4.Ready-mix concrete producer. 5.Admixture manufacturer(s). B.Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded and distributed by the Contractor to all parties concerned within five working days of the meeting. One copy of the minutes shall also be furnished to the following: 1.Design Professionals. 2.Owner's Representative. C.The minutes shall include a statement by the concrete contractor and admixture manufacturer(s) indicating that the proposed mix design and placing, finishing, and curing techniques can produce the concrete properties and quality required by these Specifications. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE BY OWNER’S TESTING AGENCY A.Quality assurance is testing and inspection to assist the Owner in evaluating the Contractor's performance and quality control. B.Cost: Except as specifically noted otherwise, the testing agencies for quality assurance shall be engaged and paid by the Owner. C.Coordination with Owner’s Testing Agency: The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for coordinating their work with the Owner’s Testing Agency to assure that all test and inspection procedures required by the Contract Documents and Public Agencies are provided. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with the Owner’s Testing Agency in the performance of their work and shall provide the following: 1.Information as to time of starting field construction and concrete placement schedule, one week prior to the beginning of the work 2.Site File: At least one copy of each approved shop drawing shall be kept available in the Contractor’s field office. Drawings not bearing evidence of approval and release for construction by the Design Professionals shall not be kept on the job. 3.Full and ample means of assistance for testing and inspection of material 4.Proper facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, safety equipment etc., for inspection of the work in shop and field Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-12 Cast-In-Place Concrete D.Duties of the Owner’s Testing Agency: 1.Reports: The Testing Agency shall prepare daily reports of the concrete work including progress and description/area of work, tests made and results. The daily reports shall be collected and delivered to the Design Professionals and Owner weekly. 2.Concrete Strength Spreadsheet Log: The Test Agency shall maintain a log that contains the results of all concrete strength tests. The log shall include the results of each test performed, be in electronic spreadsheet format, and updated and submitted along with concrete test data. See example log attached at the end of this Specification Section. 3.Rejection: The Owner’s Testing Agency has the right to reject any material, at any time, when it is determined that the material or workmanship does not conform to the Contract Documents. The Testing Agency shall immediately notify the Owner, Design Professionals, and Contractor of deficiencies. 4.Remedial Work: The Testing Agency shall indicate to the Contractor where remedial work must be performed and will maintain a current list of work not in compliance with the Contract Documents. This list shall be submitted to the Design Professionals and Owner on a weekly basis. 5.Certification: When all work has been approved by the Testing Agency, the Testing Agency shall certify in a letter to the Design Professionals and Owner that the installation is in accordance with the design and E.Field Quality Assurance 1.General: The Owner’s Testing Agency shall test and inspect concrete materials and operations as Work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Design Professional for final acceptance. 2.Owner’s Testing Agency is responsible for monitoring concrete placement as follows: a)Owner’s Testing Agency shall provide qualified personnel at site to monitor concreting operations as follows: i.Verify use of required design mix ii.Record location of point of concrete discharge of each batch truck tested, cross referenced to grid lines. iii.Record temperature of concrete at time of placement. iv.Record weather conditions at time of placement, including temperature, wind speed, relative humidity, and precipitation. v.Record types and amounts of admixtures added to concrete at the project site. vi.Record amount of water added at the site and verify that total water content does not exceed amount specified in the mix design. Addition of water at the site is subject to prior approval by the Design Professional. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-13 Cast-In-Place Concrete vii.Monitor consistency and uniformity of concrete. viii.Monitor preparation for concreting operations, placement of concrete, and subsequent curing period for conformance with Specifications for following procedures: (1)Concrete curing. (2)Hot weather concreting operations. (3)Cold weather concreting operations. 3.Owner’s Testing Agency shall conduct tests of concrete as follows and in accordance with ASTM C 1077: a)Testing frequency: Sample sets for all tests listed below of each concrete design mix placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day, nor less than once for each 100 cubic yards of concrete, nor less than once for each 5000 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls. Additional tests shall be performed if deemed necessary by the Owner’s Testing Agency and Design Professionals. In addition, sample each truckload used for columns, regardless of other frequencies listed above. b)Obtain each test sample from different batches selected on a strictly random basis before commencement of concrete placement. Record location in structure of sampled concrete. c)Determine air content of normalweight concrete in accordance with either ASTM C 231 or ASTM C 138. Determine air content of lightweight concrete in accordance with ASTM C 173. Conduct one test for air content for each strength test required or for every 50 cubic yards (40 cubic meters) of fly ash concrete placed, whichever is less. d)Test water content of freshly mixed concrete on a random basis, a minimum of once per 100 cubic yards or every 5000 square feet of concrete placement, during placement in accordance with AASHTO T 318 for the following concrete types: i.Hard troweled slabs exposed to view ii.Slab to receive a bonded finish floor material iii.Slabs with specified concrete compressive strength exceeding 6000 psi e)Conduct slump tests in accordance with ASTM C 143. f)Slump indicated in mix designs shall be achieved at point of placement. Correlation between slump at point of initial discharge from truck and point of placement must be established to determine amount of slump loss which occurs between initial discharge and point of placement. Adjustment may be necessary to achieve slump indicated in mix designs at point of placement. g)Conduct strength tests of concrete as follows: i.Secure sample sets in accordance with ASTM C 172. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-14 Cast-In-Place Concrete ii.Mold cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 31 and cure under standard moisture and temperature conditions in accordance with ASTM C 31, Section 7 (a). Quantity of cylinders listed below is based on a cylinder size of 4 inch (100mm) diameter x 8 inches (200mm) long. If 6 inch (150mm) diameter by 12 inch (300mm) long cylinders are used, the total quantity of cylinders may be reduced by one with two cylinders instead of three tested at the age designated for determination of f’c. iii.Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 39. For specified concrete strength of 10,000 psi (70MPa) and above, cylinders shall be ground and not capped. iv.For 28 day mixes mold six cylinders. Test two cylinders at seven days and three cylinders at 28 days. The 28 day strength shall be the average of the three 28 day cylinders. One cylinder shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required. v.For 56 day mixes mold seven cylinders. Test one cylinder at seven days, two cylinders at 28 days, and three cylinders at 56 days. The 56 day strength shall be the average of the three 56 day cylinders. One cylinder shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required. vi.For 90 day mixes mold eight cylinders. Test one cylinder at seven days, one at cylinder at 28 days, two cylinders at 56 days, and three cylinders at 90 days. The 90 day strength shall be the average of the three 90 day cylinders. One cylinder shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required. vii.When high early strength concrete is required by Contractor, additional cylinders shall be made and tested as required at Contractor’s expense. viii.If one cylinder in a test manifests evidence of improper sampling, molding or other damage, discard cylinder and base test results on that of remaining cylinder. 4.Owner’s Testing Agency shall evaluate concrete for conformance with Specifications as follows: a)Slump: i.Owner’s Testing Agency shall maintain a slump moving average, comprised of the average of all batches or most recent five (5) batches tested, whichever is fewer. b)Strength test: i.Owner’s Testing Agency shall maintain a compressive strength moving average, comprised of three (3) consecutive strength test results, for each mix design used in Work. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-15 Cast-In-Place Concrete ii.Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory provided averages of all sets of three (3) consecutive strength test results (i.e. moving average) equal or exceed specified 28-day strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified 28-day strength by more than 500 psi (3.5MPa). iii.If strength tests fail to meet minimum requirements, concrete represented by such tests shall be considered questionable and shall, if deemed appropriate by the SER, be subject to further evaluation by core testing as specified herein or other testing methods. c)Conduct core tests on questionable concrete in accordance with ACI 318 and ASTM C 42. i.Location of cores shall be coordinated with Design Professionals so as to least impair strength of structure. Before testing cores, discard and replace any that show evidence of having been damaged subsequent to or during removal from structure or which have reinforcement present. ii.Cores from structure exposed to soil or constant moisture in service (e.g. basement walls, retaining walls, slab-on- grade, piers, footings, etc.) shall be tested in a fully saturated condition. Cores for all other concrete may be tested dry. Prior to commencement of coring, verify with Design Professionals whether cores are to be tested wet or dry. iii.Fill core holes with low slump concrete or mortar with a strength equal to or greater than that specified for area cored. d)Concrete in area represented by core test will be considered adequate if average strength of cores is equal to at least 85% of, and if no single core is less than 75% of specified strength. 5.Floor flatness and levelness tolerance compliance testing is to be performed within 72 hours of concrete placement by Owner’s Testing Agency, and prior to the removal of shores and forms. F.Owner’s Testing Agency shall submit for record inspection, observation, and/or test reports to the Owner and Design Professionals, as required herein and shall provide an evaluation statement in each report stating whether or not concrete placement conforms to requirements of Specifications and Drawings and shall specifically note deviations therefrom. G.Immediately report deficiencies to the Contractor, Owner and Design Professionals. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-16 Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.10 QUALITY CONTROL BY CONTRACTOR A.The Contractor shall provide a program of quality control to ensure that the minimum standards specified herein are attained. B.The Owner's general review during construction and activities of the Owner’ Testing Agency are undertaken to inform the Owner of performance by the Contractor but shall in no way replace or augment the Contractor's quality control program or relieve the Contractor of total responsibility f or quality control. C.The Contractor shall immediately notify the Design Professionals of any deficiencies in the work which are departures from the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall propose corrective actions and their recommendations in writing and submit them for review by the Design Professionals. After proposed corrective action is accepted by the Design Professionals and Owner, the Contractor shall correct the deficiency at no cost to the Owner. Where the Contractor requests that the Design Professionals develop the corrective actions or review corrective actions developed by others, the Design Professional shall be compensated as outlined in the OBSERVATIONS AND CORRECTIONS BY DESIGN PROFESSIONALS section of this Specification. 1.11 OBSERVATIONS AND CORRECTIONS BY DESIGN PROFESSIONALS A.Observations: The Design Professionals will observe the construction for general compliance with the provisions of the Contract Documents during various phases of construction. B.Corrections by Design Professionals: See Part 3 - CORRECTIVE MEASURES section of this specification. 1.12 PERMITS AND WARRANTY A.Permits: The Contractor shall apply for, procure, renew, maintain, and pay for all permits required by City, State, or other governing authorities, necessary to execute work under this Contract. Contractor shall furnish copies of all permits to the Owner and Design Professionals. B.Warranty: Comply with General Conditions, agreeing to repair or replace specified materials or Work that has failed within the warranty period. Failures include but are not limited to the following: 1.Oily, waxy or loose residue which may interfere with the bonding or discoloration of various applied Architectural finish materials. 2.Discoloration of concrete surfaces scheduled to remain exposed as a finish. 3.Areas which show surface failure or defects. 4.Areas which puddle water. 5.Areas which are not properly prepared to receive Architectural finish materials. If necessary, the Contractor, at his own expense, shall have the Owner’s Testing Agency perform appropriate tests for bond and discoloration. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-17 Cast-In-Place Concrete 6.Patches that become crazed, cracked or sound hollow when tapped. 7.Self-leveling concrete topping that has cracked, spalled and/or not performed in accordance with manufacturer's design criteria. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS & PRODUCTION A.Portland Cement: 1.ASTM C150, Type I or Type II 2.Provide the same brand of Portland Cement from a single source throughout the project, as required to meet Design Professionals’ requirements. B.Aggregates for Normalweight Concrete: 1.ASTM C 33 2.Fine Aggregate: Natural sand, or sand prepared from stone or gravel, clean, hard, durable, uncoated and free from silt, loam and clay. 3.The acceptability of aggregates for the work will depend on proof that their potential alkali reactivity is not deleterious to the concrete. 4.Do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling. 5.Maximum coarse aggregate size shall conform to the requirements as specified in ACI 301 but shall not exceed the following: Size no. 57 (25mm max) for footings, drilled piers and caissons Size no. 67 (20mm max) for all other locations Size no. 467 or 457 for non-reinforced concrete at locations noted on Drawings. 6.Contractor shall furnish concrete with maximum 3/8" (10mm) aggregate at no additional cost to the Owner if areas of high reinforcement density require it for placement and consolidation. C.Water: ASTM C 94. Clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acids, alkali, salts, organic material, or other deleterious materials. D.Supplementary Cementitious Material 1.Fly Ash: a)ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F. b)Shall not be used unless part of an approved mix design. c)Limit Loss on Ignition to 2.5% 2.Ground Granulated Blast-furnace Slag (GGBFS) a)ASTM C 989. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-18 Cast-In-Place Concrete b)Shall not be used unless part of an approved mix design. 3.Silica Fume (Microsilica): a)ASTM C 1240 b)Acceptable Product: W. R. Grace “Force 10,000 D” c)Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “Eucon MSA” d)Acceptable Product: BASF “MasterLife SF 100” e)Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sikacrete 950 DP” 4.The exact percentages used shall be based on successful test placement on site. Resubmit mix design if percentages change based on test placement. 5.The fly ash or natural pozzolan supplier shall have an effective quality control program in place to guard against contamination of the fly ash and assure compliance with Specifications. 6.Fly ash and GGBFS used shall be from one source throughout the project. Substitution of sources will be acceptable only if testing of concrete mixes containing the substituted material show similar test results and if the color of concrete produced with the substituted material matches the color of previously poured concrete to the satisfaction of the Architect. E.Ready Mixed Concrete: 1.Shall be batch-mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C 94. 2.2 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A.Concrete Strength: 1.Shall be as indicated on the Structural Drawings B.Concrete Density (Unit Weight): 1.Shall be as indicated on the Structural Drawings C.Air Entrainment 1.For concrete exposed to freeze/thaw cycles and/or deicing chemicals (Exposure Classes F1, F2, F3), and concrete intended to be watertight, provide entrained air content of 6% ± 1.5%, unless specified otherwise. This includes, but is not limited to, concrete at the following locations: a)Concrete at the exterior of the structure with at least one surface exposed to weather, such as exterior face of grade beams, foundation walls, exterior walls and parapets, exposed columns and edge beams. b)Concrete in parking garages. c)Ramps and loading docks. d)Balconies and terraces with no waterproof membrane. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-19 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2.For lightweight concrete less than 120 pcf density, air content may be up to 7% regardless of exposure condition. 3.For concrete with a specified compressive strength (f’c) greater than 5000 psi (35MPa), required air content may be reduced to 5% ± 1.5%. 4.Entrained air content noted above shall occur at point of delivery. 5.No entrained air content is required in concrete placed in the foundation with no surface exposed to weather. 6.All interior steel trowel finished, normalweight slabs shall have a maximum air content of 3%. D.Water-Cementitious Materials (W/cm) Ratio for Normalweight Concrete 1.Unless lower limits are stated in the Contract Documents, all concrete exposed to freezing and thawing in moist condition (Exposure Classes F1 and F2) and/or required to be watertight shall have a maximum W/cm ratio of 0.45 and a minimum f’c=4500 psi . 2.All concrete exposed to deicing salts, brackish water seawater or spray from these sources (Exposure Class F3) shall have a maximum W/cm ratio of 0.40 and a minimum f’c=4500 psi. 3.Absent the above conditions, all concrete with required strength of 4000 psi (28MPa) or higher shall have a maximum W/cm ratio of 0.50. 4.The water-cementitious materials ratio shall not exceed values indicated, including any water added to meet specified slump in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 94. 5.Weight of fly ash or pozzolanic admixtures shall be included with the weight of cementitious materials used to determine the water- cementitious materials ratio. E.Slump 1.Concrete design mixes shall be proportioned to meet the following slump limitations. Slump should be measured as described in the Owner’s testing agency responsibilities: a)Concrete with high range or mid range water-reducing admixture: Concrete slump prior to addition of high range water-reducing admixture shall not exceed 3" for normalweight concrete. After addition of water-reducing admixture, the concrete shall have a maximum slump of 9" unless otherwise approved by the SER. b)Concrete without a water-reducing admixture: Slump shall not exceed 4”. F.Chloride Ion Content 1.The total water-soluble chloride ion content of the mix including all constituents shall not exceed the limits defined in ACI 318 4.3 unless corrosion inhibiting admixtures are added to the mixture to offset the additional chloride. 2.If the specified level of water-soluble chloride ion content cannot be maintained, appropriate level of corrosion inhibiting admixture shall be Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-20 Cast-In-Place Concrete added to the mix in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation to offset the excess amount of chloride at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.3 ADMIXTURES A.General: 1.Admixtures specified below can be used only when established in the mix design with Design Professionals' prior written approval. 2.Each admixture approved by Design Professionals shall be used in strict compliance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3.Concrete supplier shall certify all admixtures to be compatible with each other. (See Submittals Section in Part 1) B.Air Entraining Admixture: 1.ASTM C 260 2.Acceptable Product: BASF "MasterAir AE 200”" or “MasterAir -AE 90” 3.Acceptable Product: W. R. Grace “Darex Series” or “Daravair Series” 4.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “AEA –92 or Air 40” 5.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sika Air Series” or “Sika AEA Series” C.Water-Reducing Admixture: 1.ASTM C 494, Type A 2.Acceptable Product: BASF’ "MasterPozzolith 210” 3.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “EUCON NW” or “EUCON WR 91” 4.Acceptable Product: W. R. Grace “WRDA’ Series, Zyla Series or “Mira” Series 5.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Plastocrete Series” D.Retarding Admixture: 1.ASTM C 494, Type B 2.Acceptable Product: BASF “Masterset R 100” 3.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “EUCON RETARDER 100” 4.Acceptable Product: W. R. Grace “Daratard 17” 5.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Plastiment Series” E.Non Corrosive Accelerating Admixture: 1.ASTM C 494, Type C 2.Acceptable Product: BASF "POZZUTEC 20” or “Masterset NC 534” 3.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “ACCELGUARD 80”, “ACCELGUARD NCA” or “ACCELGUARD 90” 4.Acceptable Product: W. R. Grace “Daraset” Series, “Polarset”, or “DCI” 5.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sikaset NC” or “Plastocrete 161 FL” or “Sika Rapid-1” Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-21 Cast-In-Place Concrete F.Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: 1.ASTM C 494, Type D 2.Acceptable Product: BASF “Masterset R 100” 3.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “EUCON RETARDER 75” or “EUCON DS” 4.Acceptable Product: W. R. Grace “Daratard 17” or “Recovery Series” 5.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Plastiment Series” G.Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: 1.ASTM C 494, Type E 2.Acceptable Product: BASF "Masterset FP 20” 3.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “ACCELGUARD 80” or “ACCELGUARD 90” 4.Acceptable Product: W. R. Grace “Libricon NCA” 5.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sikaset NC” or “Plastocrete 161 FL” H.Mid-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 1.ASTM C 494, Type A 2.Acceptable Product: BASF “MasterPolyheed Series” 3.Acceptable Product: W. R. Grace “Daracem” or “Mira” 4.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sikaplast Series” or “Sikament Series” 5.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company: “Eucon MR” or “Eucon MRX” I.High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 1.ASTM C 494, Type F 2.Acceptable Product: BASF "PS 1466” or “MasterGlenium Series” 3.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “EUCON 37” or “PLASTOL SERIES” 4.Acceptable Product: W. R. Grace “Daracem” or “ADVA” Series 5.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Viscocrete Series” or “Sikament Series” J.High-Range Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: 1.ASTM C 494, Type G 2.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “EUCON 537” 3.Acceptable Product: W. R. Grace “Daracem Series” or “Adva Series” 4. K.Viscosity Modifying Admixture (VMA) for Self-Consolidating Concrete (SCC): 1.Acceptable Product: BASF “MasterMatrix VMA Series”” 2.Acceptable Product: W.R. Grace “V-MAR3” Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-22 Cast-In-Place Concrete 3.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “EUCON ABS” or “EUCON WO” or “Visctrol” 4.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sika Stabilizer Series” L.Corrosion Inhibiting Admixtures: 1.Calcium Nitrite Based: ASTM C 494, Type C, 30% + 2% solution a)Acceptable Product: W.R. Grace “DCI or DCI-S’ b)Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “EUCON CIA” c)Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sika CNI” 2.Amine Carboxylate Based: ASTM C 1582, which includes ASTM C-494 amine carboxylate a)Acceptable Product: Cortec Corporation “MCI 2005”, “MCI 2005 NS”, ”MCI 2006” or “MCI 2006 NS” 3.Amino Alcohol Based: a)Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sika FerroGard 901” M.Shrinkage Reducing Admixtures: 1.ASTM C 157 2.Acceptable Product: W.R. Grace “Eclipse 4500” (for use with air- entrained concrete exposed to freeze/thaw), or “Eclipse Floor 200” 3.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “EUCON SRA” or “Conex” 2.4 ADHESIVES A.Bonding Agent for Cured Concrete (existing concrete damp or dry, at least 28 days old, no surface water): 1.ASTM C 881 Type I and IV, Grade 3, Class B and C. 2.Acceptable Product: BASF "CONCRESIVE PASTE (LPL)", Class C Only 3.Acceptable Product: BASF “CONCRESIVE LIQUID (LPL)”, Class C Only for bonding topping 4.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “EUCO #452 Epoxy System” 5.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “DURALCRETE LV Series” 6.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “FLEXOCRETE System” for bonding topping B.Bonding Agent for Uncured Concrete: (existing concrete damp or dry, less than 28 days old, no surface water): 1.ASTM C 881, Type II and V, Grade 2, Class B and C. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-23 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “DURALCRETE MV System” 3.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod” C.Anti-Corrosive Epoxy Cementitious Bonding Compound and Corrosion Protection of Reinforcement (bonding agent for existing concrete saturated surface dry, no surface water): This adhesive shall be a water-based epoxy/cementitious compound for adhesion and corrosion protection of reinforcing members (20 hour maximum open time). 1.Acceptable Products: Euclid Chemical Company “DURALPREP AC” 2.Acceptable Products: Sika Corporation “ARMATEC 110" D.Adhesive Between Cured Concrete Elements: 1.ASTM C 881 Type I and IV, Grade 3, Class B and C 2.Acceptable Product Sika Corporation “Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel (1:1 Mix Ratio) 2.5 CURING COMPOUNDS AND SEALERS A.Interaction with finishes: 1.See architectural Drawings for finish material applied over concrete. 2.Use only curing and sealer compounds that are compatible with finish material. 3.Manufacturer's certification is required. 4.Where finish material is liquid rubberized asphalt, use only strippable type curing compound. B.Curing and Sealing Compound (VOC Compliant, 350 g/l) : 1.ASTM C1315, Type I, Class A and ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A or B 2.Water based acrylic, clear, 25% solids curing and sealing compound. 3.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company "Super Diamond Clear VOX" 4.Acceptable Product: Dayton Superior “Cure & Seal J22WB) 5.Acceptable Product: BASF (Sonneborn) “Kure 1315” 6.Acceptable Product: W.R. Meadows “VOCOMP-25” 7.Acceptable Product: Creteseal “CS2000” C.Curing Compound-Dissipating/Strippable (VOC Compliant, 350 g/l): 1.ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A or B 2.Water based resin, clear curing compound that begins to dissipate when exposed to UV light and traffic. 3.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “Kurez DR VOX” (Dissipating) or “Kurez RC” in combination with “Kurez RC-Off” (Strippable) Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-24 Cast-In-Place Concrete 4.Acceptable Product: Dayton Superior “Clear Resin Cure J11W" 5.Acceptable Product: W.R. Meadows: “1100 Clear” 2.6 SEALERS A.Surface Sealer: 1.ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A or B 2.Water based acrylic sealing compound. 3.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “DIAMOND CLEAR VOX” 4.Acceptable Product: Dayton Superior “Cure & Seal 309 EF” 5.Acceptable Product: BASF ”MasterKure CC 200WB” 6.Acceptable Product: “W.R. Meadows “VOCOMP 20” B.Liquid Densifier/Sealer: 1.The liquid densifier compound shall be a silicate based compound that penetrates and chemically hardens concrete surfaces. 2.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “Euco Diamond Hard” 3.Acceptable Product: Dayton Superior “Densifier J13” 4.Acceptable Product: BASF ”MasterKure HD 200WB” 5.Acceptable Product: W.R. Meadows “Liqui-Hard” 2.7 DRY SHAKE HARDENERS A.Mineral Aggregate Hardener: 1.The specified mineral aggregate hardener shall be formulated, processed and packaged under stringent quality control at the manufacturer's owned and controlled factory. The hardener shall be a factory-blended mixture of specially processed graded mineral aggregate, selected Portland cement and necessary plasticizing agents 2.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company, "Surflex" to be used with “Kurez DR VOX” 3.Acceptable Product: BASF, ”MasterTop 100 to be used with “Masterkure CC 200WB” 4.Acceptable Product: L&M Construction Chemicals “Ferrocon FF” to be used with “Dress & Seal WB 30” B.Non-Oxidizing Metallic Hardener: 1.The specified non-oxidizing metallic floor hardener shall be formulated, processed and packaged under stringent quality control at the manufacturer’s owned and controlled factory. The hardener shall be a mixture of specially processed non-rusting aggregate, selected Portland Cement and necessary plasticizing agents. 2.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company, “Diamond-Plate” to be used with “Kurez DR VOX” 3.Acceptable Product: BASF ”MasterTop 210COR” to be used with “MasterKure CC 200WB” Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-25 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE PRODUCTS A.Nonshrink Grout 1.Provide pre-packaged natural aggregate grout, high-precision, nonshrink, ready-to-use, complying with the following requirements: a)See General Notes for grout minimum compressive strength. b)Grout shall conform to ASTM C 1107 2.All material used including water, mixer and pre-packaged grout must be initially at the 45°F (7°C) and 90°F (32°C ) limits when testing is initiated. 3.Acceptable Product: BASF "MASTERFLOW 928" 4.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “HI-FLOW GROUT” 5.Acceptable Product: Five Star Products “Five Star Grout” 6.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sikagrout 328” B.Self-Leveling Concrete Topping - Underlayment for Interior Applications: 1.Use self-leveling underlayment concrete formulated to level concrete floors without shrinking, cracking or spalling, and capable of being placed from feathered edge to 1" (25mm) thickness without aggregate in one pour. If greater than 1" (25mm) thickness is required, aggregate shall be used in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Appropriate primer shall be utilized for all underlayment applications. 2.Acceptable Product: Ardex Engineered Cements "ARDEX K-15" 3.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “Flo-Top or Super Flo- Top” 4.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sika Level Series” 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A.Evaporation Retarder: 1.Acceptable Product: BASF "Masterkure ER50” 2.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “Eucobar” 3.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sika Film” B.Moisture-Retaining Covers: Conforming to ASTM C171. A naturally colored, non-woven polypropylene fabric with a 4-mil non-perforated reflective (white) polyethylene coating containing stabilizers to resist degradation from ultraviolet light. Fabric shall exhibit low permeability and high moisture retention. 1.Hydracure S-16 by PNA Construction Technologies, Inc., Matthews, NC 2.Transguard 4000 by Reef Industries (Armorlon Division), Incorporated, Houston TX C.Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-26 Cast-In-Place Concrete D.Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) used as Fill - Geofoam 1.Material: Rigid, closed cell polystyrene blocks formed by expansion of polystyrene beads by steam. 2.Comply with the requirements of ASTM D 6817 3.Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, provide the following types of EPS: a)Fill between a lower slab and a raised slab area: EPS12 -2.2 psi (15 kPa) compressive resistance minimum at 1% deformation, 10 psi (70 kPa) flexural strength minimum b)Typical below interior floor slabs supported on grade (soil fill over EPS fill) or directly on EPS fill: EPS15 - 3.6 psi (25 kPa) compressive resistance minimum at 1% deformation, 25 psi (170 kPa) flexural strength minimum c)Fill below exterior floor slabs or slabs with truck loading: EPS19 - 5.8 psi (40 kPa) compressive resistance minimum at 1% deformation, 30 psi (200 kPa) flexural strength minimum 4.Thickness as indicated on Drawings. 5.Execution: Conform to manufacturer’s instructions regarding preparation, installation and protection 6.Gripper plates shall be used as needed to restrain EPS from moving laterally in multi-layer applications 7.Contractor shall sequence soil or concrete topping placement to avoid EPS block shift or flotation. 8.Submit the following for review: a)Manufacturer’s product literature including physical properties in compliance with ASTM D 6817 and type specified b)10 year physical property warranty c)Proposed plan layout of fill blocks showing gaps between blocks where required for stabilizing and/or load bearing reinforced concrete ribs as shown on drawings, in details or in notes. 9.Submit the following for record: a)Summary of test compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties b)Product Certificates showing evidence of third party quality control 10.Acceptable product: Foam Control EPS Geofoam by AFM Corporation, Lakeville, MN 11.Acceptable product: EPS Geofoam by Styrotech, Brooklyn Park, MN 12.Acceptable product: EPS Geofoam by Universal Foam Products, Hunt Valley, MD 13.Acceptable product: EPS Geofoam by Dyplast Products, Miami, FL E.Vapor Retarder: See Division 7, Thermal and Moisture Protection 1.Minimum 15-mil thick polyolefin geomembrane Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-27 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2.Manufactured with prime virgin resins 3.Water Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, meets or exceeds Class A 4.Water Vapor Transmission Rate: ASTM E 96, 0.008 gr./ft2/hr. (0.086 gr./m²/hr) or lower 5.Permeance Rating: ASTM E 96, 0.03 Perms or lower for new material and after conditioning tests in accordance with applicable sections of ASTM E 154 6.Puncture Resistance: ASTM E 1745,minimum 2400 grams 7.Tensile Strength: ASTM E 1745, minimum 45.0 lbs./in (8.0 kg/cm). 8.Acceptable product: W.R.Grace, “Florprufe 120” 9.Acceptable product: W. R. Meadows, “Perminator” 10.Acceptable product: Stego Industry LLC, “Stego Wrap” 11.Acceptable product: Raven Industries, “Raven Vapor Block 15”. F.Non-Slip Aggregate: 1.Abrasive aggregate shall be composed of an aluminum oxide abrasive bonded by a vitreous ceramic material. Use hard, homogeneous, non- glazing, rustproof aggregate which is unaffected by moisture or cleaning compounds. 2.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “NON-SLIP AGGREGATE” 3.Acceptable Product: North Company “Alundum” 4.Acceptable Product: Anti-Hydro International “A-H A-2 Emery Shake-On” or “A-H Alox” 2.10 CONCRETE REPAIR MATERIALS A.Polymer Repair Mortar 1.The following patching mortars may be used when color match of the adjacent concrete is not required. Prior approval by the Design Professionals is required. 2.Acceptable Products (Horizontal Repairs): Euclid Chemical Company “Thin Top Supreme or Tammspatch II” (for 1/16” (2mm) to 3/8” (10mm) thickness), or “Concrete Top Supreme” (for 3/8” (10mm) to 2” (50mm) thickness). 3.Acceptable Products (Horizontal Repairs): Sika Corporation “Sikatop 121 Plus” or "Sikatop 122 Plus”. 4.Acceptable Products (Vertical and Overhead Repairs): Euclid Chemical Company “Verticoat”, “Verticoat Supreme”, or “Duraltop Gel” 5.Acceptable Products (Vertical and Overhead Repairs): Sika Corporation, “Sikatop 123 Plus”. 6.Acceptable Products (Horizontal, Vertical and Overhead Repairs): BASF, “EMACO 100” B.High Strength Flowing Repair Mortar Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-28 Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.For forming and pouring structural members, or large horizontal repairs, provide the flowable one-part, high strength microsilica modified repair mortar with 3/8” (10mm) aggregate. 2.The product shall achieve 9000 psi (62MPa) @ 28-days at a 9-inch (225mm) slump. 3.Prior approval by the Design Professionals is required for cold weather applications 4.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “Eucocrete” 5.Acceptable Product: BASF “EMACO S” Series 6.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sika Repair 211 SCC Plus” C.Repair Topping 1.Latex and microsilica modified cementitious mortar topping, which meets or exceeds the bond strength requirements of ASTM C 1059. 2.Resistance to wear: The finished topping shall show a depth of wear of 0.2 mm (0.0079”) or less when tested at 28 days with a Chaplin Abrasion Tester. 3.Acceptable Products: Euclid Chemical Company, “Thin-Top Supreme or Tammspatch II” 4.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sika Repair 211 SC Plus” D.Epoxy Injection: 1.ASTM C881, moisture insensitive maximum viscosity 350 cps at 77°F (25°C). 2.Acceptable Product: BASF “Concresive 1380” 3.Acceptable Product: Euclid Chemical Company “Eucopoxy Injection Resin” 4.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “Sikadur 35, LV, LPL” E.Pressure-Injected Foam Resin: 1.Acceptable Product: DeNeef “HA Sealform” 2.Acceptable Product: 3M “ScotchSeal 5600” 3.Acceptable Product: Sika Corporation “SikaFix HH” F.Semi Rigid Epoxy: 1.Acceptable Product: METZGER/McGUIRE “MM-80 Semi Rigid Epoxy Joint Filler” G.Methyl Methacrylate (MMA) 1.Acceptable Product: Transpo Industries, Inc. “T-78 Methyl Methacrylate Polymer Crack Healer/Sealer” H.Sealant: 1.Silicone or Polyurethane Sealant (as selected based on project requirements such as loading, traffic, bond, coatings, etc.). Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-29 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2.Joint to be routed and cleaned per manufacturer’s written directions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Subgrade: 1.Dampen subgrades not covered with membrane by sprinkling immediately before placing concrete. a)Omit when subgrade is already damp. 2.Do not place on water-saturated subgrade unless placing can be done without damage to subgrade (surface is stable) and loading the subgrade does not drive free water to the surface. 3.Do not place concrete on frozen ground. B.Forms: 1.Coordinate with Section 031000 Concrete Formwork. 2.Remove dirt, sawdust, nails and other foreign material from formed space. 3.Dampen wood forms by sprinkling immediately before placing. 4.Cool metal forms by sprinkling immediately before placing. C.Concrete Accessories: 1.Coordinate with Section 031000 Concrete Formwork. D.Dewatering: 1.Remove water from concrete formwork. 2.Divert any flowing water to sump and remove by pumping. 3.Refer to Division 1 for additional dewatering requirements. E.Vapor Retarder Placement: See Division 7, Thermal and Moisture Protection. 1.Vapor retarder installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E 1643. 2.Place vapor retarder under slabs-on-grade in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. 3.Joints: Lap 6" (150mm) minimum and seal with manufacturer’s recommended mastic or pressure-sensitive tape. 4.Prevent damage to moisture barrier. 5.If moisture barrier is damaged, place a piece of moisture barrier over damaged area (6" (150mm) larger all around) and tape in place with type of tape recommended by moisture barrier manufacturer. 6.Seal laps and intersections of walls with compatible trowel mastic or pressure-sensitive sealing tape. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-30 Cast-In-Place Concrete 7.Seal around pipes and other penetrations with compatible trowel mastic. 8.The vapor barrier must be approved prior to concrete placement. 3.2 JOINTS IN CONCRETE A.Locate construction and contraction joints as indicated on Drawings and on approved joint location submittal. 1.Do not use contraction joints in framed floors or composite slabs. 2.Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Design Professionals. 3.Coordinate location of construction and contraction joints with locations of joints in finish materials where they exist. a)Construction and contraction joints in slabs or slab on grade with terrazzo finish must be reviewed and approved by the Design Professionals. 4.Maximum joint spacing is as indicated on Drawings. B.Construction Joints: 1.Construction joints shall be located within the central third of the span. Any concrete spilling over or through the bulkhead shall be removed at the completion of the pour. All surfaces of the concrete shall have reinforcing extending through the joint. 2.Horizontal Joints: Horizontal construction joints other than those shown on the Drawings will not be permitted unless approved by the Architect. 3.Joint Preparation: Forms shall be removed in time to permit roughening of construction joints of structural members by chipping and wire brushing to remove all loose and foreign material and roughen as indicated on the Drawings. The existing concrete at joints shall either be (a) dampened to the point that the surface is saturated, but all standing water has been removed, promptly followed by placement and vibration of fresh concrete, or (b) not required to be dampened, with one of the specified bonding compounds applied as appropriate for the joint condition, following manufacturer recommendations, with placement and vibration of fresh concrete to follow while the epoxy bonding agent is still tacky. Joints without epoxy bonding agent require fresh concrete with slump 7 inches (180mm) or greater at horizontal joints, and fresh concrete confined to maintain pressure against the joint at vertical joints. Where such conditions are not present, or where applying water to dampen the surface is impractical, use epoxy bonding agent suitable for dry surfaces C.Isolation Joints: 1.Interrupt structural continuity resulting from bond, reinforcement or keyway at points of contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls and other locations, as indicated. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-31 Cast-In-Place Concrete D.Contraction Joints in Non-Structural Floor Slabs-on-Grade: 1.Maximum slab area controlled by jointing is 400 square feet (35 square meters). 2.Space joints at 36 times slab thickness unless a smaller spacing is indicated on the Drawings, located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third bays). 3.Contraction joints can be provided by sawcuts, formed joints or appropriately detailed construction joints. 4.Sawcuts shall be made as soon as possible after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate. The Soff-Cut saw shall be used to a depth of ¼ of slab thickness immediately after final finishing. Conventional saw shall be used as soon as possible after final finish without raveling to a depth as indicated on the Drawings. 5.Where contraction joints coincide with construction joints, detail joint as indicated on Drawings. E.Joint Fillers: Coordinate with Section 032000 Concrete Reinforcement and Embedded Assemblies and Division 7 requirements. 3.3 MIXING A.Measurement of Materials: Conforming to ASTM C 94 B.Mixing: All concrete shall be ready-mixed conforming to ASTM C 94 except as follows: 1.Provide concrete materials, proportions and properties as herein specified in lieu of ASTM C 94. 2.Water, beyond that required by the mix design, shall not be added at the Project site. Addition of water at the Project site shall be made only in the presence of the Owner's Testing Agency. 3.Furnish delivery ticket with each load of concrete delivered to the site to the Contractor conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 94. C.High range water reducing agents (superplasticizer), if added at the batch plant, may be added again at the Project site. 1.If superplasticizers are added at the batch plant, the concrete mix design must account for the delivery time, workability, finishability, and setting time required on the jobsite for proper placing and finishing procedures. 2.If the superplasticizer is redosed at the jobsite in air entrained concrete, air content must be checked after mixing. D.Discharge of the concrete shall be completed within 1-1/2 hours or before the drum has revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first, after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregates or the introduction of the cement to the aggregates. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-32 Cast-In-Place Concrete 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A.Prior to Concrete Placement: 1.Mechanical vibrators are required and must be available for placing concrete. 2.Remove debris from space to be occupied with concrete. 3.Notify Design Professionals and Owner’s Testing Agency 48 hours prior to starting concrete placement. 4.Approved mix designs must be maintained on file in Contractor's Field Office. 5.Reinforcement and accessories shall be in proper locations, clean, free of loose scale, dirt or other foreign coatings that may reduce bond to concrete, and in accordance with Section 032000 and Drawings. 6.Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before pouring concrete. 7.Do not place concrete having a slump outside of allowable slump range. 8.Place concrete before initial set has occurred, but in no event after it has been discharged from the mixer more than 30 minutes. All concrete shall be placed upon clean, damp surfaces, free from puddled water, or upon properly consolidated fills or upon Controlled Low-Strength Material with a strength between 50 and 1200 psi. Placement upon soft mud or dry earth is not permitted. 9.Unless adequate protection is provided, concrete shall not be placed during rain. 10.Rain water shall not be allowed to increase mixing water or to damage the surface finish. 11.At surfaces left exposed to view, do not use equipment in placing and finishing concrete that contain aluminum in the finishing edges that come in contact with the concrete surface. 12.Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas. 13.Place vapor retarder directly below slabs on grade as specified in Contract Documents. B.For Conduits and Pipes Embedded in Concrete: 1.For concrete slab, wall, beam or column, conform to requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 6. For variations from these requirements, submit a written request for Design Professionals' review and response. 2.Conduits and pipes shall not be embedded in concrete slabs on steel deck without approval of Design Professional. 3.Provide sleeves for pipes passing vertically through concrete. 4.Do not embed aluminum materials. 5.Do not cut, bend or displace the reinforcement to facilitate placement of embedded pipes and conduits. C.Pumping: Pumping shall be done in strict accordance with ACI 304.2R. D.Placing Concrete in Forms: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-33 Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.Clean and prepare forms as specified in Section 031000/Concrete Formwork. 2.Place concrete continuously without interruption between predetermined construction and contraction joints in walls. 3.Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24” (600mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 4.Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 5.Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. a)Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309R. 6.Do not use vibrators to move fresh concrete laterally inside forms from discharge point; shift discharge point as needed. 7.Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. 8.Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6" (150mm) into preceding layer. 9.Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. 10.At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. 11.Do not vibrate Self-Consolidating Concrete (SCC). E.Placing Concrete Slabs: 1.Place concrete continuously without interruption between predetermined construction and contraction joints in floors. a)Place slabs on grade by the long strip cast method. Refer to ACI 302.1R for recommended methods of placement. 2.Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section. 3.Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners. 4.Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. a)Use highway straight edges, bullfloats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. b)Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 5.Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement. 6.Do not place materials on slabs or impose loads during period of setting. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-34 Cast-In-Place Concrete F.Placing Concrete on Steel Decks 1.Exercise care during concrete placement on steel decks to prevent concentrated loads or high pile-ups of concrete and to avoid impacts caused by dumping or dropping of concrete on steel decks. 2.Do not use buggies on unprotected areas of deck. If buggies are used to place concrete, furnish and install planked runways to protect deck from damage. G.Placing Concrete at Construction Joints: 1.To secure full bond at construction joints, surfaces to receive concrete in a subsequent placement shall be left in a roughened state or intentionally roughened by raking while plastic or brushing and chipping immediately after removal. 2.Before new concrete is placed in contact, surfaces of hardened concrete already placed shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign materials and laitance. 3.At hardened concrete at joints where no bonding agents are used, dampen concrete to achieve a saturated surface dry condition. Leave no standing water. Place and vibrate concrete (slump 7 inches (180mm) or greater) against horizontal joints. Place and vibrate flowing concrete (slump 8 to 10 inches (200 to 250mm)) while maintaining pressure against vertical joints by confinement. 4.At hardened concrete with joints not meeting conditions required for no bonding agents, apply appropriate specified bonding agent for conditions present including age and moisture per manufacturer’s specifications. Place new concrete while the bonding agent is still tacky. H.Floor Topping Slabs: 1.Place concrete topping slab to required lines and levels. 2.Minimum topping slab thickness is 2” (50mm). 3.Place dividers, edge strips and other items to be cast in place. 4.At all topping slabs, remove deleterious material before placing topping slab. 5.At topping slabs placed directly against base slab, remove deleterious material and dampen base slab with water immediately before placing concrete. Leave no standing water. 6.Unless noted as a “bonded” topping slab on the Drawings, topping slabs thinner than 4” (100mm) should be placed directly against dampened base slab with no bonding agent. Topping slabs 4” (100mm) or thicker should be placed on bond breaker consisting of two sheets of plastic film. 7.Where noted on Drawings as a “bonded” topping slab, broom/vacuum clean unsealed surfaces or wire brush sealed or troweled surfaces to expose bare rough surface. Then place approved bonding grout or epoxy adhesive on the base slab per manufacturer’s instructions. 8.The topping mix shall have a maximum water/cement ratio of 0.45. 9.The topping mix shall have a maximum shrinkage of 0.04% in 28 days. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-35 Cast-In-Place Concrete 10.The topping mix shall contain a minimum of 5 lbs. per cubic yard (2.43 kg/m3) of macro synthetic fibers and achieve an Average Residual Strength (ARS) of 200 psi (1.4MPa) unless a higher dosage or ARS is noted on the plans. 11.The topping slab shall be moist cured for a minimum of 36 hours after placement. 12.The topping slab shall have contraction joints located to match any joints in the base slab, to eliminate restraint conditions such as re-entrant corners and to isolate the slab from columns, walls, etc. and to limit the maximum distance between joints to 15 feet (4570mm). I.Hot-Weather Placement: 1.Hot weather is defined as air temperature which exceeds 90°F (32°C) or any combination of high temperature, low humidity and/or high wind velocity which causes a rate of evaporation in excess of 0.2 pounds per square feet per hour (1.0 kg/m² per hour) as determined by ACI 305R. 2.When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305R and as specified in this section. 3.Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90°F. 4.Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. 5.Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 6.When concrete placement will occur late in the day and reinforcing steel will be heated by the sun, cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap so that steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 7.When concrete operations must be performed in direct sun, wind, high temperatures, low relative humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, the specified evaporation retarder shall be applied one or more times during the finishing operation to prevent plastic cracking. 3.5 CONCRETE FINISHES A.General: 1.Comply with recommendations for concrete finishing established by ACI 302.1R and ACI 304R. 2.Comply with dimensional tolerance limitations given by ACI 117. 3.For shored floor or slab on grade construction: Floor flatness/floor levelness tolerance compliance testing is to be performed prior to the removal of shores and forms but not later than 72 hours of concrete placement by Owner’s Testing Agency. 4.See architectural Drawings for locations of the various finishes listed below. 5.Comply with the specified overall SOFF and SOFL values listed below: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-36 Cast-In-Place Concrete a)The specified overall area shall be each individual floor. b)FF/FL shall be measured in accordance with ASTM E 1155. c)The specified minimum local values of MLFF/MLFL shall be 3/5 of the SOFF/SOFL values listed below. d)If an individual test section measures less than either of the specified minimum local MLFF/ MLFL numbers, that section may be rejected and remedial measures may be required as specified in CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS. e)If the composite value of the test surface measures less than either of the specified overall SOFF/SOFL numbers, then the entire slab may be rejected and remedial measures may be required. f)FL numbers shall not apply to unshored slabs or shored slabs with camber. B.Finish for monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, as indicated on architectural Drawings: 1.Scratch Finish. a)Finish surface to overall value of SOFF=20 and SOFL=15. b)Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. c)After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. C.Finish for monolithic slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, sand-bed terrazzo as indicated on architectural Drawings: 1.Float Finish. a)After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. b)Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. c)Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. d)Finish surfaces to overall value of SOFF=20 and SOFL=15. e)Cut down high spots and fill low spots. f)Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. g)Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. D.Finishes for Pedestrian Sidewalks and Ramps, Exterior Platforms, Steps, as indicated on architectural Drawings: 1.Sidewalks and Curbs: Light-to-medium broom finish applied with fiber- bristle broom perpendicular to direction of main traffic route immediately after float finishing. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-37 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2.Ramps: Scored finish as applied perpendicular to direction of main traffic route immediately after float finishing. 3.Finish surface to overall value of SOFF=20 and SOFL=15. 4.Texture shall be approved by the Design Professionals from sample panels. E.Finish for interior floor slab surfaces exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile on thick-set mortar, paint or another thin film-finish coating system, as indicated on architectural Drawings: 1.Trowel Finish. a)After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power- driven trowel. b)Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. c)The final hand-troweling operation shall result in a smooth surface, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance. d)Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. 2.Finish surface to overall value of SOFF=25 and SOFL=20. 3.Floor Slopes: Where drains occur, slope floor slabs uniformly to drains, maintaining scheduled slab thickness. 4.Floor Edges at Expansion Joints: Tool edges minimum 3/8" (10mm). 5.Defects: Remove defects of sufficient magnitude to show through floor covering by grinding. 6.Floor Hardener: Use only where scheduled and in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 7.Dry Cement: Shall not be used during finishing. F.Finish for thin set ceramic tile or thin set epoxy terrazzo, as indicated on architectural Drawings: 1.Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: a)Apply a trowel finish as specified. b)Immediately follow by slightly scarifying the surface with a fine broom. 2.Finish surface to overall value of SOFF=35 and SOFL=25. G.Finishes for Parking Garage Deck, Ramps, Loading Docks: 1.Highway straight edge immediately after screeding concrete. 2.Finish surface to overall values of SOFF=20 and SOFL=15. 3.For Slabs Not Receiving Deck Coating: Medium broom finish with ridges not to exceed 1/8" (3mm) in height. Texture shall be as approved by the Design Professionals from sample panels. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-38 Cast-In-Place Concrete 4.For Slabs Scheduled to Receive Deck Coating: Smooth floated finish which must be verified with coating manufacturer before finishing the slab. a)Coordinate with deck coating specified in Division 7. 5.Auto Ramps: Rough texture applied perpendicular to direction of traffic. Texture shall be as approved by the Design Professionals from sample panels. H.Tolerances at Slab Discontinuities 1.Within 2 ft (600mm) of slab boundaries, construction joints, isolation joints, block-outs, penetrations or other similar discontinuities, where required for travel paths, installation of finishes and partitions, or any other requirements indicated in the Contract Documents, the following equivalent straightedge tolerances shall apply: a)Specified local MLFF = 12, use ¼” (6mm) over 4 ft (1200mm), no offset greater than 1/16” (2mm) b)Specified local MLFF = 15, use 1/8” (3mm) over 4 ft (1200mm), no offset greater than 1/32” (0.8mm) I.Dry Shake Finish: 1.Non-slip aggregate where indicated on Drawings. 2.Non-oxidizing metallic hardener on loading docks at a rate of 1.5 lbs. per sq. ft. (7.3 kg/m²) and in other locations so noted on the Drawings. 3.Mineral aggregate hardener at a rate of 1.2 lbs. per sq. ft. (5.8 kg/m²) where noted on the Drawings. 4.Final finish type, method and tolerance as applicable by location and use. 5.Dry shake finish will be applied only where scheduled and in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the methods and procedures agreed upon at the pre-installation conference. J.Rough Formed Finish: 1.Acceptable for formed concrete surfaces not exposed-to-view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise indicated. 2.Concrete surface shall have texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4” (6mm) in height rubber down or chipped off. K.Smooth Formed Finish: 1.Required for formed concrete surfaces exposed to view, or scheduled to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or other similar system, as indicated on architectural Drawings: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-39 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2.Surface is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. 3.Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections completely. L.Smooth Rubbed Finish: 1."Smooth Rubbed" finish shall consist of a finish free of fins, joint marks smoothed off, blemishes removed and surfaces left smooth and unmarred. 2.Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, as indicated on architectural Drawings, which have received smooth form finish treatment not later than one day after form removal. 3.Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. a)Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. M.Grout-Cleaned Finish: 1.Provide grout-cleaned finish on scheduled concrete surfaces, as indicated on architectural Drawings, that have received smooth-formed finish treatment. 2.Combine one part Portland Cement to one and one-half parts fine sand by volume, and a 50:50 mixture of acrylic or styrene butadiene-based bonding admixture and water to form the consistency of thick paint. 3.Blend standard Portland Cement and white Portland Cement in amounts determined by trial patches so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. 4.Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and fill small holes. 5.Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. 6.Keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing. N.Unformed Surfaces: 1.At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. 2.Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 CURING AND PROTECTION A.Normal Conditions: 1.Protect concrete from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperature, and damage. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-40 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2.Concrete shall be kept continuously moist and above 50°F (10°C) for seven days (ASTM C 150 Type I cement) or for 10 days (ASTM C 150 Type II cement). High early strength concrete usage shall be maintained over 50o F (10°C) for three days. 3.Concrete and concrete patching materials shall be cured according to manufacturers published recommendations. 4.Begin curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface and finishing has been completed. 5.Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, or by combining these methods, as specified. a)Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as follows: i.Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). ii.Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. iii.Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. iv.Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. v.Use curing and sealing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to concrete. vi.Floors to receive covering shall be cleaned thoroughly using a power scrubber and industrial strength detergent. Hand-brooming and sweeping is not sufficient. vii.Strippable curing compound may be used in lieu of a moist curing method when approved by the Design Professionals. b)Provide moist curing by the following methods: i.Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. ii.Use continuous water-fog spray. iii.Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4” (100mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. c)Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows: i.Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-41 Cast-In-Place Concrete sides and ends lapped at least 3” (75mm) and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. (1)Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape 6.Cure slabs on grade, concrete toppings, concrete pour strips, supported slabs, walls and columns, not subject to conditions of hot or cold weather concreting, in accordance with ACI 308. 7.Cure surfaces exposed to deicing salts, brackish water, etc., such as loading dock slabs, parking garage slabs and ramps in accordance with ACI 308 recommendations for moist curing. 8.Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by leaving forms in place for the full curing period (equivalent to moist curing). a)If forms are removed prior to completion of full curing period, continue curing by methods specified above for Unformed Surfaces, as applicable. B.Cold-Weather Protection: 1.When concrete is placed under conditions of cold weather concreting (defined as a period when the mean daily temperature drops below 40°F (4°C) for more than 3 successive days), take additional precautions as specified in ACI 306R when placing, curing, monitoring and protecting the fresh concrete. C.Hot-Weather Protection: 1.When concrete is placed under conditions of hot weather concreting, provide extra protection of the concrete against excessive placement temperatures and excessive drying throughout the placing and curing operations with an evaporation retarder. a)Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. 2.Hot weather curing is required if hot weather conditions occur within a 24- hour period after completion of concrete placement. D.Floor surfaces, wherever indicated by weather conditions, shall be sprinkled during the interval between finishing operation and the start of curing to positively ensure against the possibility of surface drying. 3.7 CONCRETE REPAIRS A.Perform patching and repairs in accordance with ACI 301. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-42 Cast-In-Place Concrete B.Contractor shall submit patching and repair methods and materials for review by Design Professionals. C.When complete, all patches and repairs shall match color and texture of adjoining surfaces. D.At surfaces that are exposed to view, prepare test areas at inconspicuous locations for review by Design Professionals to verify repair color and texture match before proceeding with repair. E.Apply all patching and repair materials in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. F.Repairing Cracks In Formed and Unformed Surfaces: 1.Contractor shall notify Design Professionals of all cracks wider than 0.02” (0.50mm) and all cracks wider than 0.01” (0.25mm) that occur in a group of at least three cracks within twelve inches (300mm), in concrete. If Design Professionals deem repairs necessary, Contractor shall be responsible for repairing all such cracks per Design Professionals recommendation at no expense to the Owner. Repairs will generally require one or more of the following: Epoxy Injection, Semi-Rigid Epoxy, Pressure Injected Foam Resin, Methyl Methacrylate and/or Sealant with joint routed and cleaned. See Concrete Repair Materials section of this Specification for acceptable products G.Repairing Formed Surfaces 1.Immediately after stripping forms, patch all honeycombing, defective joints, voids, etc. before the concrete is thoroughly dry. 2.Remove all burrs, fins, and ridges before the concrete is thoroughly dry. 3.Remove stains from rust, grease and oils, from release agents, etc. 4.Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of the Design Professionals. a)Surface defects, include color and texture irregularities, cracks as defined above, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. b)Chip away defective areas, honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" (6mm) in any dimension and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1" (25mm) and saw-cut edges to prevent feather edging of fill material. 5.Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete. 6.Clean out form tie holes and fill with dry pack mortar or precast cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-43 Cast-In-Place Concrete 7.If honeycombing exposes reinforcement, chip to provide clear space at least 3/4" (20mm) wide all around steel to allow proper bond. H.Repairing Unformed Surfaces: 1.High and Low areas in concrete surfaces which are in excess of specified tolerances shall be leveled or ground-smooth. a)Correct high areas by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. b)Correct low areas by applying leveling material. Finish leveling material as specified in this section. 2.Repair surfaces containing defects that affect durability of concrete. a)Surface defects include crazing, cracks as defined above, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 3.Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" (25mm) in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. a)Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" (20mm) clearance all around. I.Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. 3.8 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF CONCRETE A.In accordance with ACI 301, except where otherwise specified. B.If, at any time during construction, the concrete resulting from the approved mix design deviates from Specification requirements for any reason, such as lack of workability, or insufficient strength, the Contractor shall have his laboratory verify the deficiency and modify the mix design, until the specified concrete is obtained. Modified mix to be submitted for approval per Part 1 - SUBMITTALS. 3.9 CORRECTIVE MEASURES A.Conflicts: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for errors of detailing, fabrication, and placement of reinforcement steel; placement of inserts and other embedded items; and the structural adequacy of all formwork. B.Compensation for Additional Services: Should additional work by Design Professionals such as design, documentation, meetings and/or site visits be required which are necessitated by failure of the Contractor to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents either developing corrective actions or reviewing corrective actions developed by others, the Contractor is responsible for paying for additional work performed by the Design Professionals Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.00 12/06/18 033000-44 Cast-In-Place Concrete at their standard firm-wide billing rates plus out-of-pocket expenses incurred at cost + 10%. Additional costs for testing and inspection by the Owner shall also be compensated by the Contractor. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 03 35 43 - 1 SECTION 03 35 43 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Polished concrete finishing. 2. Concrete for polished concrete, including concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, initial finishing, and curing is specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete not designated as polished concrete. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Design Reference Sample: Sample designated by Architect in the Contract Documents that reflects acceptable surface quality and appearance of polished concrete. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with polished concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete desig n mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Cast-in-place concrete subcontractor. e. Polished concrete finishing Subcontractor. 2. Review curing procedures, construction joints, concrete repair procedures, concrete finishing, and protection of polished concrete. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 03 35 43 - 2 B. Polishing Schedule: Submit plan showing polished concrete surfaces and schedule of polishing operations for each area of polished concrete before start of polishing operations. Include locations of all joints, including construction joints. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product requiring color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed color. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Sample Panels: After approval of verification sample and before casting concrete, produce field sample panels to demonstrate the approved range of selections made under Sample submittals. Produce a minimum of three sets of full - scale panels, approximately 48 by 48 inches (1200 by 1200 mm) minimum, to demonstrate the expected range of finish, color, and appearance variations. 1. Locate panels as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Maintain field sample panels during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 3. Demolish and remove field sample panels when directed. B. Mockups: Before casting concrete, build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, tolerances, and standard of workmanship. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Demonstrate curing, finishing, and protecting of polished concrete. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments for Polished Concrete Finish: Clear, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 03 35 43 - 3 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advanced Floor Products. b. ARDEX Americas. c. AWRC Corporation. d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. e. H&C Decorative Concrete Products; a brand of Sherwin-Williams Co. f. Laticrete International, Inc. g. MAPEI Corporation. h. Moxie International . i. NewLook International, Inc. j. Nox-Crete Products Group. k. PROSOCO, Inc. l. QuestMark. m. Vexcon Chemicals Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 POLISHING A. Polish: Level 3: High sheen, 800 grit. B. Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and prepared slabs to match accepted mockup. 1. Machine grind floor surfaces to receive polished finishes level and smooth. 2. Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment for polished con crete in polishing sequence and according to manufacturer's written instructions, allowing recommended drying time between successive coats. 3. Continue polishing with progressively finer-grit diamond polishing pads to gloss level, to match approved mockup. 4. Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing operations. 5. Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REINFORCED MASONRY 04 22 13 - 1 SECTION 04 22 13 - REINFORCED MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes grouted, reinforced masonry consisting of grout and reinforcing steel. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 20 00 "Concrete Reinforcement" for reinforcing steel. 2. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for concrete. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 PERFORMANCE AND PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING REQUIRMENTS A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28-days. Contractor shall determine the net-area compressive strength of masonry based on 1.4B or 1.4C. Mortar for unit masonry shall comply with ASTM C270. Contractor shall meet ASTM C270 requirements based on the Property or Performance Specification. B. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. a. Concrete Masonry Unit Test (Property and Performance Specification): For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REINFORCED MASONRY 04 22 13 - 2 b. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 109 for compressive strength. c. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780 for compressive strength. d. Grout Test (Compressive Strength) (Property and Performance Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019. C. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314. 1. Prism Test (Property and Performance Specification): For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C 1314. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Show fabrication and installation details Reinforcing Steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show bar schedules, bent bar diagrams and other arrangements as required for fabrication and placement. Show elevations of reinforced walls. C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of the following for compliance with requirements indicated: 1. Grout mixes complying with material and compressive strength requirements of ASTM C 476 for fine grout. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients and design slump. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements b. Include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REINFORCED MASONRY 04 22 13 - 3 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Test according to ASTM C 109 for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirements. D. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. E. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated. B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges, accepted for these characteristics, from single source manufacturer for each product required. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. D. Masonry Standard: Comply with the Florida Building Code, 2010 Edition and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REINFORCED MASONRY 04 22 13 - 4 D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REINFORCED MASONRY 04 22 13 - 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Refer to Section 04 22 00 “Concrete Unit Masonry” for masonry materials and accessories and grout materials not included in this section. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 3750 psi. 2. Density Classification: Medium weight. B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces, matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for corners, jambs, sashes, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions. 2.3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS A. General: Provide one of the following: 1. Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color, texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by the same method used for concrete masonry units. 2. Provide prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. 3. Provide either of above at Contractor's option or provide precast or formed-in- place concrete lintels complying with requirements in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in- Place Concrete." 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold- weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REINFORCED MASONRY 04 22 13 - 6 D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144 F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404 for fine grout. G. Water: ASTM C 94. 2.5 REINFORCING STEEL A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Shop fabricate bent bars. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951. 1. Interior Walls: Mill galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon, ASTM A 153 with a coating thickness of 1.50 oz/sf steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units. C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder type with single pair of side rods. D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 1. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated. 2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 Proportion or Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REINFORCED MASONRY 04 22 13 - 7 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For all other masonry, use Type S. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 with a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi in 28 days. 1. Use fine grout with a slump of 8 to 10 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 2. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Refer to Section 04 22 00 “Concrete Unit Masonry” for general installation requirements of unit masonry. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening. D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, Cut masonry units with motor- driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units which are not in multiples of 8 inches. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Allow wet masonry units to dry prior to placement. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, reinforcement, movement- Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REINFORCED MASONRY 04 22 13 - 8 type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern: Unless otherwise indicated, lay masonry in one-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Interlock each course at corners. C. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. D. Place clean units while the mortar is soft and plastic. Remove and relay in fresh mortar any unit disturbed to the extent that initial bond is broken after initial positioning. E. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. F. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. G. Design, provide and install bracing that will assure stability of masonry during construction. Include provisions to project against wind or other natural or construction forces that might collapse or otherwise damage a partially or completely built masonry wall in a partially completed structure. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. 3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REINFORCED MASONRY 04 22 13 - 9 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated “L” and “T” sections. D. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO CONCRETE A. Anchor masonry to concrete where masonry abuts or faces concrete to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free or mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors at 16 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches. 3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials as shown on architectural drawings as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Install backer-rod in head joints and apply sealant after concrete masonry is complete. 3.9 LINTELS A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 24 inches are shown. Reinforce and grout lintels as shown on the Drawings. B. Install steel lintels where indicated. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REINFORCED MASONRY 04 22 13 - 10 3.10 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and as follows: 1. Place reinforcement and accessories as indicated. 2. Support and fasten reinforcement together to prevent displacement by construction loads or by placement of grout. 3. Clean reinforcement by removing mud, oil, or other materials that will reduce the bond at the time grout is placed. Reinforcement with tightly bound rust and/or mill scale is acceptable without cleaning provided the dimensions and weights, including heights of deformations, of the cleaned sample are not reduced. 4. Place all reinforcement prior to grouting. Tie vertical reinforcement to dowels at base of masonry with tie wire and thread masonry units over or around reinforcement. Support vertical reinforcement at 10 feet o.c. Extend vertical bars the specified lap length above top of pour and support bar in proper position at top of grout pour. Where vertical bars are placed after laying masonry, place wire loops extending into cells as masonry is laid and loosen before mortar sets. After insertion of bar, pull loops and bar to proper position and tie free ends. 5. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in grout. 6. Splice bars only where indicated. Provide 48 bar diameter lap splices, unless otherwise noted. Place bars in contact and wire tie. Bars spliced by noncontact lap splices shall be spaced 6 inches apart (maximum). 7. Bar placement tolerance is ±1/2 inches perpendicular to wall and 2 inches along wall. The clear distance between parallel bars that are not contact lap spliced shall be not less than 1 inch in walls and 1-1/2 inches in columns and pilasters. Maintain ¼ inch clear between bars and any face of masonry. C. Laying Masonry Walls: Construct masonry walls as follows: 1. Lay masonry units to top of grout pour prior to placing grout. Maximum grout pour height is 12 feet or top of bond beam, whichever is lower. 2. Construct wall such that vertical cells to be grouted are aligned and unobstructed openings for grout are 3 inches x 4 inches (minimum). Construct grout spaces free of mortar droppings, debris, loose aggregates, and any material deleterious to grout; or, clean the cells prior to grouting. Remove masonry protrusions extending 1/2 inch or more into cells to be grouted. 3. Do not lay masonry until grouted masonry below is cured. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REINFORCED MASONRY 04 22 13 - 11 4. In bond beams, use special units or modify regular units to allow placement of horizontal bars. Place small mesh, expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cells of non-reinforced vertical cells. D. Cleanouts: Provide cleanout openings at each vertical bar at the base of walls in which one of the following applies: 1. Grout pour height exceeds 5 feet. 2. Vertical bars are not otherwise fastened to prevent displacement. In this case, use cleanout to securely tie bar in position. 3. To remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from cell and top of support in cells to be grouted. Construct cleanout by cutting opening in face shell. Construct cleanouts with openings of sufficient size to permit removal of debris and tying of bars. Minimum size is 3 inches x 3 inches. After cleaning and inspection, close cleanout opening and brace closure to resist grout pressure. E. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 2. Place grout within 1 1/2 hours from introducing water in the mixture and prior to initial set. 3. Confine grout to the areas indicated. 4. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods are acceptable to the Architect. 5. Place grout continuously in lintels and bond beams. Grout walls in lifts not exceeding 5 feet or the elevation of top of bond beam, whichever is lower. 6. If grout pour during one day exceeds 5 feet, grout in lifts 5 feet each or less, with not less than 30 minutes and not more than 1 hour between lifts. 7. Terminate grout 1-1/2 inches below bond beam course or where cell above is to be grouted. 8. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. 9. Consolidate grout with mechanical vibrators having a 3/4 inch diameter head. Vibrate each lift and reconsolidate after 10 minutes. Grout pours 12 inches high or less may be puddled in lieu of mechanical vibration. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 REINFORCED MASONRY 04 22 13 - 12 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. B. Testing Frequency: Four grout cubes will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019 for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall surface. 3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged or that do not match the adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Remove all mortar fins larger than 1/2 inch within cells to be reinforced. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1 SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for ceiling-hung toilet compartments. 2. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions. 3. Steel framing and supports for overhead vertically retractable glass wall. 4. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 5. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 6. Metal ladders. 7. Alternating tread devices. 8. Metal bollards. 9. Wire rope parking garage guards. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete. 2. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing." 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for ceiling-hung toilet compartments. 2. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions. 3. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors and grilles. 4. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 2 5. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 6. Metal ladders. 7. Alternating tread devices. 8. Metal bollards. 9. Wire rope parking garage guards. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders and alternating tread devices, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders and alternating tread devices. B. Structural Performance of Alternating Tread Devices: Alternating tread devices shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Alternating Tread Device Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 3 C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. F. Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Rope: ASTM A 741. 1. Wire-Rope Fittings: Hot-dip galvanized-steel connectors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used. G. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches. 2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, Grade 33, with G90 coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness. 3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33; 0.0966-inch minimum thickness; unfinished] [coated with rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 4 C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers. D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. F. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. G. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594. H. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 91 23 Interior Painting," and Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings." B. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc - coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems in dicated. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC- Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 5 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidl y in place and to support indicated loads. J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 6 B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes recommended by partition manufacturer with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended by partition manufacturer. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings. D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated. 2.7 METAL LADDERS A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, except for elevator pit ladders. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. B. Steel Ladders: 1. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 3. Rungs: 3/4-inch- diameter steel bars. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout. 6. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. 7. Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer. 2.8 ALTERNATING TREAD DEVICES A. Alternating Tread Devices: Fabricate alternating tread devices of open-type construction with channel or plate stringers and pipe and tube railings unless otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and fittings for installation. 1. Tread depth shall be not less than 5 inches exclusive of nosing or less than 8- 1/2 inches including the nosing, tread width shall be not less than 7 inches, and riser height shall be not more than 9-1/2 inches. 2. Tread depth shall be not less than 8-1/2 inches exclusive of nosing or less than 10-1/2 inches including the nosing, tread width shall be not less than 7 inches, and riser height shall be not more than 8 inches. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 7 3. Fabricate from steel and assemble by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners. 4. Comply with applicable railing requirements in Section 05 52 13 "Pipe and Tube Railings." B. Prime steel alternating tread devices, includi ng treads, railings, brackets, and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer. 2.9 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. B. Prime bollards with primer specified in Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings." 2.10 WIRE ROPE PARKING GARAGE GUARDS A. Wire Rope Parking Garage Guards: 3/4-inch- diameter, zinc-coated steel wire ropes with wire rope fittings for securing to parking garage columns and walls and for tightening wire rope. 2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process. C. Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with zinc-rich primer unless primers specified in Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings" are indicated. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 8 E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for ceiling hung toilet partitions, operable partitions, overhead doors, and overhead grilles securely to, and rigidly brace from, building structure. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 9 3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. 3.4 INSTALLING WIRE ROPE PARKING GARAGE GUARDS A. Install wire rope parking garage guards at locations indicated, mounted at 18 and 27 inches above the parking surface. Secure wire ropes to parking garage columns and walls and tighten to remove slack. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 05 75 00 - 1 SECTION 05 75 00 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal base. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 70 00 "Decorative Metal" for decorative items made primarily from plate, bars, extrusions, tubes, castings, and other forms of metal, but which may include sheet metal components. 2. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for items made of formed metal for flashings and trim. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative formed metal items. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate installation of decorative formed metal with adjacent construction to ensure that wall assemblies, flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes of deterioration. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative formed metal. 1. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachment details. 2. Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative formed metal member, fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design, including mechanical finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6- inch- square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 05 75 00 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: For decorative formed metal elements that house items specified in other Sections. Show dimensions of housed items, including locations of housing penetrations and attachments, and necessary clearances. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For mirrorlike stainless-steel finish and copper antique finish to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative formed metal similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabricati on and installation. 1. Build mockups for the following types of decorative formed metal: a. Metal base. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver decorative formed metal products wrapped in protective coverings and strapped together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to finished surfaces. B. Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, beams, and other construction contiguous with decorative formed metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 05 75 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL A. General: Fabricate products from sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher- leveled standard of flatness. C. Brass Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS C26000 (cartridge brass, 70 percent copper). 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive recommended by metal fabricator that will fully bond metal to metal, will prevent telegraphing and oil-canning, and is compatible with substrate and noncombustible after curing. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble decorative formed metal items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for r eassembly and coordinated installation. B. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of decorative formed metal items with those of adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated. C. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends. D. Increase metal thickness as needed to provide surface flatness equivalent to stretcher-leveled standard of flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use. 2.4 METAL BASE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Fry Reglet Corporation. 2. Pittcon Industries. B. Form metal base from metal of type and thickness indicated below: 1. MB-1, Stainless-Steel Sheet: 0.050 inch. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 05 75 00 - 4 a. Finish: No. 8. 2. MB-2, Stainless-Steel Sheet: 0.050 inch. a. Finish: No. 8. 3. MB-3, Brass Sheet: 0.040 inch. a. Finish: Antiqued Fine-Matte finish, lacquered. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where possible. After fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface blemishes to match sheet finish. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated. D. Finish items after assembly. E. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are withi n the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. C. Mirrorlike Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No. 8 finish. D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 2.7 COPPER-ALLOY FINISHES A. Fine-Matte Antique Finish, Lacquered: M42-O6x (Mechanical Finish: nondirectional finish, fine matte; Coating: clear, organic, air dried, as specified below). Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL 05 75 00 - 5 1. Clear, Organic Coating: Lacquer specified for copper alloys, applied by air spray in two coats per manufacturer's written instructions, with interim drying, to a total thickness of 1 mil. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of decorative formed metal. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place decorative formed metal items level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative formed metal. 1. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required. B. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths. B. Clean copper alloys according to metal finisher's written instructions in a m anner that leaves an undamaged and uniform finish matching approved Sample. C. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of decorative formed metal items from damage during construction period. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 1 SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking. 2. Wood furring. 3. Plywood backing panels. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 2. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 2 having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent. 2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qu alified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841 C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 3 D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. F. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry used within the building envelope. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Furring. B. Dimension Lumber Items: Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species. C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. D. For blocking used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure- preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 4 C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as appropriate for the substrate. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. C. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide blocking as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. G. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 5 B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 1 SECTION 06 41 16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic- laminate-clad architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show large-scale details. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic- laminate architectural cabinets. 5. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Plastic Laminates: 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 2 a. Provide one sample applied to core material with specified edge material applied to one edge. 2. Thermoset Decorative Panels: 8 by 10 inches, for each color, pattern, and surface finish. a. Provide edge banding on one edge. 3. Exposed Cabinet Hardware and Accessories: One full -size unit for each type and finish. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. B. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Manufacturer's Certification: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical architectural cabinets as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 3 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork and installation complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced qualit y standard. B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium. C. Type of Construction: Frameless. D. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay. E. Plastic Glazing: Tinted Transparent acrylic sheet; ASTM D4802, Finish 1 (smooth or polished). 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated. 2. Nominal Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 3. Color: As indicated. 4. Combustibility Class: CC2. 5. Locations: Transaction tops and shelves. F. PL, High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard. 1. Products: As scheduled. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 4 G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 3. Edges: PVC tape, 0.018-inch minimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. 4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. H. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inch minimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. b. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. c. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. I. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. J. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints. K. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations. 2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdicti on and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 5 3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. 2. Mill lumber before treatment and implement procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of architectural cabinets. C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi; modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi; internal bond, 80 psi; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf, respectively. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Arauco North America. b. Timber Products Company. D. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: MDF panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke- developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Panel Source International, Inc. b. Roseburg Forest Products. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware." 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Accuride International. b. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 6 c. CompX International, Inc. d. Grass America Inc. e. Hettich America L.P. f. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company. B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing. 1. Grass America; G393. 2. Salice; Series 200. 3. Blum; Clip Top Press-In 71T6580 C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter. D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: 1. Provide product listed below or comparable product by one of the following: a. Blum. b. Grass. c. E-Z Shelving Systems, Inc. d. Häfele. 2. Basis-of-Design: Knape and Vogt (standards and support clips) BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081: a. Standards: 255E, zinc coated steel standards. b. Shelf supports: 256R ZC, zinc coated steel standards with rubber cushion. 3. Basis-of-Design: Knape and Vogt (standards and brackets) BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112: a. Standards: 87 ANO, satin finish extra heavy duty. b. Brackets: 187 LL ANO 16" long for 18" shelves. 186 LL ANO 10" long for 12" shelves. E. Shelf Rests: 1. Basis-of-Design: Knape and Vogt (drilled side supports) BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal: a. Shelf Rests: 333 or 346 supports. F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24 inches wide. a. Provide Accuride 7432 or comparable product by one of the following: 1) Blum. 2) Grass. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 7 3) Häfele. 4) Knape & Vogt. 2. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide. a. Provide Accuride 4034 or comparable product by one of the following: 1) Blum. 2) Grass. 3) Häfele. 4) Knape & Vogt. 3. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 3 inches high and 24 inches wide. a. Sidewall mount 100 lb.: Provide Accuride 3832 or comparable product by one of the following: 1) Blum. 2) Grass. 3) Häfele. 4) Knape & Vogt. b. Top mount 45 lb.: Provide Accuride 2006 or comparable product by one of the following: 1) Blum. 2) Grass. 3) Häfele. 4) Knape & Vogt. G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. 1. Corbin: 0737 lock with 12-S and 2540 strikes. 2. Yale: 9780 lock with related strikes. 3. Timberline Lock, Ltd.: CB-290. H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. 1. Knape and Vogt: 986 lock. 2. Timberline Lock, Ltd.: CB-280. 3. Yale drawer lock. I. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provi de finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 8 L. CG-4, Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated or comparable products by one of the following: a. Gordon Inc. b. Pittcon Industries. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: As indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post- installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. D. Plastic Seam Filler: Plastic seam and repair filler in color to match plastic laminate. 1. Product: Seamfil, Kampel Enterprises, Inc. E. Colored Caulk: Acrylic latex caulk in color to match plastic laminate. 1. Product: Colorflex, Kampel Enterprises, Inc. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times architectural cabinet fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at manufacturer's shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 9 C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or di rectly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet installation screws. D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches using concealed shims. 1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Provide inspection of installed Work through AWI's Quality Certification Program certifying that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of the Architectural Woodwork Standards for the specified grade. 1. Inspection entity shall prepare and submit report of inspection. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 10 B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED WOOD PANELING 06 42 19 - 1 SECTION 06 42 19 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED WOOD PANELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-faced wood paneling. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic- laminate-faced wood paneling that is not concealed within other construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 70 00 "Decorative Metal" for metal reveals at plastic-laminate- faced wood paneling. 2. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing paneling that is concealed within other construction before paneling installation. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that paneling can be installed as indicated. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-faced wood paneling. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show large scale details. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring and blocking, including concealed blocking specified in other Sections. 4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's or fabricator's standard size. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed laminate, 8 by 10 inches. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED WOOD PANELING 06 42 19 - 2 1. Provide one Sample applied to core material and with specified edge material applied to one edge. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program. C. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom -fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Shop Certification: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical paneling as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver paneling until painting and similar operations that mig ht damage paneling have been completed in installation areas. Store paneling in installation areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install paneling until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where paneling is indicated to fit to other con struction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED WOOD PANELING 06 42 19 - 3 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support paneling by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELING, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of plastic-laminate-faced wood paneling (decorative laminate surfacing) indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide inspections including installation together with labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced woodwork quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. 2.2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED WOOD PANELING A. Grade: Premium. B. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3 and the following requirements: 1. Products: As indicated 2. Faces: Grade VGS. 3. Backs: Grade BKH. 4. Exposed Edges: Same as faces or Grade VGS. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations. D. Panel Core: Fire-retardant particleboard or fire-retardant MDF. 1. Thickness: 3/4 inch. E. Exposed Panel Edges: Plastic-laminate matching faces. F. Adhesives for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED WOOD PANELING 06 42 19 - 4 G. Fire-Retardant-Treated Paneling: Panels shall consist of fire-retardant plastic laminate and fire-retardant particleboard or fire-retardant, medium-density fiberboard (MDF). Panels shall have a flame-spread index of 25 or less and a smoke-developed index of 450 or less per ASTM E 84, and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. H. Assemble panels by gluing and concealed fastening. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Materials, General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherw ise defective. 2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. 2. Mill lumber before treatment and implement procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of paneling. C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Flakeboard Company Limited; Duraflake FR. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED WOOD PANELING 06 42 19 - 5 b. SierraPine; Encore FR. 2. For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi; modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi; internal bond, 80 psi; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf, respectively. D. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: MDF panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke- developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Panel Source International, Inc., McKillican America, Inc.; Pyroblock Platinum. b. SierraPine; Medite FR. 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post- installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls. C. Installation Adhesive: Product recommended by panel fabricator for each substrate for secure anchorage. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times paneling fabrication will be complete. B. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED WOOD PANELING 06 42 19 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition paneling to humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing paneling, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install paneling to comply with quality standard grade of paneling to be installed. B. Install paneling level, plumb, true in line, and without distortion. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Install with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96-inch horizontal variation from a true plane. 1. For flush paneling with revealed joints, install with variations in reveal width, alignment of top and bottom edges, and flushness between adjacent panels not exceeding 1/32 inch. C. Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips or splined connection strips. Do not use face fastening. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective paneling, where possible, to eliminate defects. Where not possible to repair, replace paneling. Adjust for uniform appearance. B. Clean paneling on exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 1 SECTION 06 46 00 - WOOD TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior wood base. 2. Shop finishing of wood trim. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for each finish system and color. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. C. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 2 C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical wood trim as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver wood trim until operations that could damage wood trim have been completed in installation areas. If wood trim must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood trim until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC syste m is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood trim can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD TRIM, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of wood trim indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 3 2.2 WD-4, WOOD BASE FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: 1. Species: White oak. 2. Cut: Plain sliced/plain sawn. C. For base wider than available lumber, glue for width. Do not use veneered construction. 2.3 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of wood trim and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches wide. 2. Wood Moisture Content for Interior Materials: 5 to 10 percent. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." B. Installation Adhesive: Product recommended by fabricator for each substrate for secure anchorage. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. B. Fabricate wood trim to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated. C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members except for members with ends exposed in finished work. D. Assemble casings in shop except where shipping limitations require field assembly. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 4 E. Assemble moldings in shop to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in shop and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together. 2.6 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Finish wood trim at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood trim, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces. C. Transparent Finish for Wood Base: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: System - 9, UV curable acrylated epoxy, polyester, or urethane. 3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 4. Staining: Match adjacent wood athletic flooring. 5. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash-coat sealer and allow to dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 6. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition wood trim to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural wood trim, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install wood trim to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble wood trim and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install wood trim level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WOOD TRIM 06 46 00 - 5 D. Scribe and cut wood trim to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches long except where shorter single- length pieces are necessary. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with latex sealant, painted to match wall. 2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. F. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of wood trim. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective wood trim, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace wood trim. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean wood trim on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19 - 1 SECTION 07 01 50.19 - PREPARATION FOR REROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Partial tear-off of roof areas indicated on Drawings. 2. Removal of flashings and counterflashings. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting removal Work, conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including exterior and interior finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as having been damaged by reroofing operations. 1. Submit before Work begins. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Approved by warrantor of existing roofing system to work on existing roofing. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Roofing System: SBS-modified bituminous roofing. B. Owner will not occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area. C. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations. D. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. E. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19 - 2 F. Limit construction loads on existing roof areas to remain, and existing roof areas scheduled to be reroofed to code required load limits for rooftop equipment wheel loads and for uniformly distributed loads. G. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering existing roofing system or building. 1. Remove only as much roofing in one day as can be made watertight in the same day. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during reroofing, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing roofing system warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AUXILIARY REROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Use auxiliary reroofing preparation materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with components of existing and new roofing system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Seal or isolate windows that may be exposed to airborne substances created in removal of existing materials. B. Shut off rooftop utilities and service piping before beginning the Work. C. Test existing roof drains to verify that they are not blocked or restricted. 1. Immediately notify Architect of any blockages or restrictions. D. Coordinate with Owner to shut down air-intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work. E. During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on -site to facilitate rapid installation of temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain. F. Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday. 1. Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19 - 3 a. Use roof-drain plugs specifically designed for this purpose. b. Remove roof-drain plugs at end of each workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast. 2. If roof drains are temporarily blocked or unserviceable due to roofing system removal or partial installation of new roofing system, provide alternative drainage method to remove water and eliminate ponding. a. Do not permit water to enter into or under existing roofing system components that are to remain. 3.2 ROOF TEAR-OFF A. Lower removed roofing materials to ground and onto lower roof levels, using dust- tight chutes or other acceptable means of removing materials from roof areas. B. Partial Roof Tear-off: Where indicated on Drawings, remove existing roofing down to concrete deck and immediately check for presence of moisture. 1. Remove wet or damp materials below existing roofing and above deck as directed by Architect. 2. Inspect wood blocking, curbs, and nailers for deterioration and damage. a. If wood blocking, curbs, or nailers have deteriorated, immediately notify Architect. 3.3 DECK PREPARATION A. Inspect deck after tear-off of roofing system. B. If deck surface is unsuitable for receiving new roofing or if structural integrity of deck is suspect, immediately notify Architect. 1. Do not proceed with installation until directed by Architect. 3.4 BASE FLASHING REMOVAL A. Remove existing base flashings. 1. Clean substrates of contaminants, such as asphalt, sheet materials, dirt, and debris. B. Do not damage metal counterflashings that are to remain. 1. Replace metal counterflashings damaged during removal with counterflashings of same metal, weight or thickness, and finish as existing. C. Inspect parapet sheathing, wood blocking, curbs, and nailers for deterioration and damage. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 07 01 50.19 - 4 1. If parapet sheathing, wood blocking, curbs, or nailers have deteriorated, immediately notify Archi tect. D. When directed by Architect, replace parapet framing, wood blocking, curbs, and nailers to comply with Section 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry." END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1 SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass-fiber blanket. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 52 16 "Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction. 2. Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic insulation. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 2 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 3 B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 1 SECTION 07 52 16 - STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS)-modified bituminous membrane roofing. 2. Substrate board. 3. Roof insulation. 4. Cover board. 5. Walkways. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood curbs, and blocking. 2. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and counterflashings. 3. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation. 4. Division 22 for roof drains. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" apply to Work of this Section. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including the following: 1. Layout and thickness of insulation. 2. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 3. Flashing details at penetrations. 4. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 5. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roof membrane, fastening spacings, and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing system. 6. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes. 7. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations. 8. Tie-in with adjoining air barrier. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 2 C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Cap Sheet: Samples of manufacturer's standard colors for selection by Architect. 2. Flashing Sheet: Samples of manufacturer's standard colors for selection by Architect. D. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: For roofing system indicating compliance with wind uplift performance requirements. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Manufacturer Certificates: 1. Performance Requirement Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. a. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements. 2. Special Warranty Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that all materials supplied under this Section are acceptable for special warranty. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of acceptance of roof assemblies by Miami - Dade County Building and Neighborhood Compliance Department or evidence of compliance with performance requirements as tested by entities listed with the Florida Building Code Commission. D. Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, from ICC-ES. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 3 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. 1. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 2. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. 1. Store in a dry location. 2. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Special warranty includes roof membrane, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate board, and other components of roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Installed roofing system and flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roof system and flashings shall remain watertight. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 4 1. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155. 2. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746/D 3746M, ASTM D 4272/D 4272M, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM Approvals 4470. B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roof membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Hurricane-Resistance Test Performance: Provide roofing systems that pass testing requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Comply with the Florida Building Code, 2014 Edition. 2. Provide roof assemblies accepted by Miami-Dade County Building and Neighborhood Compliance Department or complying with performance requirements as tested by entities listed with the Florida Building Code Commission. D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. 1. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide GAF; Ruberoid Modified Bitumen Roof System for Concrete Decks (NOA No.: 15-1001.04) or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Firestone Building Products. 2. Henry Company. 3. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. 4. Soprema, Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from roof membrane manufacturer or manufacturer approved by roof membrane manufacturer. 2.3 BASE SHEET MATERIALS A. Vented Base Sheet: ASTM D 4897/D 4897M, Type II, venting, nonperforated, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber base sheet with mineral granule surfacing on bottom surface. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 5 2.4 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS CAP SHEET A. Smooth-Surfaced Roofing Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6162/D 6162M, Type I, Grade S, SBS-modified asphalt sheet, reinforced with a combination of polyester and fiberglass fabric, suitable for torch application method. B. Granule-Surfaced Roofing Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6164/D 6164M, Type II, Grade G, SBS-modified asphalt sheet, reinforced with polyester fabric, suitable for torch application method. 1. Granule Color: White. 2.5 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 6164/D 6164M, Type I, Grade S, SBS-modified asphalt sheet, reinforced with polyester fabric, smooth surfaced, suitable for application method specified. B. Granule-Surfaced Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6164/D 6164M, Type II, Grade G, SBS- modified asphalt sheet, reinforced with polyester fabric, granule surfaced, suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Granule Color: White. C. Glass-Fiber Fabric: Woven glass-fiber cloth, treated with asphalt, complying with ASTM D 1668/D 1668M, Type I. D. Liquid Flashing System: Roof membrane manufacturer's standard one- or two-part moisture curing resin with low solvent content, consisting of a primer, flashing cement, and scrim. 2.6 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with other roofing components. 1. Adhesives and Sealants: Comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Adhesives and sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC content: a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. e. Contact Adhesives: 80 g/L. f. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. g. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. h. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. i. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. j. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. k. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 6 B. Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer. C. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. 1. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. D. Cold-Applied Asphalt Adhesive: ASTM D 3019, Type III, roof membrane manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one- or two-part, asbestos-free, cold- applied adhesive, specially formulated for compatibility and use with roofing membrane and base flashings. E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586/D 4586M, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. F. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen; nonhardening, nonmigrating, nonskinning, and nondrying. G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roofing components to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 1. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. H. Roofing Granules: Ceramic-coated roofing granules, No. 11 screen size with 100 percent passing No. 8 sieve and 98 percent of mass retained on No. 40 sieve; color to match roof membrane. I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide those recommended by roofing system manufacturer. 2.7 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate or ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, fiber-reinforced gypsum board. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. c. National Gypsum Company. d. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch. 3. Surface finish: Unprimed. 4. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 7 B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to roof deck. 2.8 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards, manufactured or approved by roof membrane manufacturer, approved for use in FM Approvals' RoofNav listed roofing system identical to that used for this Project. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Atlas EPS; a Division of Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Atlas Roofing Corporation. c. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. d. CertainTeed Corporation. e. Dyplast Products. f. Firestone Building Products. g. GAF. h. Hunter Panels. i. Insulfoam-a division of Carlisle Construction Materials Inc. j. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. k. Rmax, Inc. 2. Compressive Strength: 25 psi. 3. Size: 48 by 48 inches. 4. Thickness: a. Base Layer: 1-1/2 inches. b. Upper Layer: 2 inches. C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards. 1. Material: Match roof insulation. 2. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch. 3. Slope: a. Roof Field: 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. b. Saddles and Crickets: 1/2 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2.9 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with other roofing system components. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 8 B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 1. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulati on layer as follows: 1. Full-spread spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive. 2. Adhesives and sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC content: a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. e. Contact Adhesives: 80 g/L. f. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. g. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. h. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. i. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. j. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. k. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. D. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board. E. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum board or ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, fiber-reinforced gypsum board. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. c. National Gypsum Company. d. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 3. Surface Finish: Unprimed. 4. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. 2.10 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M. B. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312/D 312M, Type III or IV as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for application. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 9 C. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 6152/D 6152M, SEBS modified. 2.11 WALKWAYS A. Walkway Pads: Polymer-modified, reconstituted rubber pads with slip-resisting textured surface, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer, 1/2 inch thick, minimum. 1. Pad Size: Approximately 36 by 60 inches. 2. Color: Contrasting with cap sheet. 3. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations. 3. Verify that deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no adjacent units in excess of 1/16 inch out of plane relative to adjoining deck. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. 1. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C. Perform fastener-pullout tests according to roof system manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Submit test result within 24 hours of performing tests. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 10 a. Include manufacturer's requirements for any revision to previously submitted fastener patterns required to achieve specified wind uplift requirements. 3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, FM Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29. B. Complete terminations and base flashings, and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. 1. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. C. Install roof membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing roofing system. D. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt and adhesives from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. 3.4 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION ON STEEL DECK A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, with end joints staggered not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows. 1. At steel roof decks, install substrate board at right angle to flutes of deck. a. Locate end joints over crests of steel roof deck. 2. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 3. Cut substrate board to fit tight around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks. 4. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FM Approvals' RoofNav and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing roofing system components, so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 11 C. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips at junctures of roofing system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 deg F. D. Installation Over Metal Decking: 1. Install base layer of insulation with joints staggered not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows and with long joints continuous at right angle to flutes of decking. a. Locate end joints over crests of decking. b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks. c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump, with each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches. 1) Trim insulation, so that water flow is unrestricted. e. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. f. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of projections, and penetrations. g. Mechanically attach base layer of insulation and substrate board using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to metal decks. 1) Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' RoofNav for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2) Fasten insulation to resist specified uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 2. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation, with joints of each layer offset not less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation. a. Staggered end joints within each layer not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows. b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks. c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump, with each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches. e. Trim insulation, so that water flow is unrestricted. f. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. g. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of projections, and penetrations. h. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according to FM Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification, as follows: 1) Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full -spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 12 E. Installation Over Concrete Decks: 1. Install base layer of insulation with joints staggered not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows. a. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. b. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump, with each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches. 1) Trim insulation, so that water flow is unrestricted. c. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. d. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of projections, and penetrations. e. Adhere base layer of insulation to concrete roof deck according to FM Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification, as follows: 1) Set insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 2. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation, with joints of each layer offset not less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation. a. Staggered end joints within each layer not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows. b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks. c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width. d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump, with each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl pl us 24 inches. 1) Trim insulation, so that water flow is unrestricted. e. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. f. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of projections, and penetrations. g. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according to FM Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification, as follows: 1) Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full -spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARDS A. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints i n continuous straight lines, with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 13 1. Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks. 2. At internal roof drains, conform to slope of drain sump. a. Trim cover board, so that water flow is unrestricted. 3. Cut and fit cover board tight to projections and penetrations. 4. Adhere cover board to substrate using adhesive as follows: a. Set cover board in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 3.7 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations in ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing." B. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Coordinate installation of roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. 1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt, with joints and edges sealed. 2. Complete terminations and base flashings, and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system. 3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.8 BASE SHEET INSTALLATION A. Before installing, unroll base sheet, cut into workable lengths, and allow to lie flat for a time period recommended by manufacturer for the ambient temperature. B. Installation of Vented Base Sheet: 1. Mechanically fasten, using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening to applicable substrate vented base sheet with vented side down. a. Fasten vented base sheet according to requirements in FM Approval's RoofNav for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 14 3.9 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS CAP SHEET INSTALLATION A. Before installing, unroll cap sheet, cut into workable lengths, and allow to lie flat for a time period recommended by manufacturer for the ambient temperature at which cap sheet will be installed. B. Install modified bituminous roofing cap sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. 1. Extend cap sheet over and terminate above cants. 2. Install cap sheet in a shingle fashion. 3. Install cap sheet as follows: a. Torch apply to substrate. 1) Perform torch application according to NFPA 241, including two- hour fire watch after torches have been extinguished. 4. Install cap sheet without wrinkles or tears, and free from air pockets. 5. Install cap sheet, so side and end laps shed water. C. Laps: Accurately align roofing sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps. 1. Lap side laps as recommended by roof membrane manufacturer but not less than 3 inches. 2. Lap end laps as recommended by roof membrane manufacturer but not less than 12 inches. 3. Stagger end laps not less than 18 inches. 4. Heat weld laps, leaving no voids. 5. Roll laps with a 20-pound roller. 6. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed. D. Apply pressure to the body of the cap sheet according to manufacturer's instructions, to remove air pockets and to result in complete adhesion of base sheet to substrate. E. Apply roofing granules of same color as roof membrane to cover exuded bead at laps while bead is hot, to provide a continuous color appearance. 3.10 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloped and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer. 2. Backer Sheet Application: a. Adhere backer sheet to substrate in cold-applied adhesive. b. Seal all laps. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 15 3. Flashing Sheet Application: Torch apply flashing sheet to substrate. a. Perform torch application according to NFPA 241, including two-hour fire watch after torches have been extinguished. B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 4 inches onto field of roofing membrane. C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. 1. Seal top termination of base flashing with a strip of glass-fiber fabric set in asphalt roofing cement. D. Install liquid flashing system according to manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Extend liquid flashing not less than 3 inches in all directions from edges of item being flashed. 2. Embed granules, matching color of roof membrane, into wet compound. E. Install roofing cap-sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. F. Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30-inch- 4-pound lead flashing in bed of asphaltic adhesive on completed roofing membrane. 1. Cover lead flashing with roofing cap-sheet stripping, and extend a minimum of 4 inches beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane. 2. Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring. 3. Install stripping according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.11 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of manufacturer's standard size, according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install walkways at the following locations: a. Locations indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide 3-inch clearance between adjoining pads. 3. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's wri tten instructions. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 16 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, roof membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to furnish reports to Architect. B. Perform the following tests: 1. Flood Testing: Flood test each roofing area for leaks, according to recommendations in ASTM D 5957, after completing roofing and flashing but before overlying construction is placed. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water. a. Perform tests before overlying construction is placed. b. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches with a minimum depth of 1 inch and not exceeding a depth of 4 inches. Maintain 2 inches of clearance from top of base flashing. c. Flood each area for 24 hours. d. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until roofing and flashing installations are watertight. 1) Cost of retesting is the responsibility of the Contractor. e. Testing agency shall prepare survey report indicating locations of initial leaks, if any, and final survey report. 2. Testing agency shall prepare survey report indicating locations of initial discontinuities, if any. C. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion, in presence of Architect, and to prepare inspection report. 1. Notify Architect and Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. D. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. E. Roofing system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 1. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements. 3.13 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 17 1. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing system for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00 - 1 SECTION 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof curbs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-formed metal flashing, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation. B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories. 1. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For roof curbs indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof-mounted items to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section. 2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure. 3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. 4. Required clearances. B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design roof curbs to comply with wind performance requirements, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 2.2 ROOF CURBS A. Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings, bearing continuously on roof structure, and capable of meeting performance requirements; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, straight sides, and integrally formed deck- mounting flange at perimeter bottom. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Adaptable Air Products. b. AES Industries, Inc. c. Air Balance; a division of MESTEK, Inc. d. Conn-Fab Sales, Inc. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00 - 3 e. Curbs Plus, Inc. f. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products. g. Greenheck Fan Corporation. h. KCC International Inc. i. Kingspan Light + Air, North America. j. Lloyd Industries, Inc. k. LMCurbs. l. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. m. Metallic Products Corp. n. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. o. Pate Company (The). p. Plenums Incorporated. q. Roof Curb Systems. r. Roof Products and Systems (RPS); a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. s. Roof Products, Inc. t. Thybar Corporation. u. Vent Products Co., Inc. B. Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. C. Supported Load Capacity: Coordinate load capacity with information on Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. D. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.064 inch thick. 1. Finish: Mill phosphatized. E. Construction: 1. Curb Profile: Manufacturer's standard compatible with roofing system. 2. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless otherwise indicated. 3. Top Surface: Level top of curb, with roof slope accommodated by sloping deck-mounting flange. 4. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb height tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter curb is level. Equip unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow. 5. Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch- thick glass-fiber board insulation. 6. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish. 7. Nailer: Factory-installed wood nailer along top flange of curb, continuous around curb perimeter. 8. Platform Cap: Where portion of roof curb is not covered by equipment, provide weathertight platform cap formed from 3/4-inch- thick plywood covered with metal sheet of same type, thickness, and finish as required for curb. 9. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal and finish as curb. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00 - 4 2.3 METAL MATERIALS A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation. 1. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light -colored acrylic or polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. B. Steel Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A123/A123M unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation. B. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C726, nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F, thickness as indicated. C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick. D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M. E. Underlayment: 1. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 2. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners sui table for application and metals being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated Steel: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc- coated steel according to ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329. F. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight. G. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement. H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00 - 5 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. 2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads. 3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates. 4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals. B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious , install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's recommended slip sheet. 2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof accessories for waterproof performance. C. Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 72 00 - 6 D. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer. 3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A780/A780M. B. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Clean off excess sealants. D. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1 SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes joint sealants for the applications indicated in the Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Sample: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2" wide joints formed between two 6" long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified installer. B. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 2 C. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution: 1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Single-Component Pourable Neutral -Curing Silicone Sealant, ES-1: 1. Products: Subject to requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL.Dow Parking Structure Sealant b. Pecora Corporation; 300 Pavement Sealant (Self Leveling) c. Dow Corning Corporation; SL Parking Structure Sealant 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and P (pourable). Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 4 3. Class: 100/50. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: NT and T (traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and O, as applicable to joint substrates indicated. a. Use O Joint Substrates: Galvanized steel, limestone, marble, granite and ceramic tile. D. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant, ES-2: 1. Products: Subject to requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790 b. GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700 c. Tremco; Spectrem 1 (Basic) 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 100/50. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: Aluminum coated with a high-performance coating 6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248. E. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant, ES-3: 1. Products: Subject to requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; 898 b. Tremco; Tremsil 600 White c. Dow Corning 786 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: Aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, ceramic tile. 2.4 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Joint Sealant, SRS-2: Comply with ASTM C 1085. 1. Products: Subject to requirements, provide one of the following: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 5 a. Bostik Findley; Bostik 300 b. Fuller, H. B. Company; SC-0296 c. Fuller, H. B. Company; SC-0288 d. Pecora Corporation; BC-158 e. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-301 f. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonneborn Multi -Purpose Sealant g. Tremco; Tremco Butyl Sealant B. Pigmented Narrow-Joint Sealant, SRS-3: Manufacturer's standard, solvent-release- curing, pigmented, synthetic-rubber sealant complying with AAMA 803.3 and formulated for sealing joints 3/16" or smaller in width. 1. Products: Subject to requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fuller, H. B. Company; SC-0289. b. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 5504 Acryl-R Narrow Joint Sealant. 2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Joint Sealant: Siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600 c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil-A 700 d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+ e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200 f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834 2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints, AS-1: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following: 1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90. 2. Products: Subject to requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints, AS-2: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. 1. Products: Subject to requirements, provide one of the following: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 6 a. Pecora Corporation; BA-98 b. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant 2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) , and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint - filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 7 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint- sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 8 C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 9 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application JS-1: Exterior vertical and horizontal nontraffic construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant, ES-2. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Joint-Sealant Application JS-2: Exterior horizontal nontraffic and traffic isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. Joints between concrete sidewalks and building components. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component pourable neutral-curing silicone sealant, ES-1. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Joint-Sealant Application JS-3: Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry, architectural precast concrete, and cement plaster. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant, ES-2. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Joint-Sealant Application JS-4: Exterior joints in metal panels. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant, ES-2. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Joint-Sealant Application JS-5: Exterior perimeter joints between walls and frames of doors, windows and louvers. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant, ES-2. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. F. Joint-Sealant Application JS-6: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant, ES-2. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. G. Joint-Sealant Application JS-7: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral-curing silicone sealant, ES-3. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. H. Joint-Sealant Application JS-8: Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and partitions. 1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. I. Joint-Sealant Application JS-9: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 10 1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. J. Joint-Sealant Application JS-10: Interior control, expansion, and isolation joints in horizontal traffic surfaces in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-component pourable neutral-curing silicone sealant, ES-1. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 1 SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow-metal work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to SDI A250.8. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 2 C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Construction: Full profile welded. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 3 4. Exposed Finish: Prime for paint. 2.3 BORROWED LITES A. Hollow-metal frames of uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. B. Construction: Full profile welded. 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not l ess than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8- inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. D. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. E. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. F. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 4 G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full -door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation. 2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. 4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide ali gnment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 5 d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 5. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold - or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface- mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with [butted] [or] [mitered] hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-metal work. 2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 3. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish for interior applications: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface- mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of exterior frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 7 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 8 B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 1 SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core flush wood doors with plastic-laminate-faces. 2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following: 1. Door core materials and construction. 2. Door edge construction 3. Door face type and characteristics. 4. Door trim for openings. 5. Factory-machining criteria. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Door schedule indicating door location, type, size, fire protection rating, and swing. 2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware, lite and louver cutouts, and glazing thicknesses. 3. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. 4. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment. 5. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 6. Clearances and undercuts. 7. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminate, 6 inches square, for each color, texture, and pattern selected. 2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For door inspector. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 2 1. Egress Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4. 2. Submit copy of DHI's Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certificate. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Special warranties. B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Certification: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Egress Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality-control inspections of egress door assemblies shall comply with qualifications set forth in NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.4 and the following: 1. DHI's Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certification. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed and weathertight, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 3 a. Delamination of veneer. b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. c. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be req uired due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with the Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. 2.2 SOLID-CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS WITH PLASTIC-LAMINATE FACES A. Interior Doors: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ABS-American Building Supply, Inc. b. ASSA ABLOY. c. Eggers Industries. d. General Veneer Manufacturing Co. e. Haley Brothers, Inc. f. Lambton Doors. g. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. h. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. i. Oregon Door. j. Oshkosh Door Company. k. Poncraft Door Company. l. Vancouver Door Company. m. VT Industries Inc. 2. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium. 3. PL, Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 4. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated. 5. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Plastic laminate that matches faces, applied before faces. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 4 6. Core for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 particleboard. a. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows: 1) 5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. 2) 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates. 3) 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. 7. Construction: Three plies, cold-pressed bonded (vertical and horizontal edging is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before faces are applied. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. 2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA- 156.115-W, and hardware templates. 3. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames, to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 4. For doors scheduled to receive electrified locksets, provide factory-installed raceway and wiring to accommodate specified hardware. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware." B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 5 C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 31 13 - 1 SECTION 08 31 13 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each type of access door and frame and for each finish specified. C. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hallmann Sales, LLC; Stealth Hinged Access Panels. 2. Description: glass fiber reinforced gypsum (GFRG) panels, face of door flush with frame; with concealed flange for gypsum board installation and concealed hinge. 3. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 4. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, screwdriver operated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 AUTOMATIC VERTICALLY RETRACTABLE GLASS WALL 08 33 36 - 1 SECTION 08 33 36 - AUTOMATIC VERTICALLY RETRACTABLE GLASS WALL PART 1 - GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and services to complete the Automatic Vertically Retractable Glass Wall. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Related work by others: 1. Bulkheads and sound insulation above, below and in the fixed walls at both ends of the operable wall, as per ASTM E557. 2. Division 05: Primary structural support, including steel beam for the operable wall as well as the miscellaneous support steel for the lifting machinery for the operable wall. 3. Ceiling storage pockets along axis of operable wall. 4. Division 09: Painting of trim, gypsum drywall and other adjacent materials. 5. Division 26: All site wiring and connections for main power, including disconnect switches at each motor location. All site wiring and connections for control, including installation of key switches. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The products herein specified establish the standard of quality for the operable walls based on Skyfold Mirage Automatic Vertically Retractable Acoustic Interior Glass Wall by Skyfold Inc. of Baie d’Urfe (Montréal), Québec, Canada. B. The operable walls herein specified shall be furnished and installed by an authorized local distributor licensed by the operable wall manufacturer. Local distribution is required to ensure prompt project coordination and future customer service. C. The operable wall shall be designed to have a design life of at least 10,000 complete closed to opened to closed cycles. 1.4 SITE CONDITIONS A. The floor underneath the operable wall along its axis shall be flat to within +/- 1/4” (6 mm) over the entire length of the operable wall. The peak to valley undulation of +/- 1/4” (6 mm) shall not be closer together than 24” (610 mm) and a peak to valley undulation of +/- 1/8” (3 mm) shall not be closer than 12” (305 mm). B. Support steel above the operable wall along its axis shall be parallel to the floor within +/- 1/2” (12.7 mm) for the entire length of the operable wall. This includes loaded deflection. The beam must also be parallel to the center line of the operable wall within + 1/8” (3 mm), left to right. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 AUTOMATIC VERTICALLY RETRACTABLE GLASS WALL 08 33 36 - 2 C. The fixed walls at either end of the operable wall shall be within +1/4” (6 mm)-0”, from plumb vertical. D. The fixed walls at either end of the operable wall shall be flat to within +0”, -1/4” (6 mm). 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each type of operable wall. B. Submit shop drawings showing complete layout of operable wall system based on field verified dimensions. 1. The drawings shall include dimensional relationship to adjoining work. 2. Include details indicating materials, finishes, and tolerances, methods of attachment to building steel and electrical requirements. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Basic Warranty: The operable wall shall be warranted free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years or five thousand (5,000) cycles, whichever occurs first, from the date of shipment. Extended Parts Warranty (optional): An extended warranty on parts is available in addition to the basic warranty. It includes coverage on all parts (excluding touch screen operator stations) for a period of ten (10) years or five thousand (5,000) cycles, whichever occurs first from date of shipment. Refer to Owner’s manual for full warranty details. B. Parts and labor required to maintain the operable wall and part subject to normal wear and tear are not covered under the warranty and are the owner’s responsibility. (Refer to Manufacturer’s Recommended Maintenance Program). PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Skyfold Inc.; Mirage Automatic Vertically Retractable Acoustic Interior Glass Wall. 2.2 OPERATION A. Operable walls shall refer specifically to automatic vertically retractable acoustic interior glass walls that, when in the down position (closed) are hard, rigid, flat, plumb walls, made of a grid of rectangular panels, and when are lifted (opened), fold upward (vertically) without the use of any manual labor, in a manner similar to an accordion, into a pocket in the ceiling, between roof joists, or up between built in bulkheads. B. The operable wall shall be opened and closed, in the standard scenario, using two push button switches wired in series with power controlled by a single, three position Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 AUTOMATIC VERTICALLY RETRACTABLE GLASS WALL 08 33 36 - 3 key switch, or, in the optional scenario, using two touch screen operator stations. In the standard, push button scenario, turning the key from the “off” position shall cause the wall to move in the designated direction “up” or “down” once both push buttons are depressed. In the optional, touch screen scenario, pressing and holding the up or down directional arrow symbol on one touch screen while simultaneously pressing and holding the button symbol on the second screen shall cause the wall to move in the selected direction. In both scenarios, when hand pressure is removed, the wall shall immediately stop. The operable wall shall stop in a quick and positive fashion without coasting. As a normal part of the operation, it shall be possible to partially open (or close) the wall, stop it and then reverse the operation. There shall be two (2) switches per operable wall, located on opposite sides of the wall at opposite ends of the wall, wired in series. In the standard condition, one switch shall be equipped with an LED that flashes fault codes in case of a failure with the electrical system. In the optional, touch screen scenario, the screens will display faults in case of a failure with the electrical system. C. The motor assembly is mounted directly above the centre line of the operable wall. Support steel is only required at one location D. Electrical: 1. The operable wall shall be equipped for a three phase power supply to the electrical control box. 2. Standard electrical control box will be NEMA 1. NEMA 4 is also available upon request. 3. Low voltage wiring (by others). 18 gauge wiring from the switches to the control box. 4. Switches (standard): Two (2) push button switches wired in series with power controlled by a single, three position key switch. One switch shall be equipped with an LED that flashes fault codes in case of a failure with the electrical system. (Installation and wiring by others). 5. Touch Screen Operator Stations (optional): Two (2), 4.3” resistive LCD touch screens, wired in series with multilingual capabilities and 4 digit adjustable user pin. The screens will display faults in case of a failure with the electrical system. (wiring by others) E. Safety Equipment: 1. The operable wall shall employ an electromagnetic type of brake which shall activate firmly, without hesitation, when power is lost to the system. This brake shall have a minimum retarding torque rating equal to 200% of the power drive full load torque. The drive system shall be equipped with a manual override and brake release lever. The operable wall shall employ a dynamic brake, distinct and separate from the brake above, in order to lower the operable wall at a controlled speed of no more than approximately 150% of the normal down speed, in the case of a catastrophic failure in the power train. Alternately, the operable wall shall employ a brake, distinct and separate from the brakes above, in order to completely halt the downward motion of the operable wall in the case of a catastrophic failure in the power train. 2. The operable wall shall employ electrical or other limit switches in order to stop the wall at the up and down travel limits. 3. The operable wall shall employ an over torque detector in order to sense a jam in the system and to act as an over travel limit in the up direction should the Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 AUTOMATIC VERTICALLY RETRACTABLE GLASS WALL 08 33 36 - 4 primary limit switch fail to act. This over torque sensor shall be mechanical, using the motor’s torque arm in it’s over torque detection. 4. The lifting equipment shall use the latest in industry standards in thermal protection, overload protection, quick acting fuses, etc., in order to ensure the safety and reliability of the system. 5. The operable wall shall be equipped with an optical sensor, which shall cut power to the lifting equipment if an object or person passes between the emitter(s) and receiver(s). The operable wall will then automatically reverse direction for approximately 3 seconds to clear the object. Regular operation of the operable wall shall resume once the key switch has been released and the obstruction removed. 2.3 PANEL CONSTRUCTION A. Panels shall be architecturally flat with no bowing, oil canning, warping, waviness or any other surface deformation and discontinuity. B. The operable wall shall be visibly flat and rigid in the down (closed) position. C. There shall be no exposed hinges, brackets and screws visible when the operable wall is in the down (closed) position. All of the panel edges shall be right angled, with a minimum radius not more than 1/16” (1.6mm). All of the panels shall be rectangular, nominally of the same size, unless requested otherwise by the architect. Horizontal joints between panels shall be no more than approximately ½” (12.7mm) wide. D. The operable wall with single laminated glass panels shall not weigh more than 7.5 lbs per square foot (36.6 Kg per square meters), not including the lifting equipment. E. A completely functioning operable wall, tested in full accordance and compliance with ASTM E90 (ISO 140-3), shall achieve, from an independent laboratory, a Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating (Rw value) of not less than System STC 33 (Rw 33). 2.4 FOLDING MECHANISM A. The hanging, folding and extension mechanism shall be, as much as possible, made from structural grade aluminum extrusions and structural shapes, in order to minimize the weight of the system. All wear surfaces, such as bushings, spacers, pins, discs, bearings, sleeves shall be designed to function quietly and with minimum wear, over the 10,000 cycle design life of the operable wall. The hangers, which fasten the lifting mechanism to the support steel, shall be fabricated from steel and shall be welded or bolted to the support steel supplied by others. 2.5 LIFTING EQUIPMENT A. The lifting equipment shall be sized properly so that it can open and close the wall effectively over the 10,000 cycle design life of the wall, at the minimum design speed of approximately 5 to 10 vertical feet per minute (1.5 to 3 meters per minute). Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 AUTOMATIC VERTICALLY RETRACTABLE GLASS WALL 08 33 36 - 5 B. The lifting mechanism shall be designed to function as smoothly, quietly and safely as possible. Wherever possible, ball bearings shall be used instead of bushings and wear surfaces. Chain or belt drive systems are not acceptable. C. There shall be a wire rope cable for every set of lifting mechanisms. This cable shall be of 6 x 31 construction aircraft cable and shall be made of galvanized steel. The diameter of the cables shall be sized so that they shall be able to hold the entire weight of the wall, with the appropriate safety factor. D. The power drive shall be sized to deliver sufficient amount of torque to safely and effectively raise and lower the operable wall over its design life. 2.6 FINISHES A. Panels: Acoustical panels shall be single glazed laminated glass, 7/16” (11mm) thick nominal. B. Framework: Manufacturer’s standard silver metallic. C. Sound seals: Black. 2.7 SOUND SEALS A. The operable wall shall automatically and acoustically seal against the floor without the need for any manual intervention. The floor seals shall leave a joint between the floor and the bottom acoustical panels of not more than approximately 2” (51 mm). B. The operable wall shall seal to the wall track with brush seals and leave a joint between the lifting mechanism and the track of no more than approximately 3/4” (19 mm). C. The operable wall shall automatically and acoustically seal against the ceiling without any manual intervention. The top seals shall leave a joint between the top acoustical panels and the ceiling of the pocket of not more than approximately 2” (51 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Preparation of opening shall be by general contractor. Any deviation of site conditions contrary to approved shop drawings shall be called to the attention of the architect. 3.2 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Delivery to the job site shall be coordinated by general contractor. Proper storage of the operable walls before installation and continued protection during and after installation shall be the responsibility of the general contractor. The operable wall Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 AUTOMATIC VERTICALLY RETRACTABLE GLASS WALL 08 33 36 - 6 supplier shall not deliver or install this product until the General Contractor can ensure in writing safe storage and protection for the operable wall for the duration of the project. 3.3 INSPECTION: A. Inspect the relevant aspects of the site such as the evenness of the floor, walls, structural steel, etc., and ensure that these are within the tolerances stated in Part – 1 (Site Conditions) of this specification. Confirm in writing to the General Contractor or contract manager any deviations from these tolerances. Do not proceed until these conditions are corrected. Carry out all appropriate field measurements before manufacturing any components or assemblies. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install operable walls in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions. Installation shall be by an authorized factory trained installer. Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM E557 installation procedure. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust and fine-tune the operable walls to ensure that all seals are operating and sealing properly and that the operable walls are in correct and smooth operation. B. Clean up any dirt, oil, grime, etc., that may have found its way onto the acoustical panels. Leave the wall in a state of architectural cleanliness. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TRAFFIC DOORS 08 38 00 - 1 SECTION 08 38 00 - TRAFFIC DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Light to medium duty traffic doors. 2. Hardware and accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Operation and maintenance data. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details; include door elevations, head, jamb, and meeting stile details including full or partial gaskets. C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer’s warranties. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Do not lay flat. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions, temperature, humidity, and ventilation, are within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TRAFFIC DOORS 08 38 00 - 2 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard two-year warranty that products are free of defects in material and workmanship and guaranteeing to replace, exclusive of freight and labor, parts proven defective within two years after date of shipment to purchaser. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Eliason Corp.; Model SCP-15 with Hidden Hinge System or comparable product acceptable to the Architect. 2.2 TRAFFIC DOORS A. Medium Impact Traffic Doors: 3/4 inch wood core with high pressure laminate (HPL) full height both sides; 13/16 inch total thickness. Hidden hardware. 1. PL, Laminate Finish: As indicated. 2. Window Size: 9 inches wide by 14 inches high. 3. Glazing: Clear acrylic. 4. Provide options as specified in Accessories below. 2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Hinges: Double Action Easy Swing hidden hinges. 1. Finish: Stainless steel. B. Push Plates: Stainless steel; 5-3/4 inches by 11-3/4 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify jambs are plumb and square. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TRAFFIC DOORS 08 38 00 - 3 B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Fit and align door assembly including hardware. D. Adjust door assembly to smooth operation and in full contact with weatherstripping. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean doors, frames and glass. B. Remove temporary labels and visible markings. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS 08 44 23 - 1 SECTION 08 44 23 - STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glazed, four-sided structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall assemblies. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Provide structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls that comply with test-performance requirements indicated, as evidenced by reports based on Project-specific preconstruction testing or tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies by a qualified testing agency. 1. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on laboratory mockups. 2. Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility using personnel, materials, profiles, finishes and methods of construction that will be used at Project site. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory mockups will be constructed. 4. No pre-testing of final test assembly shall be allowed without Architect and Owner’s consent. 5. The test assembly shall be erected under supervision of the installation personnel that will supervise installation at the project site. 6. The mock-up shall incorporate adequate viewing holes at lower corner of backpan to review drainage of ventilated shadowbox cavity. 7. Install thermal insulation for thermal testing only after completion static and dynamic water testing. 8. Preconstruction Testing Program: Perform tests specified in "Performance Requirements" Article on laboratory mockups in the following order: a. Structural-performance preloading at 50 percent of specified wind-load design pressure when tested according to ASTM E 330. b. Air infiltration when tested according to ASTM E 283. c. Water penetration under static pressure when test ed according to ASTM E 331. d. Water penetration under dynamic pressure when tested according to AAMA 501.1. e. Structural performance at design load when tested according to ASTM E 330. f. Repeat air filtration when tested according to ASTM E 283. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS 08 44 23 - 2 g. Repeat water penetration under static pressure when tested according to ASTM E 331. h. Thermal testing. i. Structural performance at maximum 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures when tested according to ASTM E 330. j. Wind-induced building structural movement testing according to AAMA 501.4 k. Loads on window washing tie back anchor within ACW/AWW. B. Preconstruction Sealant Testing: Perform sealant manufacturer's standard tests for compatibility with and adhesion of each material that will come in contact wit h sealants and each condition. 1. Test a minimum five production-run samples each of metal, glazing, and other material. 2. Prepare samples using techniques and primers required for installed assemblies. 3. Approved sealant manufacturer shall perform tests under environmental conditions that duplicate those under which assemblies will be installed. 4. For materials that fail tests, determine corrective measures necessary to prepare each material to ensure compatibility with and adhesion of sealants including, but not limited to, specially formulated primers. After performing these corrective measures on the minimum number of samples required for each material, retest materials. C. Preconstruction Energy Performance Testing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. C. Samples: For each exposed finish required. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS 08 44 23 - 3 B. Quality-Control Program: Developed specifically for Project, including fabrication and installation, according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. Include periodic quality-control reports. C. Source quality-control reports. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Sample warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated and accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC 17025. C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of curtain-wall assemblies. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain wall that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS 08 44 23 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. 1. For structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. Coordinate submission or include glazing fabricator’s calculations for wind pressure analysis, thermal stress analysis, and structural sealant bond widths to mullion and insulating glass secondary seal included in the ACW/AWW. B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: a. Vertical Members: Limited to L/175 of clear span between structural supports for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to L/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. b. Transverse Members: Limited to L/175 of clear span. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS 08 44 23 - 5 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is less. a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between framing members and operable units. E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds. F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows: 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area: a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 12 lbf/sq. ft. H. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more than 0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100. 2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200. 3. Condensation Resistance: a. Defined as water occurring on 5 percent of interior surface of any one component or water that is not collected and positively drained to exterior through a condensation drainage gutter. b. Prevent condensation under the following conditions: 1) outdoor ambient temperature of 22.3 deg F at 4.2 mph. 2) indoor ambient air temperature of 70 deg F, with 50% relative humidity. I. Hurricane-Resistance Test Performance: 1. Comply with the Florida Building Code, 2010 Edition. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS 08 44 23 - 6 2. Provide exterior glazing units complying with performance requirements as tested by entities listed with the Florida Building Code Commission. J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. K. Sound Transmission: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have the following sound-transmission characteristics: 1. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 34 when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 1332. L. Structural-Sealant Joints: 1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing. 2. Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than 20 psi. M. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure. 1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind. 2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Physical Security LLC; RT3 Series Curtainwall System (Level E) and Captured System or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Harmon Inc. 2. Permasteelisa North America Corp. B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of curtain-wall system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer. 2.3 FRAMING A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Glazing System: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS 08 44 23 - 7 a. Retained with structural sealant on four sides. b. Retained with structural sealant on four sides and captured on four sides. 2. Finish: High-performance organic finish. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Materials: 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 2.4 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." B. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in curtain-wall assembly indicated. 1. Color: Black. C. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and structural-sealant- glazed curtain-wall manufacturers for this use. 1. Color: Match structural sealant. D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. E. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS 08 44 23 - 8 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDFresin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. 1. Color and Gloss: Match existing curtainwall. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures, sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS 08 44 23 - 9 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding. 7. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. D. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." E. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions, to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Test Area: Perform tests on representative areas of structural -sealant-glazed curtain walls. C. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls. 1. Structural-Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," Appendix X2. a. Test a minimum of six areas on each building facade. b. Repair installation areas damaged by testing. 2. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.50 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. a. Test Area: One bay wide, but not less than 30 feet, by one story of structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall. b. Perform a minimum of three tests in areas as directed by Architect. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS 08 44 23 - 10 3. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform and cyclic static-air-pressure differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft., and shall not evidence water penetration. a. Test Area: One bay wide, but not less than 30 feet, by one story of structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall. b. Perform a minimum of three tests in areas as directed by Architect. 4. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. a. Test Area: A minimum area of 75 feet by one story of structural- sealant-glazed curtain wall. D. Structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1 SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Sliding doors. 3. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. 3. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. 2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 3. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 4. Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”. D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ANSI/SDI A250.13 - Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components for Swing Door Assemblies. 3. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 4. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 5. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 6. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 7. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 8. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 2 B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams. c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein. 2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings. D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 3 hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Hurricane Resistant Openings (State of Florida): Within the State of Florida, provide copy of current State of Florida Product Approval or Metro-Dade County Notice of Acceptance (NOA) as proof of compliance that doors, frames and hardware for exterior opening assemblies have been tested and approved for use at the wind load and design pressure level requirements specified for the Project. 1. Hurricane Resistant Components (State of Florida): Within the State of Florida, provide copy of independent, third party certified listing to ANSI A250.13. B. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 4 2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards. F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures H. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 5 package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems. C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Five years for exit hardware. 3. Ten years for manual surface door closer bodies. 4. Two years for electromechanical door hardware. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 6 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants. 2.2 HANGING DEVICES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 7 a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following: a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors. 5. Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK). b. Stanley Hardware (ST). B. Concealed Hinges: Hinges mortised into door and frame so that they are concealed when the door is closed. Hinges shall be adjustable three ways; vertically, horizontally and compression (in/out) capable of a 180 degree swing. Hinges are to be non- handed. Provide fastener type, size, and quantity as recommended by hinge manufacturer for properly installing concealed hinges in the door and frame type application. Provide steel receiver for metal door and frame cutouts for receiving concealed hinges. 1. Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK). b. Soss Door Hardware. 2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES A. Concealed Quick Connect Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway housing mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware. Furnish with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1. Manufacturers: a. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE) – EL- CEPT Series. b. Securitron (SU) - EL-CEPT Series. B. Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide a connector for through- door electronic locking devices and from hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length required for each Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 8 electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction, minimum of two per electrified opening. 1. Provide one each of the following tools as part of the base bid contract: a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - Electrical Connecting Kit: QC-R001. b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - Connector Hand Tool: QC-R003. 2. Manufacturers: a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) – QC-C Series. b. Stanley Hardware (ST) – WH Series. 2.4 DOOR OPERATING TRIM A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified. 1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device location approximately six feet from the floor. 2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. 3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. 4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation. 5. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). b. Trimco (TC). B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated. 3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated. 4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets. 5. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). b. Trimco (TC). Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 9 2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard. D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. 3. Existing System: Key locks to Owner's existing system. E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10). 4. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2). 5. Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2). F. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders. G. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project. 1. Manufacturers: a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). c. Telkee (TK). Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 10 2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. 1. Extended cycle test: Locks to have been cycle tested in ordinance with ANSI/BHMA 156.13 requirements to 10 million cycles. 2. Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – ML2000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 8200 Series. B. Hurricane and Tornado Resistance Compliance: Mechanical locking and latching devices to be U.L. listed for windstorm assemblies where applicable. Provide the appropriate hurricane or tornado resistant products that have been independent third party tested, certified, and labeled to meet state and local windstorm building codes applicable to project. 2.7 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKING DEVICES A. Electromechanical Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical mortise locksets, electrified locksets to be of type and design as specified below. 1. Electrified Lock Options: Where indicated in the Hardware Sets, provide electrified options including: outside door lock/unlock trim control, latchbolt and lock/unlock status monitoring, deadbolt monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling. Support end-of-line resistors contained within the lock case. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified locksets standard as fail secure. 2. Energy Efficient Design: Provide lock bodies which have a holding current draw of 15mA maximum, and can operate on either 12 or 24 volts. Locks are to be field configurable for fail safe or fail secure operation. 3. Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ML20900 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 8200 Series. B. Hurricane and Tornado Resistance Compliance: Electromechanical locking devices to be U.L. listed for windstorm assemblies where applicable. Provide the appropriate hurricane or tornado resistant products that have been independent third party tested, certified, and labeled to meet state and local windstorm building codes applicable to project. 2.8 AUXILIARY LOCKS A. Cylindrical Deadlocks: ANSI/BHMA A156.36, Grade 1, cylindrical type deadlocks to fit standard ANSI 161 preparation and 1 3/8" to 1 3/4" thickness doors. Provide tapered collars to resist vandalism and 1" throw solid steel bolt with hardened steel roller pins. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 11 Deadlocks to be products of the same source manufacturer and keyway as other locksets. 1. Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DL3200 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 480 Series. 2.9 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. 2.10 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets. 2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements. 3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets. 4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 12 5. Flush End Caps: Provide flush end caps made of architectural metal in the same finish as the devices as in the Hardware Sets. Plastic end caps will not be acceptable. 6. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts. a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets. 7. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor. 8. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles. 9. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 10. Extended cycle test: Devices to have been cycle tested in ordinance with ANSI/BHMA 156.3 requirements to 9 million cycles. 11. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. 12. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets. 13. Hurricane and Tornado Resistance Compliance: Conventional exit devices are to be U.L. listed for windstorm assemblies where applicable. Provide the appropriate hurricane or tornado resistant products that have been independent third party tested, certified, and labeled to meet state and local windstorm building codes applicable to project. B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature. 1. Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. 2.11 DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover. 2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 13 3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. 4. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets. 5. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. 6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets. B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 certified surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide non-handed units standard. 1. Manufacturers: a. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 8300 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 1431 Series. C. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Utility Grade): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 certified surface mounted, utility grade door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6. Closers to be rack and pinion type, cast aluminum case construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide closer standard packed for regular, top-jamb, and parallel arm type mounting applications. 1. Manufacturers: a. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 1601 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 1131 Series. 2.12 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 14 4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following: a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick. 5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes. 6. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). b. Trimco (TC). 2.13 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Manufacturers: a. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). b. Trimco (TC). C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function. 1. Manufacturers: a. Rixson Door Controls (RF). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA). 2.14 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 15 jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings. C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Manufacturers: 1. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE). 2. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE). 2.15 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES A. Switching Power Supplies: Provide UL listed or recognized filtered and regulated power supplies. Provide single, dual, or multi-voltage units as shown in the hardware sets. Units must be expandable up to sixteen Class 2 power limited outputs and have thermal shutdown protection with auto-restart. Units must include the capability to incorporate a battery backup option with integral battery charging capability in addition to operating the DC load in event of line voltage failure. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment. 1. Manufacturers: a. Securitron (SU) - AQ Series. 2.16 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.17 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 16 B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series. B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 17 C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 18 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. B. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products and providing the correct option for the appropriate door type and material where more than one is presented in the hardware sets. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. C. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations: 1. MK - McKinney 2. RO - Rockwood 3. SA - Sargent 4. HS - HES 5. RF - Rixson 6. NO - Norton 7. PE - Pemko 8. OT - OTHER 9. SU - Securitron Hardware Sets Set: 1.0 Doors: 121D Description: Corridor Exit Door 3 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US10BE MK 1 Rim Exit Device (classroom) 12HC 43 8813 ETMB US10BE SA 1 Cylinder Cylinder as Required US10BE SA 1 Surface Closer CPS8301 690 NO 1 Threshold 2005DT PE 1 Gasketing 303DS x Perimeter W x H PE 1 Sweep 315DN PE Notes: All exterior doors on this project shall meet FBC standards for windstorm. The door hardware specified is listed as a basis of design. If alternate hardware is proposed, please provide third-party test results and compliance information to Architect. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 19 Set: 2.0 Doors: 116A Description: Banquet Hall Storage 8 Concealed Hinge MK80A Matte Black MK 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US10BE RO 2 Flush Bolt 557 US10BE RO 1 Fail Secure Lock RX 8271-24V LNMB US10BE SA 1 Cylinder Cylinder as Required US10BE SA 1 Surface Closer 1601 Reg/PA 690 NO 2 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO 2 Silencer 608-RKW RO 1 Card Reader by Security Contractor OT 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-CxxxP MK 1 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT 10B SU 1 Power Supply AQD Series as Required SU Notes: Operation: Doors are normally closed and locked. When presented with valid credentials, card reader unlocks door. During power failure, door stays locked (fail secure). REX switch within lock allows egress at all times. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 20 Set: 3.0 Doors: 136A, 136B Description: Access Control Storage 6 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US10BE MK 2 Surface Bolt 988 Zinc SA 1 Fail Secure Lock RX 8271-24V LNMB US10BE SA 1 Cylinder Cylinder as Required US10BE SA 1 Surface Closer CPS8301 690 NO 2 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO 1 Threshold 2005DT PE 1 Gasketing 303DS x Perimeter W x H PE 2 Sweep 315DN PE 2 Astragal 303DS x H PE 1 Card Reader by Security Contractor OT 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P MK 1 ElectroLynx Harness QC-CxxxP MK 1 Electric Power Transfer EL-CEPT 10B SU 1 Power Supply AQD Series as Required SU Notes: All exterior doors on this project shall meet FBC standards for windstorm. The door hardware specified is listed as a basis of design. If alternate hardware is proposed, please provide third-party test results and compliance information to Architect. Operation: Doors are normally closed and locked. When presented with valid credentials, card reader unlocks door. During power failure, door stays locked (fail secure). REX switch within lock allows egress at all times. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 21 Set: 4.0 Doors: 100A Description: Access Control Corridor 4 Concealed Hinge MK80A Matte Black MK 1 Storeroom Lock 8204 LNMB US10BE SA 1 Cylinder Cylinder as Required US10BE SA 1 Electric Strike 1006 KM 613 HS 1 SMART Pac Bridge Rectifier 2005M3 HS 1 Surface Closer 1601 Reg/PA 690 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO 3 Silencer 608-RKW RO 1 Card Reader by Security Contractor OT 1 Power Supply AQD Series as Required SU Notes: Operation: Door is normally closed and locked. When presented with valid credentials, card reader deactivates electric strike. During power failure, door stays locked (fail secure). Free egress at all times. Set: 5.0 Doors: 103A Description: Access Control Break Room 4 Concealed Hinge MK80A Matte Black MK 1 Storeroom Lock 8204 LNMB US10BE SA 1 Cylinder Cylinder as Required US10BE SA 1 Electric Strike 1006 KM 613 HS 1 SMART Pac Bridge Rectifier 2005M3 HS 1 Surface Closer 1601 Reg/PA 690 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO 1 Gasketing S88D x Perimeter W x H PE 1 Card Reader by Security Contractor OT 1 Power Supply AQD Series as Required SU Notes: Operation: Door is normally closed and locked. When presented with valid credentials, card reader deactivates electric strike. During power failure, door stays locked (fail secure). Free egress at all times. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 22 Set: 6.0 Doors: 107B, 130B Description: Kiosk 4 Hinge TA2714 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US10BE MK 1 Storeroom Lock 8204 LNMB US10BE SA 1 Cylinder Cylinder as Required US10BE SA 1 Surface Closer 1601 Reg/PA 690 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO 1 Gasketing S88D x Perimeter W x H PE Notes: Use only wood screws to fasten hardware items. Set: 7.0 Doors: 119A, 122A, 123A, 123B, 138A Description: Storage/Electrical/AV Room 8 Concealed Hinge MK80A Matte Black MK 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US10BE RO 2 Flush Bolt 557 US10BE RO 1 Storeroom Lock 8204 LNMB US10BE SA 1 Cylinder Cylinder as Required US10BE SA 1 Surface Closer 1601 Reg/PA 690 NO 2 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO 2 Silencer 608-RKW RO Set: 8.0 Doors: 118A, 118B Description: Electrical Room 8 Concealed Hinge MK80A Matte Black MK 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US10BE RO 2 Flush Bolt 557 US10BE RO 1 Storeroom Lock 8204 LNMB US10BE SA 1 Cylinder Cylinder as Required US10BE SA 1 Surf Overhead Stop 10-X36 613E RF 1 Surface Closer CPS1601 690 NO 2 Silencer 608-RKW RO Notes: Mount closer on active leaf and surface overhead stop on inactive leaf. Set: 9.0 Doors: 120A Description: Storage 4 Concealed Hinge MK80A Matte Black MK 1 Storeroom Lock 8204 LNMB US10BE SA 1 Cylinder Cylinder as Required US10BE SA 1 Surface Closer 1601 Reg/PA 690 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO 3 Silencer 608-RKW RO Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 23 Set: 10.0 Doors: 125A Description: Mechanical 4 Concealed Hinge MK80A Matte Black MK 1 Storeroom Lock 8204 LNMB US10BE SA 1 Cylinder Cylinder as Required US10BE SA 1 Surface Closer 1601 Reg/PA 690 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO 1 Gasketing S88D x Perimeter W x H PE Set: 11.0 Doors: 113A Description: Trash Room 4 Concealed Hinge MK80A Matte Black MK 1 Passage Latch 8215 LNMB US10BE SA 1 Surface Closer 1601 Reg/PA 690 NO 2 Kick Plate K1050 8" x LAR CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO 1 Gasketing S88D x Perimeter W x H PE Set: 12.0 Doors: 114A Description: Janitor 4 Concealed Hinge MK80A Matte Black MK 1 Storeroom Lock 8204 LNMB US10BE SA 1 Cylinder Cylinder as Required US10BE SA 1 Surface Closer 1601 Reg/PA 690 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO 3 Silencer 609 RO Notes: Use only wood screws to fasten hardware items. Set: 13.0 Doors: 112B Description: Catering Kitchen 8 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US10BE MK 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US10BE RO 1 Flush Bolt 2945 US10BE RO 1 Classroom Lock 8237 LNMB US10BE SA 1 Cylinder Cylinder as Required US10BE SA 2 Surface Closer 1601 Reg/PA 690 NO 4 Kick Plate K1050 8" x LAR CSK US32D RO 2 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO 1 Gasketing S88D x Perimeter W x H PE 1 Astragal S772D x H PE Notes: Use only wood screws to fasten hardware items. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 24 Set: 14.0 Doors: 117B, 121A Description: Banquet Hall/Corridor 4 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US10BE MK 1 Rim Exit Device (passage) 43 8815 ETMB US10BE SA 1 Surface Closer 1601 Reg/PA 690 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO 3 Silencer 608-RKW RO Set: 15.0 Doors: 108C Description: Fitness Center 4 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US10BE MK 1 Rim Exit Device (classroom) 16 43 8813 ETMB US10BE SA 2 Cylinder Cylinder as Required US10BE SA 1 Surface Closer 1601 Reg/PA 690 NO 1 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO 1 Gasketing S88D x Perimeter W x H PE Notes: Use only wood screws to fasten hardware items. Set: 16.0 Doors: 110A Description: Family Restroom 4 Concealed Hinge MK80A Matte Black MK 1 Privacy Lock LB 49 8265 LNMB US10BE SA 1 Surface Closer 1601 Reg/PA 690 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 8" x LAR CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO 3 Silencer 609 RO Notes: Use only wood screws to fasten hardware items. Set: 17.0 Doors: 111B Description: Catering Kitchen 4 Hinge TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US10BE MK 1 Passage Latch 8215 LNMB US10BE SA 1 Surface Closer CPS1601 690 NO 3 Silencer 608-RKW RO Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 25 Set: 18.0 Doors: 126A, 127A Description: Multi-stall Restroom 4 Concealed Hinge MK80A Matte Black MK 1 Push Pull 111x73C/73CL US10BE RO 1 Surface Closer 1601 Reg/PA 690 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 8" x LAR CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO 3 Silencer 609 RO Notes: Use only wood screws to fasten hardware items. Set: 19.0 Doors: 112A Description: Catering Kitchen 4 Double Acting Spring Hinge 1001 6" x 4-1/2" US10A MK 1 Deadbolt 487 US10BE SA 1 Cylinder Cylinder as Required US10BE SA 2 Push Plate 73C US10BE RO 2 Armor Plate K1050 36" x LAR CSK US32D RO 2 Wall Stop 409 or 441CU US10BE RO Set: 20.0 Doors: 111C Description: Banquet Hall/Multi-Purpose Telescopic Door 1 All Hardware by Door Supplier OT Set: 21.0 Doors: 104A, 105A, 107A Description: Muraflex Sliding Glass Door 1 All Hardware by Glass Door Supplier OT Set: 22.0 Doors: 106A, 108A, 109A, 111A Description: STC Glass Door 1 All Hardware by Glass Door Supplier OT Set: 23.0 Doors: 108B Description: Fitness Center Sliding Partition 1 All Hardware by Glass Door Supplier OT Set: 24.0 Doors: 112C Description: Bi Fold Overhead Glass Door 1 All Hardware by Overhead Glass Door Supplier OT Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 26 Set: 25.0 Doors: 117A Description: Banquet Hall Glass Door 1 All Hardware by Glass Door Supplier OT Set: 26.0 Doors: 130A Description: Kiosk Aluminum Storefront 1 Cylinder Cylinder as Required US10BE SA 1 All Hardware by Door Supplier OT Notes: Verify cylinder requirements, if any. All exterior doors on this project shall meet FBC standards for windstorm. The door hardware specified is listed as a basis of design. If alternate hardware is proposed, please provide third-party test results and compliance information to architect. Set: 27.0 Doors: E100, E-101, E-101B, E-101C, E-101D, E-117B, E-117C, E-117D Description: Existing Aluminum Storefront Doors 1 Existing Hardware to be Field Verified by Aluminum Door Supplier OT Notes: All exterior doors on this project shall meet FBC standards for windstorm. Set: 28.0 Doors: E-121B Description: Existing Delivery Entrance 1 Existing Hardware to Remain OT Notes: All exterior doors on this project shall meet FBC standards for windstorm. Set: 29.0 Doors: E-121C, E-131A, E-131B Description: Existing Doors 1 Existing Hardware to be Field Verified OT END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1 SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Curtain walls 2. Exterior Doors 3. Interior doors 4. Interior glazing B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 08 "Structural-Sealant Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for curtain walls and window walls. 2. Section 08 81 13 "Decorative Glass Glazing." 3. Section 08 83 00 "Mirrors." 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. E. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass and of 12-inch- long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. C. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass. 1. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. D. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For installers. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of acceptance of glazing assemblies by Miami-Dade County Building Code Compliance Office or evidence of compliance with performance requirements as tested by entities listed with the Florida Building Code Commission. C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Non-Uniform Color Variation: Non-uniform color variation of vacuum deposition coatings in excess of those limits described in ASTM C1376 is subject to immediate rejection by the Architect during or after installation is complete. Full size Range samples via glass mock-ups in similar lighting conditions (via glass mockup chamber which simulates interior and exterior light levels) identical to the temper and laminate of the final installed product is required prior to manufacturing release of the project glazing for each coating type specified. Color shift in the purple or red range of colors is grounds for immediate rejection without impact to cost or installation schedule. Either Green or blue, but not both, spectrum color shift is acceptable only within the non-uniformity test criteria described in ASTM C1376. B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in -service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. C. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single manufacturer for each glass type: Clear float glass, coated float glass, and laminated glass. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3 D. Source Limitations for Glass Sputter-Coated with Solar-Control Low-E Coatings: Where solar-control low-e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified fabricator program is specified, obtain sputter-coated solar- control low-e-coated glass in fabricated units from a manufacturer that is certified by coated-glass manufacturer. 1. Obtain sputter-coated solar-control low-e-coated glass in fabricated units from a manufacturer that is certified by coated-glass manufacturer for laminated assemblies where coating is in contact with the interlayer. E. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated. F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within speci fied warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4 replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each glazing product is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet governing Code and exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a. Wind Loads: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5 1) As indicated in Structural Drawings, Design Development Package issued September 12, 2014. b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1 per 1000 for glazing greater than 15 degrees off vertical. 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. c. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4 edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1 inch. 1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 2) For laminated-glass lites. d. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. D. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 4. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBNL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for the following methodologies: a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F. b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. F. Hurricane-Resistance Test Performance: 1. Comply with the Florida Building Code, 2010 Edition. 2. Provide exterior glazing units complying with performance requirements as tested by entities listed with the Florida Building Code Commission. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6 G. Energy Code Prescriptive Compliance: 1. Performance Requirements 2017 Florida Commercial Energy Code Prescriptive Compliance: a. Visible Light Transmittance: Match Existing. b. Exterior (Vis-Out) Reflectance: Match Existing. c. U Factor 0.50 overall window assembly. d. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) 0.25 overall window assembly. e. Light to Solar Gain Ratio: Match Existing. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. C. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm. D. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Arti cle. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass. E. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency or manufacturer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 7 except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality- Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. 3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass). 5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated or where required by design or by code. C. Sputter-Coated Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic-oxide or - nitride coating deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment (if any), and complying with other requirements specified. D. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with other requirements specified and with the following: 1. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Vanceva Laminate Glass 2. Interlayer: a. Ionoplast, use in following applications: 1) Basis-of-Design: SentryGlas, as manufactured by Dupont. 2) Structural and/or frameless guards. 3) Interior glazing adjacent change in floor elevation greater than 18”. 4) Exterior walls large-missile impact glazing. b. Polyvinyl butyral of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation. 3. For all interlayers, laminate lites in autoclave with heat plus pressure. 4. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 8 2.5 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomeric indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants: a. Products: 1) Dow Corning Corporation; 795 or 995. 2) GE Silicones; SilPruf. b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 50. 2. Clear, water white sealant. Neutral curing silicone a. Locations: All interior glazing vertical butt-joint applications C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test assemblies to obtain fire-protection rating. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 9 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 10 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set bl ocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 11 J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 12 C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 3.7 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE A. Glass Type GL-2: Clear laminated glass with two plies of annealed float glass with applied security film. 1. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6 mm. 2. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch. 3. Safety glazing required. 4. Security Film: Madico, Inc.; Safety & Security Window Film CL-800. 3.8 INSULATING-LAMINATED GLASS UNITS A. Insulating Laminated Low E Coated Hurricane Resistant Glass: 1. 1-5/16” Insulating Laminated Coated Glass as manufactured by Viracon. a. Exterior Glass Ply: 1/4” thick Tempered color to match Existing. b. Coating: Viracon Low E on #2 surface. c. Airspace: 1/2” aluminum black painted finish. d. Silicone: black. e. Interior Glass Ply 1: 1/4” Clear heat treated. f. Interlayer: Kind and thickness as tested in the combined assembly for hurricane resistance. g. Interior Glass Ply 2: 1/4” Clear heat treated. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING 08 81 13 - 1 SECTION 08 81 13 - DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass with decorative film overlay. 2. Glass with safety film overlay. 3. Glass with energy conservation film overlay. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 83 00 "Mirrors" for mirror glass. 1.2 DEFINITION A. Glass Thickness: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Glass Samples: For the following products, 12 inches square: 1. Each decorative film overlay on type of decorative glass. C. Decorative Glazing Schedule: List decorative glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING 08 81 13 - 2 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of decorative film overlay to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under NGA's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect decorative glass and glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install decorative glass until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings and construction contiguous with decorative glass by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Decorative Film Overlay: Translucent, dimensionally stable, cast PVC film, 2-mil- minimum thickness, with pressure-sensitive, clear adhesive back for adhering to glass and releasable protective backing. 2.2 DECORATIVE-GLASS FABRICATION A. Decorative Film Overlay: Apply squarely aligned to glass edges, uniformly smooth, and free from tears, air bubbles, wrinkles, and rough edges, in single sheet Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING 08 81 13 - 3 completely overlaying or in pattern indicated on Drawings to the back face of clean glass, according to manufacturer's written instructions, including surface preparation and application temperature limitations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine decorative-glass framing members, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Minimum required face or edge clearances. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Examine glazing units to locate orientation of outer surfaces as indicated on Drawings. Label or mark units as needed so that surface orientation is readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 3.4 DECORATIVE GLASS SCHEDULE A. Decorative Glass GL-1: Glass with decorative film overlay. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Graphics. b. FDC Graphic Films, Inc. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING 08 81 13 - 4 2. Use: Suitable for exterior and interior applications. 3. Outdoor Durability: Not less than five years. 4. Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 5. Location: Interior laminated glass. B. Decorative Glass GL-2: Glass with safety film overlay. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. 2. Use: Suitable for exterior and interior applications. 3. Outdoor Durability: Not less than five years. 4. Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 5. Location: Interior glass. C. Decorative Glass GL-3: Glass with energy conservation film overlay. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. 2. Use: Suitable for exterior and interior applications. 3. Outdoor Durability: Not less than five years. 4. Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 5. Location: Exterior insulating glass. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 MIRRORS 08 83 00 - 1 SECTION 08 83 00 - MIRRORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors with schedule as follows: 1. HD-09, Annealed monolithic glass mirrors 2. MI, Film-backed glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions. B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachment details. C. Samples: For each type of the following: 1. Mirrors: 12 inches square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges. 2. Mirror Trim: 12 inches long. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 MIRRORS 08 83 00 - 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 1. Warranty Period: Five. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Avalon Glass and Mirror Company. 2. Binswanger Glass. 3. Donisi Mirror Company. 4. D & W Incorporated. 5. Gardner Glass Products, Inc. 6. Glasswerks LA, Inc. 7. Guardian Industries Corp. 8. Independent Mirror Industries, Inc. 9. Lenoir Mirror Company. 10. National Glass Industries. 11. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions. 12. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc. 13. Walker Glass Co., Ltd. B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 MIRRORS 08 83 00 - 3 C. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single source. 2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS A. Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503. B. MI-1, Annealed Monolithic Glass Mirrors: Mirror Glazing Quality, clear. 1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm. C. HD-09, Safety Glazing Products: For film-backed mirrors, provide products that comply with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges. C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Franklin International. b. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. c. Liquid Nails Adhesive. d. Macco Adhesives. e. Palmer Products Corporation. f. Pecora Corporation. g. Royal Adhesives & Sealants, LLC. 2. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. D. Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer. 2.4 MIRROR HARDWARE A. Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover edges of mirrors in a single piece. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 MIRRORS 08 83 00 - 4 1. Bottom and Side Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Andscot Company, Inc. 2) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. 3) Stylmark, Inc. 2. Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 1 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Andscot Company, Inc. 2) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. 3) Stylmark, Inc. 3. Finish: Clear bright anodized. B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield, expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate mirrors in the shop to greatest extent possible. B. Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. C. Mirror Edge Treatment: 1. Flat polished. 2. Beveled polished edge of width shown where shown. 3. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating. 4. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes. D. Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with adhesive coating over mirror backing paint, as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer, to produce a surface free of bubbles, blisters, and other imperfections. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 MIRRORS 08 83 00 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of existing finishes or primers with mirror mastic. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. 1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual" and "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." B. Provide a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. C. Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. 1. Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch thick by 4 inches long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, two slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch wide by 3/8 inch long at bottom channel. 2. Install mastic as follows: a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrors and backing material. b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 MIRRORS 08 83 00 - 6 c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. C. Maintain environmental conditions that prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. D. Clean exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Clean mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 1 SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. 3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 40 00 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load- bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Studs and Runners: Provide documentation that framing members' certification is according to SIFA's "Code Compliance Certification Program for Cold-Formed Steel Structural and Non-Structural Framing Members." 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For firestop tracks, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 2 C. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/240 of the wall height based on horizontal loading of 5 lbf/sq. ft. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent crac king of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) ClarkDietrich Building Systems; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series. 4) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track. D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance- rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System. b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0598 inch. F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 3 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel. G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch. H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.0329 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire. I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. MRI Steel Framing, LLC. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 4 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension. c. United State Gypsum Company; Drywall Suspension System. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow- metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 5 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened. C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 6 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire- resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closur es and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire- resistance-rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. E. Z-Shaped Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 7 B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross - furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 1 SECTION 09 24 00 - CEMENT PLASTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior vertical plasterwork (stucco). 2. Exterior horizontal and nonvertical plasterwork (stucco). 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for each substrate and finish texture indicated for cement plastering, including accessories. a. Size: 100 sq. ft. in surface area. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover, and keep them dr y and protected against damage from weather, moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 2 B. Exterior Plasterwork: 1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. 2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F. 3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, cold-rolled carbon-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, p rovide products by one of the following: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company . b. CEMCO. c. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. d. MarinoWARE. e. Phillips Manufacturing Co. 2. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring, 2.5 lb/sq. yd.. 3. 3/8-Inch Rib Lath: 3.4 lb/sq. yd.. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063, and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Metal Accessories: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company . b. CEMCO. c. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. d. MarinoWARE. e. Phillips Manufacturing Co. 2. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from stainless sheet. 3. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating. 4. External- (Outside-) Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating. 5. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 3 a. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. 6. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc; square-edged style; with expanded flanges. 7. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc; one-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 8. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc; folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges. 9. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc; formed to produce slip- joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable from 1/4 to 5/8 inch wide; with perforated flanges. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in cement plaster. C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. D. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475- inch diameter unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I. B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. 2.5 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials. B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows: 1. Portland Cement Mixes: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 4 a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. C. Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes: 1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and 1-1/2 to 2 parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defec ts, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work. B. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. C. Prepare smooth, solid substrates for plaster according to ASTM C 926. 3.3 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat-diamond-mesh lath. 2. Flat-Ceiling Framing: Install 3/8-inch rib lath. 3.4 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for External (Outside) Corners: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 5 1. Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 2. Install lath-type, interior-corner reinforcement at interior locations. C. Control Joints: Locate as approved by Architect for visual effect and as follows: 1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes: a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. b. Horizontal and Other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. 2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c. 3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length -to-width ratios of not greater than 2-1/2:1. 4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change. 3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. 1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces when measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface. 2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. 3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field -applied finishes indicated. B. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for three-coat plasterwork with 3/4-inch total thickness, as follows: 1. Portland cement mixes. C. Soffits; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for three-coat plasterwork and having 1/2-inch total thickness, as follows: 1. Portland cement mixes. D. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float finish to match Architect's sample. 3.6 PLASTER REPAIRS A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CEMENT PLASTERING 09 24 00 - 6 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work after plastering is complete. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1 SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corp. c. Continental Building Products, LLC. d. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple-Inland. h. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. B. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corp. c. Continental Building Products, LLC. d. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple-Inland. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 3 h. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corp. c. Continental Building Products, LLC. d. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple-Inland. h. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Impact-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corp. c. Continental Building Products, LLC. d. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple-Inland. h. USG Corporation. 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Surface Abrasion: Meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements. 4. Surface Indentation: Meets or exceeds Level 2 requirements. 5. Single-Drop Soft-Body Impact: Meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements. 6. Hard-Body Impact: Meets or exceeds Level 3 requirements according to test in Annex A1. 7. Long Edges: Tapered. 8. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. E. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold- resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 4 b. CertainTeed Corp. c. Continental Building Products, LLC. d. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple-Inland. h. USG Corporation. 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. C-Cure. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. Custom Building Products. d. FinPan, Inc. e. James Hardie Building Products, Inc. f. National Gypsum Company. g. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. B. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. Continental Building Products, LLC. d. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. e. PABCO Gypsum. f. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific. g. USG Corporation. 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 5 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. Expansion (control) joint. d. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. B. CG-3 and 4, Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated or comparable products by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Corporation. b. Gordon Inc. c. Pittcon Industries. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: As indicated. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 6 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound or high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 3. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound. 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Accumetric LLC. b. Grabber Construction Products. c. Pecora Corporation. d. Specified Technologies, Inc. e. USG Corporation. 2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation." Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applicati ons where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 8 H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each p anel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 3. Impact-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Mold-Resistant Type: Interior face of exterior walls and where shown. 5. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Exterior soffits. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 9 member with base-layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. D. Curved Surfaces: 1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. 2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c. 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at showers, tubs, and where indicated. B. Water-Resistant Backing Board: Install where indicated with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following l ocations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings. D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 10 gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3: For surfaces receiving wallcoverings where lighting conditions are not critical. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting." 5. Level 5: For surfaces receiving gloss and semigloss enamels and other surfaces subject to severe lighting. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting." b. Provide Level 5 finish consisting of drying-type, all-purpose compound skim coat, sand and prime, for surfaces behind visual display wall coverings. E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. F. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 11 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 1 SECTION 09 30 13 - CERAMIC TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Porcelain tile. 2. Pebble Tile. 3. Stone thresholds. 4. Crack isolation membrane. 5. Metal edge strips. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. For ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide samples of each color blend. 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 3. Stone thresholds. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 2 1. Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America. 2. Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard-grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. Ceramic Tile Type: PT-1, porcelain tile. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings. 2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face Size: As shown. 4. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 5. Thickness: As shown. 6. Face: Plain with square edges. 7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 8. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated. 9. Grout Color: As indicated. B. Ceramic Tile Type: PT-2, porcelain tile. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings. 2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face Size: As shown. 4. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 5. Thickness: As shown. 6. Face: Plain with square edges. 7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 8. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated. 9. Grout Color: As indicated. C. Ceramic Tile Type: PT-3, porcelain tile. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 3 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings. 2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face Size: As shown. 4. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 5. Thickness: As shown. 6. Face: Plain with square edges. 7. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated. 8. Grout Color: As indicated. D. Ceramic Tile Type: PT-4, porcelain tile. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings. 2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face Size: As shown. 4. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 5. Thickness: As shown. 6. Face: Plain with square edges. 7. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated. 8. Grout Color: As indicated. E. Ceramic Tile Type: PT-5, porcelain tile. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings. 2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face Size: As shown. 4. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 5. Thickness: As shown. 6. Face: Plain with square edges. 7. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated. 8. Grout Color: As indicated. F. Pebble Tile Type: PP-1, pebble tiles. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Island Stone; Perfect Pebble. 2. Face Size: As shown. 3. Thickness: As shown. 4. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated. 5. Grout Color: As indicated. 2.3 THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 4 B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503/C 503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 according to ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241/C 241M and with honed finish. 1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. 2.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Durabond D-222 Duraguard Membrane. b. C-Cure; CureLastic 949. c. Custom Building Products; RedGard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane. d. Jamo Inc.; Waterproof. e. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete Hydro Ban. f. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic AquaDefense. g. Merkrete Systems, Parex USA, Inc.; Fracture Guard 5000. h. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1132. i. TEC, H. B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.; HydraFlex - Waterproofing Crack Isolation Membrane. 2.5 SETTING MATERIALS A. Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ardex Americas. b. Boiardi Products Corporation; a QEP company. c. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. d. Bostik, Inc. e. C-Cure. f. Custom Building Products. g. Jamo Inc. h. Laticrete International, Inc. i. MAPEI Corporation. j. Merkrete Systems; Parex USA, Inc. k. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. l. Summitville Tiles, Inc. m. TEC; H. B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. 2. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 5 2.6 GROUT MATERIALS A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc. b. Boiardi Products Corporation; a QEP company. c. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. d. Bostik, Inc. e. C-Cure. f. Custom Building Products. g. Jamo Inc. h. Laticrete International, Inc. i. MAPEI Corporation. j. Merkrete Systems; Parex USA, Inc. k. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. l. Summitville Tiles, Inc. m. TEC; H. B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. 2. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; white zinc alloy exposed-edge material. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Blanke Corporation. b. Ceramic Tool Company, Inc. c. Schluter Systems L.P. C. CG-3, Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated or comparable products by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Corporation. b. Gordon Inc. c. Pittcon Industries. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 6 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: As indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 7 a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. c. Tile floors consisting of rib-backed tiles. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penet rations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting bed thickness so that tiles are flush. F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Porcelain Tile: As indicated. H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. J. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in modified dry-set mortar (thinset). 2. Do not extend waterproofing or crack isolation membrane under thresholds set in modified dry-set mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on waterproofing or crack isolation membrane with elastomeric sealant. K. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated and where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CERAMIC TILING 09 30 13 - 8 L. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. 3.4 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F125-Partial; thinset mortar on crack isolation membrane. a. Ceramic Tile Type: PT-1, PT-2, PP-1. b. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. B. Interior Wall Installations, Masonry: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W202; thinset mortar. a. Ceramic Tile Type: PT-5. b. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. C. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F; thinset mortar on cementitious backer units over vapor-retarder membrane. a. Ceramic Tile Type: PT-3, PT-4. b. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLASS MOSAIC TILING 09 30 23 - 1 SECTION 09 30 23 - GLASS MOSAIC TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass tile. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.2 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. For glass mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide full sheets of each color blend. 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLASS MOSAIC TILING 09 30 23 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America. 2. Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of glass tile installation. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.2 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLASS MOSAIC TILING 09 30 23 - 3 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain glass tile from single source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Glass Tile Standard: Provide glass tile that complies with ANSI A137.2 for types and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. PT-6, Glass Tile Type: Factory-mounted mosaic glass tile. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLASS MOSAIC TILING 09 30 23 - 4 a. American Marazzi Tile, Inc. b. American Olean Corporation. c. Crossville, Inc. d. Epro Tile, Inc. e. Florida Tile, Inc. f. Interceramic. g. Interstyle Ceramic & Glass. h. Jeffrey Court Inc. i. Mosaicos Venecianos de Mexico. j. Seneca Tiles, Inc. k. Sonoma Tilemakers. 2. Module Size: As shown. 3. Sizing Category: Standard. 4. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated. 5. Grout Color: As indicated. 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS A. Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ardex Americas. b. Boiardi Products Corporation; a QEP company. c. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. d. Bostik, Inc. e. C-Cure. f. Custom Building Products. g. Jamo Inc. h. Laticrete International, Inc. i. MAPEI Corporation. j. Merkrete Systems; Parex USA, Inc. k. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. l. Summitville Tiles, Inc. m. TEC; H. B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. 2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. 2.5 GROUT MATERIALS A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc. b. Boiardi Products Corporation; a QEP company. c. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLASS MOSAIC TILING 09 30 23 - 5 d. Bostik, Inc. e. C-Cure. f. Custom Building Products. g. Jamo Inc. h. Laticrete International, Inc. i. MAPEI Corporation. j. Merkrete Systems; Parex USA, Inc. k. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. l. Summitville Tiles, Inc. m. TEC; H. B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. 2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLASS MOSAIC TILING 09 30 23 - 6 3.2 PREPARATION A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 GLASS TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting -bed thickness so that tiles are flush. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Mosaic Glass Tile: 1/16 inch. G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 GLASS MOSAIC TILING 09 30 23 - 7 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging. B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR GLASS TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs: 1. Glass Tile Installation: TCNA W245 or TCNA W248; thinset mortar on glass- mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board. a. Glass Tile Type: PT-6. b. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 1 SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 2.2 ACP, ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 2 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M. B. ACP-1 and 3, Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. C. ACP-2, Wide-Face, Aluminum-Capped, Double-Web, Hot-Dip Galvanized, G60, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold -rolled steel sheet; hot-dip galvanized, G60 coating designation; with prefinished, 15/16-inch- wide aluminum caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Cap Finish: Painted white. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension -system runners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated. B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 3 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. 2. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WOOD PANEL CEILINGS 09 54 26 - 1 SECTION 09 54 26 - WOOD PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid Wood and Wood veneer ceiling panels. 2. Exposed grid suspension system. 3. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, wall angle moldings and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 51 13 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of ceiling unit and suspension system required. B. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Samples: Minimum 3-1/2 inch or 5-1/2 inch samples of specified panel; 8 inch long samples of exposed wall molding and suspension system, including main runner. D. Shop Drawings: Illustrating the layout and details of the ceilings. Show locations of items that are to be coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide ceiling panel units and grid components by a single manufacturer. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested by HPVA (Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association) under the test standard ASTM E-84 tunnel test and complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A products. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WOOD PANEL CEILINGS 09 54 26 - 2 a. Flame Spread: 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less. C. Woodworking Standards: Manufacturer must comply with specified provisions of Architectural Woodworking Institute quality standards. D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate ceiling work with installers of related work including, but not limited to building insulation, wet work i.e. gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store the wood veneer ceiling panels in a dry interior location in their cartons prior to installation to avoid damage. Store the ceiling panel cartons in a flat, horizontal position. Do not remove the protectors between the panels until installation. B. Do not store in unconditioned spaces with humidity greater than 55 percent or lower than 25 percent relative humidity and temperatures lower than 50 degrees F or greater than 86 degrees F. Do not expose the wood veneer ceiling panels to extreme temperatures, for example, close to a heating source or near a window with direct sunlight. C. Handle ceiling units carefully to avoid chipped edges or damage to units in any way. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Prior to installation, the wood veneer ceiling materials are required to reach room temperature and have stabilized moisture content for a minimum of 72 hours. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior architectural woodwork until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 85 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Wood Veneer Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to: 1. Ceiling Panels: Defects in materials or factory workmanship. 2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturing defects. B. Warranty Period: 1. Wood veneer panels: One (1) year from date of installation. 2. Grid: One (1) year from date of installation. C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WOOD PANEL CEILINGS 09 54 26 - 3 concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.8 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. 1. Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 5.0 percent of amount installed. 2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed suspension component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide product indicated. 2.2 WOOD VENEER CEILING UNITS A. Ceiling Panels Type AP: 1. Surface Texture: Smooth. 2. Composition: Fire-retardant Particle Board. 3. Species/Finish: As indicated. 4. Size: As indicated. 5. Profile: As indicated. 6. Edge Banding and Trim: To match face veneer. 7. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423, Classified with UL label on product carton 0.50. B. Ceiling Accessories: 1. Suspension System: Provide system indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, terrazzo, plastering and painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out. B. Proper designs for both supply air and return air, maintenance of the HVAC filters and building interior space are essential to minimize soiling. Before starting the HVAC Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WOOD PANEL CEILINGS 09 54 26 - 4 system, make sure supply air is properly filtered and the building interior is free of construction dust. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install suspension system and panels in compliance with ASTM C636; CISCA Seismic Guidelines; approved construction drawings; with the authorities having jurisdiction; and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Replace damaged and broken panels. B. Clean exposed surfaces of ceilings panels, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRETCHED-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS 09 54 43 - 1 SECTION 09 54 43 - STRETCHED-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes site-upholstered ceiling systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 54 46 "Fabric-Wrapped Ceiling Panels" for decorative, fabric- wrapped ceiling panels that are not required to be tested for acoustical performance and for coordinated requirements for fabric. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. B. SAA: Sound absorption average. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include fabric facing, frame edge and trim, core material, and mounting indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each stretched-fabric system. 1. Include reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and installation and system details. 2. Include details at joints and corners; and details at ceiling intersections and intersections with walls. Indicate frame-edge profile and core materials. 3. Include details at cutouts and penetrations for other work. 4. Include direction of fabric weave and pattern matching. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Fabric: Full-width by approximately 36-inch- long Sample, but not smaller than required to show complete pattern repeat, from dye lot to be used for the Work, and with specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of fabric. 2. Frame System: 12-inch- square Sample(s) showing each edge profile and corner. 3. Core Material: 12-inch- square Sample at corner. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRETCHED-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS 09 54 43 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Electrical outlets. 2. Suspended ceiling components above stretched-fabric systems. 3. Structural members to which suspension devices will be attached. 4. Items penetrating or covered by stretched-fabric systems including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Alarms. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels. 5. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to stretched-fabric systems. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For stretched-fabric systems to include in maintenance manuals. Include fabric manufacturer's written cleaning, stain-removal, restretching, and reupholstering instructions. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fabric: For each fabric, color, and pattern installed, furnish length equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 sq. yd., full width of bolt. 2. Framing and Related Installation Items: Furnish manufacturer's full-length units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 5 units, including unopened adhesives. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRETCHED-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS 09 54 43 - 3 B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings. Include intersection of wall and ceiling, corners, and perimeters. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with fabric and stretched-fabric system manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling. B. Deliver materials in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry place with adequate air circulation. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install stretched-fabric systems until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Lighting: Do not install stretched-fabric systems until a permanent level of lighting is provided on surfaces to receive stretched-fabric systems. C. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect stretched-fabric systems from exposure to airborne odors, such as tobacco smoke, and install systems under conditions fre e from odor contamination of ambient air. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of stretched-fabric systems that fail in performance, materials, or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Acoustical performance. b. Fabric sagging, distorting, or releasing from panel edge. c. Warping of core. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRETCHED-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS 09 54 43 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain stretched-fabric ceiling systems specified in this Section and stretched-fabric wall systems specified in Section 09 77 13 "Stretched- Fabric Wall Systems" from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Stretched-fabric ceiling systems shall comply with "Surface-Burning Characteristics" or "Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency on systems prepared according to ASTM E 2573. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 286. 2.3 STRETCHED-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS A. AWP, Stretched-Fabric Ceiling System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of facing material stretched tightly over a frame and core material and secured in the frame. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Novawall Systems, Inc.; EcoTRACK or comparable product by one of the following: a. Accutrack Systems. b. Architectural Fabric Systems, Inc. c. SoftWalls, Inc. d. Whisper Walls. 2. Core: Glass-fiber board. 3. Frame Edge: Profile as shown. a. Fabric-Insertion Point: Bottom load. b. Nominal Frame Thickness: Match nominal core thickness. 4. Frame Color: Natural. 5. Facing Material: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Acoustical Performance: Sound absorption NRC or SAA of 0.75 according to ASTM C 423 for Type A mounting according to ASTM E 795. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRETCHED-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS 09 54 43 - 5 7. Nominal Overall System Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Core Materials: 1. Glass-Fiber Board: ASTM C 612, of type standard with manufacturer; nominal density of 6 to 7 lb/cu. ft., unfaced, and dimensionally stable, molded rigid board; and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. B. Frame Construction: Manufacturer's standard, continuous, extruded plastic frame (track). C. Facing Material: Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern as indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Installation Products: Concealed on back of system, recommended by stretched- fabric system manufacturer to support weight of system, fabric tension, and as follows: 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. 2. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fabric, materials, substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of stretched-fabric systems. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each area and establish layout of panels and joints of sizes indicated on Drawings within a given area. B. Before installation, allow fabric to adjust and become stable in spaces where it will be installed according to stretched-fabric system manufacturer's written instructions. Acclimatize fabric for minimum of 24 hours at ambient temperature and humidity conditions indicated for spaces when occupied for their intended use. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRETCHED-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS 09 54 43 - 6 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install stretched-fabric systems according to system manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Provide continuous perimeter frames of each profile indicated, designed to be inconspicuous when covered by fabric facing, with smooth edges, and with surface finish that will not telegraph through fabric facing. 2. Install framing around penetrations. 3. Tightly fit framing to adjacent construction and securely attach to substrate. 4. Install core material with full coverage, flush with face of stretched-fabric system frame. 5. Attach frame and core to substrate with adhesive or fasteners, or both, to support system and prevent deformation of components. 6. Install stretched-fabric systems true in plane and with fabric square to the grain. 7. Install jointed panels with butt joints and reveals as indicated. B. Fabric Installation: Apply fabric monolithically in continuous run over area, without joints or reveals, except where panel joints or midspan frames are indicated. 1. Fabric Direction: Run fabric as indicated on Drawings. 2. Fabric Sequence: Maintain sequence of fabric drops; match and level fabric pattern and grain. 3. Fabric Alignment: Install fabric with patterns or directional weaves so pattern or weave aligns with adjacent panels. 4. Fabric Seams: Sewn seams are not permitted. 5. Stretch and secure fabric to frame edges and so frame and frame attachment method are concealed by fabric unless otherwise indicated. 6. Stretch fabric tightly and square without puckers, ripples, or distortions. Acclimatize and restretch if recommended by stretched-fabric system manufacturer. Repair distortions, wrinkles, and sagging. 3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Edge Straightness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch in 48 inches. B. Variation from Alignment with Surfaces: Plus or minus 1/16 inch in 48 inches, noncumulative. C. Variation from Level or Slope: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. D. Variation of Joint Width: Not more than 1/16 inch in 48 inches from hairline or reveal line, noncumulative. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials. B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRETCHED-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS 09 54 43 - 7 END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09 64 66 - 1 SECTION 09 64 66 - WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes wood athletic flooring. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for wood athletic flooring. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor assembly, include the following: 1. Plans, sections, and installation details. 2. Expansion provisions and trim details. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of wood athletic flooring and accessory required; approximately 12 inches long and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. 1. Include Sample sets showing the full range of normal color and texture variations expected in wood flooring. 2. Include Sample sets showing finishes applied to wood flooring. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For wood athletic flooring and finish systems to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual that has been app roved by MFMA as an accredited Installer according to the MFMA Accreditation Program. 1. Installer responsibilities include installation and field finishing of wood athletic flooring components and accessories, and application of game lines and markers. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for installation. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09 64 66 - 2 1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver floor assembly materials in unopened cartons or bundles. B. Protect wood from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood components until after concrete, masonry, plaster, ceramic tile, and similar wet -work is complete and dry. C. Store wood components in a dry, warm, well-ventilated, weathertight location and in a horizontal position. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Conditioning period begins not less than seven days before wood athletic flooring installation, is continuous through installation, and continues not less than seven days after installation. 1. Environmental Conditioning: Maintain ambient temperature between 65 and 75 deg F and relative humidity planned for building occupants, but not less than 35 percent or more than 50 percent, in spaces to receive wood athletic flooring during the conditioning period. 2. Wood Conditioning: Move wood components into spaces where they will be installed, no later than beginning of the conditioning period. a. Do not install wood athletic flooring until wood components adjust to relative humidity of, and are at same temperature as, spaces where they are to be installed. b. Open sealed packages to allow wood components to acclimatize immediately on moving wood components into spaces in which they wi ll be installed. B. After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants. C. Install wood athletic flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09 64 66 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kahrs Flooring; European Naturals Collection, Oak Sienna 153N38EK50KW 0 or comparable product acceptable to the Architect. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System Type: Floating, glue down. B. Overall System Height: 5/8 inches. 2.3 FLOORING MATERIALS A. Oak Flooring: European Oak, three strip design, silk matte finish, slight color variation. B. Wood species: White Oak. C. Core material: Pine/Spruce lamella. D. Design: 3-strip. E. Grading: Variation (Town). F. Dimensions: 7-7/8" x 95-3/8" x 5/8". 2.4 FINISHES A. Floor-Finish System: As standard with flooring manufacturer. 1. Natural/Stained: Natural. 2. Surface treatment: Silk matte finish. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard for application indicated. 1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 100 g/L or less. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09 64 66 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory c onditions have been corrected. C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor- emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Concrete Slabs: 1. Grind high spots and fill low spots on concrete substrates to produce a maximum 1/8-inch deviation in any direction when checked with a 10-foot straight edge. 2. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. 3. Remove coatings including curing compounds and other substances on substrates that are incompatible with installation adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; use mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. B. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with wood athletic flooring manufacturer's written instructions. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09 64 66 - 5 B. Pattern: Lay flooring parallel with long dimension of space to be floored unless otherwise indicated. C. Expansion Spaces: Provide as indicated, but not less than that required by manufacturer's written instructions and MFMA's written recommendations at walls and other obstructions, and at interruptions and terminations of flooring. D. Installation Tolerances: 1/8 inch in 10 feet of variance from level. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect wood athletic flooring during remainder of construction period to allow finish to cure and to ensure that flooring and finish are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Do not cover flooring after finishing until finish reaches full cure and not before seven days after applying last finish coat. 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over flooring. Protect fully cured floor finishes and surfaces with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over flooring. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESILIENT WALL BASE 09 65 13 - 1 SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT WALL BASE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermoset-rubber base. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RB, THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous). 1. Style and Location: a. Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet. b. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient floor coverings. C. Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: As indicated on Drawings. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Job formed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed. H. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESILIENT WALL BASE 09 65 13 - 2 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement- based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. C. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESILIENT WALL BASE 09 65 13 - 3 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Miter corners to minimize open joints. 3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING 09 66 23 - 1 SECTION 09 66 23 - RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thin-set, epoxy-resin terrazzo flooring. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed with terrazzo. 2. Section 09 67 23 "Resinous Flooring" for decorative resinous flooring systems applied as self-leveling slurries or as troweled or screeded mortars. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include terrazzo installation requirements. Include plans, sections, component details, and relationship to other work. Show layout of the following: 1. Divider strips. 2. Control-joint strips. 3. Accessory strips. 4. Terrazzo patterns. C. Samples for Initial Selection: NTMA's "Terrazzo Color Palette" showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each terrazzo type. D. Samples for Verification: For each type, material, color, and pattern of terrazzo and accessory required showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Label each terrazzo Sample to identify manufacturer's matrix color and aggregate types, sizes, and proportions. Prepare Samples of same thickness and from same material to be used for the Work, in sizes indicated below: 1. Terrazzo: 6-inch-square Samples. 2. Accessories: 6-inch-long Samples of each exposed strip item required. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. C. Preinstallation moisture-testing reports. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING 09 66 23 - 2 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For terrazzo to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Engage an installer who is a contractor member of NTMA. 2. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by terrazzo manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's products. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for terrazzo including accessories. a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. of typical poured-in-place flooring and base condition for each color and pattern in locations directed by Architect. b. Include base. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in supplier's original wrappings and containers, labeled with source's or manufacturer's name, material or product brand name, and lot number if any. B. Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting terrazzo installation. B. Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during terrazzo installation. C. Close spaces to traffic during terrazzo application and for not less than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period. D. Control and collect water and dust produced by grinding operations. Protect adjacent construction from detrimental effects of grinding operations. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING 09 66 23 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary terrazzo materials from single source from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. B. Source Limitations for Aggregates: Obtain each color, grade, type, and variety of granular materials from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NTMA Standards: Comply with NTMA's written recommendations for terrazzo type indicated unless more stringent requirements are specified. 2.3 RTZ, EPOXY-RESIN TERRAZZO A. Epoxy-Resin Terrazzo: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for matrix and aggregate proportions and mixing. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Crossfield Products Corp., Dex-O-Tex Division; Cheminert. b. Doyle Dickerson Terrazo, Inc.; Terrazzco EZpour Epoxy. c. Key Resin Company; Key Epoxy Terrazzo. d. Master Terrazzo Technologies LLC; Morricite. e. Quadrant Chemical Corporation; Quadset Epoxy Terrazzo. f. Sherwin Williams Company, General Polymers; Terrazzo 1100. g. Terrazzo & Marble Supply Companies; Terroxy Resin Systems. See "Mix Design" Article in the Evaluations for a comparison of NTMA series.Mix Color and Pattern: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [As selected by Architect from NTMA's "Terrazzo Color Palette" EI Series] [As selected by Architect from NTMA's "Terrazzo Color Palette" EII Series] [As selected by Architect from NTMA's "Terrazzo Color Palette" EIII Series] [As selected by Architect from NTMA's "Terrazzo Color Palette" EIV Series] [Match Architect's sample] [Match existing] <Insert NTMA designation or custom mix>.. C. Materials: 1. Moisture-Vapor-Emission-Control Membrane: Two-component, high-solids, high-density, low-odor, epoxy-based membrane-forming product produced by epoxy terrazzo manufacturer that reduces moisture emission from concrete substrate to not more than 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING 09 66 23 - 4 2. Substrate-Crack-Suppression Membrane: Product of terrazzo-resin manufacturer, having minimum 120 percent elongation potential according to ASTM D 412. 3. Primer: Manufacturer's product recommended for substrate and use indicated. 4. Epoxy-Resin Matrix: Manufacturer's standard recommended for use indicated and in color required for mix indicated. a. Physical Properties without Aggregates: 1) Hardness: 60 to 85 per ASTM D 2240, Shore D. 2) Minimum Tensile Strength: 3000 psi per ASTM D 638 for a 2-inch specimen made using a "C" die per ASTM D 412. 3) Minimum Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi per ASTM D 695, Specimen B cylinder. 4) Chemical Resistance: No deleterious effects by contaminants listed below after seven-day immersion at room temperature per ASTM D 1308. a) Distilled water. b) Mineral water. c) Isopropanol. d) Ethanol. e) 0.025 percent detergent solution. f) 1.0 percent soap solution. g) 5 percent acetic acid. h) 10 percent sodium hydroxide. i) 10 percent hydrochloric acid. j) 30 percent sulfuric acid. b. Physical Properties with Aggregates: For terrazzo blended according to manufacturer's recommendations with one part epoxy resin with three parts marble aggregate consisting of 60 percent No. 1 chips and 40 percent No. 0 chips that is ground and grouted to a 1/4-inch nominal thickness, and cured for 7 days at 75 deg F plus or minus 2 deg F and at 50 percent plus or minus 2 percent relative humidity. 1) Flammability: Self-extinguishing, maximum extent of burning 1/4 inch according to ASTM D 635. 2) Thermal Coefficient of Linear Expansion: 0.0025 inch/inch per deg F according to ASTM C 531. 5. Aggregates: Comply with NTMA gradation standards for mix indicated and contain no deleterious or foreign matter. a. Abrasion and Impact Resistance: Less than 40 percent loss per ASTM C 131/C 131M. b. 24-Hour Absorption Rate: Less than 0.75 percent. c. Dust Content: Less than 1.0 percent by weight. 6. Finishing Grout: Resin based. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING 09 66 23 - 5 2.4 STRIP MATERIALS A. Thin-Set Divider Strips: L-type angle in depth required for topping thickness indicated. 1. Material: [As indicated] [White-zinc alloy] [Brass] [Aluminum] [Plastic, in color selected from full range of industry colors] <Insert requirements>. 2. Top Width: 1/8 inch. B. Control-Joint Strips: Separate, double L-type angles, positioned back to back, that match material and color of divider strips and in depth required for topping thickness indicated. C. Accessory Strips: Match divider-strip width, material, and color unless otherwise indicated. Use the following types of accessory strips as required to provide a complete installation: 1. Base-bead strips for exposed top edge of terrazzo base. 2. Edge-bead strips for exposed edges of terrazzo. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Strip Adhesive: Epoxy-resin adhesive recommended by adhesive manufacturer for this use. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. B. Anchoring Devices: 1. Strips: Provide mechanical anchoring devices or adhesives for strip materials as recommended by manufacturer and as required for secure attachment to substrate. C. Patching and Fill Material: Terrazzo manufacturer's resinous product approved and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. D. Joint Compound: Terrazzo manufacturer's resinous product approved and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. E. Resinous Matrix Terrazzo Cleaner: Chemically neutral cleaner with pH factor between 7 and 10 that is biodegradable, phosphate free, and recommended by sealer manufacturer for use on terrazzo type indicated. F. Sealer: Slip- and stain-resistant, penetrating-type sealer that is chemically neutral; does not affect terrazzo color or physical properties; and is recommended by sealer manufacturer. 1. Surface Friction: Not less than 0.6 according to ASTM D 2047. 2. Acid-Base Properties: With pH factor between 7 and 10. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING 09 66 23 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting per formance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions, including levelness tolerances, have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances, including oil, grease, and curing compounds, that might impair terrazzo bond. Provide clean, dry, and neutral substrate for terrazzo application. B. Concrete Slabs: 1. Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with terrazzo. a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup. b. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to terrazzo manufacturer's written instructions. c. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to terrazzo manufacturer's written instructions. C. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Preinstallation Moisture Testing: 1. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests. 2. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Moisture-Vapor-Emission Test: Maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours when tested according to ASTM F 1869 using anhydrous calcium chloride. b. Relative Humidity Test: Maximum 75 percent relative humidity measurement when tested according to ASTM F 2170 using in-situ probes. 3. Proceed with terrazzo installation only after concrete substrates pass moisture testing or after installation of moisture-vapor-emission-control membrane on substrate areas that fail testing. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING 09 66 23 - 7 E. Moisture-Vapor-Emission-Control Membrane: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install concrete substrates that fail preinstallation moisture testing. F. Substrate-Crack-Suppression Membrane: Install to isolate and suppress substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Prepare and prefill substrate cracks with membrane material. 2. Install membrane at substrate cracks in areas to receive terrazzo. G. Protect other work from water and dust generated by grinding operations. Control water and dust to comply with environmental protection regulations. 1. Erect and maintain temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to limit water damage and dust migration and to ensure adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions during installation. 3.3 EPOXY-RESIN TERRAZZO INSTALLATION A. Comply with NTMA's written recommendations for terrazzo and accessory installation. B. Strip Materials: 1. Divider and Control-Joint Strips: a. Locate divider strips in locations indicated. b. Install control-joint strips back to back and directly above concrete-slab control joints and in locations indicated. c. Install control-joint strips with 1/4-inch gap between strips, and install sealant in gap. d. Install strips in adhesive setting bed without voids below strips, or mechanically anchor strips as required to attach strips to substrate, as recommended by strip manufacturer. 2. Accessory Strips: Install as required to provide a complete installation. C. Apply primer to terrazzo substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Place, rough grind, grout, cure grout, fine grind, and finish terrazzo according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Installed Thickness: 3/8 inch nominal. 2. Terrazzo Finishing: Ensure that matrix components and fluids from grinding operations do not stain terrazzo by reacting with divider and control -joint strips. a. Rough Grinding: Grind with 24-grit or finer stones or with comparable diamond abrasives. Follow initial grind with 60/80-grit stones or with comparable diamond abrasives. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESINOUS MATRIX TERRAZZO FLOORING 09 66 23 - 8 b. Grouting: Before grouting, clean terrazzo with water, rinse, and allow to dry. Apply and cure epoxy grout. c. Fine Grinding/Polishing: Delay fine grinding until heavy trade work is complete and construction traffic through area is restricted. Grind with 80-grit stones or with comparable diamond abrasives until grout is removed from surface. 3. Installation Tolerance: Limit variation in terrazzo surface from level to 1/4 inch in 10 feet; noncumulative. E. Install and finish poured-in-place terrazzo base at the same time the adjacent terrazzo flooring is installed. 1. Provide 2-1/2-inch integral base. 3.4 REPAIR A. Cut out and replace terrazzo areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate. Cut out terrazzo areas in panels defined by strips and replace to match adjacent terrazzo, or repair panels according to NTMA's written recommendations, as approved by Architect. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: 1. Remove grinding dust from installation and adjacent areas. 2. Wash surfaces with cleaner according to NTMA's written recommendations and manufacturer's written instructions; rinse surfaces with water and allow them to dry thoroughly. B. Sealing: 1. Seal surfaces according to NTMA's written recommendations. 2. Apply sealer according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions. C. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure that terrazzo is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 1 SECTION 09 67 23 - RESINOUS FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes resinous flooring systems. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include manufacturer's technical data , application instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish required. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixi ng with other components. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 2 B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application. C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Flammability: Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, from single source from single manufacturer. Obtain secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from manufacturer recommended in writing by manufacturer of primary materials. 2.3 EPO-01 RESINOUS FLOORING A. Resinous Flooring System: Abrasion-, impact-, and chemical-resistant, aggregate- filled, and resin-based monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor and integral cove base. 1. Product: Provide product indicated. B. System Characteristics: 1. Color and Pattern: As indicated. 2. Wearing Surface: Manufacturer's standard wearing surface. 3. Overall System Thickness: 3/16 inch. C. Primer: Type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer for substrate and resinous flooring system indicated. 1. Formulation Description: High solids. D. Waterproofing Membrane: Type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer for substrate and resinous flooring system indicated. 1. Formulation Description: High solids. E. Reinforcing Membrane: Flexible resin formulation that is recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer for substrate and resinous flooring system indicated and that inhibits substrate cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 3 F. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. G. Body Coats: 1. Resin: Epoxy. 2. Formulation Description: High solids. 3. Type: Pigmented. 4. Application Method: Troweled or screeded. 5. Aggregates: Colored quartz (ceramic-coated silica). H. Grout Coat: 1. Resin: Epoxy. 2. Formulation Description: High solids. 3. Type: Pigmented. I. Topcoats: Sealing or finish coats. 1. Resin: Epoxy. 2. Formulation Description: High solids. 3. Type: Clear. 4. Finish: Gloss. J. System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum physical property requirements when tested according to test methods indicated: 1. Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi minimum according to ASTM C 579. 2. Tensile Strength: 2,000 psi minimum according to ASTM C 307. 3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 2.0 x 106 psi minimum according to ASTM C 580. 4. Water Absorption: 0.1 percent maximum according to ASTM C 413. 5. Impact Resistance: No chipping, cracking, or delamination and not more than 1/16-inch permanent indentation according to MIL-D-3134J. 6. Resistance to Elevated Temperature: No slip or flow of more than 1/16 inch according to MIL-D-3134J. 7. Abrasion Resistance: 0.06 gm maximum weight loss according to ASTM D 4060. 8. Hardness: 85 to 90, Shore D according to ASTM D 2240. 9. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater according to NFPA 253. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring application. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 4 B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring. 1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows: a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup. b. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements unless manufacturer's written instructions are more stringent. 2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application of resinous flooring only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. of slab area in 24 hours. b. Plastic Sheet Test: ASTM D 4263. Proceed with application only after testing indicates absence of moisture in substrates. c. Relative Humidity Test: Use in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. 4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing. C. Patching and Filling: Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Control Joint Treatment: Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated. 1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion. 2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 RESINOUS FLOORING 09 67 23 - 5 3. Expansion and Isolation Joint Treatment: At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions. B. Primer: Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C. Waterproofing Membrane: Apply waterproofing membrane over entire substrate surface, in manufacturer's recommended thickness. 1. Apply waterproofing membrane to integral cove base substrates. D. Reinforcing Membrane: Apply reinforcing membrane to substrate cracks. E. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and details, including those for taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and topcoating of cove base. Round internal and external corners. 1. Integral Cove Base: 6 inches high. F. Troweled or Screeded Body Coats: Apply troweled or screeded body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or power trowel and grout to fill voids. When body coats are cured, remove trowel marks and roughness using method recommended by manufacturer. G. Grout Coat: Apply grout coat, of type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer, to fill voids in surface of final body coat. H. Topcoats: Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer and to produce wearing surface indicated. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SHEET CARPETING 09 68 16 - 1 SECTION 09 68 16 - SHEET CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Tufted carpet. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For carpet installation, showing the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 3. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 4. Seam locations, types, and methods. 5. Type of subfloor. 6. Type of installation. 7. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 8. Pile direction. 9. Types, colors, and locations of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture required. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample warranties. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II or Master II certification level. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SHEET CARPETING 09 68 16 - 2 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CPT-1, TUFTED CARPET A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated. B. Applied Treatments: 1. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material . 2. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material. a. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram- positive bacteria, not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no fungal growth, according to AATCC 174. C. Performance Characteristics: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm according to NFPA 253. 2. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement- based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Concrete Slabs: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SHEET CARPETING 09 68 16 - 3 1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet manufacturers. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. 3.3 CARPET INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following: 1. Direct-glue-down installation. B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written instructions and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built - in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SHEET CARPETING 09 68 16 - 4 E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet adhesive manufacturer. H. Carpet Cleaning: Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer: 1. Carbonation Cleaning Method (recommended): a. With carbonation cleaning method the carpet is cleaned by being applied to a hot (65-75 degrees) PH-neutral heavy carbon dioxide producing an aqueous solution. The solution is worked into the carpet and sucked up. The carpet is then dried with a cotton disc. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STONE WALL FACING 09 75 13 - 1 SECTION 09 75 13 - STONE WALL FACING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes dimension stone paneling on interior walls. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each stone accessory, and manufactured product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for stone paneling system, including dimensions and profiles of stone units. 1. Show locations and details of joints both within stone paneling system and between stone paneling system and other finish materials. 2. Show locations and details of anchors, including locations of supporting construction. 3. Show direction of veining, grain, or other directional pattern. C. Samples for Verification: 1. For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 12 inches square. Include two or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics in completed Work. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For stone paneling to include in maintenance manuals. Include product data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate stone paneling similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of stone paneling. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STONE WALL FACING 09 75 13 - 2 C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing stone paneling similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has a record of successful in-service performance. D. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion . 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other causes. 1. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports. 2. Store stone on wood A-frames or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. B. Mark stone units, on surface that will be concealed after installation, with designations used on Shop Drawings to identify individual stone units. Orient markings on vertical panels so that they are right side up when units are installed. C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain air and material temperatures to comply with requirements of installation material manufacturers, but not less than 50 deg F during installation and for seven days after completion. B. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone paneling by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of inserts that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry and similar items to be used by stone paneling Installer for anchoring and supporting stone paneling. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing such items and deliver to Project site in time for installation. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STONE WALL FACING 09 75 13 - 3 B. Time delivery and installation of stone paneling to avoid extended on -site storage and to coordinate with work adjacent to stone paneling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from a single quarry, whether specified in this Section or in another Section of the Specifications, with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 1. For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same variety from same source for each. 2. Make stone slabs available for examination by Architect. a. Architect will select aesthetically acceptable slabs and will indicate aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs. b. Segregate slabs selected for use on Project and mark backs indicating approval. c. Mark and photograph aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs as directed by Architect. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design stone paneling system. B. General: Design stone anchors and anchoring systems according to ASTM C 1242. 2.3 ST-1 and 2, LIMESTONE A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 568/C 568M. 1. Classification: II Medium or III High Density. B. Description: Dolomitic limestone. C. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated. D. Cut: Fleuri. E. Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural markings occur. F. Finish: Sand rubbed. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STONE WALL FACING 09 75 13 - 4 G. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects. 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type II. 1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Aggregate: ASTM C 144. D. Water: Potable. 2.5 STONE ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS A. Fabricate anchors from extruded aluminum, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6. 1. Fasteners for Extruded-Aluminum Anchors: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1. B. Direct-Mount Anchoring Systems: Stainless-steel or aluminum stone anchors designed to be applied directly to wall surfaces . System is secured to wall framing, furring, or sheet-metal reinforcing strips built into wall with self-drilling screws. Anchors fit into kerfs or holes in edges of stone panels. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Halfen Anchoring Systems; Meadow Burke. b. Heckmann Building Products Inc. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2.6 STONE ACCESSORIES A. Temporary Setting Shims: Rigid plastic shims, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thickness. B. Setting Shims for Direct-Mount Anchoring Systems: Strips of resilient plastic or neoprene, nonstaining to stone, of thickness needed to prevent point loading of stone on anchors and of depths to suit anchors without intruding into required depths of pointing materials. C. Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STONE WALL FACING 09 75 13 - 5 D. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for applica tion indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Custom Building Products. c. Hillyard, Inc. d. HMK Stone Care; ACI International . e. Miracle Sealants Company. f. Stone Care International. g. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2.7 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that could impair structural integrity or function. 1. Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided they do not impair structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically unpleasing, as judged by Architect. B. Fabricate stone paneling in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated. 1. For limestone, comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook." C. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to comply with fabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable stone association. 1. Where items are installed with adhesive or where stone edges are visible in the finished work, make items uniform in thickness and of identical thickness for each type of item; gage back of stone if necessary. 2. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles. 3. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, supports, and lifting devices as indicated or needed to set stone securely in place; sh ape beds to fit supports. 5. Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate adjacent work. D. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each stone type required and to match approved Samples and mockups. E. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STONE WALL FACING 09 75 13 - 6 1. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved Samples and mockups. 2.8 STONE PANELING ON WALLS A. Arrange panels in shop or other suitable space in proposed orientation and sequence for examination by Architect. Mark units with temporary sequence numbers to indicate position in proposed layout. 1. Lay out one elevation at a time if approved by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when layout will be available for viewing. 3. Provide lighting of similar type and level as that of final installation for viewing layout unless otherwise approved by Architect. 4. Rearrange panels as directed by Architect until layout is approved. 5. Do not trim nonmodular-size units to less than modular size until after Architect's approval of layout, unless otherwise approved by Architect. 6. Mark backs of units and Shop Drawings with sequence numbers based on approved layout. Mark backs of units to indicate orientation of units in completed Work. B. Nominal Thickness: 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. C. Control depth of stone to maintain minimum clearances of 1/2 inch between backs of panels and structural members, fireproofing if any, backup walls, and other work behind stone. Do not back check stone less than 1 inch thick. D. Cut stone to produce uniform knife-edge joints. E. Quirk-miter corners unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate for anchorage in top and bottom bed joints of corner units. 2.9 MIXES A. Spotting Plaster: Stiff mix of molding plaster and water. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive stone paneling and conditions under which stone paneling will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone paneling. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of stone paneling. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STONE WALL FACING 09 75 13 - 7 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SETTING STONE, GENERAL A. Before setting stone, clean surfaces that are dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. B. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Cut lines straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping. C. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals and openings as required to accommodate contiguous work. D. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone in place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated, with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. E. Erect stone units level, plumb, and true with uniform joint widths. Use temporary shims to maintain joint width. F. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches, 1/4 inch maximum. B. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, chair rails, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, 3/8 inch maximum. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, 3/8 inch maximum. D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions indicated, do not exceed plus or minus 1/8 inch. E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary from average joint width more than plus or minus 1/16 inch or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less. F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/32-inch difference between planes of adjacent units. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STONE WALL FACING 09 75 13 - 8 3.4 INSTALLATION OF STONE FACING A. Set units firmly against setting spots. Locate setting spots at anchors and spaced not more than 18 inches apart across back of unit, but provide no fewer than one setting spot per 2 sq. ft. unless otherwise indicated. 1. Moisture Exposure: Use portland cement mortar for setting spots where stone is applied to inside face of exterior walls. B. Set units with anchors securely attached to stone and to backup surfaces. Comply with anchoring recommendations in ASTM C 1242. 1. Provide compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to prevent end bearing of dowels and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of anchor holes and kerfs with sealant for filling kerfs. 2. Set stone supported on clips or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths and to prevent point loading of stone on anchors. Hold shims back from face of stone a distance at least equal to width of joint. C. Minimum Anchors: Provide a minimum of four anchors per panel up to 12 sq. ft. in face area, plus a minimum of two additional anchors for each additional 8 sq. ft.. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone paneling as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately. B. Remove and replace stone paneling of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective stone paneling. 3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints. 4. Stone paneling and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups. 5. Stone paneling not complying with other requirements indicated. C. Replace in a manner that results in stone paneling that matches approved Samples and mockups, complies with other requirements, and shows no evidence of replacement. D. Clean stone paneling no fewer than six days after completion of grouting and pointing, using clean water and soft rags or stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone. E. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STONE WALL FACING 09 75 13 - 9 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect stone surfaces, edges, and corners from construction damage. Use securely fastened untreated wood, plywood, or heavy cardboard to prevent damage. B. Before inspection for Substantial Completion, remove protective coverings and clean surfaces. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMS 09 77 13 - 1 SECTION 09 77 13 - STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes site-upholstered wall systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 54 43 "Stretched-Fabric Ceiling Systems" for site-upholstered systems applied to ceilings and for coordinated requirements for fabric. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. B. SAA: Sound Absorption Average. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include fabric facing, frame edge and trim, core material, and mounting indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each stretched-fabric system. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and installation and system details. 2. Include details at head, base, joints, and corners; and details at ceiling, floor base, and wall intersections. Indicate frame-edge profile and core materials. 3. Include direction of fabric weave and pattern matching. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Fabric: Full-width by approximately 36-inch- long Sample, but not smaller than required to show complete pattern repeat, from dye lot to be used for the Work, and with specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of fabric. 2. Frame System: 12-inch-square Sample(s) showing each edge profile and corner. 3. Core Material: 12-inch-square Sample at corner. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Elevations and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMS 09 77 13 - 2 1. Electrical outlets, switches, and thermostats. 2. Items penetrating or covered by stretched-fabric systems including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Alarms. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels. 3. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to stretched-fabric systems. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For stretched-fabric systems to include in maintenance manuals. Include fabric manufacturer's written cleaning, stain-removal, restretching, and reupholstering instructions. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fabric: For each fabric, color, and pattern installed, furnish length equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 sq. yd., full width of bolt. 2. Framing and Related Installation Items: Furnish manufacturer's full-length units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than five units, including unopened adhesives. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. Include intersection of wall and ceiling, corners, and perimeters. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMS 09 77 13 - 3 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with fabric and stretched-fabric system manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling. B. Deliver materials in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry place with adequate air circulation. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install stretched-fabric systems until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Lighting: Do not install stretched-fabric systems until a permanent level of lighting is provided on surfaces to receive stretched-fabric systems. C. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect stretched-fabric systems from exposure to airborne odors such as tobacco smoke, and install systems under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of stretched-fabric systems that fail in performance, materials, or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Acoustical performance. b. Fabric sagging, distorting, or releasing from panel edge. c. Warping of core. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain stretched-fabric wall systems specified in this Section and stretched-fabric systems specified in Section 09 54 43 "Stretched- Fabric Ceiling Systems" from single source from single manufacturer. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMS 09 77 13 - 4 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Stretched-fabric wall systems shall comply with "Surface-Burning Characteristics" or "Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency on systems prepared according to ASTM E 2573. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 286. 2.3 STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMS A. AWP, Stretched-Fabric Wall System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of facing material stretched tightly over a frame and core material and secured in the frame. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Novawall Systems, Inc.; EcoTRACK or comparable product by one of the following: a. Accutrack Systems. b. Architectural Fabric Systems, Inc. c. SoftWalls, Inc. d. Whisper Walls. 2. Core: Manufacturer's standard Glass-fiber board. 3. Frame Edge: Profile as shown. a. Fabric-Insertion Point: Bottom load. b. Nominal Frame Thickness: Match nominal core thickness. 4. Frame Color: Natural. 5. Facing Material: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Acoustical Performance: Sound absorption NRC or SAA of 0.75 according to ASTM C 423 for Type A mounting according to ASTM E 795. 7. Nominal Overall System Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Core Materials: 1. Glass-Fiber Board: ASTM C 612; of type standard with manufacturer; nominal density of 6 to 7 lb/cu. ft., unfaced, and dimensionally stable, molded rigid Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMS 09 77 13 - 5 board; and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. B. Frame Construction: Manufacturer's standard, continuous, extruded plastic frame (track). C. Facing Material: Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern as indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Installation Products: Concealed on back of system, recommended by stretched- fabric system manufacturer to support weight of system, fabric tension, and as follows: 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. 2. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fabric, materials, substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of stretched-fabric systems. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each area and establish layout of panels and joints of sizes indicated on Drawings within a given area. B. Before installation, allow fabric to adjust and become stable in spaces where it will be installed according to stretched-fabric system manufacturer's written instructions. Acclimatize fabric for minimum of 24 hours at ambient temperature and humidity conditions indicated for spaces when occupied for their intended use. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install stretched-fabric systems according to system manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Provide continuous perimeter frames of each profile indicated, designed to be inconspicuous when covered by fabric facing, with smooth edges, and with surface finish that will not telegraph through fabric facing. 2. Install framing around penetrations. 3. Tightly fit framing to adjacent construction and securely attach to substrate. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEMS 09 77 13 - 6 4. Install core material with full coverage, flush with face of stretched-fabric system frame. 5. Attach frame and core to substrate with adhesive or fasteners or both to support system and prevent deformation of components. 6. Install stretched-fabric systems level and plumb unless otherwise indicated, true in plane, and with fabric square to the grain. 7. Install jointed panels with butt joints and reveals as indicated. B. Fabric Installation: Apply fabric monolithically in continuous run over area, without joints or reveals, except where panel joints or midspan frames are indicated. 1. Fabric Direction: Run fabric railroaded. 2. Fabric Sequence: Maintain sequence of fabric drops; match and level fabric pattern and grain. 3. Fabric Alignment: Install fabric with patterns or directional weaves so pattern or weave aligns with adjacent panels. 4. Fabric Seams: Sewn seams are not permitted. 5. Stretch and secure fabric to frame edges and so frame and frame attachment method are concealed by fabric unless otherwise indicated. 6. Stretch fabric tightly and square without puckers, ripples, or distortions. Acclimatize and restretch if recommended by stretched-fabric system manufacturer. Repair distortions, wrinkles, and sagging. 3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Edge Straightness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch in 48 inches. B. Variation from Level and Plumb: Plus or minus 1/16 inch in 48 inches, noncumulative. C. Variation of Joint Width: Not more than 1/16 inch in 48 inches from hairline or reveal line, noncumulative. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials. B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 1 SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 3. Steel and iron. 4. Galvanized metal. 5. Gypsum board. 6. Cotton or canvas insulation covering. 7. ASJ insulation covering. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming structural steel. 2. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications. 3. Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings" for tile-like coatings. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 2 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra material, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 3 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in MPI Approved Products List in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and appli cation as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. 5. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 100 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 100 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. D. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 4 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pa y for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (CMUs): 12 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 5 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connecti ons, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanentl y fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 6 C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not com ply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. CS-01, Water-Based Concrete Floor Sealer System: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 7 a. First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99. C. CMU Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. D. Steel Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based MPI #107. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi -gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. 2. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi -gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #153. 3. Water-Based Dry-Fall System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal , MPI #76. b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. c. Topcoat: Dry fall, latex, flat, MPI #118. d. Topcoat: Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #133. E. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat for Ceilings only: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 8 2. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #151. F. Cotton or Canvas and ASJ Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct coverings. 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09 96 00 - 1 SECTION 09 96 00 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of high -performance coating systems on the following substrates: 1. Exterior Substrates: a. Steel. b. Galvanized metal. 2. Interior Substrates: a. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). b. Steel. c. Gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of structural steel with primers specified in this Section. 2. Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" for general field painting. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Product List: Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09 96 00 - 2 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Coatings: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each coating system. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color sel ections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09 96 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the Exterior High-Performance Coating Schedule for the coating category indicated. 2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 3. Products shall be of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. C. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 6. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 7. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If coating materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09 96 00 - 4 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated. D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09 96 00 - 5 E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Coat backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09 96 00 - 6 B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1. Pigmented Polyurethane over High-Build Epoxy System MPI EXT 5.1J: a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, for metal. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, high build, low gloss. c. Topcoat: Polyurethane, two component, pigmented, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6). 1) Benjamin Moore; Corotech, Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Gloss, V500 . 2) PPG Architectural; PPG, Pitthane Ultra Gloss Urethane Enamel, 95- 8001/819. 3) Sherwin-Williams; Protective & Marine, Acrolon 218 HS, B65W611/B65V600 B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Pigmented Polyurethane over Epoxy Primer System MPI EXT 5.3L: a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, for metal. b. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane, two component, pigmented, gloss matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Polyurethane, two component, pigmented, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6) 1) Benjamin Moore; Corotech, Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Gloss, V500. 2) PPG Architectural; PPG, Pitthane Ultra Gloss Urethane Enamel, 95- 8001/819. 3) Sherwin-Williams; Protective & Marine, Acrolon 218 HS, B65W611/B65V600 3.7 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. CMU Substrates: 1. Epoxy-Modified Latex System: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09 96 00 - 7 b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Epoxy-modified latex, eggshell. 1) Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy, EggShell B73 – 360 series. B. Steel Substrates: 1. Epoxy-Modified Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Epoxy-modified latex, eggshell. 1) Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy, EggShell B73 – 360 series. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Epoxy-Modified Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy-modified latex, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Epoxy-modified latex, eggshell. 1) Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy, EggShell B73 – 360 series. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 VISUAL DISPLAY FABRICS 10 11 46 - 1 SECTION 10 11 46 - VISUAL DISPLAY FABRICS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes tackable wall coverings. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of tackable wall covering. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, and flame-resistance characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent. C. Samples: For each type of tackable wall covering and trim. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For tackable wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install tackable wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 2.2 WC-1, TACKABLE WALL COVERINGS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product acceptable to the Architect. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 VISUAL DISPLAY FABRICS 10 11 46 - 2 B. Description: Homogeneous tackable surface material made of primary natural materials consisting of linseed oil, cork, rosin binders and dry pigments mixed and calendared onto a natural jute backing. The color extends throughout the thickness of the material. 1. Roll Size: In manufacturer's standard length, but not less than 48 inches (1980 mm) wide. C. Thickness: 0.240 inch (6.0 mm). 1. Color: As indicated. D. Aluminum Trim: Fabricated from extruded aluminum. 1. Field-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard, 1/4-inch L-Trim. 2. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish. E. Adhesives for Field Application: Strippable, mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with tackable wall coverings; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing by tackable wall covering manufacturer. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. F. Primer/Sealer: Mildew-resistant primer/sealer complying with requirements in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" and recommended in writing by tackable wall covering manufacturer for intended substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation for tackable wall covering. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances, including dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the bond of tackable wall coverings or affect the smooth, finished surfaces of tackable wall coverings. C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, and depressions. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 VISUAL DISPLAY FABRICS 10 11 46 - 3 D. Prepare substrates indicated to receive tackable wall covering as required by manufacturer's written instructions to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurall y sound surface that is uniform in color. 1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 4 percent when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 3. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Tackable Wall Covering: Comply with tackable wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions for installation of wall covering and trim. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Clean tackable wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one removable cleaning instructions label to tackable wall covering in each room. C. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SOLID-SURFACE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13.19 - 1 SECTION 10 21 13.19 - SOLID-SURFACE TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-surface toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach ceiling-hung compartments to overhead structural system. 2. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 3. Section 10 28 00 "Toilet Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments. B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 4. Show locations of floor drains. 5. Show ceiling grid, ceiling-mounted items, and overhead support or bracing locations. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of toilet compartment material indicated. 1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection. D. Product Schedule: For toilet compartments, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing location and selected colors for toilet compartment material. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SOLID-SURFACE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13.19 - 2 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents and source. 1. Door Hinges: One hinge with associated fasteners. 2. Latch and Keeper: One latch and keeper with associated fasteners. 3. Door Bumper: One bumper with associated fasteners. 4. Door Pull: One door pull with associated fasteners. 5. Fasteners: Ten fasteners of each size and type. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 2.2 PF-02, SOLID-SURFACE TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Privacy Plus Partitions; Privacy Plus Partitions with DuPont Corian solid surface panels. B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Ceiling hung. C. Panel Material: Homogeneous filled acrylic; not coated, laminated or of composite construction; meeting ANSI Z124.3 and 6, Type Six and Fed. Spec. WW -P- 541E/Gen. 1. Material shall be 1/2” thick solid surface. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SOLID-SURFACE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13.19 - 3 D. Pilaster Material: Homogeneous filled acrylic; not coated, laminated or of composite construction; meeting ANSI Z124.3 and 6, Type Six and Fed. Spec. WW-P- 541E/Gen. 1. Material shall be 1” thick solid surface for pilasters and vertical door edges and 1/2” for all other components. E. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: 1. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as indicated. F. Pilaster Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; polymer. 1. Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching pilaster. G. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; polymer or extruded aluminum. a. Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching panel. 2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or partially open position, allowing emergency access by lifting door. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment- mounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective- coated steel compatible with related materials. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SOLID-SURFACE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13.19 - 4 2.4 MATERIALS A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. B. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories. B. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage. C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide, in- swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SOLID-SURFACE TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 21 13.19 - 5 2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height brackets. a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Ceiling-Hung Units: Secure pilasters to supporting structure and level, plumb, and tighten. Hang doors and adjust so bottoms of doors are level with bottoms of pilasters when doors are in closed position. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 10 22 19 - 1 SECTION 10 22 19 - DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Offset Glazed Partition system. 2. Telescopic Glass Wall System. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 71 00 “Door Hardware.” B. Section 08 80 00 “Glass and Glazing.” 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide seismic calculations and/or engineering stamps as required. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Certified test reports indicating compliance with performance requirements specified herein. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, details, sections, attachments to other construction, and accessories. Indicate dimensions, weights, conditions at openings and at storage areas, and required installation, storage, and operating clearances. 2. Indicate details of track and door connections, rail sections, fittings, and hardware components for all wall conditions and door types/hardware sets. 3. Indicate glass type, sizes, and details. 4. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track including floor & ceiling tolerances and direction of travel. Indicate blocking to be provided by others. 5. Indicate bracing requirements and details. 6. Setting Drawings: Show imbedded items and cutouts required in other work. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 10 22 19 - 2 C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches square in size. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of the following products: 1. Linear Trim: 12-inch- long Samples. 2. Door Finish: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, but not less than 3 inches square. 3. Glazing: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, but not less than 3 inches square. 4. Hardware and Accessories: Whole units. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Drawings to integrate information from reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from the installers of the items involved. 1. Structural reinforcement. 2. Locations of fixed door and window mullions. 3. Seismic bracing and related structural members when supplied. 4. Ductwork above ceiling. B. General Contractor to provide the Manufacturer with CAD files with issue of order showing all related information required to complete submittals. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers’ warranties. B. Maintenance Data: For demountable partitions to include in maintenance manuals. C. As-built record documents showing actual installation conditions. D. Parts list and maintenance instructions including data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from same production run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Partition Components: Furnish a quantity of each type of full-size unit with installation tools and materials equal to one percent of the amount installed, but no fewer than two units. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 10 22 19 - 3 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the actual production of specified products 1. Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria, and physical requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: Qualified installer to have minimum 5 years documented experience in installation of system similar in complexity to those required for this Project. 1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer. 2. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic details, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups for demountable partitions including accessories. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Do not deliver or install demountable partitions until finishes in spaces to receive them are complete, including suspended ceilings, floors, carpeting, and painting. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate the measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid project delays. General Contractor to ensure that walls and bulkhead are installed before manufacturer of demountable partitions takes field measurements. The site must be available for field measuring within an acceptable and agreed upon lead time. C. Maintain environmental conditions, temperature, humidity, and ventilation, are within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged packaging with identification labels intact. B. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packing until ready for installation. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature & humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 10 22 19 - 4 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with other operations and installation of adjacent surfaces to avoid damage of installed materials. B. Coordinate work with adjacent floor, wall, and ceiling construction to accommodate frame anchorage, system track, and hardware. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Source Limitations: Obtain Offset Glazed Partition System and Telescopic Glass Wall System from single source from single manufacturer. B. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Muraflex; MIMO Offset Glazed Partitions or comparable products by the following: 1. Pradere Office Products; Mono. C. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Muraflex; EXPO Telescopic Glass Wall System or comparable products by the following: 1. Pradere Office Products; Mono. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Components: Conforming to ASTM B221-08 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum‐ Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes B. Glass: Provide fully tempered glass (Kind FT) complying with ASTM C1036 and ASTM C1048 requirements, including glass indicated by reference to type, class, and quality. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 10 22 19 - 5 2.4 FRAMELESS SLIDING, HINGED GLASS DOOR & GLASS WALL A. Track: Extruded aluminum, single track profile with flexibility of allowing the use of 3/8”, 1/2” or 5/8” glass, allow the glass to be center mounted, offset mounted to inside or outside, or the use as a double pane system. System to be modular and reconfigurable with regards to changing out glass thickness, plane of installation, and being able to retrofit to double pane system for future applications. 1. Ceiling Track: a. Size: 3 inches wide x 1-9/16 inches high x full length. b. Attached to suspended ceiling via caddy clips. 2. Floor Track: a. Size: 3 inches wide x 1-9/16 inches high x full length. b. Carpet grippers integral to aluminum extrusion. c. Leveling tray included. 3. Finish: Bronze Anodized. B. Glass Walls: 1. Clear tempered glass conforming to ASTM C1048. 2. Thickness: 12 mm. 3. Vertical Edges: Counter-profile chamfer with double-sided polish edges. 4. Seams: Butt joints. 5. Vertical “Slim Trim” 3/8” or 1/2”, profile to fit counter- profile on glass for in-line elevation run, finish to match glass or aluminum. 6. Top captured by aluminum channel set into Ceiling Track. 7. Bottom captured by aluminum channel integral to Base Track assembly. 8. Aluminum Finish: Bronze Anodized. C. Frameless Glass Sliding Doors/ Telescoping Doors: 1. Clear tempered glass conforming to ASTM C1048. a. Thickness: 12mm. b. Edges: Chamfer Polished. c. Door: Panel to slide within the floor track. 2. Hardware: To be coordinated with selected manufacturer to provide the following functions: a. Double roller ball-bearing running gears. b. Adjustable clamp shoes with Full Width Fascia. c. Acoustic seals. d. Ladder pull: Model, length, locking/non-locking as required. e. Finish: Brushed stainless steel. D. Frameless Glass Hinge Door: 1. Clear tempered glass conforming to ASTM C1048. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 10 22 19 - 6 a. Thickness: 12 mm. b. Edges: Chamfer Polished. 2. Hardware: To be coordinated with selected manufacturer to provide the following functions: a. Glass door Hinges. b. Acoustical seal. c. Patch Handel and Lever, stainless steel door strike. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate demountable walls for installation with concealed fastening devices and pressure-fit members that will not damage ceiling or floor coverings. Fabricate systems for installation with continuous seals at floor, ceiling, and other locations where partitions abut fixed construction. B. Fabricate components in sizes, profiles, and configurations as indicated on the approved shop drawings. C. Fabricate doors with required fittings. D. Fabricate doors and walls to allow for minimum clearances. E. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints and connections flush, hairline, and soundproof. F. Prepare components to receive anchor devices and hardware. G. Arrange fasteners, attachments, and jointing to ensure concealment from view. H. Prepare components with drillings for door hardware. I. Wiring: Conceal conductors and cables in raceways. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. C. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 10 22 19 - 7 1. Color: Bronze. 2.8 DOOR HARDWARE FOR OFFSET GLAZED PARTITIONS A. DOOR TYPE: (2) Frameless Sliding Glass Doors. 1. DOOR #'s: Conference And Meeting Rooms. 2. HW SET "N/A": 48" PBA Ladder Pull - Non-Locking. 3. Finish: Match Aluminum Frame Finish. 4. Muraflex Sliding Door Hardware. B. DOOR TYPE: (4) Frameless Pivot Glass Doors. 1. DOOR #'s: Classroom, Fitness Room, Telephone And Corridor. 2. HW SET "N/A": 48" PBA Ladder Pull - Non-Locking. 3. Finish: Match Aluminum Frame Finish. 4. Canaropa Patch Pivots With Integrated Door Closer, Hold Open 5. Function. 6. Floor Stop. C. DOOR TYPE: (1) Double Frameless Pivot Glass Doors. 1. DOOR #'s: Corridor. 2. HW SET "N/A": 48" PBA Ladder Pull - Non-Locking. 3. Finish: Match Aluminum Frame Finish. 4. Canaropa Patch Pivots With Integrated Door Closer, Hold Open 5. Function. 6. Floor Stop. D. NOTES 1. Minimum required rough width for 34" clear door opening for sliding glass door is 83", drywall to drywall. 2. Corridor door quoted with swing glass door due to insufficient clear opening width. 2.9 DOOR HARDWARE FOR TELESCOPIC GLASS WALL SYSTEM A. DOOR TYPE: (1) Set Of Telescopic Glass Wall System. 1. DOOR #'s: Fitness Room. 2. HW SET "N/A": 48" PBA Ladder Pull - Non-Locking. 3. Finish: Match Aluminum Frame Finish. B. NOTES 1. Contractor to provide a structure designed to span and support the weight of 1,461 Lbs point load with a maximum deflection of 1/8". 2. Structural beam must be supported by columns to the floor and not by the slab or structure above. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 10 22 19 - 8 3. Finished floor must be level with a maximum total variation of 1/4" from the highest to the lowest point throughout the entire length of the telescopic door. 4. Structural support and blocking is required and to be provided by the contractor. Final structural requirements, based on provided point loads and maximum allowed deflection, to be determined by Architect and Structural Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify prepared openings are in accordance with Shop Drawings. C. Verify wall openings are ready to receive work of this section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install demountable partitions after other finishing operations have been completed. 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Install partitions rigid, level, plumb, and aligned. Install seals at connections with floors, ceilings, fixed walls, and abutting surfaces to prevent light and sound transmission. 3. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels and components are not acceptable. 4. Except for filler panels scribed to fixed walls or columns, do not modify manufacturer's standard components. B. Install demountable glass walls and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. C. Match glazing by installing from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings. D. Align assembly plumb and to indicated position, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Suspended-Ceiling System: Make alterations to suspended-ceiling system required by partition installation or to gain access to electrical or communication systems without Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 10 22 19 - 9 affecting the structural integrity of suspended-ceiling system. Make alterations so they are not noticeable after panel installation. F. Doors and Frames: Install door-and-frame and glazing-and-glazing-frame assemblies securely anchored to partitions and with doors aligned and fitted. Install and adjust door hardware for proper operation. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install each demountable partition so surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent partitions. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Inspect installation, correct misalignments, and tighten loose connections. B. Adjust doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. C. Check and readjust operating hardware. Verify that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding; lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. D. Clean soiled surfaces to remove dirt, fingerprints, adhesives, and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Remove and replace defaced or damaged components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. F. Remove and replace components that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products and finish surfaces from damage until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.7 CLEANING A. After installation and adjusting, clean metal and glass surfaces to remove dust, loose fibers, fingerprints, adhesives, and other foreign materials. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain demountable partitions when using a new installer not yet certified by the manufacturer. When engaging installers without supervision provided by the manufacturer, the installers must be certified by the manufacturer. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS 10 22 19 - 10 END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WALL PROTECTION 10 26 00 - 1 SECTION 10 26 00 - WALL PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Abuse-resistant wall coverings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" for metal protective trim units, according to BHMA A156.6, used for armor, kick, mop, and push plates. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall protection showing locations and extent. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following products, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Abuse-Resistant Wall Covering: 6 by 6 inches square. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of wall protection product to include in maintenance manuals. 1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining best condition of plastic under use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store wall protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside well - ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WALL PROTECTION 10 26 00 - 2 1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period plastic materials are stored. 2. Keep plastic materials out of direct sunlight. 3. Store plastic wall- protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall- protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including detachment of components from each other or from the substrates, delamination, and permanent deformation beyond normal use. b. Deterioration of materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall - protection products from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.3 WP, ABUSE-RESISTANT WALL COVERINGS A. Abuse-Resistant Sheet Wall Covering: Fabricated from fiberglass reinforced thermosetting polyester resin panel sheets complying with ASTM D 5319. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Marlite; Standard FRP or comparable product by one of the following: a. Nudo. b. USFRP.com. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WALL PROTECTION 10 26 00 - 3 2. Coating: Multi-layer print, primer and finish coats or applied over-layer. 3. Dimensions: a. Thickness: 0.090-inches nominal. b. Width: 4'-0” nominal. c. Length: As indicated on the drawings. d. Panel Size: 48 by 96 inches for sheet. 4. Color and Texture: As indicated. 5. Height: As indicated. 6. Trim and Joint Moldings: Extruded rigid plastic that matches wall -covering color. 7. Mounting: Adhesive. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Adhesive: As recommended by protection product manufacturer. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wall protection according to requirements indicated for design, performance, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components. 2.6 FINISHES A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acce ptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls to which wall protection will be attached. 1. For wall protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 WALL PROTECTION 10 26 00 - 4 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall protection. B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation Quality: Install wall protection according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. B. Abuse-Resistant Wall Covering: Install top and edge moldings, corners, and divider bars as required for a complete installation. 3.4 CLEANING A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent. B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 1 SECTION 10 28 00 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Toilet accessories. 2. Warm-air dryers. 3. Underlavatory guards. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 83 00 "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Include electrical characteristics. B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified. 1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify accessories using designations indicated. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects. 2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated. B. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single manufacturer. C. HD-01A, Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated. 2. Description: Double-roll dispenser. 3. Mounting: Recessed. 4. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle with hood. 5. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). D. HD-01B, Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated. 2. Description: Double-roll dispenser. 3. Mounting: Surface Mounted. 4. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle with hood. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 3 5. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). E. HD-02, Purse Hook: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated. 2. Description: Single-prong unit. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). F. HD-03, Grab Bars: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches. 5. Configuration and Length: a. HD-03A: Straight, 36 inches long. b. HD-03B: Straight, 42 inches long. G. HD-04, Seat-Cover Dispenser: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Minimum Capacity: 250 seat covers. 4. Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Lockset: Tumbler type. H. HD-05, Diaper-Changing Station: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated. 2. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child-protection strap. a. Engineered to support minimum of 250-lb static load when opened. 3. Mounting: Semirecessed, with unit projecting not more than 1 inch from wall when closed. 4. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin), exterior shell with rounded plastic corners; HDPE interior in manufacturer's standard color. 6. Liner Dispenser: Built in. I. HD-06A, Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated. 2. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable waste receptacle. 3. Mounting: Recessed. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 4 a. Designed for nominal 4-inch wall depth. 4. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels. 5. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 6.3 gal. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 7. Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste-receptacle liner. 8. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel -dispenser compartment and waste receptacle. J. HD-06B, Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated. 2. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable waste receptacle. 3. Mounting: Recessed. a. Designed for nominal 4-inch wall depth. 4. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 300 C-fold or 400 multifold paper towels. 5. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 1.6 gal. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 7. Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste-receptacle liner. 8. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment and waste receptacle. K. HD-09, Mirror Units: 1. Specified in Section 08 83 00 "Mirrors". 2.3 WARM-AIR DRYERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated. B. Source Limitations: Obtain warm-air dryers from single source from single manufacturer. C. HD-07, Multiple Airflow Warm-Air Dryer: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated. 2. Description: Multiple airflow warm-air hand dryer, using two or more airstreams for rapid hand drying. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with operation time of 10 to 20 seconds. 5. Cover Material and Finish: Sprayed Nickel ABS Cover. 6. Electrical Requirements: 115 V, 8.3 A, 1000 W. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 5 2.4 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. Truebro by IPS Corporation. B. ULG, Underlavatory Guard: 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevents direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch minimum nominal thickness. C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating. D. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full -length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 6 B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 13 - 1 SECTION 10 44 13 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguisher. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 10 44 16 "Fire Extinguishers" for portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers accommodated by fire-protection cabinets. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed- mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction. B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. D. Product Schedule: For fire-protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed or semirecessed. Coordinate final fire-protection cabinet schedule with fire- extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 13 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-protection cabinets, accessories, and fire extinguishers from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. 2.3 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET FOR ROUND EXTINGUISHERS A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher, FEC. 1. Basis-of-Design for Recessed: Provide Larsen’s Manufacturing; Concealed Hinge Door cabinet, fully recessed, Occult Series or comparable products by one of the following: a. Babcock-Davis. b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. d. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. e. Nystrom, Inc. f. Potter Roemer LLC. 2. Basis-of-Design for Semi-Recessed: Provide Larsen’s Manufacturing; Concealed Hinge Door cabinet, fully recessed, Architectural Series or comparable products by one of the following: a. Babcock-Davis. b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. d. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. e. Nystrom, Inc. f. Potter Roemer LLC. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. C. Cabinet Material: 1. Cold-rolled steel sheet 2. Stainless-steel sheet for plastic laminate finished walls. 3. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet. D. Recessed Cabinet: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 13 - 3 1. Trimless with Hidden Flange: Flange of same metal and finish as box overlaps surrounding wall finish and is concealed from view by an overlapping door. E. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth. F. Cabinet Trim Material: 1. Steel sheet for GWB walls. 2. Stainless-steel sheet for plastic laminate finished walls. G. Door Material: 1. Steel sheet for GWB walls. 2. Stainless-steel sheet for plastic laminate finished walls. H. Door Style: Flush opaque panel, frameless, with no exposed hinges. I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide Concealed Pulls. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge, permitting door to open 180 degrees. J. Accessories: 1. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle. 2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Engraved. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical. K. Materials: 1. Cold-Rolled Steel for GWB walls: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. a. Finish: Baked enamel, TGIC polyester powder coat, HAA polyester powder coat, epoxy powder coat, or polyester/epoxy hybrid powder coat, complying with AAMA 2603. b. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. c. Color: White. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 13 - 4 2. Stainless Steel for plastic laminate finished walls: ASTM A 666, Type 304. a. Finish: No. 4 directional satin finish. 2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET FOR LOW PROFILE EXTINGUISHERS A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher, FEC. 1. Product: Provide the following: a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group; Cabinet for ORBIT Low Profile Extinguishers, FE-2. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet. 1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet. D. Recessed Cabinet: 1. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). E. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no trim. F. Cabinet Trim Material: 1. Steel sheet for GWB walls. 2. Stainless-steel sheet for plastic laminate finished walls. G. Door Material: 1. Steel sheet for GWB walls. 2. Stainless-steel sheet for plastic laminate finished walls. H. Door Style: Flush opaque panel, frameless, with no exposed hinges. I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide Concealed Pulls. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge, permitting door to open 180 degrees. J. Accessories: 1. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 13 - 5 a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Engraved. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical. K. Materials: 1. Cold-Rolled Steel for GWB partitions: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. a. Finish: Baked enamel, TGIC polyester powder coat, HAA polyester powder coat, epoxy powder coat, or polyester/epoxy hybrid powder coat, complying with AAMA 2603. b. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. c. Color: White. 2. Stainless Steel for plastic laminate finished walls: ASTM A 666, Type 304. a. Finish: No. 4 directional satin finish. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Miter corners and grind smooth. 3. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 13 - 6 they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembl ed or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets will be installed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at height indicated below: 1. Fire-Protection Cabinets: 42 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire - protection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire- protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 13 - 7 recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 1 SECTION 10 44 16 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 10 44 13 "Fire Protection Cabinets." 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher. B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire-protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 2 a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global. 2.2 FE-1, ROUND PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International . c. Babcock-Davis. d. Badger Fire Protection. e. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. f. Fire End & Croker Corporation. g. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. h. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. i. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division. j. Larsens Manufacturing Company. k. MOON American. l. Nystrom, Inc. m. Potter Roemer LLC. n. Strike First Corporation of America (The). 2. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers, fire-protection cabinets, and accessories, from single source from single manufacturer. 3. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 3 B. FE-1, Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. 2.3 FE-3, ROUND PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International . c. Babcock-Davis. d. Badger Fire Protection. e. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. f. Fire End & Croker Corporation. g. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. h. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. i. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division. j. Larsens Manufacturing Company. k. MOON American. l. Nystrom, Inc. m. Potter Roemer LLC. n. Strike First Corporation of America (The). 2. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers, fire-protection cabinets, and accessories, from single source from single manufacturer. 3. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. FE-3, Purple-K Dry-Chemical Type in Aluminum Container: UL-rated 10-B:C, 2.5-lb nominal capacity, with potassium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in enameled- aluminum container. 1. Location: Kitchen. 2.4 FE-2, LOW-PROFILE PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet indicated. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Oval Fire Products Corporation; Oval Brand fire extinguisher(s) or comparable products by one of the following: Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 4 a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. b. Strike First Corporation of America (The). 2. Valves: Heavy-Duty Tempered Aluminum with Anodized Coating. 3. Handles and Levers: Stainless steel. 4. Siphon Tubes: Manufacturer's standard metal. 5. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. FE-2, Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Aluminum Container: UL-rated 4- A:80B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in powder-coated-aluminum container. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Oval Fire Products Corporation: Model 10JABC. 2.5 FEB, MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International . c. Babcock-Davis. d. Badger Fire Protection. e. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. f. Fire End & Croker Corporation. g. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. h. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. i. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division. j. Larsens Manufacturing Company. k. Nystrom, Inc. l. Potter Roemer LLC. m. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Fire Suppression & Building Products . n. Strike First Corporation of America (The). 2. Source Limitations: Obtain mounting brackets and fire extinguishers from single source from single manufacturer. B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals appli ed to mounting surface. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 44 16 - 5 a. Orientation: Vertical. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mounting Brackets: Top of fire extinguisher to be at 42 inches above finished floor. B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION WRITTEN FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS • SECTION 11400 SUNNY ISLES GATEWAY PARK SUNNY ISLES BEACH, FLORIDA IFG No. 18041 CATERING/EXHIBITION KITCHEN KIOSK Prepared by Jeffrey Brown, Professional Member F.C.S.I. Julie Jones – IFG/South Juji Zapata – IFG/South 1330 Coral Way – Suite 310 Miami, Florida 33145 Phone: (305) 859-2025 Fax: (305) 859-8103 Date: 12-06-2018 Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 2 SECTION 11400 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS INDEX PART 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.00 DEFINITIONS AND SCOPE 1.01 Definitions 1.02 Ownership of Drawings 1.03 Drawings and Contract Documents 1.04 Work Included 1.05 Work Not Included 1.06 Related work by Owners 1.07 PRIOR CONTRACT CONDITIONS 1.08 Owner's Rights 1.09 Substitutions 1.10 Subcontractors 1.11 Laws and Ordinances and Energy Conservation 1.12 Insurance and Bonds 1.13 Guarantee and Warranty 1.14 Royalties 1.20 PRIOR INSTALLATION CONDITIONS 1.21 Equipment Access 1.22 Submittals, Requirements and Approvals 1.30 INSTALLATION CONDITIONS 1.31 Manufacturer's Installation Requirements 1.32 Unions and Trades 1.33 Access and Authority 1.34 Payments/Charge Orders 1.35 Schedule/Special Handling 1.36 Signs and/or Publicity 1.37 Start-up Demonstration and Manuals PART 2: FOODSERVICE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 2.41 Operation Requirements 2.42 Connection Terminals 2.43 Hoods, Walk-ins, Coolers and Dish Machines 2.44 Insert Pans 2.45 Tray Slides 2.46 Enclosures 2.47 Dispensers 2.48 Water Filter Purifier Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 3 2.50 ELECTRIC WORK 2.51 General 2.52 Internal Wiring of Fixtures and Equipment 2.53 Convenience and Power Outlets 2.54 Plugs and Cords 2.55 Heating Equipment 2.56 Starters, Switches and Controls 2.60 PLUMBING WORK 2.61 General Requirements 2.62 Faucets 2.63 Disherwells 2.64 Wastes 2.65 Materials and Workmanship 2.70 UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATION 2.80 UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 2.90 COLD PANS 2.95 VENTILATION OF REFRIGERATED EQUIPMENT PART 3: EXECUTION 3.00 GENERAL INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT 3.01 Supervision 3.02 Trimming and Sealing Equipment 3.03 Cutting and Fitting 3.04 Protection of Equipment 3.05 Equipment Start-up/Demonstration 3.06 Final observation PART 4: SPECIFIC CONDITIONS – STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATION 4.01 General Requirements 4.02 Materials 4.03 Metal Top Construction 4.04 Enclosed Cabinet Bases 4.05 Legs and Crossrails 4.06 Shelves 4.07 Sinks, Steam Tables, and Bain Maries 4.08 Other Fabricated Components 4.09 Fabrication Workmanship Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 4 PART 5: SPECIFIC CONDITIONS – KITCHEN VENTILATION 5.01 Scope of Work 5.02 Work Included 5.03 Work Not Included 5.04 Materials 5.05 Workmanship 5.06 Light Fixtures and Switches 5.07 Filter Cartridges 5.08 Closure Panels 5.09 Approvals and Testing PART 6: ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS PART 7: STANDARD DETAILS Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 5 PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 11400 1.00 DEFINITIONS AND SCOPE 1.01 DEFINITIONS The following summary is intended to clarify the responsibilities of each party, and their relationship to one another, as used and defined throughout the Foodservice Equipment Contract Document. A. OWNER The Owner shall be defined as the ultimate decision-maker in regard to the project. 1. The Owner shall designate a Representative who has the authority to make decisions and provide pertinent project information. 2. The Owner, through its designated Representative, shall issue all instructions to the Kitchen Equipment Contractor (KEC) through the Foodservice Consultant. 3. The Owner, through its designated Representative, shall inform all parties of any pertinent information, such as cost limitations, due dates, or other contracts which may affect the performance of this contract. B. ARCHITECT The Architect is the Owner's Representative for the proper performance of all aspects of this project and will be included in the flow of documents pertinent to the project. C. FOODSERVICE CONSULTANT Inman Foodservices Group is the Kitchen Designer for this project. As such, they represent the Owner in matters related to kitchen design and also act as technical advisor to the Architect. To function effectively, Inman Foodservices Group must be advised of any modifications, proposed by any party to this contract, which may affect the performance of this contract. D. GENERAL CONTRACTOR The General Contractor (GC) and/or Construction Manager (CM) are responsible for overall coordinations, deliveries, scheduling installation, coordination of other trades, and the rough-in connection of equipment to utilities. The KEC must closely coordinate his activities with the GC and/or CM. E. KITCHEN EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR The KEC is the party responsible for supplying, delivering, and setting-in-place all items included in this contract. The KEC may hire subcontractors to perform portions of his work, but final responsibility for the performance of the contract rests with the KEC. The KEC is to have a full time project manager on site as necessary. Sub-contractors/installers do not count as project managers unless full time employed by the KEC. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 6 F. SUBCONTRACTORS A subcontractor is a person or organization who has a direct contract with the Kitchen Equipment Contractor to perform any of the work at the project site. The term Subcontractor is referred to in the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term Subcontractor means the Subcontractor or his authorized representative. Nothing contained in the Contract documents shall create any contractual relationship between the Owner and any subcontractor. G. COMPLETE INSTALLATION This shall be interpreted as the delivery of all Foodservice and/or kitchen equipment and refrigeration, with transportation and trucking charges prepaid to the building site, removal from crates, assembled, set-in-place, leveled, ready for final connection, re-leveled, calibrated, started-up, adjusted and demonstrated inclusive of completed training. Clean all equipment, new or existing to a condition acceptable for intended foodservice. Cleaning shall be performed during the process of installation to property maintain the equipment and prior to Owner's acceptance. H. N.I.K.E.C. Whenever the abbreviation N.I.K.E.C. is used in this contract, it shall mean the items are not part of the foodservice equipment contract. I. CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations or agreements either written or oral, including the bidding documents. Contract Documents shall consist of: The Specifications which consist of Instructions To Bidders, General Conditions, Specific Conditions, Itemized Equipment Specifications, Equipment Details; the drawings and all addenda issued prior to the execution of the contract; and all modifications thereto. (1) The Drawings and the Specifications are intended to be complimentary to each other so that any work exhibited in the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or vice-versa, is to be executed the same as if both were mentioned in the specifications and exhibited in the drawings to the true intent and meaning of the said drawings and specifications when taken together. (2) Titles and headings to sections in these Contract Documents are introduced for convenience and shall not be taken as a correct or complete segregation of several units of materials and labor. No responsibility either direct or implied will be assumed by the Owner or the Designer for errors or omissions by the Kitchen Equipment Contractor, due to real or alleged error in arrangement or content of matter in the Contract Documents. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 7 (3) The drawings and specifications are advisory and for information purpose only. They are not intended to be, and shall not be used for construction purposes. They are to be used by licensed Architects and Engineers for preparing their stamped and sealed documents and for the Kitchen Equipment Contractor and for preparing dimensioned rough- in drawings, brochure submittals and shop drawings. J. THE WORK The term work includes all labor necessary to produce and install the equipment required by the Contract Documents. 1.02 OWNERSHIP OF DRAWINGS All drawings and contract documents prepared and furnished by Inman Foodservices Group are the property of Inman Foodservices Group. They shall be used only for this project and shall not be duplicated or used on any other project, in whole or part. They shall be returned upon completion of the project. 1.03 DRAWINGS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and written specifications constitute a full and complete Foodservice Equipment Contract Document. The Contract Document for the KEC's consideration shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Equipment layouts 2. Spot connection plans and special details 3. Instructions to bidders 4. General conditions 5. Specific Conditions 6. Specifications and details 7. Any addendum issued prior to executing this contract B. All drawings prepared by Inman Foodservices Group serve to define only. They should not be used as construction documents or building shop details. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between the Designer and Kitchen Equipment Contractor. C. Drawings are only for reference, assistance and guidance to the KEC. They indicate the preferred final location of equipment. The exact final location will be dictated by the building condition. The KEC should understand and accept this contract with this understanding. D. Drawings and equipment specifications are intended to compliment each other and form one Contract Document. Therefore, neither one should be considered complete without the other. Where variances occur between Contract Documents or within the document itself, the item or arrangement of equipment with better quality, greater quantity, higher cost or most stringent requirement shall be included in cost. E. The KEC should not submit cost bids, Proposal Contract Document, or enter into agreements without complete knowledge or access to all Contract Documents. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 8 F. The Kitchen Equipment Contractor shall carefully compare the Contract Documents and shall at once report to Owner any errors, ambiguities, inconsistencies or omissions he may discover. Unless expressly stipulated, and in a timely manner, Kitchen Equipment Contractor shall be liable to Owner for any damage resulting from any such errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents. Kitchen Equipment Contractor shall not do any work without Drawings, Specifications or Modifications without receiving written prior checking from Owner or Designer. 1.04 WORK INCLUDED Furnish any and all labor, material and services necessary for installation of foodservice equipment in strict accordance with the specifications, applicable drawings and local codes including, that which is reasonably inferred. In addition: A. The equipment shall be delivered and installed on schedule. The Kitchen Equipment Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the work with the general contractor. B. Field dimensions before fabrication. C. All Indirect waste piping (except sinks, cooler/freezer assemblies and ventilators) to floor sinks. D. Cutting of holes in equipment for pipe, drains, electric outlets, etc., as required for this installation. Work shall conform to highest standards of workmanship and shall include welded sleeves, collars, ferrules or escutcheons. E. All work involved in making stands and supports for all equipment requiring them. F. Repair of all damage to the premises as a result of this installation and daily removal of all debris left by the Kitchen Equipment Contractor from the site at his expense. G. Foodservice equipment and fixtures shall be cleaned and ready for operation at the time the building is turned over to the Owner. H. Work to be in compliance with the Florida Accessibility code building construction with amendments. I. Refrigerant, fittings, dryers, pipe, insulation, etc. 1.05 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. General Construction 1. All floor assemblies including finishes, openings, depressions, sleeves, curbs and bases. 2. All wall/partition assemblies including finishes, openings, recesses, sleeves, furring and backing. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 9 3. All ceiling assemblies including finishes, openings, soffits and sleeves. 4. All roof assemblies including finishes, openings, curbs, platforms and dunnage. 5. All structural supports, materials and grounds for hanging ceiling mounted and wall mounted items of foodservice equipment assemblies as described in this section. B. Plumbing 1. Water, gas and steam supply systems. 2. Sanitary drainage system. 3. Final plumbing connections including mounting of drains, faucets and piping from point of connection on equipment to building plumbing systems and interconnections between equipment components. 4. All plumbing materials including pipe, traps, stops, valves, floor drains and floor sinks, pressure reducing valves, gauges, unions and insulation. 5. Grease traps. 6. Indirect condensate drain lines from walk-ins cooler/freezer assemblies and refrigeration units to drains. 7. Mechanical/Electrical gas shut off valves as required for ventilator fire suppression system. 8. All gas and water piping materials including pipe, traps, valves, pressure reducing valves and unions from point of connection on equipment, interconnections between equipment and connection to utility distribution system and to building gas and water system. 9. Empty PVC conduit system with pull boxes for beverage systems. 10. Empty PVC conduit system with pull boxes for refrigeration systems. C. H.V.A.C. 1. Ventilation ductwork, fans and final connections to and from exhaust ventilators, dishwashers and condensate hoods. 2. All heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems except as otherwise specified in this section. D. Electrical 1. All electrical distribution, lighting and power systems except as otherwise specified in this section. 2. Final electrical connections including wiring from point of connection on equipment to building electrical systems and interconnections between equipment components. 3. All electrical materials including wire, conduit, over-current protection, main switches, safety cutouts, shunt-trip breakers, disconnect switches and controllers. 4. Shunt-trip breakers and/or contactors and all conduit and wire for shut down of electrically operated cooking equipment as required for ventilator fire suppression systems. 5. Exhaust fans, supply fans, interlocks, motor starters, disconnect switches, fan controls, switches and interconnecting wiring and conduit. 6. Empty E.M.T. conduit system with pull boxes for beverage systems. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 10 7. Empty E.M.T. conduit system for refrigeration systems. 8. Empty conduit system for point-of-sale register system. 1.06 RELATED WORK BY OWNERS: A. Furnishing and installing Owner's furnished equipment, unless otherwise specified. 1.07 PRIOR CONTRACT CONDITIONS 1.08 OWNER'S RIGHTS A. HOLDING PAYMENT The Owner, through his Representative and Inman Foodservices Group, reserves the right to hold payment from the KEC if he, or any of his subcontractors, neglect to perform properly. B. RIGHT TO DO WORK The Owner reserves the right to take any steps necessary to complete the project, and to deduct these expenses from the KEC's contract. If the KEC fails to perform properly and to satisfaction, the Owner shall notify the KEC of such failure by registered mail, return receipt requested. C. EMERGENCY REPAIRS The Owner reserves the right to make all necessary emergency repairs without voiding or impairing the guarantee while it is in effect. 1.09 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Bids presented shall be as specified by Inman Foodservices Group with specific manufacturer, model number, size, utilities requirements, capacity, options, and accessories. B. The KEC may present a price for alternate equipment (other than what is specified). In this case, the KEC must clearly and on a separate sheet of paper state that he is offering a substitution at that time for that item of equipment. He should submit complete illustrations, specifications, capacities, utilities, and operational data. It is the KEC's responsibility to prove that the item or items substituted are equivalent to the specified items. Inman Foodservices Group, as the Owner's Representative or with Owner, shall be the determining authority as to the acceptability or equivalency of alternates. Items of standard equipment shall be the latest model, new at time of delivery. C. The KEC shall be responsible for all costs associated with the approved alternate item if it requires additional space, or specific utilities, which differ from the original specifications. The KEC shall be responsible to the Owner and GC for any retrofitting, such as building changes, utility changes, and engineering changes. All substitutions and alternates must be approved by Inman Foodservice Group in writing. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 11 1.10 SUBCONTRACTORS A. The KEC shall be allowed to use subcontractors for any portion of the work that he wishes. However, prior to awarding the contract, the KEC is responsible for submitting to Inman Foodservices Group, in writing, the addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors to be approved. B. Every subcontractor shall be bound by the terms and provisions of the Contract Documents applicable to his work. Nothing contained herein shall create any contractual relationship among a contractor, and the Owner or Inman Foodservices Group. C. If in the judgment of Inman Foodservices Group any subcontractor fails to perform the work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, the KEC, after due notice from Inman Foodservices Group, shall discharge the same. This in no way releases the KEC from his obligations and responsibility under the contract. D. The KEC shall be fully responsible for providing the Owner with a Lien Release (Waiver) from his subcontractor for any payment the KEC received on behalf of the contract, whether partial or full. E. The KEC shall be fully responsible to the Owner for acts of error and omission by the subcontractor. 1.11 LAWS AND ORDINANCES A. The KEC shall certify that all work and materials comply with Federal, State and local laws, ordinances, and regulations, and is confirmed by the local inspector having jurisdiction. B. Work and materials must be in full accord, and when appropriate, shall be listed with any and all appropriate agencies, including, but not limited to: 1. Local Health Department 2. National Board of Fire Underwriters 3. OSHA 4. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) 5. Underwriter Laboratories (UL) 6. ASME / ANSI 7. AGA 8. NFPA - 96 for exhaust system 9. ADA requirements 10. U.S. Public Health Services (Ship Board) 11. HACCP / NSF Standard 7 Refrigeration and NSF 372 Low Lead Requirements 12. U.S. Public Health Food and Drug Administration 13. Refrigeration to meet DOE 2017 NSF-U.L. compliance C. All electrically heated or gas-fired, jacketed steam kettles are to meet the codes in 1992 ASME, Section VIII-Division 1, Appendix 19. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 12 D. The KEC shall check and confirm that specifications and drawings meet all codes of Federal, State and local government bodies. The drawings and specifications shall govern whenever they require larger sizes or higher standards than those required by local agencies and regulations. The regulations shall govern when drawings and specifications call for something less than they required by regulation. The Owner shall be neither held responsible nor incur extra charges related to code compliance. Inman Foodservices Group, the Architect, and the Owner shall determine if extra charges are justified. E. All foodservice equipment shall be year 2000 compliment in terms of computers and timers. F. Walk-in cooler/freezer assemblies must comply with all applicable sections of the 2009 U.S. Department of Energy (DOE), Energy Independence and Security Act (EISA), Section 312. G. All foodservice equipment shall be Energy Star Rated when possible. H. For water resource conservation, it is recommended where possible for ice makers and compressor racks to be water-cooled on a closed loop system. For pre-rinse faucets, the maximum flow rate shall be 1.3 GPM. For bar and preparation sink faucets, the maximum flow rate shall be 2.2 GPM. I. Ice makers shall be Energy Star Rated and not exceed 25 gallons of fresh water per 100 lbs. of ice produced. 1.12 INSURANCE AND BONDS A. The Owner reserves the right to request security bonds, performance bonds, or others from the KEC. In the event that the Owner requests such bonds, the KEC will be reimbursed for the cost of the bond. He should include the bond cost as a separate line item in the proposal. B. At his own expense, the KEC shall procure and maintain satisfactory public liability and casualty insurance to adequately protect himself and the Owner against damages for personal injury, including death, which may arise from operations under this contract, whether such operations are by himself, his subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by him. 1.13 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY A. All equipment furnished by the KEC shall be fully warranted by manufacturer's warrantee for parts and labor for the first year after the acceptance date of the final punch list. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 13 B. All equipment furnished by the KEC shall be fully guaranteed against defects in workmanship and material for one (1) year after Owner's final punch list acceptance. All repairs and replacements shall be made by the KEC without charge to the Owner. This guarantee period shall commence with the first usage of the equipment, for its intended purpose, after Owner/Inman Foodservices Group's final punch list is completed. C. Refrigeration systems and ice makers shall have start-up and one (1) year extended service and five (5) year extended warranty on compressors. D. Contractors who do not normally maintain local refrigeration service shall be required to provide the Owner with a refrigeration service policy from a local refrigeration service company that maintains a twelve (12) hour call service and that is acceptable to the Owner for a period of one (1) year and at no expense to the Owner. 1.14 ROYALTIES The KEC shall pay all royalties and license fees required for his equipment. The KEC agrees to indemnify all parties to this contract from the payment of any royalties, damages, losses, or expenses for suits, claims or otherwise, growing out of alleged infringement of patents, materials, and methods used in the execution of this contract. 1.20 PRIOR INSTALLATION CONDITIONS 1.21 EQUIPMENT ACCESS The KEC is responsible for verifying all building conditions and coordinating the proper access of large equipment to the building with the GC and/or CM. Any specific items needed for the lifting or movement of large, heavy, or bulky equipment is the full responsibility of the KEC. 1.22 SUBMITTALS, REQUIREMENTS AND APPROVALS The following information must be submitted to Inman Foodservices Group directly or through Owner's Representative. A. SHOP DETAILS 1. Shop drawings of all stainless fabricated equipment, which are part of this contract, shall be submitted at 3/4" (1:20) scale. Minimum size shop drawings shall be 18” x 24”. Shop drawings submitted smaller than this shall be returned disapproved. All stainless fabrication shall have dimensions, fabrication materials, thickness, detail of construction, installation and method of field joint, especially for large counters. Shop details must indicate reinforcements, methods of anchorage and quality of finishing. Shop detail drawings shall be submitted as follows: a. Reproducible Transparency (which will be returned). a. One (1) set of full size prints. 2. Shop details and all other drawings shall be delivered in a tube for protection. Folded transparencies shall be returned for resubmittal. 3. It is the responsibility of the KEC to verify all field dimensions and incorporate them into shop details. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 14 B. ROUGH-IN DRAWINGS 1. Provide Inman Foodservices Group one (1) print for review. 2. Provide complete floor plans showing sizes and location of all equipment. (Scale shall be 1/4" - 1'-0"). 3. Provide complete plans with dimensions showing locations and elevations of all plumbing, electrical and mechanical rough-ins. Use same symbols, connection numbers, and dimensioning system as indicated in Contract Document (scale shall be 1/4" - 1'-0"). 4. In the event rough in has been accomplished before the award of the contract, the Kitchen Equipment Contractor shall check existing facility and furnish all equipment to suit building conditions and utilities. No extra charges shall be allowed for utility changes to fit equipment during installation and connection. 5. Drawings shall be prepared on the Kitchen Equipment Contractor's sheets and title block by his employees. Drawings of any part thereof created by photograph, paste-up, or other methods using Inman Foodservices Group drawings and/or details will be returned for resubmittal. C. SAMPLES 1. Provide all samples of materials requested by Inman Foodservices Group for test purposes or comparisons. 2. Samples used for testing shall not be used on the work without the approval of Inman Foodservices Group. D. BROCHURES 1. Provide Inman Foodservices Group two (2) complete brochures for review showing each piece of standard manufactured equipment complete with a detail and/or description of the manufacturer's installation recommendations. Provide six (6) copies of brochure after approval. 2. Brochures are to be bound in booklet form and shall include the following: a. A separate flysheet for each component or item of equipment indicating item number, description, quantity, manufacturer, model number, finishes, modifications, options and utility requirements. b. Catalog specification sheet and/or manufacturer's drawing. 3. Provide complete plans showing locations and elevations of all depressions, bases, curtain walls and hoods, and any critical wall dimensions. Use same dimensioning system as indicated in Contract Documents. (Scale shall be 1/4" - 1'-0") 4. Plumbing, electrical, and mechanical rough-ins all shown on the same sheet will not be accepted. 5. Provide complete details on each piece of stainless-built equipment in plans, elevations, and sections. (Scale shall be 3/4" - 1'-0") 6. Fabrication details must identify all metal gauges, hardware, trim, electrical parts, special fittings, and other components by manufacturer's name and model number. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 15 E. CHECKING Checking rough-in drawings, shop drawings, details and equipment by Inman Foodservices Group is for design concept only, and does not relieve the Kitchen Equipment Contractor of responsibility for compliance with design drawings, details and specifications, verification of utilities with equipment requirements for conformity and location and verification of all dimensions of equipment building conditions or reasonable adjustments due to deviations. F. INTERPRETATIONS 1. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS a. Should it appear that the work intended to be described or any of the matters relative thereto are not sufficiently detailed or explained on the drawings or in the specifications, the Contractors shall apply to Inman Foodservices Group for such drawings or explanations as may be necessary and shall conform to them as far as they shall be consistent with original drawings. b. If any question arises regarding the true meaning of the drawings or specifications, reference shall be made to Inman Foodservices Group whose decision shall be conclusive. c. In no instance shall a bid be submitted or any work started with any uncertainty. d. Before doing any Work or ordering any materials, the Contractor shall verify all measurements of any work and shall be responsible for their correctness. Any differences, which may be found, shall be submitted to Inman Foodservices Group for consideration before proceeding with the work. e. Extra compensation will not be allowed because of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the working drawings. f. Where a conflict occurs between or within standards, specifications, codes, ordinances, and working drawings, the more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply. G. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS 1. Bidding Documents, Contract Forms, and related materials issued by Inman Foodservices Group before awarding a contract apply to this section. 1.30 INSTALLATION CONDITIONS 1.31 MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS KEC and his subcontractors must follow and comply with all manufacturer's installation requirements and recommendations, unless otherwise authorized by Inman Foodservices Group or Owner's Representative in writing. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 16 1.32 UNIONS AND TRADES KEC shall be responsible to verify the conditions of the job, if the project is union. It is the responsibility of KEC to perform work and comply with all union trade requirements. KEC should employ union trade employees to avoid shutdown or misunderstandings on job site. KEC shall be wholly responsible for all trade union relations and fees. At no time shall Owner be liable for delays or claims arising from KEC acts. 1.33 ACCESS AND AUTHORITY A. KEC work shall be available at all times for GC, CM, Architect, Inman Foodservices Group and OWNER'S Representative's inspection. B. In the event that work performed is not according to the drawings and specifications, the work is subject to rejection by Owner. Owner shall inform KEC in writing and the KEC shall remove all rejected work and comply with the Contract Document. 1.34 PAYMENTS/CHANGE ORDERS A. Payment schedule shall be as specified in the instructions to bidder and agreed upon by the Owner. B. All requests of payment shall be sent to Inman Foodservices Group through the Owner for approval for payment. C. All billings must indicate work performed to the cutoff date, material on hand. All invoices shall be accompanied by Labor and Material Releases (Lien Waver). It is the full responsibility of the KEC to clear all lien intention or liens filed by his subs. D. Prior to payment to KEC, KEC shall provide the Owner's Representative with a written guarantee of subcontractor payment satisfaction. E. In the event that change orders are required, all such changes shall be presented to the Owner's Representative through Inman Foodservices Group. 1.35 SCHEDULE & SPECIAL HANDLING Time is of the essence in this agreement and acceptance constitutes a guarantee that the KEC can and will obtain all materials, equipment and manpower, upon notice to proceed, to permit overall completion of the entire building project on schedule. KEC shall coordinate its work with progress schedule, as prepared and updated periodically by the GC/CM. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 17 A. Anticipated delays, not within the realm of control of KEC shall be the subject of written notification to the Designer and Architect immediately upon KEC's realization that delays are imminent. B. Failure of manufacturers to meet promised delivery dates will not relieve KEC of its obligation to meet schedules, unless KEC can establish, in writing, that orders were received by the manufacturer with reasonable lead times. C. Extra charges resulting from special handling or air shipment shall be paid for by the KEC. 1.36 SIGNS AND/OR PUBLICITY A. SIGNS No signs or nameplates of any type will be displayed on any part of this work or on or about the Owner's premises unless authorized in writing by the Owner. B. PUBLICITY Any publicity giving reference to this project, whether in form of press releases, brochures, photographic coverage or verbal announcement shall be only with the general or specific checking of the Owner, and in all instances shall give due mention of the Designer. 1.37 START-UP DEMONSTRATION AND MANUALS A. KEC shall provide factory-trained engineers for start-up and demonstration of equipment. Demonstration shall be done in two stages: one for operation and the second for maintenance personnel. B. KEC shall return to the job site within ten (10) days for final adjustment and calibration of equipment in each kitchen or separate facility. C. KEC shall furnish three (3) sets of service parts manuals as well as maintenance manuals. D. KEC shall prepare, for the Owner, a list of service agencies authorized by the manufacturer to service its equipment. The list should include the name of the person to contact and a telephone number. END OF SECTION Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 FOODSERVICE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 18 PART 2 - FOODSERVICE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 2.40 GENERAL EQUIPMENT 2.41 OPERATION REQUIREMENTS KEC must ensure quiet operation of foodservice and related equipment. KEC must provide sound deadening on all tables, counters and undershelves. KEC must ensure that bumpers, gaskets, stops, closures, and any other needed protection are installed on all fabricated equipment as needed. 2.42 CONNECTION TERMINALS All fabricated equipment shall be provided with standard connection terminals to allow contractors on job site to make final connections. In counters requiring multiple circuit and/or voltages, provide and mount the appropriate UL-listed breaker box and make ready for single-point connection. 2.43 HOODS/WALK-IN COOLERS AND DISH MACHINE A. KEC must verify size and location of all connections required before fabrication. B. KEC shall check job site prior to installation of walk-in cooler to verify proper dimension for all trim pieces. Verification of flooring type and appropriate depression for walk-ins is required. C. Provide stainless steel duct collars at ceiling or wall duct connection, where exposed. D. KEC shall provide all stainless steel duct connections and collars for exposed ducts. 2.44 INSERT PANS All cutouts, openings, drawers, or equipment specified or detailed to hold stainless steel insert pans shall be provided with a full compliment of pans as follows: A. One (1) stainless steel, 20-gauge (.95 mm) minimum, solid insert pan for each space, 12” x 20” unless specified otherwise, sized per plans, details, or specifications. B. Where pan sizes are not indicated in plans, details, or specifications, provide one full-size pan for each opening. C. Provide maximum depth pan to suit application and space. D. Provide 18-gauge (1.27 mm) removable stainless steel adapter bars where applicable. 2.45 TRAY SLIDES Before fabrication of counters with tray slides, the K.E.C. shall verify: Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 FOODSERVICE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 19 A. Configuration of all corners, turns, and shape of tray slides for proper support and safe guidance of trays. B. Size and shape of tray. C. Tray slide height to be 34" and meet ADA requirements. 2.46 ENCLOSURES Provide and install enclosure panels secured or removable for any equipment which houses any equipment with moveable parts, i.e., compressors, pumps, solenoid valves, temperature controls, etc. Also, cover and provide protection for any exposed steam line, refrigeration line or condensate line, which may be within reach of operating personnel. 2.47 SELF-LEVELING DISPENSERS KEC to verify make of dishware and glassware, dimensions, and weight with Owner/Operator and submit to the dispenser manufacturer so that springs may be properly calibrated. 2.48 WATER FILTER-PURIFIER A. K.E.C. shall furnish in-line water filter-purifiers to remove materials, taste, and odor for beverage systems, coffee urns, iced tea brewers, steamers, combi oven and ice makers. B. Cartridges shall be accessible securely mounted and easily replaceable. 2.50 ELECTRICAL WORK 2.51 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Before ordering equipment, the KEC shall confirm with the serving electric utility, all pertinent electrical requirements such as actual voltages available, number of phases and number of wires in the system. B. Electrical work for fabricated equipment shall be completely wired by KEC to a junction or pull box, wholly accessible, mounted on the equipment. Wiring shall be labeled for outlet or item served. C. Components and assemblies shall bear the UL label or be approved by the prevailing authority. D. Stainless fabricated and standard refrigerator units shall be provided with vapor-tight receptacles, shatterproof lamps and automatic switches. All wiring shall be concealed. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 FOODSERVICE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 20 2.52 INTERNAL WIRING OF FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT A. KEC shall be responsible for internal wiring of electrical devices, built into or forming an integral part of fabricated equipment items. Wiring to be in metal conduit to a pull box tagged for intended use. Check with Electrical Engineer for color-coding of wiring. B. Each standard item shipped in sections shall be properly connected internally and verified by KEC. Examples: ovens, dishwashers, conveyors, broilers, etc. C. Provide dishwashers and conveyors internally wired to junction box or distribution panel as specified, including push button switches, motors, immersion heaters, solenoids, etc. D. Where light fixtures are specified or detailed as part of counters or cases of fixtures, light fixtures and lamps shall be provided unless otherwise specified. If LED light fixtures are specified, all ballasts shall be included. E. Wiring for built-in strip heaters or immersion-type elements shall be provided as follows: 1. In heat zone, shall have UL-approved insulation and be not less that 300 volt rated with nickel wire. 2. Connection wiring extended in raceway or conduit to junction or pull box shall be not less than 600 volt rated AVA insulation covered wire, UL- approved, or equal. F. Wiring for fabricated refrigerator and freezer cabinets shall be UL-approved, insulated cable from exterior junction box to internal components within insulation, unless code requires metallic conduit: 1. Conduit shall be Electrical Metallic Tubing, rigid or flexible (Greenfield). For freezer applications, Seal-Tite Flex or approved equal shall be used. 2. Internal wiring shall be UL-approved rubber covered 600 volt rated conductor except door heaters, which shall be nichrome wire with silicone-braided jacket having resistance of 10.4 watts per lineal foot. 3. Convenience outlets, lighting receptacles (rubber or porcelain), and door switches shall be mounted in approved boxes. Convenience outlets for evaporators shall be twist-lock type. Solid connections as for freezer evaporators shall be made vapor tight. G. Exposed flexible steel conduit on kitchen equipment shall be neoprene-jacketed "Seal-Tite" conduit equal to Anaconda type "UA" UL-approved, complete with approved liquid-tight connectors on each end, designed to provide electrical grounding continuity. H. Exposed electrical conduit used in kitchen wet area applications, except for flexible connections, shall be rigid galvanized steel. Thin wall conduit (EMT) will not be permitted for wet areas. Exposed outlet boxes shall be liquid-tight with thread hubs. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 FOODSERVICE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 21 2.53 CONVENIENCE AND POWER OUTLETS A. KEC shall make cut-outs and install appropriate boxes or outlets in fabricated fixtures complete with wiring conduit, outlet and cover plate. All exposed outlet boxes to all run horizontal with splash our counter above. B. All outlets and plugs shall conform to NEMA standards. C. All electrical outlets and devices shall be first quality "Specification Grade." D. All convenience outlets specified in backsplashes of underbar equipment and counters with sinks shall have G.F.I. style receptacles installed and run horizontal. 2.54 PLUGS AND CORDS Where cords and plugs are used, they shall comply with National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA) requirements. 2.55 HEATING EQUIPMENT A. Electric and heating equipment shall be so installed as to be readily cleanable or removable for cleaning. B. Steam-heated stainless-fabricated equipment shall be a self-contained assembly complete with control valves located in an accessible position. 2.56 STARTERS, SWITCHES AND CONTROLS A. The KEC shall furnish all starters, motor controls, remote controls and transformers as required. B. All switches shall be located out of heat zone. C. All electric motors furnished with specified foodservice equipment to be ball bearing motors type TEFC (Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled) with capacitor start. 2.60 PLUMBING WORK 2.61 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Before ordering any equipment, the K.E.C. shall confirm with the gas company the type and pressure of cooking gas being provided to the facility. B. The K.E.C. shall confirm the building water pressure and provide the necessary pressure reducing valves for proper operating pressures of dishmachine. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 FOODSERVICE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 22 2.62 FAUCETS A. All sinks and equipment requiring open water supply are to be provided with faucets. All faucets and water fittings that dispense water for drinking or cooking to meet NSF/ANSI Standard 61 - Section 9. Drinking water requirements must bear approval seal. B. All vacuum breakers to be provided with chrome stand pipe and goose neck piping. C. Faucets are to be the following manufacturer and type. (Approved alternate manufacturers Fisher and Chicago Faucets). D. Faucets to meet the following codes: 1. Commonwealth of Massachusetts P1-0814-29 and G1-0216-368 2. City of Chicago 3. City of New York (Refer to item specifications for type required) Type 1 T&S No. B-1123 deck mounted 8” O.C. 12” swivel spout. Fisher No. 3313 – 8” O.C. deck mounted faucet with 12” swing spout. Type 2 T&S No. B-1112 deck mounted 4” O.C. 10” swivel spout. Fisher No. 3512 – 4” O.C. deck mounted faucet with 10” swing spout. Type 3 T&S No. B-231 splash mounted, 12” swivel spout. Fisher No. 13269 – 8” O.C. splash mounted faucet with 12” swing spout. Type 4 T&S No. B-290 splash mounted, 12” swivel spout (¾” pipe connection). Fisher No. 5414 – 8” O.C. splash mounted faucet, (¾” pipe connection) with 14” swing spout. Type 5 T&S No. B-1141 deck mounted swivel gooseneck. Fisher No. 3515 – 4” O.C. deck mounted with swivel gooseneck spout. Type 6 T&S No. B-207 faucet for cook’s table, single fill. Fisher No. 3010 Single supply faucet, deck mounted. Type 7 T&S No. B-123B deck mounted pre-rinse assembly with wall bracket. Fisher No. 2310-1WB Pre-rinse unit, 8” O.C. deck mounted control valve. Type 8 T&S No. B-133B splash mounted pre-rinse assembly with wall bracket. Fisher No. 113382 Pre-rinse unit, 8” O.C. splash mounted. Type 9 T&S No. B-123B pitcher filler faucet with No. B-155 add-on faucet mounted to deck mount control valve with food grade hose and wall bracket. Fisher No. 93971 Water Station –8” O.C. deck mounted control valve, wall bracket, food grade hose and glass filler valve. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 FOODSERVICE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 23 Type 10 T&S No. B-173 with straight Nozzle 2864-40 in lieu of B-0107 spray valve with B-109-3 wall bracket. Provide with food grade hose and wall bracket. Fisher No. 11117-WB Water Station – single supply control valve with glass filler valve, wall bracket and food grade hose. Type 11 T&S No. B-1225 combination glass and pitcher fill faucet with No. B- 325LN deck mount control valve. Fisher No. 98752 Water Station – 4” O.C. control valve with combination pitcher fill faucet and glass filler head. Type 12 T&S No. B-594, 24” double-jointed pot and kettle fill faucet. Fisher No. 4731 Pot filler faucet – single water inlet, 24” double jointed pot filler spout. Type 13 T&S No. B-513 deck mount 4” O.C. faucet base with built-in back flow check valves two (2) T&S No. BVCH3/8 and T&S No. B-101A-36” flexible stainless steel food grade hose with shut-off valve and “B-K” protector flange. Fisher No. 2805CV & 9159 Water Station – 4” O.C. remote control valve with 60” flexible food grade hose, thru deck fitting, glass filler valve with short squeeze lever. Type 14 T&S No. B-102-A 60” flexible food grade hose and pot filler valve with wall bracket No. B-104-D and wall hook No. B-513 deck mount 4” O.C. faucet base with built-in back flow check valves. Fisher No. 2805CV & 2909 & 2907 Pot Filler Hose with 60” flexible food grade hose, remote dual control valve, wall hook. T&S Note: All splash mounted faucets to be provided with two (2) T&S No. 150X wall elbows. Fisher Note: All splash mounted faucets to be provided with two (2) Fisher Model 2400-2103 wall elbows. Note: Approved alternate on faucets is Chicago Faucets providing they meet the all specifications. Approved alternate must meet the all specifications including food grade hoses on Type 9, 10, 13 and 14. 2.63 DISHERWELLS Disherwells shown on drawings shall be T&S Model 6678-45 with Model B-2282 / Fisher Model 3041 faucet or as specified. 2.64 WASTES Unless otherwise specified, sink compartments shall be provided with Fisher 22306 Series or T&S Series B3917-01 rotary type, one quarter turn quick-opening, rough chrome finish, red brass waste having rear wall connected overflow. Over-flow tubing shall be 1-1/4” inch diameter brass tubing, nickel-plated. Waste outlet shall be 2 inch I.P.S. unless otherwise indicated. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 FOODSERVICE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 24 2.65 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Piping shall be routed concealed with vertical pipes plumb and horizontal pipes graded to uniform slopes. Adjacent pipes shall be parallel. Plumbing lines shall have threaded ends ready for final connections. Piping passing through finished surfaces shall have chrome-plated escutcheon flanges on exposed sides. Pipe shall be supported with 14 gauge stainless steel brackets, secured to fixture frame, space to provide rigid assembly. Service lines shall be extended to the exterior of fixtures or run in a service chase built into base of fixture. Exposed pipes, valves, fittings and controls shall be chrome-plated or stainless steel. B. Exposed steam pipes and/or hot water pipes shall have a minimum of 1” insulation veneered with 20 gauge stainless steel. Steam heated items shall have factory installed pressure regulators, control valves, safety valves, strainers, thermostatic bucket traps, check valves, and all components necessary for the proper function of the item. Provide pressure gauges where specified or indicated. C. Exposed drain valve handles, control valve handles, and other similar devices shall be recessed into bodies of closed base fixtures or installed under tops of open base fixtures. In no case will unprotected protruding handles or other unprotected plumbing components be acceptable. Valves shall be located in accessible places or hinged door access panels shall be provided of sufficient size to allow easy accessibility to bodies, handwheels, and bonnets. Gate valves shall be used on lines required to be wide open or fully shut-off. Globe valves shall be used on lines requiring flow control. Unions shall be provided in locations that will allow dismantling or servicing of valves, controls, trim, or equipment without removing any main piping. 2.70 UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATION A. Refrigerators/Freezers shall be all metal construction with no wood. Outer shell to be constructed with 18 gauge stainless steel and shall be fully welded to form a vapor proof seal. Inner shell to be no less than 20 gauge stainless steel with coved corners pitched to a 1” stainless steel drain fitting welded to the shell. Drain should be located as close as possible to the blower coil. B. Entire compartment shall be insulated with 2” thick approved urethane insulation on all sides, top and bottom. Provide a non-toxic, high-impact plastic breaker strip around the entire cabinet opening perimeter. Provide removable condensate proof heating wire around all freezer doors. A removable vinyl magnetic gasket shall be installed around the full perimeter of cabinet opening for a positive seal. Flush mount a 2” diameter dial thermometer with chrome-plated Bezel in face of cabinet. C. Interior shelving to be stainless steel wire shelves mounted on adjustable clips providing four point support. Shelves shall be easily removable for cleaning. Provide one (1) bottom shelf and one (1) intermediate shelf. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 FOODSERVICE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 25 D. Doors, if specified, shall be fabricated 1-1/4” thick with approved urethane insulation. Outer shell shall be 18-gauge stainless steel pan type construction with flat sides for edge-mounted hardware secured to internal steel tapping strips in door body. Provide each door with heavy-duty self-closing cam lift hinges. Door to actuate an incandescent shatterproof light. Light to be mounted so as not to interfere with storage space. E. Drawers, if specified, shall be mounted on stainless steel self-closing roller bearing tracks with positive stops. A vinyl magnetic gasket is to be provided around entire perimeter of drawer front for a positive seal. Drawer fronts to be 18 gauge stainless steel construction with urethane insulation. Provide condensate-proof heating wires in cabinet mullion and the entire perimeter of drawer opening. F. Where undercounter refrigerators are specified to have top opening to receive stainless steel pans, the openings shall be die stamped and fitted with a removable stainless steel double pan fully insulated cover with gasket and stainless steel lift handle. 2.80 UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS A. Evaporator coils for custom fabricated and buyout refrigerator/freezers shall be blower type coils and be installed for accessibility and replacement. B. All temperature controls, expansion valves, sight glass, filter/dryers and solenoid valves are to be installed at the time of manufacturing and mounted for easy adjustment and service. C. Refrigeration circuits shall have automatic expansion valves, dual high-low pressure switches, high-pressure line sight glass and line vibration eliminators. D. Evaporator coils shall have the condensate drain line routed to an indirect waste and/or furnished with a condensate evaporator as specified under Item Specifications. E. Each condensing unit shall have a separate control on/off switch with pilot light and an engraved phenolic plastic identification sign. F. Refrigeration lines are to be Type ACR copper with cast fittings assembled by silver soldering joints. Silver soldering or silver brazing shall be done in presence of nitrogen (oil pumped) in tubing to prevent oxidation and scale formation. Refrigeration system shall be evacuated three (3) times to a pressure of 300 microns maximum and flushed between each evacuation with refrigerant. Refrigeration lines shall be insulated with Armstrong Armaflex insulation. G. Refrigeration systems shall operate on Freon Type R-22 in high and medium temperature applications and Type R-22 / Type 404A in low temperature applications as specified under individual Item Specifications. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 FOODSERVICE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS 11400 - 26 H. On remote refrigeration systems all refrigeration piping is to be pre-piped at the time of manufacturing and routed to one (1) central location ready for a one (1) point hook-up by the Kitchen Equipment Refrigeration Contractor. I. Refrigeration system shall be properly sized to maintain refrigerated food products at 38 degrees to 40 degrees Fahrenheit and frozen food at 0 to -10 degrees Fahrenheit. Refrigeration systems to meet HACCP requirements of maintaining 40º F. in raised rail cold wells. 2.90 COLD PANS / FROST TOPS A. Interior shall be 16 gauge stainless steel one (1) piece construction with all corners coved on a 3/4” radius pitched to 1” stainless steel drain fitting welded to the shell. Pipe drain line to bottom of cabinet. B. Exposed exteriors shall be 18-gauge stainless steel. Concealed exteriors shall be 18-gauge galvanized steel. C. Entire pan shall be insulated with 2” thick urethane foam. Provide a non-toxic high impact plastic breaker strip around the entire opening to prevent condensation. D. Refrigerated cold pan coils shall be 1/2” O.D. Type K copper tube with wrought copper fittings and silver soldered joints. Space runs of coil at 1-1/2” O.C. parallel to the long axis of the cold pan bottom and solder in place. Runs of coils must be straight and soldered joints must be 1” long equally spaced at 4” O.C. securing the coils to the pan. After the coils are secured to the pan, cover the entire bottom with thermal mastic and apply waterproof covering. Refrigerated cold pans to meet 1997 HACCP/NSF 7 refrigeration requirements. E. Cold pan and frost top units shall have a separate control on/off switch pilot light and an engraved phenolic plastic identification sign. 2.95 VENTILATION OF REFRIGERATED EQUIPMENT A. Adequate air supply and exhaust shall be provided for self-contained refrigeration condensing units, both fabricated and standard, as required for proper operation. B. KEC to provide louvered panels for all self-contained refrigeration with adequate supply and return air. C. If, in the opinion of the KEC, additional ventilation is required to ensure correct operating temperatures, he shall so state in a letter to Inman Foodservices Group for evaluation and decision before installation. END OF SECTION Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 EXECUTION 11400-27 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.00 GENERAL INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT 3.01 SUPERVISION An experienced and competent project manager, representing the KEC, shall be assigned to the project during the entire progress of the KEC's work. KEC must provide a full time project manager on site as needed during the installation phase of the project. Project manager to assist the other trades with the coordination of the foodservice equipment installation. Project manager to be full time employed by the KEC and not be sub-contractors or installers. 3.02 TRIMMING AND SEALING EQUIPMENT A. Any space between units to walls, ceilings, floors and adjoining units, non-portable shall be completely sealed against entrance of food particles or vermin by means of trim strips, welding, soldering, or commercial joint material suitable to the nature of the equipment and the size of the opening. B. Sealer, when not exposed to extreme heat, shall be Silicone Construction Sealant in appropriate color. C. Ends of hollow sections shall be closed. D. Enclosed fixtures without legs mounted on masonry bases or floor shall be trimmed and sealed watertight to curb base or floor. 3.03 CUTTING AND FITTING A. KEC shall do all cutting and fitting required on the equipment by sub-contractors to make their work fit. B. Should any repairs to foodservice equipment be required due to neglect of other contractors, all extra charges must be approved and all repairs must be noted in writing before work is performed, stipulating the price and to whom the extra expense is to be paid. In case this KEC does not secure such extra order, the expense shall be borne by him. C. No cutting, notching, drilling, or altering of any kind shall be done to the building by any contractor without first obtaining permission from the Architect. 3.04 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT A. The KEC is responsible, during the progress of the project, to protect all his equipment against theft and/or damage until final acceptance by the Owner. B. Pre-fabricated walk-in boxes, on-site and installed in advance of the rest of the equipment, are not to be used for general storage by other trades and should be locked by the KEC before leaving the site. Damage and/or theft resulting from KEC's failure to secure boxes will be repaired/replaced at the KEC’s expense. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 EXECUTION 11400-28 3.05 EQUIPMENT START-UP/DEMONSTRATION A. Carefully test, adjust and regulate all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and certify to the Owner that the installation, adjustments and performance are in full compliance. B. Provide all ice makers with factory authorized start-up and service. 3.06 FINAL OBSERVATION A. Final observation shall be made when certified that the K.E.C. has completed his work made a thorough review of the installation/operation of each item in the contract, and further attests that the project is in compliance with the Construction Documents. B. The Owner, Architect, and/or Foodservice Consultant or their assigns shall have access to the foodservice equipment in the "bonded" warehouse and the site of final destination during installation. K.E.C. to correct any errors found during inspection(s) with the greatest possible speed. C. Repetitive Final Observations (more than two) and all costs associated thereto, which may be incurred due to the failure of the K.E.C. to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, will be invoiced to the K.E.C. at an hourly rate with addition of travel expense. END OF SECTION Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 SPECIFIC CONDITIONS – STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATION 11400 - 29 PART 4 - SPECIFIC CONDITIONS – STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATION 4.00 STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATION 4.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF FABRICATION A. All fabrication shall conform to general acceptance of the foodservice industry. B. All fabrication shall meet or exceed National Sanitation Foundation standards including the latest editions and revisions. All custom refrigeration shall meet NSF-7/HAACP. C. All items shall meet sanitation requirements of USPHS Foodservice Manual No. 9 and Manual No. 934 for shipboard work and ADA for healthcare work. D. It is required that all "fabricated" items of equipment described in the following specifications be manufactured by an N.S.F. fabricator who has the plant, personnel, and engineering facilities to properly design, detail and manufacture the highest quality foodservice equipment. One (1) manufacturer shall manufacture the equipment. The manufacturer of this equipment must be able to show that it has, for the past seven (7) years, been engaged in the manufacturing and distribution of fabricated foodservice equipment as required under the contract, as its principle product. E. All stainless fabrication must be done in an approved workmanship like manner to the complete satisfaction of Inman Foodservices Group and Owner. F. Upon completion of the stainless fabrication before crating and shipping, digital photos shall be taken of all items specified prior to equipment leaving fabricator’s warehouse. Photos must be e-mailed to Julie Jones at jeff.brown@inman-inc.com with the name of the project in the subject line. 4.02 MATERIALS A. STAINLESS STEEL Stainless steel shall be of US Standard gauges as indicated, but not less than 18 gauge unless otherwise. Stainless steel to be 18-8 AISI, Type 304 with hardest worktable temper, No. 4 finish. B. GALVANIZED STEEL Galvanized Steel shall be of 14-gauge and shall be electro-galvanized. Galvanized steel shall be used in non-exposed areas, areas that have no contact with food or food serving items and in framework, when used in framework, galvanized steel shall be all welded construction. C. INSULATION MATERIALS 1. For normal temperature applications, such as fabricated under counter refrigerators, use urethane material 2" (50 mm) thick, bounded at all joints. 2. For heated-type applications, such as plate warmers, use block-type rock wool, minimum 1" (25 mm) thick. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 SPECIFIC CONDITIONS – STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATION 11400 - 30 3. For low-temperature applications, such as ice bins, cold pans, or fabricated under counter freezers, use urethane, rigid board, foam or foamed-in-place, not less than 2" (50 mm) thick, except that vertical surfaces of cold pans and ice bins may be 1" (25 mm) thick. Insulation shall be bonded at joints to prevent condensation on exterior. 4. At counter tops subject to heat from cooking equipment and/or refrigeration compressors, use 1" (25 mm) thick John Manville's Martinite 36, or equal, to insulate underside of top. Martinite material shall be added between freezer or refrigerator and 14-gauge (1.98 mm) stainless steel top. D. LAMINATED PLASTIC 1. Shall be Formica, Wilsonart, Nevamar or approved equal. 2. Shall be veneered with approved waterproof and heatproof cement. Rubber base adhesives are not acceptable. 3. Shall be applied directly over close-grained plywood, such as solid Mahogany or solid Birch, of selected, smooth, sanded stock to ensure a smooth ripple-free laminated surface. 4. If specified plywood in unavailable, submit specifications and samples of alternate material for approval. 5. Exposed faces and edges shall be faced with 1/16" (1.6 mm) thick material. Corresponding backs are to be covered with approved backing and balancing sheet material. E. SOUND DEADENING The undersides of all metal tops, drainboards and sinks shall have a hard, dry self curing mastic applied to 1/16” thickness to all surfaces. Exposed mastic will not be acceptable. 4.03 METAL TOP CONSTRUCTION Metal tops shall be one-piece 14-gauge welded construction, including field joints. Secure to a full perimeter galvanized steel channel from cross-braced not farther than 30" (760 mm) on center. Fasten top with stud bolts or tack welds. Underside of tops shall be coated with a minimum 1/16" (1.6 mm) thick approved hard-drying, sound-deadening, and mastic material. Apply by spreading after top has been secured to frame, such that top and frame are covered and sealed. 4.04 ENCLOSED CABINET BASES Bases shall be fabricated from not less than 18-gauge (1.27 mm) steel reinforced by forming the metal ends and shelves. Partitions shall be all of stainless steel. The ends and vertical partitions can be of single wall construction, with a 2" (50 mm) face, all through partitions and sides must be welded in the intersection and flush with the bottom. Unexposed backs and structural members may be constructed of galvanized steel. Intermediate shelves shall be removable, except the bottom shelf when the cabinet is on legs. When the cabinet is on a masonry base, the bottom shelf shall be removable to allow access for cleaning. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 SPECIFIC CONDITIONS – STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATION 11400 - 31 4.05 LEGS AND CROSSRAILS A. Legs and Crossrailings shall be of 1-5/8" (41 mm), 16-gauge (1.59 mm) stainless steel tubing. All crossrails shall be continuously welded, grounded and polished. Tack welds or other methods of connection are not acceptable. Bottoms of legs shall be wedged inward and fitted with a stainless steel bullet-type foot with not less than 2" adjustment. Freestanding legs shall be pegged to floor with 1/4" (6 mm) stainless steel rod. B. Stainless steel gusset shall be not less than 3" (76 mm) diameter at top and 3- 3/4" (95 mm) long. Outer shell 16-gauge (1.59 mm) stainless steel reinforced with 12-gauge (2.78 mm) mild steel insert welded interior shell. Gusset shall be large enough to accommodate 1-5/8" (41 mm) tub with provision for Allen screw fastener. C. Low counter leg shall be constructed of stainless steel exterior of 5-3/4" (146 mm) minimum height or 7" (178 mm) maximum height with 3-1/2" (89 mm) square plate with four countersunk holes, welded to the top for fastening. D. Adjustable foot shall be constructed of stainless steel 1-1/2" (38 mm) diameter tapered at the bottom to 1" (25 mm) diameter, fitted with threaded cold rolled rod for minimum 1-1/2" (38 mm) x 3/4" (19 mm) threaded bushing plug welded to legs. Push-in foot not acceptable. E. When legs are fastened to equipment, the following methods should be used: 1. SINKS: reinforced with bushings and set screws. 2. METAL TOP TABLE or DISHTABLE: to be welded to galvanized steel frame of 14-gauge or more and secured to the top with screws through slotted holes. 3. WOOD TOP: a welded stainless steel channel of not less than 14-gauge (1.98 mm), secured to the top with screws through slotted holes. F. Kick plates to be fully welded assemblies and clip on to legs with spring clips. No magnets. 4.06 SHELVES When shelves are part of the fixture, the following shall take place: A. Open base type shelf shall be notched around the leg and continuously welded to the leg. B. Cabinet base type shelf shall be turned-up on the backside a minimum of 1/4" (6 mm) radius and further slightly to ensure a tight fit to enclosure panels. 4.07 SINKS, STEAM TABLES AND BAIN MARIES A. When multiple compartments are part of the design, they shall be continuous on the exterior without applied facing strips or panels. Bottoms of each compartment shall be creased such as to endure complete drainage to waste opening. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 SPECIFIC CONDITIONS – STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATION 11400 - 32 B. Partitions between compartments shall be double thickness continuous and welded. C. Where sink bowls are exposed, the exterior shall be polished to a Number 4 finish. D. Fabrication shall furnish and install drains, wastes and faucets. They shall be as follows or equal: 1. Waste to be Kenco Model DA-51 with 3-1/2" (89 mm) basket and connected overflow. 2. Drains shall be Fisher Model 22306 rotary-type waste without connected overflow. Valve to be 2" (50 mm) chrome-plated. 3. Water pan for bain maries shall be fitted with 2" (50 mm) waste with basket strainer with connected overflow and adapter to connect to 1-1/2" (38 mm) drain line. Use Klein box pattern basket, drain number 4161-CP with 458-X overflow head. 4. Furnish faucets for all sinks, bain maries, water stations and other fixtures. Water stations shall have gooseneck water faucet. 4.08 OTHER FABRICATED COMPONENTS A. CASTERS 1. Shall be heavy-duty type, ball-bearing, and solid or disc wheel with non-marking greaseproof rubber, neoprene or polyurethane tire. 2. Wheels to be 5" (127 mm) diameter, minimum width of tread 1-3/16" (30 mm), with a minimum capacity per caster of 250 lbs. (113.4 kg). 3. Solid material wheels to be provided with stainless steel rotating wheel guards. 4. To be sanitary, have sealed wheel and swivel bearings and polished plated finish (per NSF). B. DOORS 1. Metal doors shall be double-cased stainless steel. Other pans shall be 18-gauge (1.27 mm) stainless steel with corners welded, ground smooth, and polished. Inner pan shall be 20-gauge (.95 mm) stainless steel fitted tightly into outer pan with a sound-deadening material such as Celotex or Styrofoam used as a core. The two pans shall be tack-welded together and joints solder-filled. Doors shall finish approximately 3/4" (19 mm) thick, and be fitted with flush recessed type stainless steel door pulls. 2. Sliding doors shall be mounted on large, quiet ball bearing rollers in 14-gauge (1.98 mm) stainless steel overhead tracks and be removable without the use of tools. Bottom of cabinet shall have stainless steel guide-pins and not channel tracks for doors. 3. Wood doors shall be fabricated as detailed. If Formica or other plastic surfaces are used, all sides must be laminated. 4. Hinged doors shall be mounted on heavy-duty, NSF-approved hinges, or as noted on plans or specifications. 5. All doors to have friction grips. Magnets are not acceptable. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 SPECIFIC CONDITIONS – STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATION 11400 - 33 C. HARDWARE 1. Shall be solid, heavy-duty type. 2. Door hardware shall be locking type, keyed and master keyed. 3. Shall be identified with manufacturer's name and number so that broken or worn parts may be replaced. 4. Submit samples for approval, when requested. 5. Pulls when specified shall be Klein Hardware, or equal. D. DRAWER ASSEMBLIES 1. Assemblies shall consist of removable drawer body mounted in a ball bearing slide assembly and padlock assembly. 2. Slide assembly consists of one pair of roller bearing extension slides with side and back enclosure panels, front spacer angle, two drawer carrier angles secured to slides and stainless steel front. 3. Slides are to be Model No. 3320-22 (250 lb. capacity) (113.4 kg) made by Grant Pulley and Hardware Co., or equal. 4. Drawer bodies for general storage are to be 20" x 20" (508 mm x 508 mm) with Royalite containers are manufactured by United States Rubber Co. 5. Drawers intended to hold food products should be removable type with 12" x 20" (305 mm x 508 mm) stainless steel assembly. 6. Drawer fronts are double cased, 3/4" (19 mm) thick, with 18-gauge (1.27 mm) stainless steel welded and polished front pan. Stainless steel back pan is tightly fitted and tack welded. Sound deaden with rigid insulation. Provide drawer pull per Detail KD-1.3 on all stainless fabricated drawers, both dry and refrigerated. 7. All drawers shall be provided with replaceable soft neoprene stem bumpers or, for refrigerated drawers, a full perimeter soft gasket. E. ICE BINS / PANS All ice bins, ice pans, refrigerated cold pans and frost tops shall be provided with breaker strips where adjoining top or cabinet face materials meet to insulate and prevent condensation from forming. 4.09 FABRICATION WORKMANSHIP All stainless fabrication must be done in an approved workmanship like manner to the complete satisfaction of Inman Foodservices Group and Owner. A. WELDING AND SOLDERING 1. Materials 18-gauge (1.27 mm) or heavier, shall be welded. 2. Seams and joints shall be shop-welded or soldered as the nature of the material may require. 3. Welds must be ground smooth and polished to match original finish. 4. Where galvanizing has been burned off, the weld shall be cleaned and touched up with high-grade aluminum paint. B. FASTENERS AND JOINTS The following will not be accepted: 1. Exposed screw or bolt heads. 2. Rivets. 3. Butt joints made by rivetting straps under seams and then filled with solder. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 SPECIFIC CONDITIONS – STAINLESS STEEL FABRICATION 11400 - 34 C. ROLLED EDGES Rolled edges shall be as detailed, with corners bullnosed, ground and polished with no sharp edges. D. COVED CORNERS All stainless steel foodservice equipment shall have 1/2" (13 mm) or larger radius coves in all horizontal and vertical corners and intersections per NSF standards. E. CLOSURES Where ends of fixtures, splashbacks, shelves, etc., are open, fill by forming the metal, or weld sections, if necessary, to close entire opening flush to walls or adjoining fixtures. F. KEC shall make cut-outs and install appropriate boxes or outlets in fabricated fixtures complete with wiring conduit, outlet and cover plate. All exposed outlet boxes to all run horizontal with splash our counter above. END OF SECTION Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 SPECIFIC CONDITIONS – KITCHEN VENTILATION 11400 - 35 PART 5 - SPECIFIC CONDITIONS – KITCHEN VENTILATION 5.01 A. SCOPE OF WORK 1. Furnish and install all labor, materials and service necessary for the fabrication and installation of the Kitchen Exhaust System in accordance with the drawings and specifications, including that which is reasonably inferred. 2. All Exhaust Ventilators shall be manufactured by one manufacturer and installed by one installer. 3. Work shall be accomplished so as not to delay the project construction schedule, interfere or conflict with the work being performed by other contractors. Work shall be coordinated and integrated in cooperation with them to prevent conflict of work necessitating changes to work already completed. Should conflicts occur, Kitchen Equipment Contractor shall notify the Owner for his coordination in its resolution. 4. The equipment shall be delivered and installed on schedule by factory supervised and licensed hood installer. The Kitchen Equipment Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the work with the General Contractor and other trades as necessary. 5. Hanging height to finished floor shall be 6’-6”, unless otherwise specified. 6. Refer to the Item Specifications for individual item requirements and details. 7. The Kitchen Equipment Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the timely installation of the Exhaust Ventilator with the General Contractor to prevent prolonged exposure of floor cleaning chemicals to the stainless steel. 8. The Kitchen Equipment Contractor shall fully familiarize himself with the job site and the architectural drawings and specifications before beginning any work. 9. The Kitchen Equipment Contractor shall be responsible for establishing a time schedule with the General Contractor that will insure the job site coordination with the various trades and to insure job site conditions will meet the requirements of the Exhaust Ventilators size and hanging weight. 10. The Kitchen Equipment Contractor shall notify Inman Associates and the General Contractor in writing if, in his opinion, the job site is not adequate to insure proper installation of the Exhaust Ventilators. Notification shall be in writing with sufficient time to effect corrective measures to meet the installation schedule. 11. Exhaust Ventilators shall be cleaned and ready for operation at the time the building is turned over to the Owner. 5.02 B. WORK INCLUDED 1. Light fixtures complete with bulbs, fan and light on/off switches. 2. Temperature fire/alarm systems and all junction boxes. 3. Closure panels and finish trim. 4. Hood support rods. 5. Shop drawings. 6. Fire Suppression Systems. 7. Field dimensions before fabrication. 8. Factory supervised and approved installation. 9. Installation complete including without limitation, enclosure panels, trim and sealing ready for duct connections by others. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 SPECIFIC CONDITIONS – KITCHEN VENTILATION 11400 - 36 5.03 C. WORK NOT INCLUDED 1. Electrical service for and connection of lights, switches, any temperature alarms and fan speed control switches. The Electrician shall furnish and install conduit in cooperation with the Kitchen Equipment Contractor. All conduit shall be installed on the exterior top surface of the Exhaust Ventilator and shall penetrate at a point where it can drop directly to the point of connection on the component on the interior. The Electrician shall furnish and install nipples and fire seal offs at each point the conduit penetrates the Exhaust Ventilator. The holes shall be minimum size, fire sealed and trimmed. 2. Floor sinks and floors drains for water wash ventilators. 3. Exhaust and make-up air fans and duct work unless specified under the item specification. 4. Magnetic starter switches and holding coils 5.04 D. MATERIALS 1. Exhaust Ventilator shall be of all stainless steel construction, minimum 18- gauge, Type 304. All exposed surfaces shall be a number 4 finish. 5.05 E. WORKMANSHIP 1. All items shall be installed plumb, square, level and in proper elevation, plane location and in alignment with other work. 2. All work shall be designed and manufactured to comply with field conditions. 5.06 F. LIGHT FIXTURES AND SWITCHES 1. Quantity of light fixtures shall be as indicated on the plan. 2. Back-of-House recessed light fixtures shall be LED as specified. 3. Front-of-House recessed light fixtures shall be incandescent or LED as specified. 4. Alternate light fixture when recessed mounted cannot be used, provide a standard globe style vaporproof fixture with guard. 5.07 G. FILTER CARTRIDGES 1. Filters shall be horizontal mounted, self-draining and all stainless steel constructed. Maximum size 19.5”. 5.08 H. CLOSURE PANELS 1. Closure panels shall be furnished and installed to close the space between the top of the Exhaust Ventilator and the finished ceiling of the building. 2. Panels to be all stainless steel. Panels to be lift out type with side turned in to form a pan. At ceilings securely fasten a channel and at face of Exhaust Ventilator, securely fasten an angle for panel to slip into. Channel and angle to match panel material. 3. When the area does not have a finished ceiling, closure panels shall not be required, unless otherwise specified or required by the Health Department. 4. When air-cooled refrigeration is specified, the KEC shall provide louvered panels to ensure proper air flow over compressors. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 SPECIFIC CONDITIONS – KITCHEN VENTILATION 11400 - 37 5.09 I. APPROVALS AND TESTING 1. Exhaust Ventilators shall be ETL listed to the UL 710 Standard “Exhaust Hoods for Commercial Cooking Equipment”. Hoods shall be tested for structural performance under fan failure and flare up conditions. 2. Exhaust Ventilators shall be independently tested in accordance with ASTM 1704-05 for low volume exhaust performance. Exhaust Ventilators shall be sized based on testing data collected and experience. 3. Exhaust Ventilators shall bear the NSF mark for Standard 2 “Food Service Equipment”. 4. Exhaust Ventilators shall be constructed in strict accordance with the IMC 2012, specifically the hood safety interlock described in Section 507.2.1.1. 5. Exhaust Ventilators shall be constructed in strict accordance with NFPA 96 “Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations” Chapter 4-6. Clearances described in Table A.3.3.37 will be strictly adhered to. 6. Exhaust Ventilators shall meet all applicable local codes. END OF SECTION Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 38 PART 6 - ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS – CATERING/EXHIBITION KITCHEN Item 1 Description: MOP SINK Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: IMC/Teddy Model No.: FS Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Size and shape as per plan. b. Provide complete with service faucet T&S Brass and Bronze Model 0665. c. Provide with 30" hose and hanger assembly. d. One (1) piece wash basin to be 16 gauge, type 304 stainless steel with coved corners. e. Secure mop sink to floor and seal per the General Requirements. f. Provide 18 gauge stainless steel wall splash as per Detail KD- 10.8. Item 2 Description: S/S WALL CABINET Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Fabricate Specifier ID No.: I025 Fabricate per general requirements Size and shape per plan and details including: a. Provide as shown one (1) 12" deep by 2' - 3" long 14 gauge stainless steel wall mounted storage cabinet. b. Provide enclosed storage cabinet with intermediate shelf and doors hinged as per plan with cylinder locks all keyed alike. c. Secure cabinet to wall with stainless steel fasteners at height as indicated on plan. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 39 d. Seal per general requirements. Special Instructions: General Contractor to provide backing in wall to support storage cabinets as per standard detail KD-1.23 / KD-1.24 and Special Conditions Plan. Item 3 Description: MOP/BROOM HOLDER Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: IMC/Teddy Model No.: MH3 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide where shown one (1) 24" long stainless steel mop/broom hanger with spring loaded rubber grips. Mount at height indicated on drawing. b. Secure to wall with stainless steel fasteners and expansion shields. c. Seal to wall as per general requirements. Special Instructions: General Contractor to provide backing in wall to support rack assembly as per standard details and Special Conditions Plan. Item 4 Description: EMPLOYEE LOCKER Quantity: 1 Lot Manufacturer: Kelmax Equipment Model No.: EL-2/6 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide stacked style locker, two (2) compartment each for a total of six (6) lockers. b. Provide with legs. c. Provide with pad lock feature. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 40 Item 5 Description: 24” DRY STORAGE SHELVING Quantity: 5 Manufacturer: Metro Model No.: Super Erecta Specifier ID No.: I025 Size and shape as per plan and details, including: a. Four (4) tier high super adjustable stainless steel wire shelves. b. Provide with 74" high posts, four (4) per unit with adjustable feet. c. K.E.C. to field verify dimensions before ordering. d. Shelving to be manufactured in North America. Item 6 Description: S/S CORNER GUARD Quantity: 5 Manufacturer: Fabricate Specifier ID No.: I025 Fabricate per general requirements Size and shape per plan and details including: a. 16 Gauge stainless steel corner guards to be installed where shown on plan, 1" above the cove base. KEC to fasten with stainless steel screws and seal. b. Refer to Standard Detail KD-10.21. Item 7 Description: ROLL-IN REFRIGERATOR +34° Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Continental Refrigerator Model No.: DL2RI Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide as part of this assembly one (1) U.L. Listed approved cord and plug set. b. Provide all stainless steel exterior and interior finish. c. Provide with solid doors hinged as indicated on drawings. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 41 d. Provide with stainless steel ramps and interior rack guides. e. Provide with LED lights. f. Provide with standard locks, all locks keyed alike. g. Refrigeration systems to meet HACCP requirements of maintaining +34º F. in roll-in cabinet. h. Refrigeration to be self-contained air-cooled. Compressor location shall on top. i. Provide with condensate evaporator. Item 8 Description: MOBILE PAN RACK Quantity: 6 Manufacturer: Sammons Equipment Model No.: 2580-20 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories. Furnish the following options: a. Provide all welded stainless steel construction. b. Provide with four (4) 5" polyurethane casters, two (2) swivel, two (2) with brakes with gray non-marking corner bumpers. c. Rack to fit specified Roll-In, Item No7. d. Pan rack to hold 12” x 20” pans and 18” x 26” sheet pans. Item 9 Description: ROLL-IN HEATED CABINET Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Continental Refrigerator Model No.: DL2WI Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide as part of this assembly one (1) U.L. Listed approved cord and plug set. b Provide with solid doors hinged as indicated on drawings. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 42 c. Provide with standard locks, all locks keyed alike. d. Provide with stainless steel ramps and interior rack guides. e. Assembly to have strip type heaters with elements sheathered in Monel for corrosion resistance. Provide with fan for even temperature control in cabinet. Special Instructions: Cord and plug to be furnished by K.E.C. Electrical Contractor is to install and make all interconnections as required. Item 10 Description: S/S WORK COUNTER W/ SINK Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Fabricate Specifier ID No.: I025 Fabricate per general requirements Size and shape per plan and details including: a. Table edge to have a type "E", an inverted “V” non-spill marine edge per Standard Detail KD-1.1. b. Where adjacent to wall and Item 9, provide an 8" x 2" wide stainless steel standard backsplash. Enclose ends of splash. Refer to Detail KD-1.2. c. Provide as shown on plan one (1) 18" x 21" x 10" deep sink with one (1) splash mount Type 3 faucet with lever waste basket drain and overflow. d. Punch holes for faucet. e. Pitch worktop to sink as indicated on plan. f. Provide opening for Mobile Trash Receptacle, Item 14. g. Enclose body where shown and provide / three (3) stainless steel tool drawers with removable pans. Refer to Detail KD-1.3. h. Provide over each set of drawers one (1) 18” x 20” x ¾” built-in cutting board. Cutting board to be recessed in counter above top drawer assembly and be secured with stainless steel slides with back stop. Cutting board to be easily removable from slides. Refer to Detail KD-1.3A. i. Crossbrace and provide space to accommodate one (1) Mobile Trash Receptacle, Item 14. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 43 j. Crossbrace and provide a stainless steel undershelf under sink with turn up at rear to allow for plumbing connections. k. Provide with adjustable bullet feet. l. Seal around all built-in equipment and sound deaden per general requirements. Item 11 Description: S/S WALL CABINET Quantity: 2 Manufacturer: Fabricate Specifier ID No.: I025 Fabricate per general requirements Size and shape per plan and details including: a. Provide as shown two (2) 12" deep by 3' - 0" long 14 gauge stainless steel wall mounted storage cabinets. b. Provide enclosed storage cabinet with intermediate shelf and doors hinged as per plan with cylinder locks all keyed alike. c. Secure cabinet to wall with stainless steel fasteners at height as indicated on plan. d. Seal per general requirements. Special Instructions: General Contractor to provide backing in wall to support storage cabinets as per standard detail KD-1.23 / KD-1.24 and Special Conditions Plan. Item 12 Description: SPARE NUMBER Item 13 Description: SPARE NUMBER Item 14 Description: MOBILE TRASH RECEPTACLE Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Continental Mfg. Co. Model No.: 3200GYBP Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 44 Furnish the following options: a. Provide in gray color. b. Provide with #3255 conversion dolly. c. Provide each with one (1) flat lid #3201-GY. Item 15 Description: S/S WORK COUNTER W/ SINKS Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Fabricate Specifier ID No.: I025 Fabricate per general requirements Size and shape per plan and details including: a. Table edge to have a type "E", an inverted “V” non-spill marine edge per Standard Detail KD-1.1. b. Where adjacent to wall, provide an 8" x 2" wide stainless steel standard backsplash. Enclose ends of splash. Refer to Standard Detail KD-1.2. KEC to verify pass window height. c. Provide as shown on plan two (2) 18" x 21" x 10" deep sinks with one (1) splash mount Type 3 faucet with lever waste basket drain and overflow. d. Punch holes for faucet. e. Pitch worktop to sinks as indicated on plan. f. Crossbrace and provide a stainless steel undershelf. g. Provide with adjustable bullet feet. h. Seal and sound deaden per general requirements. Item 16 Description: ROLL-UP GATE Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: NIKEC Specifier ID No.: I025 Not in Kitchen Equipment Contract. Item to be specified by the Architect and furnished by the General Contractor. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 45 Item 17 Description: SPARE NUMBER Item 18 Description: SPARE NUMBER Item 19 Description: S/S WALL SHELVES Quantity: 2 Manufacturer: Fabricate Specifier ID No.: I025 Fabricate per general requirements Size and shape per plan and details including: a. Provide where shown two (2) 12" wide stainless steel overshelves by length as shown. Turn-up 2" at rear, left and right end. Refer to standard detail KD-1.21 / KD-1.22. Mount shelves at height indicated on drawing. b. Mount overshelves with stainless steel fasteners and expansion shields. c. Seal to wall as per general requirements. Special Instructions: General Contractor to provide backing in wall to support overshelves as per standard detail KD-1.21 / KD-1.22 and Special Conditions Plan. Item 20 Description: S/S WORK TABLE Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Fabricate Specifier ID No.: I025 Fabricate per general requirements Size and shape per plan and details including: a. Table edge to have a type "E", an inverted “V” non-spill marine edge per Standard Detail KD-1.1. b. Where adjacent to wall, provide an 8" x 2" wide stainless steel standard backsplash. Enclose ends of splash. Refer to Standard Detail KD-1.2. c. Crossbrace and provide space to accommodate mobile equipment. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 46 d. Provide with stainless steel legs with adjustable bullet feet. e. Seal and sound deaden per general requirements. Item 21 Description: S/S WALL SHELF Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Fabricate Specifier ID No.: I025 Fabricate per general requirements Size and shape per plan and details including: a. Provide where shown one (1) 12" wide stainless steel overshelf by length as shown. Turn-up 2" at rear, left and right end. Refer to Standard Details KD-1.21 / KD-1.22. Mount shelf at height indicated on drawing. b. Mount overshelf with stainless steel fasteners and expansion shields. c. Seal to wall as per general requirements. Special Instructions: General Contractor to provide backing in wall to support overshelf as per Standard Details KD-1.21 / KD-1.22 and Special Conditions Plan. Item 22 Description: SPARE NUMBER Item 23 Description: COOK’S COUNTER W/ SINK Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Fabricate Specifier ID No.: I025 Fabricate per general requirements Size and shape per plan and details including: a. Table edge to have a type "D" flat turn down edge per Standard Detail KD-1.1. b. Enclose base and provide where shown on plan, one (1) 12" x 15" x 10" deep sink with one (1) Chicago Model No. 772 faucet with basket drain and overflow. Provide die stamped opening in top where indicated for trash chute. At sink and trash chute area, provide a stainless steel hinged access door with friction grip. Refer to Details KD-1.25 and KD-3.4. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 47 c. Provide one (1) electrical outlet box for convenience outlet as manufactured by Wolverine Brass Works of Michigan. Box assembly to be U.L. approved. Furnish conduit nipples with lock nuts and washers with each box assembly. All Cook's Table wiring to be run concealed to a connection point under the table. d. Provide enclosed cabinet base as per general specifications. Refer to Standard Details KD-4.1 and KD-4.3. e. Provide opening in base cabinet for Items No. 25 and 27. f. Cook's Table to be mounted on 6" adjustable legs. g. Seal around all built-in equipment and sound-deaden per general requirements. Item 24 Description: SLIM JIM TRASH RECEPTACLE Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Continental Mfg. Co. Model No.: 8322 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide gray in color. b. Provide with untouchable hinged lid. Item 25 Description: UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATOR +34° Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Continental Refrigerator Model No.: SW48-U-D Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide with 6’ U.L. approved cord and plug. b. Provide where shown a +34º refrigerated base with drawers hinged as per plan. c. Provide a minimum of 2" thick approved insulation on all sides. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 48 d. Refrigerated base is to be vapor proofed under pressure for positive seal against heat leakage. e. Provide four (4) drawers as indicated on plan with easily removable 12” x 20” stainless steel pans. Drawers to be mounted on stainless steel roller bearing tracks with positive stops. Provide vinyl magnetic gaskets around entire perimeter of drawer for positive seal. Drawers to hold 12” x 20” standard stainless steel pans. f. Provide with stainless steel front, top, left and right ends. g. Provide interior with all stainless steel finish with coved corners. h. Provide with stainless steel sub top. i. Refrigeration system to meet HACCP requirements of maintaining +34º F. in base cabinet. j. Refrigeration to be self-contained, air-cooled with front breathing option. Compressor location shall be exactly as shown on plan. k. Provide with condensate evaporator. l. Refrigeration system to be designed to operate on refrigerant in compliance with the 1989 Montreal Protocol. m. Provide with 1-3/8” plate casters. Item 26 Description: INDUCTION RANGE Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: CookTek Induction Systems, LLC Model No.: MC3502S Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide type “S” model with four (4) non-slip feet. b. Provide all 16 gauge stainless steel construction. c. Provide unit with electric induction “Cooking Zone” with 90% thermal efficiency. d. Provide with high limit thermal protection. e. Provide unit with over / under current protection. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 49 f. Cooking surface to be flush and water tight with stainless steel body. g. Assembly to be NSF and UL or ETL listed. h. Provide as part of this assembly one (1) cord and plug set Special Instructions: Cord and plug to be furnished by K.E.C. Electrical Contractor is to install and make all interconnections as required. Item 27 Description: UNDERCOUNTER FREEZER -10° Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Continental Refrigerator Model No.: DLF48-SS-U Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide with 6’ U.L. approved cord and plug. b. Provide two (2) doors as indicated on plan with easily removable wire shelves. Provide vinyl magnetic gaskets around entire perimeter of door for positive seal. c. Provide with stainless steel front, top, left and right ends. d. Provide interior with all stainless steel finish with coved corners. e. Provide a minimum of 2" thick approved insulation on all sides. f. Freezer base is to be vapor proofed under pressure for positive seal against heat leakage. g. Condensate proof heating wire is to be installed around all freezer door (s). Provide vinyl magnetic gaskets around entire perimeter of opening for positive seal. h. Provide with stainless steel sub top. i. Provide with 1-3/8” plate casters. j. Refrigeration system to meet HACCP requirements of maintaining freezing temperatures in base cabinet. k. Refrigeration to be self-contained air-cooled with front breathing option. Compressor location shall be exactly as shown on plan. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 50 l. Provide with condensate evaporator. Item 28 Description: SPARE NUMBER Item 29 Description: S/S MOBILE DISH-UP TABLE Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Fabricate Specifier ID No.: I025 Fabricate per general requirements Size and shape per plan and details including: a. Table edge to have a type "D" flat turn down edge per Standard Detail KD-1.1. b. Provide stainless steel oval tray storage under as indicated on plan, remainder to be undershelf. Provide stainless steel undershelf. Refer to Detail KD-2.7 c. Table assembly to be mounted on heavy duty 5” swivel casters, non-marking, two (2) with locking brakes in front. d. Sound deaden per general requirements. Item 30 Description: HAND SINK Quantity: 2 Manufacturer: Advance Tabco Model No.: 7-PS-69 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide with two (2) custom fabricated 14 gauge stainless steel support brackets. Refer to Standard Detail KD-10.5. Mount and fasten brackets with stainless steel fasteners. b. Provide hand sink with welded side splashes. c. Provide as part of this unit one (1) cleaning faucet Fisher Model 2445 with vacuum breaker. Faucet to be installed by Plumbing Contractor under sink as detailed. d. Provide as part of this unit one (1) surface mounted mirror, Bobrick Model B-165-1824, and mount as detailed. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 51 Item 31 Description: WASTE RECEPTACLE Quantity: 2 Manufacturer: Continental Mfg. Co. Model No.: 2818GY Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories. Furnish the following options: a. Provide in gray color. Item 32 Description: REFRIGERATOR +34° Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Continental Refrigerator Model No.: DL1R Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide with 6' UL approved cord and plug. b. Provide all stainless steel exterior and interior finish. c. Provide with 6” adjustable stainless steel legs. d. Provide with half doors hinged as indicated on drawings. e. Provide with LED lights. f. Provide with standard locks, all locks keyed alike. g. Provide with universal tray slides in all sections on 2" spacing h. Refrigeration systems to meet HACCP requirements of maintaining +34º F. in cabinet and be Energy Star rated. i. Refrigeration to be self-contained air-cooled. Compressor shall be top mounted. j. Provide with condensate evaporator. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 52 Item 33 Description: EXHAUST VENTILATOR Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Caddy Corporation Model No.: SHBC-C-W-102-ND-60 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Ventilator to consist of one (1) section 16' - 0" long with continuous capture by 5' - 0" O.D. wide mounted 6' - 8" above the finished floor to leading edge. b. Duct connector size, CFM exhaust, internal make-up air and static pressure shall be as indicated on Special Conditions Sheet and shall not exceed same. c. Ventilator assembly to incorporate three (2 ) recessed LED warm light fixtures pre-wired to Junction Box on hood. K.E.C. to provide LED light bulbs as required. d. Provide ventilator complete with recessed mounted on/off switch for vapor proof light fixtures and fan. e. As part of this item, provide one (1) ceiling plenum. Make-up air shall discharge through full length stainless steel perforated face panels. Face panel to have large surface area with dampers producing a low even velocity discharge (maximum 24" throw, 250 CFM). f. Ventilator shall be U.L. listed with fire damper and be constructed as a wall type unit having the grease extraction/filtering portion adjacent to wall. Entire hood shall be constructed of 18 gauge stainless steel, all welded construction in compliance with all recommendations of the N.F.P.A., U.L., BOCA, ICBO and NSF Standards. All joints jointed at the outside shall be hairline type, tack welded and polished clean. Seal hairline joints with silicone sealer. Standing seams on the interior of the hood will not be acceptable. Refer to Standard Detail KD-8.7. g. Ventilator shall be high velocity dry extractor type with air inlet opening above and parallel to the cooking surface. Ventilator to incorporate full length horizontal self-draining baffles for 95% centrifugal grease extraction. h. Dry cartridge baffles shall be easily removable for cleaning and constructed out of Type 304 stainless steel. Removable cartridge not to exceed 18” in length. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 53 i. Ventilator must be labeled according to the maximum cooking surface temperature to which they have been tested. j. Provide ventilator system with temperature sensor per the requirements of IMC 5007.2.1.1. k. Provide stainless steel closure panels to finished ceiling. l. Mount ventilator assembly on 1/2" diameter stainless steel hanger rods. Hanger rods shall be fastened to the building construction above and shall be spaced on a maximum of 60" centers. K.E.C. to coordinate with G.C. on installation of support brackets. K.E.C. to supply and install hanger rods as required. m. Secure the ventilator to the rear wall with stainless steel screws and wall anchors and seal with silicone sealer per General Requirements. n. Mount ventilator over Items 36, 39, 41, 42, 44 and 45. o. Fire protection system to be pre-piped at the factory with chrome piping, nozzles and quick seals similar to Evergreen Tool Company Model 170. KEC to provide Fire Suppression System for plenum, duct collar and surface protection per latest codes. p. K.E.C. shall verify location of exhaust and supply ducts and coordinate connections to same. q. KEC to provide 18” wide, 16-gauge stainless steel lay-in panels all the way around the hood perimeter as part of the lay-in and ceiling. KEC to coordinate with General Contractor and Architect. Item 34 Description: FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM Quantity: 1 Lot Manufacturer: Ansul Model No.: R-102 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following: a. System shall protect hood duct and cooking surface in accordance with pamphlet 96 of the National Fire Protection Association, U.L. Standard 300 and all code requirements of local Fire Insurance Rating Bureau and state and local fire authorities. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 54 b. Equipment installer shall submit to the local Fire Insurance Rating Bureau drawings and certification detail. Send three (3) copies of signed certification to the Owner / Client. c. System to be provided with micro-switch to provide means of exhaust ventilator fan control, signal capability for building fire alarm system and shunt trip of electrical cooking equipment as required by code. All electrical connections and interconnections to be furnished by Electrical Contractor. Refer to Standard Detail KD-8.10. d. Provide with chrome sleeves and nozzles. All piping and conduit, etc., shall be concealed as applicable. e. System to provide protection for plenum, exhaust duct and all grease producing cooking surfaces located under the Ventilator, Item 33. f. All penetrations in exhaust hood capture area for piping shall be made with U.L. Listed chrome plated quick-seal adapters similar to Evergreen Tool Company Model 170. g. Size, number and location of nozzles, number and location of fusible links for this particular system. h. Manual pull station shall be located a point of egress and shall be recessed mounted. Refer to equipment layout plan for location. Pull station to be mounted 60" A.F.F. i. System to include mechanically activated fire fuel shut-off solenoid valves as required. Shut-off valves to be mounted where shown on Foodservice Drawings or as directed by local authorities. j. Upon completion of installation, system shall be completely dry tested with CO2 in the presence of the Owner's representative. A certification of inspection by those authorities having jurisdiction shall be issued at the completion of the installation. k. Mount stainless steel control cabinet and cylinders on wall in stainless steel enclosure as per plans and equipment elevations. Provide nitrogen expellant gas cartridge in lieu of carbon dioxide cartridge. Gas cartridge to be labeled “Nitrogen” in easily readable print. l. Provide wet chemical suppression system with fresh water back- up. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 55 Special Instructions: Division 16 to make all interconnection between Fire Suppression System and electric solenoid fire fuel shut-off valve. Electrical Contractor to also provide all electrical connections and interconnection for shunt trip of electrical cooking equipment. P.C. to provide wet chemical suppression system with ¾” cold water line with lockable on/off valve. Item 35 Description: S/S WALL FLASHING Quantity: 1 Lot Manufacturer: Fabricate Specifier ID No.: I025 Fabricate per general requirements Size and shape per plan and details including: a. Provide 20-gauge stainless steel wall flashing with cap strips and divider bars as per Standard Detail KD-10.23. b. Secure stainless steel flashing to walls with heat resistant mastic. Refer to Architect’s plans for elevations. c. KEC to provide stainless steel cover plates and escutcheon plates for all receptacles and plumbing stub outs of wall flashing. d. Stainless steel wall flashing to be 6’-8” high and cover all Kitchen walls. Item 36 Description: COMBI OVEN Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Rational Cooking Systems Model No.: 102 G Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide complete with 6’-0” UL approved cord and plug assembly. b. Provide for gas heat complete with gas quick disconnect hose and PRV. c. Combi steamer to have HACCP interface. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 56 d. Provide with automatic core temperature probe. e. Unit to be self-cleaning with external hose spray nozzle with retracting hose. f. Provide combi cooker with ½ fan speed and intermittent fan speed. g. Provide unit with climaplus option for combination moist and dry cooking environment. h. Unit temperature to run from 85° F. to 575° F. i. Unit to come with 340 owner/operator requested standard recipes pre programmed in unit. j. Door to be hinged as per plan and be capable of being opened with one (1) hand. k. Provide with Combi Stand complete with pan slides. Item 37 Description: COMBI STAND Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Rational Cooking Systems Model No.: 60.30.331 Specifier ID No.: I025 This Item Specified under Item No. 36. Item 38 Description: WATER FILTRATION SYSTEM Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Watts Water Technologies Co. Model No.: QTSTMMAX-2S-1M Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide one (1) complete high-flow system with mounting plate, one (1) pre-filter cartridge, one (1) micron filter and one (1) anti-scale filter complete with gauge and flush valve. b. Filter system to be NSF listed for standard 42 and met Rational Specifications for water treatment.. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 57 Special Instructions: Water Filter System to be mounted on wall beside on side of Combi Oven, Item 36, with suitable steel fasteners. Incoming water line to be hooked up to pre-filter and cartridges. Filtered water connection to be piped in field to filter and water connection on Combi Oven. All plumbing connections and interconnections to be made by Division 15. Assembly to be mounted by KEC. Item 39 Description: PIZZA OVEN W/ STAND Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Moffat Model No.: E22M3 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide in all stainless steel finish. b. Provide as part of this assembly one (1) cord and plug set. c. Provide with mobile stand with pan slides. d. Oven to accommodate three (3) 18” x 26” sheet pans. Special Instructions: Cord, plug and receptacle to be furnished by K.E.C. Electrical Contractor is to install and make all interconnections as required. Item 40 Description: SPARE NUMBER Item 41 Description: 6-BURNER RANGE W/ CONVECTION OVEN Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Imperial Range Model No.: IHR-6C Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide for gas operation. b. Provide with rear gas connection, quick disconnect and P.R.V. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 58 c. Provide factory mounting and interpiping of Salamander Broiler, Item 42. d. Provide with convection oven base, complete with 6’ UL listed cord and plug. e. Provide with four (4) 6" legs. f. Cap and cover left and right front manifold. g. Provide with stainless steel front, left and right side. h. Provide top configuration as indicated on the plans. Item 42 Description: SALAMANDER BROILER Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Imperial Range Model No.: ISB-36 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide for gas operation. b. Provide factory mounting and interpiping with P.R.V. to Range, Item 41. c. Provide with stainless steel front, left and right side. Item 43 Description: WATER FILL FAUCET Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: T&S Brass and Bronze Model No.: B-0594 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide with 18" double jointed control spout with insulated handle. b. Provide with swivel stem shut-off valve. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 59 Special Instructions: K.E.C. to mount faucet in backsplash of Item No. 41, where shown on plan and elevations. Plumbing Contractor to connect cold water to faucet. Item 44 Description: 24” GRIDDLE W/ STAND Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Imperial Range Model No.: ITG-24 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide for gas operation. b. Provide with rear gas connection, quick disconnect and P.R.V. c. Provide with four (4) 6" legs. d. Provide with thermostat control. e. Provide with stainless steel front, left and right side. f. Provide 1” thick smooth fry top with two (2) thermostats. g. Provide as part of this assembly a stainless steel stand with under shelf. Item 45 Description: 24” BROILER W/ STAND Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Imperial Range Model No.: IAB-R-S-24 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide for gas operation. b. Provide with rear gas connection, quick disconnect and P.R.V. c. Provide without legs. d. Provide with stainless steel front, left and right side. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 60 e. Provide with adjustable top grate. f. Provide as part of this assembly a stainless steel stand with under shelf. Item 46 Description: SPARE NUMBER Item 47 Description: RAISED RAIL REFRIGERATOR +34° Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Continental Refrigerator Model No.: CPA60 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide with 6’ U.L. approved cord and plug. b. Provide where shown a +34º refrigerated base with doors hinged as per plan. c. Provide a minimum of 2" thick approved insulation on all sides. d. Refrigerated base is to be vapor proofed under pressure for positive seal against heat leakage. e. Provide two (2) doors as indicated on plan with easily removable wire shelves. Each refrigerated compartment to be able to hold 18” x 26” sheet pans. Provide vinyl magnetic gaskets around entire perimeter of door for positive seal. f. Provide with refrigerated door above compressor compartment. g. Provide with stainless steel front, top, left and right ends. h. Provide interior with all stainless steel finish with coved corners. i. Provide with stainless steel work top. j. Provide 4” reduced height raised refrigerated opening in top of refrigerated section as shown to accommodate 12” x 20” x 6” deep pans. Provide with insulated hinged night cover sized for pan opening. Raised pan rail to be wrapped cold wall construction and to meet current HACCP refrigeration codes. k. Raised rail to be designed to be operated without cover for extended periods. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 61 l. Provide opening in top with insulated sleeve as shown to accommodate 12" x 20" x 6" pans. Provide insulated hinged night cover sized for pan opening. m. Refrigeration system to meet HACCP requirements of maintaining +34º F. in base cabinet and in raised rail cold wells. n. Refrigeration to be self-contained, air-cooled with front breathing option. Compressor location shall be exactly as shown on plan. o. Provide with condensate evaporator. p. Refrigeration system to be designed to operate on refrigerant in compliance with the 1989 Montreal Protocol. q. Provide with 5” swivel casters. Item 48 Description: S/S WALL SHELVING Quantity: 2 Manufacturer: Fabricate Specifier ID No.: I025 Fabricate per general requirements Size and shape per plan and details including: a. Provide where shown two (2) 12" wide stainless steel overshelves by length as shown. Turn-up 2" at rear, left and right end. Refer to Standard Details KD-1.21 / KD-1.22. Mount shelf at height indicated on drawing. b. Mount overshelves with stainless steel fasteners and expansion shields. c. Seal to wall as per general requirements. Special Instructions: General Contractor to provide backing in wall to support overshelf as per Standard Details KD-1.21 / KD-1.22 and Special Conditions Plan. Item 49 Description: 24” UTENSIL SHELVING Quantity: 2 Manufacturer: Metro Model No.: Super Erecta Specifier ID No.: I025 Size and shape as per plan and details, including: a. Four (4) tier high louvered / embossed stainless steel shelving. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 62 b Provide with 74" high stainless steel posts, four (4) per unit with adjustable feet. c. K.E.C. to field verify dimensions before ordering. d. Shelving to be manufactured in North America. Item 50 Description: UTENSIL SINK Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Fabricate Specifier ID No.: I025 Fabricate per general requirements Size and shape per plan and details including: a. Provide Type “C” 3" raised rolled rim at front and sides as per Standard Detail KD-1.1. Rolled edge to drop to 34” AFF at front edge of sink compartment. Refer to Standard Details KD-6.1 and KD-6.2. b. Pitch drainboards to sink as indicated on drawing. c. At rear adjacent to wall provide an 8" x 2" wide stainless steel standard backsplash. Enclose ends of splash. Refer to Standard Detail KD-1.2. d. Punch holes for faucets and overflows. e. Where shown on plan, provide three (3) sinks 14" deep with two (2) Type 3 splash mount faucets with three (3) Fisher Drain King lever wastes and overflows. f. Provide over the top of the sink assembly a 12" wide by length as shown overshelf. Turn up 2" at rear, left end and right end. Refer to Standard Detail KD-1.14. g. As part of the overshelf provide as per Standard Detail KD-1.16 one (1) stainless steel utensil rack welded to brackets as shown. Provide pot rack with double stainless steel pot hooks on 8" centers. h. Crossbrace and provide space to accommodate Undercounter Dishmachine, Item 51. i. Cross brace and provide a stainless steel undershelf under right drainboard with 2" turn up at rear. j. Seal and sound deaden per general requirements. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 63 Item 51 Description: UNDERCOUNTER DISHMACHINE Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Insinger Model No.: RL-30 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide with stainless steel front, back and side enclosure panels. b. Provide with ultra-quiet insulation package. c. Provide drain water tempering kit. d. Provide with built-in booster heater. e. Dishwasher to hold one (1) 20” x 20” standard glass rack. f. All motors to be U.L. approved with overload protection. g. Provide dishmachine with non-clogging rinse and wash arms. h. Provide complete with internal detergent and rinse agent pumps and chemical containers. i. Provide pressure reducing valve with in line strainer. Item 52 Description: CLASS K FIRE EXTINGUISHER Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: NIKEC Specifier ID No.: I025 Not in Kitchen Equipment Contract Item to be specified by the Owner and furnished under separate contract. Item 53 Description: TRASH COMPACTOR Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Orwak Model No.: 5030 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 64 Furnish the following options: a. Provide complete with 6'-0" UL approved cord and plug. b. Bailer to bail cardboard and plastic material with open design for easy cleaning. c. Provide with top loading. d. Provide complete with bail transport / lifter cart. e. Provide bailer with 31” piston stroke with 30 second cycle and raw compaction force of 6600 lbs.. Item 54 Description: SPARE NUMBER Item 55 Description: S/S FLOOR TROUGH W/ GRATE Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: IMC/Teddy Model No.: FT-M Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide trough with stainless steel drain pan to be fabricated in one (1) piece construction. b. Provide with removable anti-slip subway grating Model SGAS. c. Refer to Special Conditions Plans and Standard Detail SD-1.3. Special Instructions: Stainless steel floor trough with pan and grate to be furnished by K.E.C. Assembly to be installed by General Contractor and hooked up by Division 15 in accordance with all local and state codes. Note: If stainless steel ice maker floor trough is installed above grade with bottom exposed to ambient air, the General Contractor is to fully insulate the exposed bottom of drain pan to prevent condensation and possible water damage. Plumbing Contractor to insulate drain pan P trap and exposed piping for 15’-0” to prevent condensation due to ice melting in pipe. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 65 Item 56 Description: ICE STORAGE BIN Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Infinity Stainless Products Model No.: IBS-30-773-M Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide in all Type 304, Series 18/8 stainless steel interior and exterior finish with all coved corner construction. b. Provide custom fabricated ice storage bin with foamed in place closed cell urethane insulation 2" thick. c. Provide with top hinged access door. Provide lift door with gaskets. Provide door with safety lock for open position. d. Storage bin to hold 774 lbs. of cube ice. e. Provide with stainless steel top cut at factory for mounting Ice Maker, Item 57. f. Provide with four (4) 6" adjustable legs. Special Instructions: KEC to coordinate with General Contractor on ceiling height of ice maker and bin with field conditions. Item 57 Description: CUBE ICE MAKER Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Hoshizaki Model No.: KM-515MAH Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide ice maker in standard all stainless steel finish. b. Unit to be air-cooled, self-contained. c. Unit to produce 435 lbs. of cube ice at 90º air temperature and 70º water temperature in 24 hour period. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 66 d. Ice maker to produce crescent ice form and be adjustable for two sizes. Item 58 Description: WATER FILTRATION SYSTEM Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: 3M Purification, Inc. Model No.: ICE260-S Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide one (1) complete high-flow system with mounting plate, two (2) IceAssure filter cartridges, gauge and flush valve. b. Filter system to be NSF listed for standard 42 and 53 and remove odor, particles, minerals and parasitic protozoan cysts. Special Instructions: Water Filter System to be mounted on wall beside Ice Machine, Item 57, with suitable steel fasteners. Incoming water line to be hooked up to pre-filter and cartridges. All plumbing connections and interconnections to be made by Division 15. Assembly to be mounted by KEC. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 67 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS – KIOSK Item K1 Description: MILLWORK FRONT COUNTER Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: NIKEC Specifier ID No.: I025 Custom Millwork. Not in Kitchen Equipment Contract. Item to be specified by the Architect and furnished by the Millwork Contractor. Millwork Contractor to coordinate shop drawings with the Foodservice Consultant, Kitchen Equipment Contractor and Architect. Refer to Architect’s Documents, Elevations, Sections and Details. Item K2 Description: DROP-IN DRY DISPLAY CASE Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: NIKEC Specifier ID No.: I025 Custom Millwork. Not in Kitchen Equipment Contract. Item to be specified by the Architect and furnished by the Millwork Contractor. Millwork Contractor to coordinate shop drawings with the Foodservice Consultant, Kitchen Equipment Contractor and Architect. Refer to Architect’s Documents, Elevations, Sections and Details. Item K3 Description: SPARE NUMBER Item K4 Description: EDP/POS REGISTER Quantity: 1 Lot Manufacturer: NIKEC Specifier ID No.: I025 Not in Kitchen Equipment Contract Item to be specified by the Owner/Operator and furnished under separate contract. All utility connections to be coordinated with Foodservice Consultant and Kitchen Equipment Contractor. Item K5 Description: SPARE NUMBER Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 68 Item K6 Description: GLASS DISPLAY REFRIGERATOR +34° Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Summit Appliance Model No.: SCR1400W Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide with 6' UL approved cord and plug. b. Provide all stainless steel exterior and interior finish. c. Provide with leveling feet. d. Provide with glass door hinged as indicated on drawings. e. Provide with LED lights. f. Provide with standard lock. g. Provide with coated wire shelving. h. Refrigeration systems to meet HACCP requirements of maintaining +34º F. in cabinet and be Energy Star rated. i. Refrigeration to be self-contained air-cooled. j. Provide with condensate evaporator. Item K7 Description: MILLWORK BACK COUNTER Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: NIKEC Specifier ID No.: I025 Custom Millwork. Not in Kitchen Equipment Contract. Item to be specified by the Architect and furnished by the Millwork Contractor. Millwork Contractor to coordinate shop drawings with the Foodservice Consultant, Kitchen Equipment Contractor and Architect. Refer to Architect’s Documents, Elevations, Sections and Details. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 69 Item K8 Description: UNDERCOUNTER ICE MAKER +34° Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Summit Appliance Model No.: BIM44GADA Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide complete with 6’-0” U.L. listed cord and plug. b. Unit to be air-cooled self-contained. c. Ice maker to produce 152 lbs. of ice daily. d. Provide with leveling feet. Special Instructions: KEC to install Ice Maker per the factory’s recommendation with adequate air supply and return. Item K9 Description: UNDERCOUNTER FREEZER -10° Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Summit Appliance Model No.: SP6DS2DOS7ADA Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide with 6’ U.L. approved cord and plug. b. Provide two (2) drawers as indicated on plan. Drawers to be mounted on stainless steel roller bearing tracks with positive stops. Provide vinyl magnetic gaskets around entire perimeter of drawer for positive seal. c. Provide with stainless steel front, top, left and right ends. d. Provide interior with all stainless steel finish with coved corners. e. Freezer base is to be vapor proofed under pressure for positive seal against heat leakage. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 70 f. Condensate proof heating wire is to be installed around all freezer door (s). Provide vinyl magnetic gaskets around entire perimeter of opening for positive seal. g. Provide with leveling feet. h. Refrigeration to be self-contained air-cooled with front breathing option. i. Provide with condensate evaporator. j. Refrigeration system to be designed to operate on refrigerant in compliance with the 1989 Montreal Protocol. Item K10 Description: SPARE NUMBER Item K11 Description: UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATOR +34° Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Summit Appliance Model No.: SP6DS2DOS7ADA Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide with 6’ U.L. approved cord and plug. b. Provide two (2) drawers as indicated on plan. Drawers to be mounted on stainless steel roller bearing tracks with positive stops. Provide vinyl magnetic gaskets around entire perimeter of drawer for positive seal. c. Provide with stainless steel front, top, left and right ends. d. Provide interior with all stainless steel finish with coved corners. e. Refrigeration to be self-contained, air-cooled with front breathing option. f. Provide with condensate evaporator. g. Provide with leveling feet. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 71 Item K12 Description: ESPRESSO MAKER Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Illy Caffe North America, Inc. Model No.: 2419 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Complete with 6' U.L. approved cord and plug. b. Confirm color finish with Architect. Item K13 Description: SPARE NUMBER Item K14 Description: UNDERCOUNTER MICROWAVE OVEN Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Bosch Model No.: HMD8451UC Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Complete with 6' U.L. approved cord and plug. b. Oven cavity to be all stainless steel with coved corners. c. Microwave to be slide into Millwork Counter, Item K7. Refer to Architect’s elevations. Item K15 Description: DROP-IN HAND SINK Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: Advance Tabco Model No.: DI-1-10 Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide with a Type 2 faucet and basket drain. b. Provide with Hudee rim with mounting clips. Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 ITEMIZED EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS 11400 - 72 c. Sink to be mounted into Millwork Counter, Item No. K7. d. Faucet to meet LEED and EPA Certification. e. Provide sink with three sided sidesplash. Item K16 Description: SOAP DISPENSER Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: San Jamar Model No.: S890TBK Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide wall mounted soap dispenser with 800ml bag-in-box cartridge. b. Confirm color with Architect. Item K17 Description: PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER Quantity: 1 Manufacturer: San Jamar Model No.: T1190TBK Specifier ID No.: I025 Complete with all standard accessories Furnish the following options: a. Provide wall mounted, lever roll, towel dispenser. b. Unit to dispense 8” wide x 8” diameter roll with 4” diameter stub roll. c. Confirm color with Architect. END OF SECTION Sunny Isles Gateway Park INMAN FOODSERVICES GROUP IFSG 18041 12/06/18 STANDARD DETAILS 11400 - 73 PART 7 - STANDARD DETAILS Standard Details included as part of specifications are to be considered guides to quality and scope of work involved. Where shop practices dictate, alternate construction methods and component items of equal manufacturer may be substituted. It will be the responsibility of the Kitchen Equipment Contractor to prove the quality of the proposed methods. Note: These details are registered and the property of Jeff Brown, F.C.S.I., and may not be reproduced except for use with this Inman Foodservices Group project. Unauthorized use or copying will result in legal action. END OF SECTION For help and assistance with Bosch accessories please visit: www.bosch-eshop.com/eshop/bosch/us or call 1-800-944-2904 Mon-Fri 5am to 6pm PST Sat 6am to 3pm PST Notes: All height, width and depth dimensions are shown in inches. BSH reserves the absolute and unrestricted right to change product materials and specifications, at any time, without notice. Consult the product’s installation instructions for final dimensional data and other details prior to making cutout. Applicable product warranty can be found in accompanying product literature or you may contact your account manager for further details. Warranties: Bosch warrants that the Product is free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three hundred and sixty-five (365) days from the date of purchase. The foregoing timeline begins to run upon the date of purchase, and shall not be stalled, tolled, extended, or suspended, for any reason whatsoever. This Product is also warranted to be free from cosmetic defects in material and workmanship (such as scratches of stainless steel, paint/porcelain blemishes, chip, dents, or other damage) to the finish of the Product, for a period of thirty (30) days from the date of purchase or closing date for new construction. This cosmetic warranty excludes slight color variations due to inherent differences in painted and porcelain parts, as well as differences caused by kitchen lighting, product location, or other similar factors. This cosmetic warranty specifically excludes any display, floor, “As Is”, or “B” stock appliances. For more information on our entire line of products, go to www.bosch-home.com/us or call 1-800-944-2904 © BSH Home Appliances Corporation. All rights reserved. Bosch is a registered trademark of Robert Bosch GmbH.08/16 SGX68U55UC Stainless Steel The 3rd rack offers 30% more loading area. Perfect for ramekins, cooking utensils and extra long silverware. Features & Benefits 44 dBA: Quietest dishwasher brand. 3rd rack adds versatility and offers 30% more loading capacity. Water softener ensures optimally spot-free and shiny dishes. RackMatic® offers 3 height levels, for 9 possible rack positions. InfoLight® shines on the floor so you know the dishwasher’s running. 24" Bar Handle Special Application 800 Series – Stainless Steel SGX68U55UC Technical Details Watts (W)1300 W Current (A)12 Amps Volts (V)120 V Frequency (Hz)60 Hz Power cord length 68 7/8" Minimum water pressure (lb/sin) 7 Length inlet hose (in)65" Length outlet hose (in)74 7/8" Dimensions & Weight Overall appliance dimensions (HxWxD) (in) 32 1/16" x 23 9/16" x 22 9/16" Required cutout size (HxWxD) (in) 32 1/8" x 24" x 24" Adjustable feet Yes Net weight (lbs)92 lbs Accessories—Optional Dishwasher Softener Salt (4.4 lbs) SGZ9092UC Dishwasher Drain Hose Extension 76 3/4" SGZ1010UC Dishwasher Accessory Kit SMZ5000 Anti-tarnish Silverware Cassette SMZ5002 General Properties Number of wash cycles 6 Number of options 5 dBA 44 Third rack Standard Rack adjustability RackMatic® Tub material Stainless steel Control type Buttons Concealed heating element Yes Leak protection system 24/7 AquaStop® Plus Water softener Yes Five-level wash Yes ChildLock No Special features InfoLight®, Eco Cycle Efficiency Water usage per cycle 3.0 Energy efficiency class Tier 1 ENERGY STAR® qualified Yes Total annual energy consumption (kWh) 259 kWh Total annual water consumption (g) 645 Capacity Number of place settings 15 For help and assistance with Bosch accessories please visit: www.bosch-eshop.com/eshop/bosch/us or call 1-800-944-2904 Mon-Fri 5am to 6pm PST Sat 6am to 3pm PST Notes: All height, width and depth dimensions are shown in inches. BSH reserves the absolute and unrestricted right to change product materials and specifications, at any time, without notice. Consult the product’s installation instructions for final dimensional data and other details prior to making cutout. Applicable product warranty can be found in accompanying product literature or you may contact your account manager for further details. Warranties: Bosch warrants that the Product is free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three hundred and sixty-five (365) days from the date of purchase. The foregoing timeline begins to run upon the date of purchase, and shall not be stalled, tolled, extended, or suspended, for any reason whatsoever. This Product is also warranted to be free from cosmetic defects in material and workmanship (such as scratches of stainless steel, paint/porcelain blemishes, chip, dents, or other damage) to the finish of the Product, for a period of thirty (30) days from the date of purchase or closing date for new construction. This cosmetic warranty excludes slight color variations due to inherent differences in painted and porcelain parts, as well as differences caused by kitchen lighting, product location, or other similar factors. This cosmetic warranty specifically excludes any display, floor, “As Is”, or “B” stock appliances. For more information on our entire line of products, go to www.bosch-home.com/us or call 1-800-944-2904 © BSH Home Appliances Corporation. All rights reserved. Bosch is a registered trademark of Robert Bosch GmbH.08/16 Installation Details 24" Bar Handle Special Application 800 Series – Stainless Steel SGX68U55UC Pre-connected drain hose Pre-connected AquaStop® inlet hose Toe-kick Power cord with junction box Included: Image 2: 2013 New Dish EU and ADA Ø 2 1/2" (63.5 mm) 7" (178 mm) Example of Hardwire Installation Note: Cutout required on left or right cabinet wall, depending on location of water inlet, drain and electrical connection Power cord with junction box included 2 1/2" (63.5 mm) Image 3a: New Dish EU, ADA and 18 inch Ø 2 1/2" (63.5 mm) 7" (178 mm) Example of an Electrical Receptacle Installation Note: Cutout required on left or right cabinet wall, depending on location of water inlet, drain and electrical connection Power cord with junction box included 2 1/2" (63.5 mm) Image 3b: New Dish EU, ADA and 18 inch For help and assistance with Bosch accessories please visit: www.bosch-eshop.com/eshop/bosch/us or call 1-800-944-2904 Mon-Fri 5am to 6pm PST Sat 6am to 3pm PST Notes: All height, width and depth dimensions are shown in inches. BSH reserves the absolute and unrestricted right to change product materials and specifications, at any time, without notice. Consult the product’s installation instructions for final dimensional data and other details prior to making cutout. Applicable product warranty can be found in accompanying product literature or you may contact your account manager for further details. Warranties: Bosch warrants that the Product is free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three hundred and sixty-five (365) days from the date of purchase. The foregoing timeline begins to run upon the date of purchase, and shall not be stalled, tolled, extended, or suspended, for any reason whatsoever. This Product is also warranted to be free from cosmetic defects in material and workmanship (such as scratches of stainless steel, paint/porcelain blemishes, chip, dents, or other damage) to the finish of the Product, for a period of thirty (30) days from the date of purchase or closing date for new construction. This cosmetic warranty excludes slight color variations due to inherent differences in painted and porcelain parts, as well as differences caused by kitchen lighting, product location, or other similar factors. This cosmetic warranty specifically excludes any display, floor, “As Is”, or “B” stock appliances. For more information on our entire line of products, go to www.bosch-home.com/us or call 1-800-944-2904 © BSH Home Appliances Corporation. All rights reserved. Bosch is a registered trademark of Robert Bosch GmbH.08/16 Installation Details 24" Bar Handle Special Application 800 Series – Stainless Steel SGX68U55UC Note: Plumbing installations will vary - refer to local codes. Drain hose included is 88 5/8" (225 cm) and can be extended to a maximum of 165 3/8" (420 cm). Always use the approved drain hose extension kit (SGZ1010UC). Ensure a portion of the drain hose is raised between min. 20" (50 cm) and max. 43" (110 cm) above the cabinet floor. Non-metallic tie mi n 2 0 " ( 5 0 m m ) ma x 4 3 " ( 1 1 0 m m ) mi n 2 0 " ( 5 0 m m ) ma x 4 3 " ( 1 1 0 m m ) Non-metallic tie Removeplug Image 5: New Dish EU, ADA and 18 inch EQ-2 ICE MAKER BIM44GADA 32.38" x 14.5" x 23.5" (H x W x D) ADA compliant NSF-listed auto defrost clear icemaker with internal pump for built-in or freestanding use under counters Highlights: 32 3/8" height fits under lower ADA compliant counters Automatic defrost saves on user maintenance Flexible design allows built-in or freestanding use Product Features: ADA compliant 32 3/8" height fits under lower ADA compliant counters Commercially approved NSF listed for use in commercial establishments ENERGY STAR qualified Certified as a batch-type commercial icemaker for its efficiency Built-in pump Internal pump allows more flexibility in placing the unit Automatic defrost Simplify appliance care by letting your icemaker defrost itself Reversible door Keep your options flexible with a reversible door that is easy to switch when your arrangement changes; Unit ships LHD but can be reversed in our factory or by the user Built-in capable Make the best use of space by installing your icemaker under the counter Stainless steel door Professional styling with lasting durability Professional towel bar handle A curved handle in brushed stainless steel offers an easy grip SUMMIT APPLIANCE DIVISION, FELIX STORCH, INC. | ISO 9001:2015 Certified 770 Garrison Avenue Bronx, NY 10474 USA TEL 718-893-3900 FAX 844-478-8799 info@summitappliance.com www.summitappliance.com BIM44GADA Specifications: Overview Height of Cabinet 32.38" (82 cm) Width 14.5" (37 cm) Depth 23.5" (60 cm) Depth with Handle 25.0" (64 cm) Depth with door at 90°36.75" (93 cm) Defrost Type Automatic Door Stainless Steel Cabinet Black US Electrical Safety UL Canadian Electrical Safety ULC Sanitation NSF Amps 4.8 Voltage/Frequency 115 V AC/60 Hz Shipping Weight 117.0 lbs. (53 kg) Parts & Labor Warranty 1 Year Compressor Warranty 5 Years Icemaker Door Swing LHD Reversible Yes Drain Required Yes Daily Ice Production 50.0 lbs. (23 kg) Ice Storage Capacity 25.0 lbs. (11 kg) Ice Shape Cube Size of Cube 3/4" x 3/4" x 1" Number of Ice Cube Sizes 1 Fan Type Exterior Refrigerant Type R134a Refrigerant Amount 3.88 oz. High Side PSI 350.0 Low Side PSI 130.0 Interior Height 18.5" (47 cm) Interior Width 12.0" (30 cm) Interior Depth 16.0" (41 cm) SUMMIT APPLIANCE DIVISION, FELIX STORCH, INC. | ISO 9001:2015 Certified 770 Garrison Avenue Bronx, NY 10474 USA TEL 718-893-3900 FAX 844-478-8799 info@summitappliance.com www.summitappliance.com EQ-3 MICROWAVE DRAWER For help and assistance with Bosch accessories please visit: www.bosch-eshop.com/eshop/bosch/us or call 1-800-944-2904 Mon-Fri 5am to 6pm PST Sat 6am to 3pm PST Notes: All height, width and depth dimensions are shown in inches. BSH reserves the absolute and unrestricted right to change product materials and specifications, at any time, without notice. Consult the product’s installation instructions for final dimensional data and other details prior to making cutout. Applicable product warranty can be found in accompanying product literature or you may contact your account manager for further details. Warranties: Bosch warrants that the Product is free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three hundred and sixty-five (365) days from the date of purchase. The foregoing timeline begins to run upon the date of purchase, and shall not be stalled, tolled, extended, or suspended, for any reason whatsoever. This Product is also warranted to be free from cosmetic defects in material and workmanship (such as scratches of stainless steel, paint/porcelain blemishes, chip, dents, or other damage) to the finish of the Product, for a period of thirty (30) days from the date of purchase or closing date for new construction. This cosmetic warranty excludes slight color variations due to inherent differences in painted and porcelain parts, as well as differences caused by kitchen lighting, product location, or other similar factors. This cosmetic warranty specifically excludes any display, floor, “As Is”, or “B” stock appliances. For more information on our entire line of products, go to www.bosch-home.com/us or call 1-800-944-2904 © BSH Home Appliances Corporation. All rights reserved. Bosch is a registered trademark of Robert Bosch GmbH.05/16 HMD8451UC Stainless Steel The 24" drawer microwave opens and closes automatically with the push of a button, and can be installed flush to cabinet. Features & Benefits Convenient automatic sensor programs simplify cooking for perfect results. White touch control LCD matches Bosch wall ovens. Able to fit a 20 oz. cup or a 13" x 9" baking oven pan. Low profile design with touch “open” and “close”. General Properties Cavity material White Max. microwave power (W) 950 W Capacity Cavity capacity (cu. ft.)1.2 cu. ft. Technical Details Watts (W) 1,500 W Circuit breaker (A) 15 A Volts (V) 120 V Frequency (Hz) 60 Hz Power cord length (in) 48" Plug type 120V-3 prong Dimensions & Weight Overall appliance dimensions (HxWxD) (in) 16 5/16" X 23 7/8" X 23 3/8" Required cutout size (HxWxD) (in) 14 13/16" x 22 1/8" x 23 1/2" Net weight (lbs) 81 lbs 24" Drawer Microwave 800 Series – Stainless Steel HMD8451UC For help and assistance with Bosch accessories please visit: www.bosch-eshop.com/eshop/bosch/us or call 1-800-944-2904 Mon-Fri 5am to 6pm PST Sat 6am to 3pm PST Notes: All height, width and depth dimensions are shown in inches. BSH reserves the absolute and unrestricted right to change product materials and specifications, at any time, without notice. Consult the product’s installation instructions for final dimensional data and other details prior to making cutout. Applicable product warranty can be found in accompanying product literature or you may contact your account manager for further details. Warranties: Bosch warrants that the Product is free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three hundred and sixty-five (365) days from the date of purchase. The foregoing timeline begins to run upon the date of purchase, and shall not be stalled, tolled, extended, or suspended, for any reason whatsoever. This Product is also warranted to be free from cosmetic defects in material and workmanship (such as scratches of stainless steel, paint/porcelain blemishes, chip, dents, or other damage) to the finish of the Product, for a period of thirty (30) days from the date of purchase or closing date for new construction. This cosmetic warranty excludes slight color variations due to inherent differences in painted and porcelain parts, as well as differences caused by kitchen lighting, product location, or other similar factors. This cosmetic warranty specifically excludes any display, floor, “As Is”, or “B” stock appliances. For more information on our entire line of products, go to www.bosch-home.com/us or call 1-800-944-2904 © BSH Home Appliances Corporation. All rights reserved. Bosch is a registered trademark of Robert Bosch GmbH.05/16 Installation Details 24" Drawer Microwave 800 Series – Stainless Steel HMD8451UC 237/8" (606 mm) 215/8" (549 mm)48" (1220 mm) 111 /16" (39 mm) 233/8" (594 mm) 217/8" (556 mm) 383/8" (974 mm) 145/8" (371 mm) 165/16" (414 mm) FLUSH INSTALLAT ION DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES 23 1/2" (597 mm) 217/8" (555 mm) Base min. depth 27" (686 mm) 1" (25 mm) 1" (25 mm) 36" (914 mm) 24 3/16"(614 mm) 221/8"(562 mm) Frontview cut out Cleat145/8" (371 mm) 165/8" (422 mm)cutout 6" (152 mm) 4" (102 mm) 5" (127 mm) 21/4" (57 mm) 15/8" (41 mm) 1/2" (13 mm)visible area 1/4" (6 mm) base thickness * Suggested location of electrical outlet ** Anti-Tip Block *** Base should support up to 100 lbs **** Sides should be finished and extend back to cleat. Cleats should also be finished, as they may be visible after installation. (Cleats are not included with unit.) * ** *** **** STANDARD INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS & CLEARANCES FLUSH INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS & CLEARANCES FLUSH INSTALLAT ION DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES 23 1/2" (597 mm) 217/8" (555 mm) Base min. depth 27" (686 mm) 1" (25 mm) 1" (25 mm) 36" (914 mm) 24 3/16"(614 mm) 221/8"(562 mm) Frontview cut out Cleat145/8" (371 mm) 165/8" (422 mm)cutout 6" (152 mm) 4" (102 mm) 5" (127 mm) 21/4" (57 mm) 15/8" (41 mm) 1/2" (13 mm)visible area 1/4" (6 mm) base thickness * Suggested location of electrical outlet ** Anti-Tip Block *** Base should support up to 100 lbs **** Sides should be finished and extend back to cleat. Cleats should also be finished, as they may be visible after installation. (Cleats are not included with unit.) * ** *** **** FLUSH INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES 23 1/2" (597 mm) 217/8" (555 mm) Base min. depth 27" (686 mm) 1" (25 mm) 1" (25 mm) 36" (914 mm) 24 3/16"(614 mm) 221/8"(562 mm) Frontview cut out Cleat145/8" (371 mm) 165/8" (422 mm)cutout 6" (152 mm) 4" (102 mm) 5" (127 mm) 21/4" (57 mm) 15/8" (41 mm) 1/2" (13 mm)visible area 1/4" (6 mm) base thickness * Suggested location of electrical outlet ** Anti-Tip Block *** Base should support up to 100 lbs **** Sides should be finished and extend back to cleat. Cleats should also be finished, as they may be visible after installation. (Cleats are not included with unit.) * ** *** **** FRONTVIEW CUT OUT FRONTVIEW CUT OUT EQ-4 REFRIGERATOR SCR1400W 69.75" x 23.63" x 23.75" (H x W x D) Commercial beverage merchandiser with 12.6 cu.ft. capacity, digital thermostat and self-closing door; replaces SCR1400 Highlights: Commercially approved and CalCode compliant Digital thermostat offers precise and convenient temperature control Recessed LED lighting offers attractive presentation of stored products Product Features: Slim fit Just 24" wide and deep for an easy fit in any setting Commercially approved ETL-S listed to NSF standards for commercial use Glass door with stainless steel trim Heat-safe design offers safe display of stored products Self-closing door Door will automatically close when left ajar, preventing items from accidentally being left exposed to ambient temperatures Professional handle Elegant chrome handle finishes the look Factory installed lock Keyed security on the refrigerator door Recessed LED lighting On/off button to illuminate stored products with an attractive and energy efficient glow Frost-free operation No-frost convenience requires no manual defrosting Adjustable shelves Fifteen glide positions accommodate a variety of sizes, with heavy duty wired shelving SUMMIT APPLIANCE DIVISION, FELIX STORCH, INC. | ISO 9001:2008 Certified 770 Garrison Avenue Bronx, NY 10474 USA TEL 718-893-3900 FAX 844-478-8799 info@summitappliance.com www.summitappliance.com SCR1400W Specifications: Overview Height of Cabinet 69.75" (177 cm) Width 23.63" (60 cm) Depth 23.75" (60 cm) Depth with Handle 25.63" (65 cm) Depth with door at 90°46.75" (119 cm) Capacity 12.6 cu.ft. (357 L) Defrost Type Frost-Free Door Glass Cabinet White US Electrical Safety ETL Canadian Electrical Safety ETL-C Sanitation ETL-S Amps 1.7 Voltage/Frequency 115 V AC/60 Hz Weight 151.0 lbs. (68 kg) Shipping Weight 190.0 lbs. (86 kg) Parts & Labor Warranty 1 Year Compressor Warranty 5 Years Refrigerator Features Door Swing RHD Reversible No Shelf Type Wire Shelf Qty 6 Adjustable Shelves Yes Thermostat Type Digital Fan Type Interior Refrigerant Type R600a Refrigerant Amount 1.66oz. High Side PSI 270.0 Low Side PSI 105.0 Level Legs Qty 4 Interior Light Yes Temperature Range 36°F to 43°F Dimensions Interior Height 60.25" (153 cm) Interior Width 20.0" (51 cm) Interior Depth 17.5" (44 cm) Compressor Step Height 4.0" (10 cm) Compressor Step Width 20.0" (51 cm) Compressor Step Depth 5.5" (14 cm) SUMMIT APPLIANCE DIVISION, FELIX STORCH, INC. | ISO 9001:2008 Certified 770 Garrison Avenue Bronx, NY 10474 USA TEL 718-893-3900 FAX 844-478-8799 info@summitappliance.com www.summitappliance.com SUMMIT APPLIANCE DIVISION, FELIX STORCH, INC. | ISO 9001:2008 Certified 770 Garrison Avenue Bronx, NY 10474 USA TEL 718-893-3900 FAX 844-478-8799 info@summitappliance.com www.summitappliance.com EQ-5 UNDER COUNTER REFRIGERATOR PANTRY 12/7/2016 SP6DS2DOS7ADA | Summit Appliance https://www.summitappliance.com/catalog/model/SP6DS2DOS7ADA 1/3 SUMMITAPPLIANCE.COM SUMMIT COMMERCIAL ACCUCOLD MEDICAL Dealer LoginDealer Registration Enter model number or keyword, such as outdoor icemaker SEARCH FIND A DEALER Refrigeration Freezers &  Icemakers Outdoor Refrigeration Beer Storage Beverage &  Wine Cooking Range Hoods Laundry & Dishwashers Kitchenettes &  Combo  Units SHARE THIS PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Overview Height of Cabinet 32.25" (82 cm) Width 23.63" (60 cm) Depth 25.38" (64 cm) Depth with Handle 26.88" (68 cm) Depth with door at 90° 43.0" (109 cm) Capacity 3.1 cu.埔�. (88 L) Defrost Type Automatic Door Stainless Steel Cabinet Stainless Steel US Electrical Safety ETL Canadian Electrical Safety ETL-C Sanitation ETL-S Amps 1.3 Voltage/Frequency 115 V AC/60 Hz Shipping Weight 140.0 lbs. (64 kg) Parts & Labor Warranty 1 Year Compressor Warranty 5 Years Refrigerator Features Thermostat Type Dial Fan Type Interior and Exterior SP6DS2DOS7ADA Fully constructed from stainless steel for durable use in the outdoors 32.25" H x 23.63" W x 25.38" D OVERVIEW 32" height allows installation under lower ADA compliant counters ETL-S listed to NSF-7 commercial standards Weatherproof construction ensures safe operation in the outdoors Minimum maintenance with automatic defrost Flexible design allows built-in or freestanding use Complete construction in durable stainless steel Two sliding drawers include sleek stainless steel handles Made in the U.S.A. WHERE TO BUY Enter Zip Code Find a dealer near you SUMMIT COMMERCIAL offers a quality line of commercially approved outdoor drawer refrigerators, all fully constructed from stainless steel and made in the U.S.A. The SP6DS2DOS7ADA is a two-drawer all-refrigerator that can be built-in under counters or used freestanding. Sized at just 24" wide and 32" high, it can be installed under lower counters complying with ADA guidelines. The weatherproof design includes a sealed back, integrated Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI), and complete construction in non- corrodible 304 grade stainless steel. Sleek stainless steel handles complete the look. The fully automatic defrost system ensures easy user maintenance inside the roomy interior. Two easy-glide drawers provide ample storage space that can accommodate large bottles. A rapid chill compartment lets you cool smaller items quickly. This unit includes an adjustable divider that lets you better organize your storage. The SP6DS2DOS7ADA is ETL-S listed to NSF-7 commercial standards and meets UL Commercial Standard 471. For this unit in standard counter height, see the SP6DS2DOS7. FEATURES Weatherproof design Designed and constructed for durable use in the outdoors Commercially approved ETL-S listed to NSF standards and approved to UL-471 electrical standard for commercial use ADA compliant 32" height is designed to fit under lower ADA compliant counters All 304 grade stainless steel construction Non-corrodible stainless steel inside and out Built-in capable Make the best use of space by installing your appliance under the counter and flush with other cabinets Fully finished cabinet Allows the refrigerator to be used as a freestanding model Refrigeration > ADA Height 12/7/2016 SP6DS2DOS7ADA | Summit Appliance https://www.summitappliance.com/catalog/model/SP6DS2DOS7ADA 2/3 Refrigerant Type R134a Refrigerant Amount 1.8oz. High Side PSI 285.0 Low Side PSI 70.0 Level Legs Qty 4 Interior Drawers Yes Interior Drawers Qty 2 Drawer Dimensions Interior Height 1 9.5" (24 cm) Interior Width 1 18.63" (47 cm) Interior Depth 1 12.0" (30 cm) Interior Height 2 12.75" (32 cm) Interior Width 2 17.25" (44 cm) Interior Depth 2 16.0" (41 cm) Dimensions Compressor Step Height 5.75" (15 cm) Compressor Step Width 18.63" (47 cm) Compressor Step Depth 4.0" (10 cm) AVAILABLE UPGRADES Exterior Latch SSK California residents: click here for information on Proposition 65 Due to our commitment to continuous product improvement, all specifications are subject to change without notice BROCHURE w/ DRAWINGS SP6DS2DOS7ADA.pdf TECHNICAL DRAWING (.dwg) SP6DS2DOS7ADA_2_DRAWER_O-D_... USE & CARE SummitProfessionalDrawerRef... Automatic defrost Reduced maintenance with auto defrost system Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Our integrated GFCI exceeds U.L. requirements for safety by protecting your unit from shocks and circuit breaks Sealed back No exposed electrical components Two slide-out drawers Smoothly gliding stainless steel drawers for easy use Adjustable drawer divider Wire divider lets you separate items into four sections for easier organization Adjustable thermostat Dial thermostat for easy temperature management Magnetic gaskets Ensures the drawers are tightly sealed to protect stored items Customizable drawer fronts Order our Panel Kit to install your own panels over the drawers 100% CFC free Environmentally friendly design without ozone- damaging chemicals DOWNLOADS YOU MIGHT NEED SIMILAR PRODUCTS Panel Kit Kit that allows the SP6DS2D7 drawer refrigerator to accept custom overlay panels Add to Cart $40 VCOS 33.0" H x 24.5" W x 27.0" D Vinyl cover for any SUMMIT outdoor refrigerator Add to Cart $75 12/7/2016 SP6DS2DOS7ADA | Summit Appliance https://www.summitappliance.com/catalog/model/SP6DS2DOS7ADA 3/3 SPFF51OS2D 34.0" H x 23.63" W x 23.63" D Two-drawer outdoor frost-free all- freezer in stainless steel, commercially listed for built-in or freestanding use SP6DSSTB7Thin 33.25" H x 23.75" W x 23.58" D Commercially approved three- drawer refrigerator in stainless steel for built-in undercounter use, with thin handles SP6DS2D7 33.25" H x 23.75" W x 23.88" D Commercially approved two-drawer auto defrost all-refrigerator in full stainless steel for built-in or freestanding use FF642D 34.0" H x 23.63" W x 23.63" D Two-drawer refrigerator in complete stainless steel for built-in or freestanding use SCFF532D 34.0" H x 23.63" W x 23.63" D Built-in undercounter two-drawer all-freezer with frost-free operation and stainless steel construction CONTACT US PARTS AND ACCESSORIES SERVICE AND SUPPORT ORDER STATUS ABOUT US CAREERS COMPANY NEWS PHOTO ARCHIVE DEALER LOG IN DEALER NEWS DEALER REGISTRATION SITE MAP STAY IN TOUCH SIGN UP FOR OUR E-NEWSLETTER EMAIL ADDRESS SUBSCRIBE Summit Appliance Division, Felix Storch, Inc. • ISO 9001:2008 Certified 770 Garrison Ave • Bronx, NY 10474 Phone: 718-893-3900 • Fax: 1-844-478-8799 E-mail: info@summitappliance.com COPYRIGHT 2016 SUMMIT APPLIANCE, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED CAN'T FIND WHAT YOU WANT? EMAIL US AT INFO@SUMMITAPPLIANCE.COM OR CALL US AT 718-893-3900 Item # 2419 Completed 220v (3 wire - 2 hot + 1 ground) dedicated line with matching cord cap Actual Amperage - 17 amps Recommended Amperage - 30 amps (Must supply the plug to match the outlet). Receptacle must be a maximum 40” from machine. 5. Water Filtration (Recommended) 4021 - Twin Filter Housing 4004 - Resin Cartridge 4008 - Carbon Cartridge Filter Dimensions 12" H X 5" round * Disclaimer - Please make sure to check all local electrical and plumbing codes as these differ from region to region. I, the customer understand that if the above requirements are to be completed prior to installation. Failure to have the site ready will result in additional service and travel charges and may cause delays in completing the installation. Customer Name Signature Company Name Email Phone Fax illy caffe North America, Inc. Drain Line: 1/2" or 5/8" OD pipe. This pipe must be below the top of the counter, positoned directly behind the machine when in place. If water, drain, or electrical connections are to be made below the counter a 2” diameter hole must be drilled in the counter, positioned directly behind the machine when in place. Cold Water Line: 3/8” OD pipe with shut off valve and vacuum breaker. The line must end in either a 3/8” compression fitting or a 3/8” or 1/2” NPTF female fitting with a maximum distance of 36” from machine and 60" from a main water source. 1. Counter Space Requirements: Width: 25.6” 4. Water and Electrical Access Hole: 3. Water and Drain Line Requirements: Depth: 22” 2. Electrical Requirements: Height: 23.2” (leave 4" for placing cups on top) Unic Twin Phoenix I Espresso Machine EQ-7 COFFEE MAKER Features Related Products ITEM# PROJECT DATE For current specification sheets and other information, go to www.bunn.com. Patents Apply 3/06 A1.2 Easy Clear® EQ-17-TL Product No. : 30200.1000 Dimensions: 127⁄16" H x 21⁄2" W x 3" D 31.6 cm H x 6.35 cm W x 7.62 cm D Easy Clear® ED-17-TL Product No. : 30201.1001 Dimensions: 81⁄4" H x 25⁄16" Dia. 20.95 cm H x 5.87 cm Dia. Paper Filter Pack Product No. : 20115.0000 Packed per case: 1,000 Dimensions: 41⁄4" Base x 23⁄4" Sidewall 10.8 cm Base x 6.98 cm Sidewall Easy Pour® black decanter Product No. : 06100.0101 Quantity: 1 (also packaged in quantities of 2, 3, 6, 12, & 24) Easy Pour® orange decanter (for decaf) Product No. : 06101.0101 Quantity: 1 (also packaged in quantities of 2, 3, 6, 12, & 24) 1GPR SS Portable Server on an RWS1 Warmer 1GPR Product No. : 12487.0001* RWS1 Product No. : 12203.0010 *Also available with side handles or black decor. Model Agency Listing CWT15-3 CWTF15-3 CWTF20-3 CWTF35-3 12 Cup Automatic Coffee Brewer with 3 Lower Warmers 12 Cup Automatic Coffee Brewer • Brews 3.8 to 7.5 gallons (14.4 to 28.4 litres) of perfect coffee per hour. • All stainless steel construction. • Back-up pourover feature on all models. • Hot water faucet on all models except CWT15-3. • SplashGard® funnel deflects hot liquids away from the hand. • International electrical configurations available. Model CWTF15–3 (3 lower warmers) (decanters sold separately) Dimensions: 16.8” H x16.5” W x 17.7” D (43.2cm H x 41.9cm W x 45cm D) E9001.0003B BUNN® practices continuous product research and improvement. We reserve the right to change specifications and product design without notice. Such revisions do not entitle the buyer to corresponding changes, improvements, additions or replacements for previously purchased equipment. All dimensions shown in inches. Bunn Corporation owns all copyrights relating to materials in this publication. Please contact Bunn Corporation to request permission to reproduce any portion of this publication. Dimensions & Specifications BUNN Corporation - 1400 Stevenson Drive Springfield, Illinois 62703 • 800-637-8606 • 217-529-6601 • Fax 217-529-6644 • www.bunn.com Model Product # Volts Amps Tank Heater Total Brewing Cubic Shipping Cord Watts Watts Capacity Measure Weight Attached CWT15–3 12950.0112 120 13.9 1320 1670 3.8 gal./hr. 6.4 ft3 32 lbs. Yes CWTF15–3 12950.0212 120 13.9 1320 1670 3.8 gal./hr. 6.4 ft3 35 lbs. Yes CWTF15–3* 12950.0216 120 13.9 1320 1670 3.8 gal./hr. 6.4 ft3 36 lbs. Yes CWTF20–3 12950.0232 120 17.9 1800 2150 5.1 gal./hr. 6.4 ft3 35 lbs. No CWTF35–3 12950.0252 120/208-240 17.1† 3500 3850 7.5 gal./hr. 6.4 ft3 35 lbs. No CWTF15 12950.0298 120 13.9 1320 1670 3.8 gal./hr. 6.4 ft3 35 lbs. Yes (3 left lower warmers) CWTF35* 12950.0381 120/208-240 17.1† 3500 3850 7.5 gal./hr. 6.4 ft3 39 lbs. No *Stainless steel funnel †Current at 120/240 Volts Brewing capacity: based upon incoming water temp of 60ºF/15˚C (140ºF/60˚C rise) per 1/2 gallon brew time of 4 minutes. Models listed as 120/208V or 120/240V must be connected to 208V or 240V electrical service respectively. Please refer to the installation manual. Electrical: Model 15 requires 2-wires plus ground service rated 120V, single phase, 60 Hz. Model 20 requires 2-wires plus ground service rated 120V, single phase, 60 Hz. Model 35 requires 3-wires plus ground service rated 120/208 or 120/240V, single phase, 60 Hz. Plumbing: 20-90 psi (138-621 kPa). Machine supplied with 1⁄4" male flare fitting. EQ-8 TOASTER OVEN EQ-11 COPY MACHINE OWNER PROVIDED Desk DK-510Paper Feed Cabinet PC-410 (2,500) Paper Feed Cabinet PC-210 (500 x 2) Paper Feed Cabinet PC-110 (500 x 1) Desk DK-705 Working Table WT-506 Finisher FS-533 Inner finisher Job Separator JS-506 Inner job separator Punch kit PK-519 System Must Select Note: Some options are not listed. Mount Kit MK-730 Used for banner printing. Keypad KP-101 Upgrade kit UK-208 Android terminal connection kit 1 Local Interface Kit EK-606 USB hub kit / Voice guidance Local Interface Kit EK-607 USB hub kit / Voice guidance / mobile phone compatibilitySecurity Kit SC-508 * Two SC-508 are required. Large Capacity Unit LU-301 Large Capacity Unit LU-204 Select One bizhub 554e only One of the options may be selected (not mandatory). Once of the options must be selected (mandatory). Trans-Kit TK-101 Fax Kit FK-511 For 1st / 2nd line Stamp Unit SP-501 * 1st line : Requires Main Unit + one FK-511 2nd line: Requires Main Unit + two FK-511 Authentication Unit AU-102 Biometric type Select One Select One Select One Mount Kit MK-735 For IC card authentication installation Built into front panel. Authentication Unit AU-201 IC card type * WT-506 or MK-735 is required. However, AU-102 cannot be combined when equipped with WT-506. * WT-506 is required. Output Tray OT-506 Saddle Stitcher SD-511 Attaches to Finisher FS-534 for saddle stitching, half folding and tri-folding jobs. * SD-511 cannot be retrofitted. Finisher FS-534 A small, low-noise and high-performance finisher that allows you to multi-staple up to 50 sheets. Staples MS-10A * for FS-535 Staple Kit SK-602 * for SD-512 Staple Kit SK-602 * for FS-534, SD-511 *1 PI-505 and JS-602 cannot be installed at the same time. Saddle Stitcher SD-512 Attaches to Finisher FS-535 for saddle stitching, half folding and tri-folding jobs. Finisher FS-535 A high-performance finisher that allows you to multi- staple up to 100 sheets. Punch Kit PK-520 Attaches to Finisher FS-534 for hole punching capability (paper up to 300 g/m2 thick) Post Inserter PI-505 *1 When attached to Finisher FS-535, allows you to add white paper cover sheet/inter sheet, and operate the Finisher manually. Job Separator JS-602 *1 When attached to the FS-535, this becomes the fax/print/copy output separator tray. Punch Kit PK-521 Attaches to Finisher FS-535 for hole punching capability. (paper up to 300 g/m2 thick) Must Select Select One i-Option LK-106 Barcode font (Code39, QR Code, PDF417)i-Option LK-101 v3 Web browse function i-Option LK-105 v3 Searchable PDF i-Option LK-102 v3 Encrypted PDF or PDF/A (1a/1b) Upgrade kit UK-204 2 GB memory i-Option LK-104 v3 Voice guidance * Local Interface Kit EK-606 or EK-607 is required. i-Option LK-107 Unicode font i-Option LK-108 OCR font (OCR-A, OCR-B (PCL)) i-Option LK-110 File format extension package i-Option LK-111 ThinPrint function i-Option LK-115 TPM function * Not available in all areas. • A5 (Short edge feed) to A3 • 500 sheets × 1 • 52 to 256 g/m2 * Cannot be selected with FS-534/FS-535 installed. • A5 (Short edge feed) to A3 • 500 sheets × 2 • 52 to 256 g/m2 • A4/Letter Crosswise • 2,500 sheets • 52 to 256 g/m2 Z Folding Unit ZU-606 Includes Z-folding function and hole punching function. * LK-101 v3 is required. bizhub Connector S-1/G-1/E-1 Increases the bizhub's paper capacity by 3,000 sheets for paper up to A4 size and 80 g/m2 thick. Increases the bizhub's paper capacity by 2,500 sheets for paper up to SRA3 and 80 g/m2 thick. Fixed Same Magnification Lengthwise Crosswise Individual Settings Scaling Up Scaling Down Preset Zoom Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 1 / 2 Paper Size Paper Weight Multiple Bypass Tray Multiple BypassTray Specifcations bizhub 554e/454e General Specifications Type Desktop Printer / Copier / Scanner Copy Resolution Scan Main: 600 dpi × Sub: 600 dpi Print 1,800 dpi (equivalent) × 600 dpi Gradation 256 Memory Capacity (Std./Max.) 2 GB/4 GB HDD 250 GB Original Type Sheets, Books, Objects Printer Specifications Scanning Specifications Internet Fax bizhub 554e bizhub 454e 22 sec. or less 55 ppm 45 ppm 25 sec. or less 4.1 sec. or less 4.6 sec. or less Copy Speed (A4 Crosswise) Copy Magnification Paper Capacity (80 g/m2) Max. Paper Capacity (80 g/m2)*5 Paper Weight Multiple Copy Auto Duplex Power Requirements Max. Power Consumption Dimensions [W] × [D] × [H] Weight Space Requirements [W] × [D]*6 First Copy Out Time*4 Warm-Up Time*3 (23°C, std. voltage) * The time required to start printing when both the main power and sub-power switches are turned from OFF to ON. 22 sec. or less 25 sec. or less* The time required to start printing when the main power switch is ON and the sub-power switch is turned from OFF to ON. Image Loss Output Size Max. Original Size 1: 1±0.5% or less 1: 1.154/1.224/1.414/2.000 1: 0.866/0.816/0.707/0.500 3 types 25 to 400% (in 0.1% increments) 25 to 400% (in 0.1% increments) 500 sheets (up to A3) 500 sheets (up to SRA3) 150 sheets (up to SRA3) 52 to 256 g/m2 Width: 100 to 320 mm, Length: 148 to 457.2 mm 52 to 256 g/m2 AC220 to 240 V 9 A (50 to 60 Hz) 615 × 685 × 921 mm (24-1/4" × 27-1/2" × 36-1/4") Approx. 93 kg (205-1/4 lb) 937 × 1,246 mm (37" × 49") 2.0 kW or less 60 to 300 g/m2 1 to 9,999 sheets 6,650 sheets Max. 4.2 mm or less for top edge (5 mm for thin paper), Max. 3.0 mm or less for bottom edge, Max. 3.0 mm or less for right/left edges *A loss of 4.2 mm each during printing. SRA3 to A5, B6S*1, A6S*1 Thick paper, Foolscap*2 (8-1/2" × 13-1/2", 200 mm × 330 mm, 8-1/8" × 13-1/4", 8-1/2" × 13", 8-1/4" × 13", 8" × 13"), 8K, 16K, Long Length Paper (210 × 457.3 mm to 297 × 1,200 mm) A3 (11" × 17") Type CPU Memory HDD Print Speed Print Resolution PDL Protocol Support OS Fonts PCL PS Interface SOC 800 MHz (DualCore) Embedded Shared with the copier 250 GB (Shared with the copier) Same as Copy Speed (when using the same original) 1,800 dpi (equivalent) × 600 dpi (at smoothing) or 1,200 dpi × 1,200 dpi (in 1,200 dpi mode) PCL 5e/c Emulation, PCL 6 Emulation, PostScript 3 (3016) Emulation, XPS (Ver.1.0) TCP/IP, IPX/SPX (NDSsupport), SMB (NetBEUI), LPD, IPP1.1, SNMP, HTTP Windows / Vista / Vista 64bit / 7 / 7 64bit / 8 / 8 64bit / 8.1 / 8.1 64bit Windows Server 2003 / Server 2003 64bit / Server 2003 R2 / Server 2003 R2 64bit / Server 2008 / Server 2008 64bit / Server 2008 R2 / Server 2012 / Server 2012 R2 Mac OS 9.2 / X 10.2 / X 10.3 / X 10.4 / X 10.5 / X 10.6 / X 10.7 / X 10.8 / X 10.9 Linux 80 Roman fonts 137 Roman Type1 fonts Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T), USB 1.1, USB 2.0, USB Host Push Pull Type Interface Driver Protocol Scanning Speed (Colour/B&W) (300 dpi, A4 Crosswise) Scanning Size Output Format Scanning Resolution Main Functions Other Functions Full-Colour Scanner Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T) 80 opm 160 opm Simplex Duplex TWAIN Driver, HDD TWAIN Driver TCP/IP (FTP, SMB, SMTP, WebDAV) (IPv4/IPv6) Max. A3 (11" × 17") TIFF, JPEG, PDF, Compact PDF, XPS, Compact XPS, OOXML (pptx, xlsx*, docx*), Searchable PDF*, PDF/A*, Linearised PDF* *Optional 200 dpi / 300 dpi / 400 dpi / 600 dpi 100 dpi / 200 dpi / 300 dpi / 400 dpi / 600 dpi Scan to E-Mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to BOX (HDD), Scan to PC (SMB), Network TWAIN, Scan to WebDAV, Scan to Me, Scan to Home, Scan to USB, Scan to Scan Server, Scan to Web Service (WSD-Scan), Device Profile for Web Services (DPWS) Multi-Method Send, Authentication at the time of E-Mail send (SMTP authentication, POP before SMTP), S/MIME, Annotation Fax Kit FK-511 (Optional) Communication Compatible Lines Line Density Modem Speed Compression Sending Paper Size Recording Paper Size Transmission Speed Memory Number of Abbr. Dials Number of Program Dials Number of Group Dials Sequential Multiple Station Transmission Super G3 Public Switch Telephone Network, Private Branch Exchange, Fax Communication Line G3 (8 dot/mm × 3.85 line/mm, 600 × 600 dpi) 2.4 to 33.6 kbps MH/MR/MMR/JBIG Max. A3 (Long Length Support: Max.1,000 mm) Max. A3 (Long Length Max. 1,000 mm — following the page division —) Less than 3 sec. (A4, V.34, 33.6 kbps, JBIG) Shared with the copier 2,000 400 100 Max. 600 Protocol Connection Mode Sending Paper Size Recording Paper Size Resolution Interface Colour Format SMTP, POP Full-Mode A3, B4, A4 Max. A3 200 × 100 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T) Support Colour Internet Fax Send: TIFF-F, Receive: TIFF-F ,Colour/Grey Scale: TIFF (RFC3949 Profile-C) IP Address Fax *Optional Fax Kit FK-511 is required. Sending Paper Size Resolution Format SMTP A3, B4, A4 200 × 200 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi Send: TIFF-F, Receive: TIFF-F Colour/Grey Scale: TIFF (RFC3949 Profile-C) Protocol Transmission *1 S: Short edge feed *2 Set by Customer engineer *3 May vary depending on the operating environment and usage. *4 A4 crosswise full size/using the first tray/scanning from the original glass surface. *5 With options installed. *6 Without options, with paper trays pulled out, and multiple bypass tray, auxiliary tray and ADF opened. Single pass simultaneous duplex system A3 to A6S*1, 11" × 17" to 5-1/2" × 8-1/2", Foolscap*2 (8-1/2" × 13-1/2", 200 mm × 330 mm, 8-1/8" × 13-1/4", 8-1/2" × 13", 8-1/4" × 13", or 8" × 13"), 8K, 16K Support Centre guide 600 dpi support Simplex: 35 to 163 g/m2, Duplex: 50 to 163 g/m2, Mixed Original: 50 to 128 g/m2 FAX Mode: 35 to 163 g/m2 (Simplex), 50 to 163 g/m2 (Duplex) Max. 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Copy (Colour/B&W): 55 opm (600 dpi) Scan (Colour/B&W): 80 opm (300 dpi) Copy (Colour/B&W):110 opm (600 dpi) Scan (Colour/B&W): 160 opm (300 dpi) Supplied from the MFP main body 74.5 W or less 611.2 × 503.6 × 130 mm (24" × 19-3/4" × 5") Approx. 12 kg (26-1/2 lb) Type Support Paper Size Mixed Size Original Set Resolution Support Paper Weight Paper Capacity Productivity Simplex (A4 Crosswise) Duplex Power Requirements Max. Power Consumption Dimensions [W] × [D] × [H] Weight Dual Scan Document Feeder *1 S: Short edge feed *2 Set by Customer engineer Finisher FS-533 (Optional) Type Support Paper Type Support Paper Size Mode Stacking Capacity Staple Capacity Power Requirements Max. Power Consumption Dimensions [W] × [D] × [H] Weight Finisher Thin paper/Plain paper (52 to 90 g/m2), Thick paper (91 to 300 g/m2), Transparency, Envelope, Label sheet, Letterhead paper, Long length paper, Tab paper SRA3 to A5, B6S*1, A6S*1, Thick paper, Foolscap*2 (8-1/2" × 13-1/2", 200 mm × 330 mm, 8-1/8" × 13-1/4",8-1/2" × 13", 8-1/4" × 13", 8" × 13"), 8K, 16K, Long Length Paper (210 × 457.3 mm to 297 × 1,200 mm) Sort, Group, Offset Sort, Offset Group, Staple 500 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2, A4S*1 or smaller) 250 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2, B4 or larger) 10 sheets (91 to 300 g/m2, special paper) 50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2, A4S*1 or smaller) 30 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2, B4 or larger) 2 sheets (91 to 209 g/m2, as cover pages) Supplied from the MFP main body 40 W or less 472.5 × 583.5 × 194.7 mm (18-1/2" × 23" × 7-3/4") Approx. 12 kg (26-1/2 lb) *1 S: Short edge feed *2 Set by Customer engineer Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 1 Tray 2 Job Separator JS-506 (Optional) Support Paper Type (Weight) Support Paper Size Stacking Capacity Power Requirements Max. Power Consumption Dimensions [W] × [D] × [H] Weight Thin paper/Plain paper (52 to 90 g/m2), Thick paper (91 to 300 g/m2), Transparency, Envelope, Label sheet Thin paper/Plain paper (52 to 90 g/m2), Thick paper (91 to 300 g/m2), Transparency, Envelope, Label sheet, Long length paper SRA3 to A5, B6S*1, A6S*1, Thick paper, Foolscap*2 (8-1/2" × 13-1/2", 200 mm × 330 mm, 8-1/8" × 13-1/4", 8-1/2" × 13", 8-1/4" × 13", 8" × 13"), 8K, 16K, Long Length Paper (210 × 457.3 mm to 297 × 1,200 mm) 100 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2) 150 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2) Supplied from MFP main body 24 W or less 491.9 × 469.5 × 226.5mm (19-1/2" × 18-1/2" × 9") Approx. 1.5 kg (3-1/4 lb) *1 S: Short edge feed *2 Set by Customer engineer Specifcations Authentication Unit (IC Card type) AU-201 (Optional) Applicable Card Interface Power Supply Dimensions [W] × [D] × [H] Weight ISO 14443 TypeA, FeliCa-based noncontact IC card USB 2.0 Power received from USB port 92 × 64 × 16 mm (3-3/4" × 2-1/2" × 3/4") Approx. 120 g (264-1/2 lb) Authentication Unit (Biometric type) AU-102 (Optional) Biometric Sensor System Interface Verification Time Max. Power Consumption Dimensions [W] × [D] × [H] Weight Transmission-type optical system USB 2.0 Approx. 1 sec. or less DC 5 V 500 mA 59 × 82 × 74 mm (2-1/4" × 3-1/4" × 3") Approx. 96 g (211-3/4 lb) (excluding USB cable) A4 Crosswise (8-1/2" × 11" Crosswise) Plain paper: 3,000 sheets (80 g/m2)/ 3,300 sheets (60 g/m2) Thick paper 1: 2,500 sheets, Thick paper 1+: 1,750 sheets, Thick paper 2: 1,550 sheets, Thick paper 3: 1,300 sheets 367 × 528 × 405 mm (14-1/2"× 20-3/4" × 16") Approx. 18 kg (39-3/4 lb) Large Capacity Unit LU-204 / LU-301 (Optional) *1 The maximum number of loadable sheets for each paper size is 2,500 sheets (for 80 g/m2) or 2,750 sheets (for 60 g/m2) * Thick paper 1: 91 to 120 g/m2, Thick paper 1+: 121 to 157 g/m2, Thick paper 2: 158 to 209 g/m2, Thick paper 3: 210 to 256 g/m2 Max. Power Consumption Paper Capacity Support Paper Size Support Paper Type (Weight) Power Requirements Dimensions [W] × [D] × [H] Weight Thin paper/Plain paper (52 to 90 g/m2), Thick paper (91 to 256 g/m2) SRA3 to A4, 12" × 18" to 8-1/2" × 11"*1 Plain paper: 2,500 sheets (80 g/m2)/ 2,750 sheets (60 g/m2) Thick paper 1: 2,000 sheets, Thick paper 1+: 1,450 sheets, Thick paper 2: 1,250 sheets, Thick paper 3: 1,000 sheets Supplied from the MFP main body 22 W or less LU-204 LU-301 629 × 556 × 405 mm (24-3/4" × 22" × 16") Approx. 25 kg (55 lb) Model Finisher FS-534 (Optional) Power Requirements Max. Power Consumption Dimensions [W] × [D] × [H] Weight Type Support Paper Type Support Paper Size Mode Stacking Capacity Output tray 1 (Sub tray) Output tray 2 (Main tray) Output tray 3 (Relay Unit top surface) Staple Capacity Finisher Thin paper/Plain paper (52 to 90 g/m2) , Thick paper (91 to 300 g/m2), Transparency, Envelope, Label sheet, Letterhead paper, Long length paper, Tab paper SRA3 to A5, B6S*1, A6S*1 Thick paper, Foolscap*2 (8-1/2" × 13-1/2", 200 mm × 330 mm, 8-1/8" × 13-1/4", 8-1/2" × 13", 8-1/4" × 13", 8" × 13"), 8K, 16K, Long Length Paper (210 × 457.3 mm to 297 × 1,200 mm) Sort, Group, Offset Sort, Offset Group, Staple 200 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2) 20 sheets (91 to 300 g/m2, special paper) 3,000 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2, A4S*1 or smaller, B5 or larger) *2,000 sheets when SD-511 is installed 1,500 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2, B4 or larger) 500 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2, A5 or smaller) 20 sheets (91 to 300 g/m2, special paper) 100 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2) 20 sheets (91 to 300 g/m2, special paper) 50 sheets (Plain Paper 52 to 90 g/m2) 48 sheets (Plain paper 52 to 90 g/m2) + 2 sheets (Thick paper 91 to 209 g/m2) 30 sheets (Thick paper 91 to 120 g/m2) 15 sheets (Thick paper 121 to 209 g/m2) Supplied from the MFP main body 56 W or less 528 × 641 × 1,023 mm (20-3/4" × 25-1/4" × 40-1/4") Approx. 40 kg (88-1/4 lb) *1 S: Short edge feed *2 Set by Customer engineer Job Separator JS-602 (For FS-535) (Optional) Support Paper Type (Weight) Support Paper Size Power Requirements Max. Power Consumption Dimensions [W] × [D] × [H] Weight Supplied from Finisher FS-535 5 W or less 341 × 537 × 149 mm (13-1/2" × 21-1/4" × 5-3/4") Approx. 1.75 kg (3-3/4 lb) Applicable Finisher FS-535 Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2) A3, B4, A4, B5, A5S*1, Foolscap*2 (8-1/2" × 13-1/2", 200 mm × 330 mm, 8-1/8" × 13-1/4", 8-1/2" × 13", 8-1/4" × 13", 8" × 13"), 11" × 17", 8-1/2" × 14", 8-1/2" × 11", 10-1/2" × 8", 7-1/4"× 10-1/2", 5-1/2"× 8-1/2"S*1, 8K, 16K *1 S: Short edge feed *2 Set by Customer engineer Z Folding Unit ZU-606 (For FS-535) (Optional) Punch Holes Punch Paper Weight Punch Paper Size Z Fold Paper Size Z Fold Paper Weight Power Requirements Max. Power Consumption Dimensions [W] × [D] × [H] Weight A3, B4, 8K 60 to 90 g/m2 AC100 to 240 V 120 W or less 169 × 1,028 × 660 mm (6-3/4" × 40-1/2" × 26") Approx. 45 kg (99-1/4 lb) Applicable Finisher FS-535 2 holes or 4 holes 60 to 90 g/m2 2 holes: A3, B4, A4S*1, B5, A5, 8K, 16K Foolscap*2 (8-1/2" × 13-1/2", 200 mm × 330 mm, 8-1/8" × 13-1/4", 8-1/2" × 13",8-1/4" × 13", 8" × 13") 4 holes: A3, B4, A4 Crosswise, 8K, 16K Crosswise *1 S: Short edge feed *2 Set by Customer engineer A4 Crosswise (8-1/2" × 11" Crosswise) Plain paper: 2,500 sheets, Thick paper: 1,000 sheets Paper Feed Cabinet PC-110 / PC-210 / PC-410 (Optional) Support Paper Type (Weight) Support Paper Size Model Paper Capacity Power Requirements Unit Configuration Dimensions [W] × [D] × [H] Weight Paper tray, 1 level Paper tray, 2 levels 615 × 652 × 246 mm (24-1/4" × 25-3/4" × 9-3/4") Thin paper/Plain paper (52 to 90 g/m2), Thick paper (91 to 256 g/m2) A3 to A5S*1, 11" × 17" to 8-1/2" × 11", Foolscap*2 (8-1/2" × 13-1/2", 8-1/2" × 13", 8-1/4" × 13", 8" × 13") , 8K, 16K Crosswise Plain paper: 500 sheets, Thick paper: 150 sheets Plain paper: 500 sheets, Thick paper: 150 sheets Supplied from the MFP main body Approx. 22 kg (48-1/2 lb) Approx. 24 kg (53 lb) Approx. 23 kg (50-3/4 lb) PC-110 PC-210 PC-410 Bottom tray (Tray 4) Top tray (Tray 3) *1 S: Short edge feed *2 Set by Customer engineer Post Inserter PI-505 (For FS-535) (Optional) Support Paper Type (Weight) Support Paper Size Power Requirements Paper Capacity Max. Power Consumption Dimensions [W] × [D] × [H] Weight Upper Tray Lower Tray Supplied from Finisher FS-535 200 sheets (Plain paper, 80 g/m2) 30 W or less 511 × 635 × 220 mm (20-1/4" × 25" × 8-3/4") Approx. 10.5 kg (23-1/4 lb) Applicable Finisher FS-535 Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2), Thick paper (91 to 209 g/m2) A4, B5, A5 Crosswise, 8-1/2" × 11", 7-1/4" × 10-1/2", 5-1/2" × 8-1/2" Crosswise, 16K A3 Wide, A3, B4, A4, B5, A5 Crosswise, Foolscap*1 (8-1/2" × 13-1/2", 200 mm × 330 mm, 8-1/8" × 13-1/4", 8-1/2" × 13",8-1/4" × 13", 8" × 13"), 12" × 18", 11" × 17", 8-1/2" × 14", 8-1/2" × 11", 10-1/2" × 8", 7-1/4" × 10-1/2", 5-1/2" × 8-1/2" Crosswise, 8K, 16K *1 Set by Customer engineer Punch Kit PK-519 (For FS-533) / PK-520 (For FS-534)/ PK-521 (For FS-535) (Optional) Applicable 17 W or less 146.2 × 639.2 × 233.8 mm (5-3/4" × 25-1/4" × 9-1/4") Applicable Number of holes Support Paper Size Support Paper Type (Weight) Power Requirements Dimensions [W] × [D] × [H] Weight 2 holes or 4 holes Thin paper/Plain paper (52 to 90 g/m2), Thick paper (91 to 300 g/m2) Thin paper/Plain paper (52 to 90 g/m2), Thick paper (91 to 157 g/m2) A3, B4, A4, B5, Foolscap*2 (8-1/2" × 13-1/2", 200 mm × 330 mm, 8-1/8" × 13-1/4", 8-1/2" × 13", 8-1/4" × 13", 8" × 13"), 8K, 16K Supplied from Finisher FS-533 Supplied from Finisher FS-534 Supplied from Finisher FS-535 61 × 492 × 142 mm (2-1/2" × 19-1/2" × 5-1/2") 110.2 × 483.5 × 203.2 mm (4-1/2" × 19" × 8") Approx. 1.8 kg (4 lb)Approx. 4.5 kg (10 lb) Finisher FS-533 Finisher FS-534 Finisher FS-535 Approx. 3.2 kg (7 lb) A3, B4, A4, B5 (Excluding 52 to 59 g/m2 B5S*1), A5, Foolscap*2 (8-1/2" × 13-1/2", 200 mm × 330 mm, 8-1/8" × 13-1/4", 8-1/2" × 13", 8-1/4" × 13", 8" × 13"), 8K, 16K A3, B4, A4, B5, Foolscap*2 (8-1/2" × 13-1/2", 200 mm × 330 mm, 8-1/8"×13-1/4", 8-1/2" × 13", 8-1/4" × 13", 8" × 13"), 8K, 16K Max. Power Consumption Model PK-519 PK-520 PK-521 *1 S: Short edge feed *2 Set by Customer engineer Type Output tray 1 (Sub tray) Output tray 2 (Main tray) Support Paper Type Support Paper Size Mode Stacking Capacity Staple Capacity Power Requirements Max. Power Consumption Dimensions [W] × [D] × [H] Weight Finisher Thin paper/Plain paper (52 to 90 g/m2), Thick paper (91 to 300 g/m2), Transparency, Envelope, Label sheet, Letterhead paper, Long length paper, Tab paper SRA3 to A5, B6S*1, A6S*1 Thick paper, Foolscap*2 (8-1/2" × 13-1/2", 200 mm × 330 mm, 8-1/8" × 13-1/4",8-1/2" × 13", 8-1/4" × 13", 8" × 13"), 8K, 16K, Long Length Paper (210 × 457.3 mm to 297 × 1,200 mm) Sort, Group, Offset Sort, Offset Group, Staple 200 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2) 50 sheets (52 to 59 g/m2) 20 sheets (91 to 300 g/m2, special paper) 3,000 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2, A4S*1 or smaller) *2,500 sheets when SD-512 is installed. 1,500 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2, B4 or larger) 500 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2, A5S*1 or smaller) 100 sheets (91 to 300 g/m2) Supplied from the MFP main body Max. 100 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2) 77 W or less 724 × 709.5 × 1,025 mm (28-1/2" × 28" × 40-1/2") Approx. 63.5 kg (140 lb) Finisher FS-535 (For bizhub 554e Only) (Optional) *1 S: Short edge feed *2 Set by Customer engineer Centre Staple and Fold, Half-Fold: A3 Wide, A3, B4, A4S*1,12-1/4" × 18", 11" × 17", 8-1/2" × 14", 8-1/2" × 11",8K Tri-Fold: A4S*1, 8"-1/2" × 11"S*1, 16KS*1 1 to 5 sheets: 35 sets 6 to 10 sheets: 25 sets (paper length: 330 mm or less), 30 sets (paper length: over 330 mm) 11 to 20 sheets: 15 sets Tri-Fold (1 sheet): 50 sets Tri-Fold (2 sheets): 40 sets Tri-Fold (3 sheets): 30 sets 239 × 579 × 534 mm (9-1/2" × 22-3/4" × 21") Max. Power Consumption Dimensions [W] × [D] × [H] Weight Support Paper Size Maximum Number of Sheets that can be Centrestapled 20 (52 to 90 g/m2) sheets, or 19 (90 g/m2) sheets + Thick (209 g/m2) 1 sheet Maximum Number of Folded Sheets Stacking Capacity Finisher FS-534 Finisher FS-535 Centre Staple: 52 to 90 g/m2 Half-Fold: 52 to 209 g/m2 (more than 91 g/m2 Thick paper can be used only as a cover page) Tri-Fold: 52 to 90 g/m2 Centre Staple and Fold, Half-Fold: A3 Wide, A3, B4, A4S*1, 12-1/4" × 18", 11" × 17", 8-1/2" × 14", 8-1/2" × 11", 8K Tri-Fold: A4S*1, 8-1/2" × 11"S*1, 16KS*1 Half-Fold: 5 sheets or Thick paper (91 to 209 g/m2) 1 sheet, Tri-Fold: 3 sheets 1 to 3 sheets: 20 sets 4 to 10 sheets: 10 sets 11 to 20 sheets: 5 sets Tri-Fold (1 sheet): 30 sets Tri-Fold (2-3 sheets): 10 sets 31 W or less 210 × 556 × 547 mm (8-1/2" × 21-3/4" × 21-1/2") Approx. 24 kg (53 lb) Approx. 25.5 kg (56-1/4 lb) Saddle Stitcher SD-511 (For FS-534) / SD-512 (For FS-535) (Optional) Applicable Support Paper Type SD-511 SD-512Model *1 S: Short edge feed Power Requirements Supplied from Finisher FS-534 Supplied from Finisher FS-535 Space Requirements Dimensions (unit: mm) bizhub 554e (454e) + DF-701 + PC-210 (PC-110/PC-410/DK-510) + OT-506 bizhub 554e (454e) + DF-701 + PC-210 (PC-110/PC-410/DK-510) + FS-533 bizhub 554e (454e) + DF-701 + PC-210 (PC-110/PC-410/DK-510) + MK-730 + FS-534 + SD-511 bizhub 554e + DF-701 + PC-210 (PC-110/PC-410/DK-510) + MK-730 + LU-204 (LU-301) + FS-535 + PI-505 + SD-512 + ZU-606 1,113 1,113 461 652 1,246 818 428 685 937 615 483 1,098 322 252 1,553 528 1,167 771 142 254 818 1,246 428 685 461 652 158 908 1,066 615 547 2,310 1,119 182 252615 937 170 When sliding +170 367 (LU-301) (When sliding + 452) 629 (LU-204) (When sliding + 452) 528 771 254 142 1,553 1,167 1,187 406 1,163 1,066 1,820 530 615 547 1,065 1,023 04/2014 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS MCM1U LCM1U (Shown installed to 1-1/2" NPT column as example only) (Shown installed to CPA Series extension column as example only) Single Flat Panel Ceiling Mounts Spanish Product Description German Product Description Portuguese Product Description Italian Product Description Dutch Product Description French Product Description MCM1U / LCM1U / MCM1US / LCM1US MCM1U / LCM1U / MCM1US / LCM1US Installation Instructions 2 DISCLAIMER Milestone AV Technologies and its affiliated corporations and subsidiaries (collectively "Milestone"), intend to make this manual accurate and complete. However, Milestone makes no claim that the information contained herein covers all details, conditions or variations, nor does it provide for every possible contingency in connection with the installation or use of this product. The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice or obligation of any kind. Milestone makes no representation of warranty, expressed or implied, regarding the information contained herein. Milestone assumes no responsibility for accuracy, completeness or sufficiency of the information contained in this document. Chief® is a registered trademark of Milestone AV Technologies. All rights reserved. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WARNING:A WARNING alerts you to the possibility of serious injury or death if you do not follow the instructions. CAUTION:A CAUTION alerts you to the possibility of damage or destruction of equipment if you do not follow the corresponding instructions. WARNING:Failure to read, thoroughly understand, and follow all instructions can result in serious personal injury, damage to equipment, or voiding of factory warranty! It is the installer’s responsibility to make sure all components are properly assembled and installed using the instructions provided. WARNING:Failure to provide adequate structural strength for this component can result in serious personal injury or damage to equipment! It is the installer’s responsibility to make sure the structure to which this component is attached can support five times the combined weight of all equipment. Reinforce the structure as required before installing the component. WARNING:Exceeding the weight capacity can result in serious personal injury or damage to equipment! It is the installer’s responsibility to make sure the combined weight of all components located between the mount up to (and including) the display does not exceed 125 lbs (56.7 kg). WARNING:Use this mounting system only for its intended use as described in these instructions. Do not use attachments not recommended by the manufacturer. WARNING:Never operate this mounting system if it is damaged. Return the mounting system to a service center for examination and repair. WARNING:Do not use this product outdoors. IMPORTANT ! :The MCM1U/LCM1U and MCM1US/ LCM1US mounts are designed to be mounted to a 1-1/2" NPT or NPSM following ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 (Schedule 40, 0.154" minimum thickness aluminum-ASTM B221) threaded extension column (not included);OR a UL Listed Chief CPA Series extension column (not included). --SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS-- Installation Instructions MCM1U / LCM1U / MCM1US / LCM1US 3 DIMENSIONS 460.4 MAX MOUNTING PATTERN 7.87" [200 ] MIN MOUNTING PATTERN 5.56 141.3 PATTERN MAX MOUNTING 15.75 400.0 528.8 20.82 18.13 5.38 136.5 20° 4.75 120.7 0.50 12.7 161.7 6.37 5.22 132.6 7.94 201.6 16.50 419.1 3.95 100.2 MCM1U/MCM1US 15.75 5.38 136.5 MIN MOUNTING PATTERN [200] 7.87 MAX MOUNTING PATTER 616.0 PATTERN MAX MOUNTING 400.0 141.3 5.56 24.25 26.81 681.0 100.2 3.95 16.50 419.1 7.94 201.6 12.7 0.50 161.7 6.37 4.25 108.0 5.22 132.6 20° LCM1U/LCM1US MCM1U / LCM1U / MCM1US / LCM1US Installation Instructions 4 LEGEND Tighten Fastener Apretar elemento de fijación Befestigungsteil festziehen Apertar fixador Serrare il fissaggio Bevestiging vastdraaien Serrez les fixations Loosen Fastener Aflojar elemento de fijación Befestigungsteil lösen Desapertar fixador Allentare il fissaggio Bevestiging losdraaien Desserrez les fixations Phillips Screwdriver Destornillador Phillips Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher Chave de fendas Phillips Cacciavite a stella Kruiskopschroevendraaier Tournevis à pointe cruciforme Open-Ended Wrench Llave de boca Gabelschlüssel Chave de bocas Chiave a punte aperte Steeksleutel Clé à fourche Hex-Head Wrench Llave de cabeza hexagonal Sechskantschlüssel Chave de cabeça sextavada Chiave esagonale Zeskantsleutel Clé à tête hexagonale Adjust Ajustar Einstellen Ajustar Regolare Afstellen Ajuster Remove Quitar Entfernen Remover Rimuovere Verwijderen Retirez Optional Opcional Optional Opcional Opzionale Optie En option By Hand A mano Von Hand Com a mão A mano Met de hand À la main Installation Instructions MCM1U / LCM1U / MCM1US / LCM1US 5 TOOLS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION PARTS #2 1/2" or 13mm 3/32" (included) 1/8" (included) 5/32" (included) M5 (included) C (6) E (6) [Interface Bracket Hardware Kit] A (8) M4x16mm B (6) M4x20mm M4x25mm D (6) M5x16mm M5x20mm F (6) M5x25mm G (6) M6x16mm H (6) M6x25mm I (6) M8x20mm J (6) M8x30mm K (4) M8x50mm L (8) .750x.323x.250 M (8) .750x.344x.500 N (8) P (1)[Universal washer] Q (1) 3/32" S (1) 5/32" R (1) 1/8" T (1) 10-24 x 1/4" U (2) 5/16" x 1" V (2) W (4) 10-24" x 1/2" X (3) 5/16" x 3/4" Y (2) 10-24 x 1/2" AA (1) [In bag M5 BB (1)[Bottom coupling] 5/16" [Bottom stop collar] (Used with CPA Series extension column system) (Used with 1-1/2" NPT column system) CC (1) [Ceiling mount assembly - MCM1U/MCM1US] CC (1) [Ceiling mount assembly - LCM1U/LCM1US] OR DD (1) [Back cover] EE (2) [Side cover] FF (2) [Interface bracket] labeled "N"] GG (4) [Interface bracket cover] Z (2) 10-24 HH (2) 10-24 x 5/8" MCM1U / LCM1U / MCM1US / LCM1US Installation Instructions 6 INSTALLATION WARNING:FAILURE TO PROVIDE ADEQUATE STRUCTURAL STRENGTH FOR THIS COMPONENT CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT! It is the installer’s responsibility to make sure the structure to which this component is attached can support five times the combined weight of all equipment. Reinforce the structure as required before installing the component. IMPORTANT ! :These instructions assume that a 1-1/2"NPT or NPSM following ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 (Schedule 40, 0.154" minimum thickness aluminum-ASTM B221) threaded extension column (not included); or a UL Listed Chief CPA Series extension column (not included) -- hasbeen properly installed and is in place. NOTE:Proceed to Attaching Mount to NPT Column section or Attaching Mount to CPA Extension Column section, as appropriate. Attaching Mount to NPT Column CAUTION:WATCH FOR PINCH POINTS! Do not place fingers between moveable parts. 1. Slide ceiling mount (CC) up from below onto installedcolumn (not included). (See Figure 1) 2. Thread bottom coupling (BB) onto installed column untiltight, with a minimum of four threads engaged. Figure 1 3. Install and tighten one 10-24 x 1/4" set screw (T) into bottomcoupling (BB). (See Figure 1) 4. Install and tighten two 5/16" set screws (X) through back ofmount (CC) and against column. (See Figure 2) Figure 2 Attaching Mount to CPA Extension Column CAUTION:WATCH FOR PINCH POINTS! Do not place fingers between moveable parts. 1. Slide ceiling mount (CC) up from below onto installed column (not included). (See Figure 3) 2. Slide bottom stop collar (AA) onto installed column, lining up holes in collar with holes in column. Figure 3 3. Install two 5/16" x 1" self-tapping screws (U) through two5/16"flat washers (V), bottom stop collar (AA), and intoinstalled column. 1 2 2 3 (T) x 1(BB) (CC) 4 (X) x 2 1 (CC) 2 4 3 (U) x 2 (V x 2) (AA) (X) x 1 Installation Instructions MCM1U / LCM1U / MCM1US / LCM1US 7 4. Install and tighten 5/16" x 3/4" set screw (X) into bottom stopcollar (AA). (See Figure 3) 5. Install and tighten two 5/16" x 3/4" set screws (X) throughback of mount (CC) and against column. (See Figure 4) Figure 4 Attaching Interface Brackets to Display 1. Lower the latch mechanism on each interface bracket (FF).(See Figure 5) Figure 5 2. Align the center of the interface bracket (FF) with center ofscreen. (See Figure 6) NOTE:The diamond-shape hole in the bracket corresponds to the center of the mount. Figure 6 WARNING:IMPROPER INSTALLATION CAN LEAD TO DISPLAY FALLING CAUSING SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT! Using screws of improper size may damage your display. Properly sized screws will easily and completely thread into display mounting holes. If spacers are required, be sure to use longer screws of the same diameter. 3. Select correct screws, spacers (if necessary) and universal washers from the hardware bag (A-N) and attach brackets (FF) to back of screen. (See Figure 6) 5 (X) x 2 (FF) 1 Latch mechanism Center of bracket (N) (L or M) (A-K)(FF)3 2 MCM1U / LCM1U / MCM1US / LCM1US Installation Instructions 8 Attaching Display to Ceiling Mount 1. Ensure that the latch mechanisms on interface brackets(FF) are already lowered. (See Figure 5) 2. While supporting both sides of display, lower display ontoceiling mount, hooking top of interface brackets onto front ofceiling mount. (See Figure 7) WARNING:IMPROPER INSTALLATION CAN LEAD TO DISPLAY FALLING CAUSING SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT! The display MUST be centered on the ceiling mount. Figure 7 3. Raise the latch mechanism on both interface brackets tolock bracket in place. (See Figure 7) 4. Fasten bracket against ceiling mount extrusion using one10-24 x 5/8" button head cap screw (HH). (See Figure 8) 5. Repeat for other interface bracket. Figure 8 Adjustments CAUTION:Watch for pinch points! Do not place fingers between moveable parts. IMPORTANT ! :Always use two hands (one at bottom of display and one at top of display) to adjust ceiling mount. Roll The ceiling mounts allow up to 3° roll each direction. 1. Turn the roll adjustment screw in the direction necessary forthe desired roll. (See Figure 9) 2. Stop adjusting when the desired setting is reached. Figure 9 2 3 3 Latch mechanism (Ceiling mount not shown for clarity) 4 (HH) x 2 5 1 Roll adjustment screw side view Installation Instructions MCM1U / LCM1U / MCM1US / LCM1US 9 Tilt The ceiling mounts allow -5° to 20° tilt. The ceiling mount can be locked at 0°, 5°, 10° and 15° tilt. 3. Loosen two tilt friction screws (located each side). (SeeFigure 10) 4. Adjust tilt as required. Note specific degrees of tilt. (SeeFigure 10) 5. Tighten two tilt adjustment screws if NOT using the 0°, 5°,10° or 15° settings. Figure 10 6. If using the tilt settings of 0°, 5°, 10° or 15°, insert two10-24 x 1/2" Phillips head screws (Y) and two 10-24 locknuts (Z) to lock mount at the specific tilt. (See Figure 11) Figure 11 OPTIONAL: Security 1.OPTIONAL: Add padlock (not included) to each interfacebracket to lock display to ceiling mount. (See Figure 12) Figure 12 Installing Covers 1. Install four interface bracket covers (GG) over the top andbottom of both interface brackets. (See Figure 13) NOTE:Be sure to line up tabs inside the bracket covers with holes on sides of interface brackets. (See Figure 13) Figure 13 15° 10°5°0° 20° -5° Tilt friction screw 3 4 5 (Z) x 2 (Y) x 26 [Example shows locking tilt at 15°] (Ceiling mount not shown for clarity) Padlock (Optional) 1 1 (GG) MCM1U / LCM1U / MCM1US / LCM1US Installation Instructions 10 2. Install back cover (DD) into four holes on back of ceilingmount. (See Figure 14) Figure 14 3. Install one side cover (EE) onto side of ceiling mount usingtwo 10-24 x 1/2" flat head screws (W). (See Figure 15) 4. Repeat for other side of ceiling mount. Figure 15 (DD) (EE) (W) x 43 4 Installation Instructions MCM1U / LCM1U / MCM1US / LCM1US 11 MCM1U / LCM1U / MCM1US / LCM1US Installation Instructions USA/International A 6436 City West Parkway, Eden Prairie, MN 55344 P 800.582.6480 / 952.225.6000 F 877.894.6918 / 952.894.6918 Europe A Franklinstraat 14, 6003 DK Weert, Netherlands P +31 (0) 495 580 852 F +31 (0) 495 580 845 Asia Pacific A Office No. 1 on 12/F, Shatin Galleria 18-24 Shan Mei Street Fotan, Shatin, Hong Kong P 852 2145 4099 F 852 2145 4477 Chief Manufacturing, a products division of Milestone AV Technologies 8800-002238 Rev01 ¤2013 Milestone AV Technologies, a Duchossois Group Company www.chiefmfg.com 01/13 For help and assistance with Bosch accessories please visit: www.bosch-eshop.com/eshop/bosch/us or call 1-800-944-2904 Mon-Fri 5am to 6pm PST Sat 6am to 3pm PST Notes: All height, width and depth dimensions are shown in inches. BSH reserves the absolute and unrestricted right to change product materials and specifications, at any time, without notice. Consult the product’s installation instructions for final dimensional data and other details prior to making cutout. Applicable product warranty can be found in accompanying product literature or you may contact your account manager for further details. Warranties: Bosch warrants that the Product is free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three hundred and sixty-five (365) days from the date of purchase. The foregoing timeline begins to run upon the date of purchase, and shall not be stalled, tolled, extended, or suspended, for any reason whatsoever. This Product is also warranted to be free from cosmetic defects in material and workmanship (such as scratches of stainless steel, paint/porcelain blemishes, chip, dents, or other damage) to the finish of the Product, for a period of thirty (30) days from the date of purchase or closing date for new construction. This cosmetic warranty excludes slight color variations due to inherent differences in painted and porcelain parts, as well as differences caused by kitchen lighting, product location, or other similar factors. This cosmetic warranty specifically excludes any display, floor, “As Is”, or “B” stock appliances. For more information on our entire line of products, go to www.bosch-home.com/us or call 1-800-944-2904 © BSH Home Appliances Corporation. All rights reserved. Bosch is a registered trademark of Robert Bosch GmbH.05/16 HMD8451UC Stainless Steel The 24" drawer microwave opens and closes automatically with the push of a button, and can be installed flush to cabinet. Features & Benefits Convenient automatic sensor programs simplify cooking for perfect results. White touch control LCD matches Bosch wall ovens. Able to fit a 20 oz. cup or a 13" x 9" baking oven pan. Low profile design with touch “open” and “close”. General Properties Cavity material White Max. microwave power (W) 950 W Capacity Cavity capacity (cu. ft.)1.2 cu. ft. Technical Details Watts (W) 1,500 W Circuit breaker (A) 15 A Volts (V) 120 V Frequency (Hz) 60 Hz Power cord length (in) 48" Plug type 120V-3 prong Dimensions & Weight Overall appliance dimensions (HxWxD) (in) 16 5/16" X 23 7/8" X 23 3/8" Required cutout size (HxWxD) (in) 14 13/16" x 22 1/8" x 23 1/2" Net weight (lbs) 81 lbs 24" Drawer Microwave 800 Series – Stainless Steel HMD8451UC For help and assistance with Bosch accessories please visit: www.bosch-eshop.com/eshop/bosch/us or call 1-800-944-2904 Mon-Fri 5am to 6pm PST Sat 6am to 3pm PST Notes: All height, width and depth dimensions are shown in inches. BSH reserves the absolute and unrestricted right to change product materials and specifications, at any time, without notice. Consult the product’s installation instructions for final dimensional data and other details prior to making cutout. Applicable product warranty can be found in accompanying product literature or you may contact your account manager for further details. Warranties: Bosch warrants that the Product is free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three hundred and sixty-five (365) days from the date of purchase. The foregoing timeline begins to run upon the date of purchase, and shall not be stalled, tolled, extended, or suspended, for any reason whatsoever. This Product is also warranted to be free from cosmetic defects in material and workmanship (such as scratches of stainless steel, paint/porcelain blemishes, chip, dents, or other damage) to the finish of the Product, for a period of thirty (30) days from the date of purchase or closing date for new construction. This cosmetic warranty excludes slight color variations due to inherent differences in painted and porcelain parts, as well as differences caused by kitchen lighting, product location, or other similar factors. This cosmetic warranty specifically excludes any display, floor, “As Is”, or “B” stock appliances. For more information on our entire line of products, go to www.bosch-home.com/us or call 1-800-944-2904 © BSH Home Appliances Corporation. All rights reserved. Bosch is a registered trademark of Robert Bosch GmbH.05/16 Installation Details 24" Drawer Microwave 800 Series – Stainless Steel HMD8451UC 237/8" (606 mm) 215/8" (549 mm)48" (1220 mm) 111 /16" (39 mm) 233/8" (594 mm) 217/8" (556 mm) 383/8" (974 mm) 145/8" (371 mm) 165/16" (414 mm) FLUSH INSTALLAT ION DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES 23 1/2" (597 mm) 217/8" (555 mm) Base min. depth 27" (686 mm) 1" (25 mm) 1" (25 mm) 36" (914 mm) 24 3/16"(614 mm) 221/8"(562 mm) Frontview cut out Cleat145/8" (371 mm) 165/8" (422 mm)cutout 6" (152 mm) 4" (102 mm) 5" (127 mm) 21/4" (57 mm) 15/8" (41 mm) 1/2" (13 mm)visible area 1/4" (6 mm) base thickness * Suggested location of electrical outlet ** Anti-Tip Block *** Base should support up to 100 lbs **** Sides should be finished and extend back to cleat. Cleats should also be finished, as they may be visible after installation. (Cleats are not included with unit.) * ** *** **** STANDARD INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS & CLEARANCES FLUSH INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS & CLEARANCES FLUSH INSTALLAT ION DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES 23 1/2" (597 mm) 217/8" (555 mm) Base min. depth 27" (686 mm) 1" (25 mm) 1" (25 mm) 36" (914 mm) 24 3/16"(614 mm) 221/8"(562 mm) Frontview cut out Cleat145/8" (371 mm) 165/8" (422 mm)cutout 6" (152 mm) 4" (102 mm) 5" (127 mm) 21/4" (57 mm) 15/8" (41 mm) 1/2" (13 mm)visible area 1/4" (6 mm) base thickness * Suggested location of electrical outlet ** Anti-Tip Block *** Base should support up to 100 lbs **** Sides should be finished and extend back to cleat. Cleats should also be finished, as they may be visible after installation. (Cleats are not included with unit.) * ** *** **** FLUSH INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES 23 1/2" (597 mm) 217/8" (555 mm) Base min. depth 27" (686 mm) 1" (25 mm) 1" (25 mm) 36" (914 mm) 24 3/16"(614 mm) 221/8"(562 mm) Frontview cut out Cleat145/8" (371 mm) 165/8" (422 mm)cutout 6" (152 mm) 4" (102 mm) 5" (127 mm) 21/4" (57 mm) 15/8" (41 mm) 1/2" (13 mm)visible area 1/4" (6 mm) base thickness * Suggested location of electrical outlet ** Anti-Tip Block *** Base should support up to 100 lbs **** Sides should be finished and extend back to cleat. Cleats should also be finished, as they may be visible after installation. (Cleats are not included with unit.) * ** *** **** FRONTVIEW CUT OUT FRONTVIEW CUT OUT Item # 2419 Completed 220v (3 wire - 2 hot + 1 ground) dedicated line with matching cord cap Actual Amperage - 17 amps Recommended Amperage - 30 amps (Must supply the plug to match the outlet). Receptacle must be a maximum 40” from machine. 5. Water Filtration (Recommended) 4021 - Twin Filter Housing 4004 - Resin Cartridge 4008 - Carbon Cartridge Filter Dimensions 12" H X 5" round * Disclaimer - Please make sure to check all local electrical and plumbing codes as these differ from region to region. I, the customer understand that if the above requirements are to be completed prior to installation. Failure to have the site ready will result in additional service and travel charges and may cause delays in completing the installation. Customer Name Signature Company Name Email Phone Fax illy caffe North America, Inc. Drain Line: 1/2" or 5/8" OD pipe. This pipe must be below the top of the counter, positoned directly behind the machine when in place. If water, drain, or electrical connections are to be made below the counter a 2” diameter hole must be drilled in the counter, positioned directly behind the machine when in place. Cold Water Line: 3/8” OD pipe with shut off valve and vacuum breaker. The line must end in either a 3/8” compression fitting or a 3/8” or 1/2” NPTF female fitting with a maximum distance of 36” from machine and 60" from a main water source. 1. Counter Space Requirements: Width: 25.6” 4. Water and Electrical Access Hole: 3. Water and Drain Line Requirements: Depth: 22” 2. Electrical Requirements: Height: 23.2” (leave 4" for placing cups on top) Unic Twin Phoenix I Espresso Machine BUNN® practices continuous product research and improvement. We reserve the right to change specifications and product design without notice. Such revisions do not entitle the buyer to corresponding changes, improvements, additions or replacements for previously purchased equipment. All dimensions shown in inches. Bunn Corporation owns all copyrights relating to materials in this publication. Please contact Bunn Corporation to request permission to reproduce any portion of this publication. Dimensions & Specifications BUNN Corporation - 1400 Stevenson Drive Springfield, Illinois 62703 • 800-637-8606 • 217-529-6601 • Fax 217-529-6644 • www.bunn.com Model Product # Volts Amps Tank Heater Total Brewing Cubic Shipping Cord Watts Watts Capacity Measure Weight Attached CWT15–3 12950.0112 120 13.9 1320 1670 3.8 gal./hr. 6.4 ft3 32 lbs. Yes CWTF15–3 12950.0212 120 13.9 1320 1670 3.8 gal./hr. 6.4 ft3 35 lbs. Yes CWTF15–3* 12950.0216 120 13.9 1320 1670 3.8 gal./hr. 6.4 ft3 36 lbs. Yes CWTF20–3 12950.0232 120 17.9 1800 2150 5.1 gal./hr. 6.4 ft3 35 lbs. No CWTF35–3 12950.0252 120/208-240 17.1† 3500 3850 7.5 gal./hr. 6.4 ft3 35 lbs. No CWTF15 12950.0298 120 13.9 1320 1670 3.8 gal./hr. 6.4 ft3 35 lbs. Yes (3 left lower warmers) CWTF35* 12950.0381 120/208-240 17.1† 3500 3850 7.5 gal./hr. 6.4 ft3 39 lbs. No *Stainless steel funnel †Current at 120/240 Volts Brewing capacity: based upon incoming water temp of 60ºF/15˚C (140ºF/60˚C rise) per 1/2 gallon brew time of 4 minutes. Models listed as 120/208V or 120/240V must be connected to 208V or 240V electrical service respectively. Please refer to the installation manual. Electrical: Model 15 requires 2-wires plus ground service rated 120V, single phase, 60 Hz. Model 20 requires 2-wires plus ground service rated 120V, single phase, 60 Hz. Model 35 requires 3-wires plus ground service rated 120/208 or 120/240V, single phase, 60 Hz. Plumbing: 20-90 psi (138-621 kPa). Machine supplied with 1⁄4" male flare fitting. BIM44GADA 32.38" x 14.5" x 23.5" (H x W x D) ADA compliant NSF-listed auto defrost clear icemaker with internal pump for built-in or freestanding use under counters Highlights: 32 3/8" height fits under lower ADA compliant counters Automatic defrost saves on user maintenance Flexible design allows built-in or freestanding use Product Features: ADA compliant 32 3/8" height fits under lower ADA compliant counters Commercially approved NSF listed for use in commercial establishments ENERGY STAR qualified Certified as a batch-type commercial icemaker for its efficiency Built-in pump Internal pump allows more flexibility in placing the unit Automatic defrost Simplify appliance care by letting your icemaker defrost itself Reversible door Keep your options flexible with a reversible door that is easy to switch when your arrangement changes; Unit ships LHD but can be reversed in our factory or by the user Built-in capable Make the best use of space by installing your icemaker under the counter Stainless steel door Professional styling with lasting durability Professional towel bar handle A curved handle in brushed stainless steel offers an easy grip SUMMIT APPLIANCE DIVISION, FELIX STORCH, INC. | ISO 9001:2015 Certified 770 Garrison Avenue Bronx, NY 10474 USA TEL 718-893-3900 FAX 844-478-8799 info@summitappliance.com www.summitappliance.com BIM44GADA Specifications: Overview Height of Cabinet 32.38" (82 cm) Width 14.5" (37 cm) Depth 23.5" (60 cm) Depth with Handle 25.0" (64 cm) Depth with door at 90°36.75" (93 cm) Defrost Type Automatic Door Stainless Steel Cabinet Black US Electrical Safety UL Canadian Electrical Safety ULC Sanitation NSF Amps 4.8 Voltage/Frequency 115 V AC/60 Hz Shipping Weight 117.0 lbs. (53 kg) Parts & Labor Warranty 1 Year Compressor Warranty 5 Years Icemaker Door Swing LHD Reversible Yes Drain Required Yes Daily Ice Production 50.0 lbs. (23 kg) Ice Storage Capacity 25.0 lbs. (11 kg) Ice Shape Cube Size of Cube 3/4" x 3/4" x 1" Number of Ice Cube Sizes 1 Fan Type Exterior Refrigerant Type R134a Refrigerant Amount 3.88 oz. High Side PSI 350.0 Low Side PSI 130.0 Interior Height 18.5" (47 cm) Interior Width 12.0" (30 cm) Interior Depth 16.0" (41 cm) SUMMIT APPLIANCE DIVISION, FELIX STORCH, INC. | ISO 9001:2015 Certified 770 Garrison Avenue Bronx, NY 10474 USA TEL 718-893-3900 FAX 844-478-8799 info@summitappliance.com www.summitappliance.com SP6DS2DOS7ADA 32.25" x 23.63" x 25.38" (H x W x D) Two-drawer commercial outdoor all-refrigerator in ADA compliant height, fully stainless steel with automatic defrost Highlights: 32" height allows installation under lower ADA compliant counters ETL-S listed to NSF-7 commercial standards Weatherproof construction ensures safe operation in the outdoors Product Features: Weatherproof design Designed and constructed for durable use in the outdoors Commercially approved ETL-S listed to NSF standards and approved to UL-471 electrical standard for commercial use ADA compliant 32" height is designed to fit under lower ADA compliant counters All 304 grade stainless steel construction Non-corrodible stainless steel inside and out Built-in capable Make the best use of space by installing your appliance under the counter and flush with other cabinets Fully finished cabinet Allows the refrigerator to be used as a freestanding model Automatic defrost Reduced maintenance with auto defrost system Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Our integrated GFCI exceeds U.L. requirements for safety by protecting your unit from shocks and circuit breaks Sealed back No exposed electrical components SUMMIT APPLIANCE DIVISION, FELIX STORCH, INC. | ISO 9001:2015 Certified 770 Garrison Avenue Bronx, NY 10474 USA TEL 718-893-3900 FAX 844-478-8799 info@summitappliance.com www.summitappliance.com SP6DS2DOS7ADA Specifications: Overview Height of Cabinet 32.25" (82 cm) Width 23.63" (60 cm) Depth 25.38" (64 cm) Depth with Handle 26.88" (68 cm) Depth with door at 90°43.0" (109 cm) Capacity 3.1 cu.ft. (88 L) Defrost Type Automatic Door Stainless Steel Cabinet Stainless Steel US Electrical Safety ETL Canadian Electrical Safety ETL-C Sanitation ETL-S Amps 1.3 Voltage/Frequency 115 V AC/60 Hz Shipping Weight 140.0 lbs. (64 kg) Parts & Labor Warranty 1 Year Compressor Warranty 5 Years Refrigerator Features Thermostat Type Dial Fan Type Interior and Exterior Refrigerant Type R134a Refrigerant Amount 1.8oz. High Side PSI 285.0 Low Side PSI 70.0 Level Legs Qty 4 Interior Drawers Yes Interior Drawers Qty 2 Drawer Dimensions Interior Height 1 9.5" (24 cm) Interior Width 1 18.63" (47 cm) Interior Depth 1 12.0" (30 cm) Interior Height 2 12.75" (32 cm) Interior Width 2 17.25" (44 cm) Interior Depth 2 16.0" (41 cm) Dimensions Compressor Step Height 5.75" (15 cm) Compressor Step Width 18.63" (47 cm) Compressor Step Depth 4.0" (10 cm) SUMMIT APPLIANCE DIVISION, FELIX STORCH, INC. | ISO 9001:2015 Certified 770 Garrison Avenue Bronx, NY 10474 USA TEL 718-893-3900 FAX 844-478-8799 info@summitappliance.com www.summitappliance.com 12/7/2016 SP6DS2DOS7ADA | Summit Appliance https://www.summitappliance.com/catalog/model/SP6DS2DOS7ADA 1/3 SUMMITAPPLIANCE.COM SUMMIT COMMERCIAL ACCUCOLD MEDICAL Dealer LoginDealer Registration Enter model number or keyword, such as outdoor icemaker SEARCH FIND A DEALER Refrigeration Freezers &  Icemakers Outdoor Refrigeration Beer Storage Beverage &  Wine Cooking Range Hoods Laundry & Dishwashers Kitchenettes &  Combo  Units SHARE THIS PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Overview Height of Cabinet 32.25" (82 cm) Width 23.63" (60 cm) Depth 25.38" (64 cm) Depth with Handle 26.88" (68 cm) Depth with door at 90° 43.0" (109 cm) Capacity 3.1 cu.埔�. (88 L) Defrost Type Automatic Door Stainless Steel Cabinet Stainless Steel US Electrical Safety ETL Canadian Electrical Safety ETL-C Sanitation ETL-S Amps 1.3 Voltage/Frequency 115 V AC/60 Hz Shipping Weight 140.0 lbs. (64 kg) Parts & Labor Warranty 1 Year Compressor Warranty 5 Years Refrigerator Features Thermostat Type Dial Fan Type Interior and Exterior SP6DS2DOS7ADA Fully constructed from stainless steel for durable use in the outdoors 32.25" H x 23.63" W x 25.38" D OVERVIEW 32" height allows installation under lower ADA compliant counters ETL-S listed to NSF-7 commercial standards Weatherproof construction ensures safe operation in the outdoors Minimum maintenance with automatic defrost Flexible design allows built-in or freestanding use Complete construction in durable stainless steel Two sliding drawers include sleek stainless steel handles Made in the U.S.A. WHERE TO BUY Enter Zip Code Find a dealer near you SUMMIT COMMERCIAL offers a quality line of commercially approved outdoor drawer refrigerators, all fully constructed from stainless steel and made in the U.S.A. The SP6DS2DOS7ADA is a two-drawer all-refrigerator that can be built-in under counters or used freestanding. Sized at just 24" wide and 32" high, it can be installed under lower counters complying with ADA guidelines. The weatherproof design includes a sealed back, integrated Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI), and complete construction in non- corrodible 304 grade stainless steel. Sleek stainless steel handles complete the look. The fully automatic defrost system ensures easy user maintenance inside the roomy interior. Two easy-glide drawers provide ample storage space that can accommodate large bottles. A rapid chill compartment lets you cool smaller items quickly. This unit includes an adjustable divider that lets you better organize your storage. The SP6DS2DOS7ADA is ETL-S listed to NSF-7 commercial standards and meets UL Commercial Standard 471. For this unit in standard counter height, see the SP6DS2DOS7. FEATURES Weatherproof design Designed and constructed for durable use in the outdoors Commercially approved ETL-S listed to NSF standards and approved to UL-471 electrical standard for commercial use ADA compliant 32" height is designed to fit under lower ADA compliant counters All 304 grade stainless steel construction Non-corrodible stainless steel inside and out Built-in capable Make the best use of space by installing your appliance under the counter and flush with other cabinets Fully finished cabinet Allows the refrigerator to be used as a freestanding model Refrigeration > ADA Height 12/7/2016 SP6DS2DOS7ADA | Summit Appliance https://www.summitappliance.com/catalog/model/SP6DS2DOS7ADA 2/3 Refrigerant Type R134a Refrigerant Amount 1.8oz. High Side PSI 285.0 Low Side PSI 70.0 Level Legs Qty 4 Interior Drawers Yes Interior Drawers Qty 2 Drawer Dimensions Interior Height 1 9.5" (24 cm) Interior Width 1 18.63" (47 cm) Interior Depth 1 12.0" (30 cm) Interior Height 2 12.75" (32 cm) Interior Width 2 17.25" (44 cm) Interior Depth 2 16.0" (41 cm) Dimensions Compressor Step Height 5.75" (15 cm) Compressor Step Width 18.63" (47 cm) Compressor Step Depth 4.0" (10 cm) AVAILABLE UPGRADES Exterior Latch SSK California residents: click here for information on Proposition 65 Due to our commitment to continuous product improvement, all specifications are subject to change without notice BROCHURE w/ DRAWINGS SP6DS2DOS7ADA.pdf TECHNICAL DRAWING (.dwg) SP6DS2DOS7ADA_2_DRAWER_O-D_... USE & CARE SummitProfessionalDrawerRef... Automatic defrost Reduced maintenance with auto defrost system Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Our integrated GFCI exceeds U.L. requirements for safety by protecting your unit from shocks and circuit breaks Sealed back No exposed electrical components Two slide-out drawers Smoothly gliding stainless steel drawers for easy use Adjustable drawer divider Wire divider lets you separate items into four sections for easier organization Adjustable thermostat Dial thermostat for easy temperature management Magnetic gaskets Ensures the drawers are tightly sealed to protect stored items Customizable drawer fronts Order our Panel Kit to install your own panels over the drawers 100% CFC free Environmentally friendly design without ozone- damaging chemicals DOWNLOADS YOU MIGHT NEED SIMILAR PRODUCTS Panel Kit Kit that allows the SP6DS2D7 drawer refrigerator to accept custom overlay panels Add to Cart $40 VCOS 33.0" H x 24.5" W x 27.0" D Vinyl cover for any SUMMIT outdoor refrigerator Add to Cart $75 12/7/2016 SP6DS2DOS7ADA | Summit Appliance https://www.summitappliance.com/catalog/model/SP6DS2DOS7ADA 3/3 SPFF51OS2D 34.0" H x 23.63" W x 23.63" D Two-drawer outdoor frost-free all- freezer in stainless steel, commercially listed for built-in or freestanding use SP6DSSTB7Thin 33.25" H x 23.75" W x 23.58" D Commercially approved three- drawer refrigerator in stainless steel for built-in undercounter use, with thin handles SP6DS2D7 33.25" H x 23.75" W x 23.88" D Commercially approved two-drawer auto defrost all-refrigerator in full stainless steel for built-in or freestanding use FF642D 34.0" H x 23.63" W x 23.63" D Two-drawer refrigerator in complete stainless steel for built-in or freestanding use SCFF532D 34.0" H x 23.63" W x 23.63" D Built-in undercounter two-drawer all-freezer with frost-free operation and stainless steel construction CONTACT US PARTS AND ACCESSORIES SERVICE AND SUPPORT ORDER STATUS ABOUT US CAREERS COMPANY NEWS PHOTO ARCHIVE DEALER LOG IN DEALER NEWS DEALER REGISTRATION SITE MAP STAY IN TOUCH SIGN UP FOR OUR E-NEWSLETTER EMAIL ADDRESS SUBSCRIBE Summit Appliance Division, Felix Storch, Inc. • ISO 9001:2008 Certified 770 Garrison Ave • Bronx, NY 10474 Phone: 718-893-3900 • Fax: 1-844-478-8799 E-mail: info@summitappliance.com COPYRIGHT 2016 SUMMIT APPLIANCE, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED CAN'T FIND WHAT YOU WANT? EMAIL US AT INFO@SUMMITAPPLIANCE.COM OR CALL US AT 718-893-3900 SCR1400W 69.75" x 23.63" x 23.75" (H x W x D) Commercial beverage merchandiser with 12.6 cu.ft. capacity, digital thermostat and self-closing door; replaces SCR1400 Highlights: Commercially approved and CalCode compliant Digital thermostat offers precise and convenient temperature control Recessed LED lighting offers attractive presentation of stored products Product Features: Slim fit Just 24" wide and deep for an easy fit in any setting Commercially approved ETL-S listed to NSF standards for commercial use Glass door with stainless steel trim Heat-safe design offers safe display of stored products Self-closing door Door will automatically close when left ajar, preventing items from accidentally being left exposed to ambient temperatures Professional handle Elegant chrome handle finishes the look Factory installed lock Keyed security on the refrigerator door Recessed LED lighting On/off button to illuminate stored products with an attractive and energy efficient glow Frost-free operation No-frost convenience requires no manual defrosting Adjustable shelves Fifteen glide positions accommodate a variety of sizes, with heavy duty wired shelving SUMMIT APPLIANCE DIVISION, FELIX STORCH, INC. | ISO 9001:2008 Certified 770 Garrison Avenue Bronx, NY 10474 USA TEL 718-893-3900 FAX 844-478-8799 info@summitappliance.com www.summitappliance.com SCR1400W Specifications: Overview Height of Cabinet 69.75" (177 cm) Width 23.63" (60 cm) Depth 23.75" (60 cm) Depth with Handle 25.63" (65 cm) Depth with door at 90°46.75" (119 cm) Capacity 12.6 cu.ft. (357 L) Defrost Type Frost-Free Door Glass Cabinet White US Electrical Safety ETL Canadian Electrical Safety ETL-C Sanitation ETL-S Amps 1.7 Voltage/Frequency 115 V AC/60 Hz Weight 151.0 lbs. (68 kg) Shipping Weight 190.0 lbs. (86 kg) Parts & Labor Warranty 1 Year Compressor Warranty 5 Years Refrigerator Features Door Swing RHD Reversible No Shelf Type Wire Shelf Qty 6 Adjustable Shelves Yes Thermostat Type Digital Fan Type Interior Refrigerant Type R600a Refrigerant Amount 1.66oz. High Side PSI 270.0 Low Side PSI 105.0 Level Legs Qty 4 Interior Light Yes Temperature Range 36°F to 43°F Dimensions Interior Height 60.25" (153 cm) Interior Width 20.0" (51 cm) Interior Depth 17.5" (44 cm) Compressor Step Height 4.0" (10 cm) Compressor Step Width 20.0" (51 cm) Compressor Step Depth 5.5" (14 cm) SUMMIT APPLIANCE DIVISION, FELIX STORCH, INC. | ISO 9001:2008 Certified 770 Garrison Avenue Bronx, NY 10474 USA TEL 718-893-3900 FAX 844-478-8799 info@summitappliance.com www.summitappliance.com Oracle® MICROS® Workstation 6 Benefits of the Oracle® MICROS® Workstation 6 • Sturdy construction and the newest Microsoft® Windows® operating system mean longetivity for your POS investment • Supports modular peripherals like scanners and customer displays • A 30-year partnership between CBORD® and Oracle MICROS means superior integration Overview Meet the newest generation of point- of-sale workstation—the Oracle MICROS Workstation 6. Designed to Last The terminal is unobtrusively sleek yet is designed to withstand the day-to-day abuse unique to the hospitality industry. The companion Adjustable Stand internally houses the power supply and other peripheral cables, keeping them safe from spills, debris, and tampering. The Workstation 6 also has the option of wall-mounting—leaving a smaller footprint. The terminal comes pre-installed with Microsoft Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro—allowing it to have one of the longest life-cycles of any POS software on the market. Superior Service & Integration with CBORD Our long-time partnership with Oracle MICROS means our customers can rely on us for all of their support and implementation needs. Oracle MICROS POS terminals and software options perfectly complement CBORD's cashless retail environments. Comprehensive Solutions. Innovative Products. Dedicated Service. The CBORD Group, Inc. 61 Brown Road, Ithaca, NY 14850 1.844.GO.CBORD • FAX: 607.257.1902 www.cbord.com Minimum Versions Oracle MICROS 3700 5.4 with Workstation 6 update patch Oracle MICROS Simphony™ 1 1.6 MR9 Oracle MICROS Simphony 2 2.7 MR3 Comprehensive Solutions. Innovative Products. Dedicated Service. The CBORD Group, Inc. 61 Brown Road, Ithaca, NY 14850 607.257.2410 • FAX: 607.257.1902 www.cbord.com Oracle MICROS® Workstation 6 Technical specifications Processor Intel® E3827 Dual Core Hyperthreaded Processor Operating System Microsoft® Windows® Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro Memory 4G DDR3L 1333MHz Standard, Expandable to 8G Storage MO-297 “Slim” SATA Solid State Drive (Removable/Secured) 32G Standard MO-300 mSATA Solid State Drive Socket (Internal) Available SD Card Socket Available (Removable/Secured) Embedded Multimedia Card (eMMC) – 4G on Board Enclosure Cast Aluminum and Rugged PC-ABS Spill Resistant Enclosure Passive Cooling (no fans) Network 10/100/1G RJ45 Ethernet 802.11 a/b/g/n Dual Band Radio w/Bluetooth® 4.0 Optional Display & Touchscreen 15.6” Wide Screen High Definition (1920x1080 FHD) Display Multi-Touch Projected Capacitive Touchscreen HDMI Connector for 2nd Display Output Power Supply Universal Input Auto Switching Power Supply in Workstation 6 Adjustable Stand External Universal Input Auto Switching Power Supply for Wall or VESA Mount. Magnetic Card Reader Modular Integrated Three Track magnetic card reader that is capable of 3DES of AES encryption at the swipe Audio Intel HD Audio 2 Integrated Stereo Speakers Standard Headphone Output/MIC Input on I/O panel USB Ports 9 Total • 2 - USB 3.0 on I/O Panel • 1 - USB 3.0 in Base • 2 – USB 2.0 on I/O Panel • 1 - USB 2.0 12V Powered Header on I/O Panel • 3 - USB 2.0 Internal for Options Serial Ports 4 Total Standard • 2 - RJ45 RS232 Powered (5/9/12V Selectable) • 1 - RJ45 RS232 • 1 - RJ45 RS422/RS232 “IDN” Customer Display Ports 1 - Customer Display Port Cash Drawer Ports 2 - Oracle MICROS Series 2 Cash Drawer Ports 12/24V Selectable Certifications FCC Class A, UL, CE, TUV, RoHS, China RoHS Power Output 1 – 12V Power Out (2.5A) Expansion Ports 1 – 12V Power Out (2.5A) Operating Temperature 32° – 122° F (0° – 55° C) CBORD is a registered trademark of The CBORD Group, Inc. All other brand and product names are believed to be trademarks, registered trademarks, or service marks of their respective owners. We’re Changing the Game! Versatility, Mobility, Durability, and Elegance MICROS mTablet R-Series and mStation Key Features: • Daylight Viewable Technology • High Capacity Battery Option for the mStation allows it to operate completely unplugged in remote areas. • Integrated Payment Processing on mTablet • Highly Ruggedized, Weatherized and Spill Resistant • Stand Alone Resilient • Expansive Hardware Connectivity • Integrated Customer Display Options • Slim Footprint • Wi-Fi and Bluetooth Support The MICROS mTablet R-Series tablets combined with the MICROS mStation make up a revolutionary and unprecedented touchscreen solution specifically designed for the hospitality and retail industries. The first of its kind, the mTablet R-Series and mStation are ruggedized and weather resistant. This elegant combination provides you the incredible ability to deliver service on your own terms. A powerfully integrated solution, the mStation with removable mTablet R-Series work in sync when together or the mTablet R-Series can operate on its own in a mobile fashion, delivering you the ultimate flexibility and ease of use. Profit From: • Unmatched performance and external connectivity with a revolutionary new look • Deliver top-notch service to your guests straight from the hands of your staff • Improved staff productivity with ease of servicing and payment • Improved managerial productivity • Additional revenue generating opportunities • Paramount interchangeabilities free you from the restraints of typical tablet implementations We’re Changing the Game! Versatility, Mobility, Durability, and Elegance Experience the Uniqueness The level of versatility, mobility, elegance, and service adaptability that the portable MICROS mTablet R-Series and the MICROS mStation provide is immeasurable to current tablet offerings on the market today. Simply put, MICROS mTablet R-Series and mStation change the game! Form Factor and Features • 10.1” LCD Touchscreen • Optional Daylight Viewable Adaptive LCD • Ruggedized, Spill and Drop Resistant Casework • Integrated Modular 3 Track MSR - Hardware Encryption Capable • Wireless 802.11 a/b/g/n Dual Band Radio • Modular Accessory Mounting Point • Secured microSD socket (8G mSD standard) • Mounts for shoulder strap, handstrap and cover Flexible Usage • Fully mobile tablet - Multi-bay charging station • mStation for fixed or portable workstation - MICROS Cash Drawers - Customer Displays - Serial and IDN Printers - Wired or Wireless Network Support - Optional high capacity battery Enhanced Platform Options• Microsoft Windows Embedded Compact 7 - Secure Operating System - Small Footprint - Long Lifecycle • MICROS CAL (Client Application Loader) - Maintains correct version of application and platform - Provides unattended Windows EC7 operating system and platform upgrade capability • Integrated platform recovery utility • Enhanced suite of diagnostic and test tools Optional Accessories • mTablet R-Series - Expandable Multi-bay Charging Station - Shoulder Strap - Cover - Handstrap • mStation - Customer Displays - 1D/2D Imager Scanner - Integrated Printer - High Capacity Battery for remote operation The mStation provides a constant charge to the mTablet R-Series and power to all of peripherals, allowing for a clean installation with a single power connection and minimal cable clutter. MICROS mTablet R-Series and mStation Specs Feature mTablet Processor Freescale i.MX6 ARM Cortex A9 1Ghz Memory 1G DDR3 RAM Storage 4G Fixed NAND Flash Internal 8G Removable microSD Standard Operating System Microsoft Windows Embedded Compact 7 (EC7) Display 10.1” WVGA (1024x600) TFT LCD Optional Daylight Viewable “Adaptive” LCD Touchscreen 10.1” Hardened Projected Capacitive Multi-Touch Screen Orientation Portrait or Landscape, Auto Rotating, Can be Locked Magnetic Card Reader Modular Integrated, 3-Track MSR Capable of Hardware Encryption at the Swipe Network 802.11 a/b/g/n Wireless Bluetooth 2.1 Battery Integrated Lithium Ion Battery 21.6Wh USB 1 Below Modular MSR Cover for Future Accessories 1 USB “On The Go” Port Serial Ports 1 Reserved for MSR Operating Temperature Range -10 to 60C (14 to 140F) Normal Operation 0 to 45C (32 to 113F) when charging battery Enclosure Magnesium Alloy, PC-ABS and Nylon materials. Spill Resistant Enclosure. Certification FCC Class A, UL, CE, TUV, RoHS, China RoHS Feature mStation USB 2.0 4 Total • 2 Standard on I/O Panel • 1 Reserved for Optional 2D Imager • 1 MICROS Powered USB Port Serial Ports Com1 DB9 RS232 – 5/9/12V Selectable Power Com2 DB9 – 12V Powered Port (For optional 2” Printer) Com5 RJ45 RS232 MICROS IDN Port RJ45 RS422/RS232 Cash Drawers 2 MICROS “Generation 2” Cash Drawer Ports Customer Display 1 MICROS Customer Display Port Power Outputs 12V Output Network 10/100/1G RJ45 Ethernet Connectivity (Available only when mTablet is installed) Power Supply Internal Universal 100W Power Supply Battery Optional Integrated Extended Life Battery Ports on the mStation for multiple peripheral connectivity. Find out more about how MICROS can help you grow Get in touch with us for more information or to schedule a demo and consultation appointment. E-mail: info@micros.com MICROS Systems, Inc. 7031 Columbia Gateway Drive Columbia, MD 21046-2289, USA Sales information: 443.285.6000 | 866.287.4736 (US and Canada) info@micros.com www.micros.com micros® is a registered trademark of MICROS Systems, Inc. Certain product and company names appearing here may be the trademarks or service marks owned and/or registered by third parties. All other product and brand names are the property of their respective owners. © Copyright MICROS Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. mStation-mTablet_BR_US_EN-US_14MAY29 Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 11/16/18 CURTAINS AND DRAPES 12 22 00 - 1 SECTION 12 22 00 - CURTAINS AND DRAPES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Drapes. 2. Drapery tracks. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Drapery Tracks: Include maximum weights of drapes that can be supported. a. Motorized Tracks: Indicate motor weights, motor-mounting requirements, and electrical requirements. 2. Fabrics. 3. Textile treatments. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Drapery Tracks: Show installation and anchorage details and locations of controls. a. Motorized Tracks: Indicate dimensions, weights, and required clearances for track and motor and differentiate between manufacturer- installed and field-installed wiring. 2. Drapes: Show sizes, locations, and details of installation. C. Samples for Verification: As follows: 1. Drapery Tracks: 18 inches long, with carriers, controls, and accessories. 2. Drapery Fabrics: For each color and pattern indicated, full width by 36 inches long, from dye lot to be used for the Work and with specified textile treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat if any. Mark top and face of fabric. 3. Textile Trims: For each color and pattern indicated, 18 inches long. 4. Drape Fabrication: For each heading, fabric, color, and pattern indicated, a complete full-size panel to verify details of fabrication and thread colors. D. Product Schedule: For drapes and drapery tracks. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 11/16/18 CURTAINS AND DRAPES 12 22 00 - 2 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: For drapery track installation; reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating track installation wi th openings and ceiling-mounted items, on which the following items are shown: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which motors are attached. 3. Size and location of motor access panel. B. Product Certificates: For each drapery fabric treated with flame retardant, signed by fabric supplier and indicating treatment durability and cleaning procedures required to maintain treatment effectiveness. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For products installed to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Drapery Track Carriers: For each size indicated, equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 of each size. 2. Drapery Track Controls: For each type indicated, equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 of each type. 3. Drapery Fabrics: For each fabric, color, and pattern indicated, from the same product run, full-width lengths equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 yards of each fabric, color, and pattern. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: For drapes and drapery tracks, fabricator of drapes. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before drape fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. B. Scheduling: Do not deliver or install drapes until after other finish work, including painting, is complete and spaces are otherwise ready for occupancy. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 11/16/18 CURTAINS AND DRAPES 12 22 00 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DRAPERY TRACKS A. CF, Motorized Track: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.; Dual Recessed Drapery Track or comparable products by one of the following: a. BTX Window Automation Inc. b. Forest Group USA, Inc. c. MechoShade. d. Silent Gliss USA Inc. e. SM Automatic, Inc. 2. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Construction: Extruded aluminum, slotted for mounting at interval of not more than 24 inches o.c. a. Lengths and Configurations: As indicated on Drawings. b. Support Capability: Weight of drape indicated mounted on track length indicated. c. Finish: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Mounting Brackets: Suitable for fastening track to surface indicated and designed to support weight of track assembly and drape plus force applied to operate track. a. Mounting Surface: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Installation Fasteners: Sized to support track assembly and drape, and fabricated from metal compatible with track, brackets, and supporting construction. Provide two fasteners to fasten each bracket to supporting construction. 6. Motor Operation: Low-voltage motor with built-in low-voltage interface for direct access to control systems, with thermal-overload switch; sized for weight of drape and track length indicated; and equipped with stops to prevent overdrawing. a. Control: Wall switch. b. Draw: One way, stack as indicated on Drawings. 7. Carriers: Coordinate with drapery headings indicated. 8. End Stops: Manufacturer's standard with track end cap. 9. Pulleys: Standard duty. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 11/16/18 CURTAINS AND DRAPES 12 22 00 - 4 2.2 DRAPES A. Source Limitations: Obtain each color and pattern of drapery fabric and trim from one dye lot. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fabrics treated with fire retardants, provide products that pass NFPA 701 as determined by testing of fabrics that were treated using treatment-application method intended for use for this Project by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.3 FABRIC FOR DRAPERY A. Solarscreen Fabric: Sahara. 1. Code: 51J7321. 2. Other Fabric Properties: a. Fire Rating: Class A, Flame Retardant – Complies with NFPA 701-2010 / CAN/ULLC-S109. b. Material Composition: 100% Polyester. c. Railroadable. B. Blackout Fabric: Cambay Nimbus EasyClean. 1. Code: V3228/23. 2. Other Fabric Properties: a. Fire Rating: Class A, BS5852 Fire Retardancy. b. Material Composition: 100% Polyester. c. Blackout, 0% Openness. 2.4 DRAPE FABRICATION A. Fabricate drapes in heading styles and fullnesses indicated. Fabricate headings to stand erect. If less than a full width of fabric is required to produce panel of specified fullness, use equal widths of not less than one-half width of fabric located at ends of panel. 1. One-Way-Stacking Drapes: Add 5 inches to overall width for returns. 2. Center-Opening Drapes: Add 10 inches to overall width for overlap. B. Seams: Sew vertical seams with twin-needle sewing machine with selvage trimmed and overlocked. Join widths so that patterns match and vertical seams lay flat and straight without puckering. Horizontal seams are unacceptable. C. Side Hems: Double-turned, 1-1/2-inch-wide hems consisting of three layers of fabric, and blindstitched so that stitches are invisible on face of drape. D. Bottom Hems: Double-turned, 4-inch-wide hems consisting of three layers of fabric, and weighted and blindstitched so that weights and stitches are invisible on face of drape. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 11/16/18 CURTAINS AND DRAPES 12 22 00 - 5 1. Sew in square lead weights at each seam and at panel corners. E. Interlinings: Extend from top of drape to within 1/2 inch of lining's bottom hem and to leading edge of side hems to produce full -shadowed appearance. F. Linings: Equal to widths of drapery fabric and joined to drapery fabric at top by inside invisible seam, and hand stitched at side hems and shadowed with 1-1/2- inch return of face fabric. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DRAPERY TRACK INSTALLATION A. Install track systems according to manufacturer's written instructions, level and plumb, and at height and location in relation to adjoining openings as indicated on Drawings. B. Isolate metal parts of tracks and brackets from concrete, masonry, and mortar to prevent galvanic action. Use tape or another method recommended in writing by track manufacturer. 3.2 DRAPE INSTALLATION A. Where drapes abut overhead construction, hang drapes so that clearance between headings and overhead construction is 1/4 inch. B. Where drapes extend to floor, install so that bottom hems clear finished floor by not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch. C. Where drapes extend to windowsill, install so that bottom hems hang above sill line and clear sill line by not more than 1/2 inch. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. After hanging drapes, test and adjust each drapery track to produce unencumbered, smooth operation. B. Steam and dress down drapes as required to produce crease- and wrinkle-free installation. C. Remove and replace drapes that are stained or soiled. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 40 - 1 SECTION 12 36 40 - STONE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes stone countertops. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 12 36 61.19 "Quartz Agglomerate Countertops" for quartz- agglomerate countertops. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each stone accessory and manufactured product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Show direction of veining, grain, or other directional pattern. C. Samples for Verification: For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 12 inches square. 1. Include two or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics expected in the completed Work. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For stone countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include product data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer, and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom -fabricate stone countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of stone countertops. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 40 - 2 C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other causes. 1. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports. 2. Store stone on wood A-frames or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone countertops by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain stone, from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 1. Make stone slabs available for examination by Architect. a. Architect will select aesthetically acceptable slabs and will indicate aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs. b. Segregate slabs selected for use on Project and mark backs indicating approval. c. Mark and photograph aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs as directed by Architect. 2.2 ST-2, LIMESTONE A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 568/C 568M. 1. Classification: III High Density. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 40 - 3 B. Description: Dolomitic limestone. C. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated. D. Cut: Fleuri. E. Cut stone from one block. F. Finish: Smooth. G. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects. 2.3 ADHESIVES, GROUT, SEALANTS, AND STONE ACCESSORIES A. General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and that are recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 65 g/L or less. B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonstone Materials Corporation. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Parex USA, Inc. j. Prospec; Bonsal American; a division of Oldcastle Architectural Products Group. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. l. TEC, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc.; an H. B. Fuller company. C. Plywood Subtops: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded. D. Stone Cleaner: Specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer and by sealer manufacturer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives. E. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 40 - 4 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Custom Building Products. c. Hillyard, Inc. d. HMK Stone Care System. e. Miracle Sealants Company. f. Stone Care International Inc. g. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2.4 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that may impair structural integrity, function, or appearance. 1. Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided they do not impair structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically unpleasing, as judged by Architect. B. Grade and mark stone for final locations to produce assembled countertop units with an overall uniform appearance. C. Fabricate stone countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles. 2. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, supports, and attachments. 4. Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate adjacent work. 5. Fabricate molded edges with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse contour of edge profile to produce uniform shape throughout entire length of edge and with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping. Form corners of molded edges as indicated with outside corners slightly eased unless otherwise indicated. 6. Finish exposed faces of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each stone type required and to match approved Samples and mockups. Provide matching finish on exposed edges of countertops. D. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units. 2.5 STONE COUNTERTOPS A. General: Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual VII." B. Nominal Thickness: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than 3/4 inch. Gage backs to provide units of identical thickness. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 40 - 5 C. Edge Detail: As indicated. D. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive stone countertops and conditions under which stone countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone countertops. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of stone countertops. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of inserts and similar items to be used by stone countertop Installer for anchoring stone countertops. Furnish installers of other work with Drawings or templates showing locations of these items. B. Before installing stone countertops, clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives and rinse with clear water. Allow stone to dry before installing. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches, 1/4 inch maximum. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS A. Install countertops over subtops with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. B. Do not cut stone in field unless otherwise indicated. If stone countertops or splashes require additional fabrication not specified to be performed at Project site, return to fabrication shop for adjustment. C. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws wi th diamond blades to cut stone. Cut lines straight, true, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 STONE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 40 - 6 D. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Shim and adjust stone to locations indicated. Install anchors and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone countertops in place. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean countertops as work progresses. Remove adhesive smears immediately. B. Remove and replace stone countertops of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective countertops. 3. Interior stone countertops not matching approved Samples and mockups. 4. Interior stone countertops not complying with other requirements indicated. C. Replace in a manner that results in stone countertops matching approved Samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. D. Clean stone countertops no fewer than six days after completion of installation, using clean water and soft rags. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that may damage stone. E. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SOLID SURFACING SINKS 12 36 61.16 - 1 SECTION 12 36 61.16 - SOLID SURFACING SINKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid surface material sink. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 41 00 "Residential Plumbing Fixtures" for plumbing fittings. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For countertop materials. B. Shop Drawings: For sinks. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. 1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view. D. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Sink material, 6 inches square. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material sinks to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom -fabricate sinks similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SOLID SURFACING SINKS 12 36 61.16 - 2 B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of sinks. C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical sink as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of sinks by field measurements before solid surface sink fabrication is complete. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate sinks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SSM, SOLID SURFACE SINK MATERIALS A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable products by one of the following: a. Avonite Surfaces. b. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. c. Formica Corporation. d. LG Chemical, Ltd. e. Meganite Inc. f. Samsung Chemical USA, Inc. g. Swan Corporation (The). h. Transolid, Inc. i. Wilsonart International . 2. Type: Provide Standard type. 3. Colors and Patterns: As indicated. B. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made using ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde resins as defined in the California Air Resources Board's "Airborne Toxic Control Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products" or shall be made with no added formaldehyde. C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. D. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SOLID SURFACING SINKS 12 36 61.16 - 3 2.2 SINK FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Grade: Premium. B. Configuration: As shown. C. Sink Material: 1/2-inch-thick, solid surface material. D. Joints: Fabricate sinks without joints. E. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. a. Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening. 2. Counter-Mounted Plumbing Fixtures: Prepare sinks in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. 3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less. B. Sealant for Sinks: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material sinks and conditions under which sinks will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of sinks. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 SOLID SURFACING SINKS 12 36 61.16 - 4 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install sinks level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units. B. Secure sinks to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match sink, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. C. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of sinks adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. 1. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish. D. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.19 - 1 SECTION 12 36 61.19 - QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Quartz agglomerate countertops. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For countertop materials. B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, methods of joining. C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SS, QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with ICPA SS-1, except for composition. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide products indicated or comparable product by one of the following: a. Cosentino USA. b. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. c. LG Chemical, Ltd. d. Meganite Inc. e. Samsung Chemical USA, Inc. f. Technistone USA, Inc. g. Transolid, Inc. 2. Colors and Patterns: As indicated. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.19 - 2 2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions and the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Grade: Premium. B. Configuration: 1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top. C. Countertops: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, quartz agglomerate. D. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field . E. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Product recommended by quartz agglomerate manufacturer. B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. B. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. C. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. D. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. E. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. F. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.19 - 3 END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12 48 13 - 1 SECTION 12 48 13 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roll-up rail mats. 2. Recessed frames. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete to receive floor mats and frames. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for floor mats and frames. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Perimeter floor frames on existing concrete in ceramic tile recess. C. Samples: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes: 1. Floor Mat: Assembled sections of floor mat. 2. Tread Rail: Sample of each type and color. 3. Frame Members: Sample of each type and color. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For floor mats and frames to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Resilient-Tile Entrance Mats: Full-size tile units equal to 2 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 units. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12 48 13 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL A. Structural Performance: Provide roll-up rail mats and frames capable of withstanding the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform floor load of 300 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Wheel load of 350 lbper wheel. B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1. 2.2 ROLL-UP RAIL MATS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide C/S Group; Pedimat M1 Entry Mat or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Amarco Products. 2. American Mat & Rubber Company. 3. Babcock-Davis. 4. Balco, Inc. 5. Durable Corporation. 6. Forbo Industries, Inc. 7. J. L. Industries, Inc. 8. K. N. Crowder Manufacturing, Inc. 9. Kadee Industries, Inc. 10. Mats Inc. 11. Musson Rubber Company. 12. Nystrom, Inc. 13. Pawling Corporation; Architectural Products Division. 14. ProSpec; an Oldcastle company. 15. Reese Enterprises, Inc. B. Roll-up, Aluminum-Rail Hinged Mats: Extruded-aluminum tread rails 1-1/2 inches or 2 inches wide by 3/8 inch thick, sitting on continuous vinyl cushions. 1. Tread Inserts: 1/4-inch-high, 28-oz./sq. yd. weight, level-cut, nylon-pile, fusion-bonded carpet. 2. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Inserts: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 3. Rail Color: Mill finish. 4. Hinges: Aluminum. 5. Mat Size: As indicated. 2.3 FRAMES A. Recessed Frames: Manufacturer's standard extrusion. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12 48 13 - 3 1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6061-T6 or Alloy 6063-T5, T6, or T52. a. Color: Mill finish. 2.4 CONCRETE FILL AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Provide concrete fill and grout equivalent in strength to cast-in-place concrete slabs for recessed mats and frames. Use aggregate no larger than one-third fill thickness. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints. B. Recessed Frames: As indicated, for permanent recessed installation, complete with corner pins or reinforcement and anchorage devices. 1. Fabricate edge-frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by straight connecting pins. C. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames th at contact cementitious material with manufacturer's standard protective coating. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Mill finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12 48 13 - 4 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install recessed mat frames and mats to comply with manufacturer's written instructions so that tops of mats will be flush with adjoining finished flooring. Set mats with tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate tops of mat surfaces with bottoms of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat. 1. Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location, and secure attachment of frames. 2. Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at proper elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth and level. 3. Delay setting mats until construction traffic has ended. 3.3 PROTECTION A. After completing frame installation and concrete wo rk, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CUSTOM UPHOLSTERED SEATING 12 52 83 - 1 SECTION 12 52 83 - CUSTOM UPHOLSTERED SEATING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes specially designed upholstered seating. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 41 16 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets" and Section 06 42 19 "Plastic-Laminate-Faced Wood Paneling" for construction of seating units. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of finish and springing method indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show design, dimensions, construction, joinery, and upholstery material pattern placement. C. Verification Samples: Show full range of color, texture, and pattern variations ex- pected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. 1. Upholstery Fabric: Full-width by 36-inch- long section of material from dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show com- plete pattern repeat. Mark top and face of material. 2. Banquette Upholstery Unit: a. Full size, two-seat units including seats and seatbacks. b. Include cushions with and without welts. 3. Removable Seat Cushion Fasteners. D. Product Schedule: Use same room designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that flame-resistant up- holstery material treatment complies with requirements. Incl ude conditions under which treatment is no longer effective. B. Maintenance Data: For custom upholstered seating to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CUSTOM UPHOLSTERED SEATING 12 52 83 - 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide seating identical to that tested per Cal- ifornia Technical Bulletin 117 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency ac- ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify seating with appropriate mark- ings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide seating identical to that tested per Cal- ifornia Technical Bulletin 133 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency ac- ceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify seating with appropriate mark- ings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. C. Mockups: Before installing banquettes, construct mockups for each form of seating required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and execution. Install mockups to comply with the followi ng re- quirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Install mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as di- rected by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be installed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work. 5. Keep mockups undisturbed during installation as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Remove mockups when directed. 7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Own- er of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Docu- ments and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to replace seating frame that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty peri- od. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection. 2. Deterioration of finishes and other materials beyond normal wear. C. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CUSTOM UPHOLSTERED SEATING 12 52 83 - 3 1. Upholstery Material: Full-width quantity to reupholster seating units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but not less than 2 banquette units. 2. Covered Welt Cord: 10 yards of continuous cord. 3. Tuft Buttons: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UPHOLSTERY MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products specified for each designation in the Upholstery Material Schedule for Custom Upholstered Seating at the end of this Section. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Upholstery Material: Upholster adjacent banquettes with material from same dye lot. 1. UF-1, Product: Provide product indicated. 2. UF-2, Product: Provide product indicated. 3. UF-3, Product: Provide product indicated. 4. UF-4, Product: Provide product indicated. 5. UF-5, Product: Provide product indicated. 6. UF-6, Product: Provide product indicated. 7. UF-7, Product: Provide product indicated. 8. UF-8, Product: Provide product indicated. B. Cushion Material: Manufacturer's standard as follows: 1. Flexible Polyurethane Foam: As follows: a. Seatback Cushion Polymer Density: 1.4 lb/cu. ft. b. Seat Cushion Polymer Density: 2.8 lb/cu. ft. c. Indentation Force Deflection: 35 lb. d. Support Factor: 2.2. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Double stitch seams. B. Center upholstery pattern indicated on the inside and outside seatback and cush- ion, and in the same location on each seating unit. Match upholstery pattern on cushion and upholstered seat edge. C. Apply upholstery material smooth and even, with undistorted grain lines, and free of ripples, scallops, or puckers. D. Conceal channeled seams. Channel stitch straight and continuous, with channels parallel to each other and perpendicular to intersecting materials. Gateway Park Center PERKINS+WILL 810495.000 12/06/18 CUSTOM UPHOLSTERED SEATING 12 52 83 - 4 E. Staple or sew breathable concealment fabric to underneath side of seat. Secure staples flush with seating frame to prevent snagging concealment fabric. F. Fabricate removable seat cushion covers with cushion vents and concealed zippers. G. Fabricate seat cushions and seat frame with integral, concealed, hook-type fasten- ers to secure cushions in place. H. Cut welt-cord cover on bias. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas for suitable conditions where seating is to be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UPHOLSTERY MATERIAL SCHEDULE FOR CUSTOM UPHOLSTERED SEATING A. UF, Upholstery Material for Custom Upholstered Seating Designation : Where up- holstery material of this designation is indicated, provide upholstery material indi- cated. END OF SECTION